Panasonic KX-T336 System Ref Vol 2 PDF

Panasonic
KX-T336 SYSTEM
System Reference Manual

Vol. 2
Panasonic Company
Division of Matsushita Electric Corporation of America
One Panasonic Way, Secaucus, New Jersey 07094
Panasonic Company (West) of America,

Division of Matsushita Electric Corporation of America
6550 Katella Avenue, Cypress, California 90630
Panasonic Sales Company (“PSC”),

Division of Matsushita Electric of Puerto Rico, Inc.
San Gabriel Industrial Park, 65th Infantry Avenue, KM 9.5, Carolina, P. R. 00630
KX - A220
Printed in Japan PQQX6485YA Q069101053M
Contents
Vol. 1
Section 1 ---- SystemOutline
Section 2 ---- Installation
Section 3 ---- System Featuresand Operation
Section4 ---- Station Featuresand Operation

ProprietaryIntegratedTelephoneSystem (PITS)
Section 5 ---- Station Featuresand Operation

Single Line Telephone(SLT)
Section 6 ---- Station Featuresand Operation

AttendantConsole(ATT)
Vol. 2
Section7 ---- Preparationfor Programmingand Maintenance
VT220 and Compatibles
Section8 ---- Preparationfor Programmingand Maintenance
DumbType Terminal
Section9 ---- System Programming

Section 10 ---- System Programming

Dumb TypeTerminal
Section 11 ---- System Programming

Section 12 ---- Station Programming
Section 13 ---- Station Programming
AttendantConsole(ATT)
Section 14 ---- Maintenance

Section 15 ---- Maintenance

DumbType Terminal
Section 16 ---- Backup Utility-On-Site
Section 17 ---- Backup Utility-RemoteLocation
Section 18 ---- Abbreviations

Section 19 ---- Index
Section 7
Prepafation for Programmhg and Maintenance

(Section 7)
Preparation for programming and Maintenance

Contents
Page
A Introduction . . . . . .. . .. .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . . .. . . .. 7-A-l
1 .OO On-Site Administration ..................................................... 7-A-l

2.00 System Administration from a Remote Location ............. 7-A-2
3.00 Mode Structure ................................................................ 7-A-3
4.00 Layout of Screen ............................................................. 7-A-4
5.00 Correspondefice b&ween Setting Screen and ms
Explanation Table ............................................................ 7-A-6
B Pre-entering Mode . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . . . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . . .. . .. . . . . 7-B-l
1 .OO Initial Screen .................................................................... 7-B-l

2.00 Installation Screen ........................................................... 7-B-2
3.00 Password Entry Screen ................................................... 7-B-4
4.00 Date and Time Set Up Screen.. ....................................... 7-B-5
5.00 Main Menu Screen .......................................................... 7-B-6
6.00 Operating Flow Chart ...................................................... 7-B-7
C Menu Screen . .. . . . . .. . . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . . . .. . . .. . . .. .. . . . .. .. . . .. .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . 7-c-1
1 .oo Introduction ...................................................................... 7-c-1

2.00 Operation of Switching Screens ...................................... 7-C-2
3.00 Returning to Previous Screen ......................................... 7-c-3
4.00 Programming Main Menu ................................................ 7-c-4
5.00 Test Main Menu ............................................................... 7-C-6
6.00 Monitor Main Menu .......................................................... 7-C-6
7.00 Print Out .......................................................................... 7-c-7
8.00 Change Password ........................................................... 7-c-7
9.00 Change Date and Time ................................................... 7-C-8
10.00 Backup Utility.. ................................................................ 7-C-8
11 .oo Restart ............................................................................ 7-c-9
12.00 Exit ............................................................................... 7-c-9
D Printing Out ............................................................................... 7-D-l
E Changing Password.. .................................................................. 7-E-?
F Changing Date and Time ...................................... ........ 7-F-l
G Returning to Initial Screen .._._............_..._._._._.___.. . . . . . . .. .. . . . 7-G-l
1 .OO Exit ....................................................... .......... 7-G-l

2.00 Restart ............................................................................. 7-G-l
7-l
Page
Key Functions . . . .. . . .. . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . . 7-H-l
1 .oo Moving Cursor bymmmmmm! .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. 7-H-l

2.00 Command Execution by RETURN or ENTER ................. 7-H-l
3.00 Returning to Previous Menu Screen by PF2 ................... 7-H-2
4.00 Entrygf Value by SPACE or Directly ............................... 7-H-3
5.00 Storage of Set Value by PF4 ........................................... 7-H-4’ -
6.00 Advancing to Next Screen by NEXT ................................ 7-H-5
7.00 Returning to Previous Screen by PREV .......................... 7-H-6
8.00 Cancelling Set Value by PF3 ........................................... 7-H-7
9.00 Concluding Function Mode by CTRL + C ........................ 7-H-7
10.00 Key Operation Table for Various Terminals .................... 7-H-8
Operation of Function Keys . .. . . . .. . . .. .. . . . .. . . . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . 7-l-l
1 .OO Relation between Function Keys and Screens.. .............. 7-I-l

2.00 Features Assigned to Function Keys ............................... 7-l-l
3.00 Function Mode ................................................................. 7-l-2
Execution of Function Modes ...................................................... 7-J-l
1 .oo COMMON (Fl) and EXIT (F7) ......................................... 7-J-l

2.00 SHOW LV (Show Level) .................................................. 7-J-2
3.00 CHG LV (Change Level). ................................................. 7-J-3
4.00 INS (In Service) ............................................................... 7-J-5
5.00 OUS (Out of Service). ...................................................... 7-J-7
6.00 REMOVE ......................................................................... 7-J-9
7.00 INDEX .............................................................................. 7-J-l 1
8.00 COPY .............................................................................. 7-J-l 3
9.00 READ.. ............................................................................. 7-J-l 6
10.00 HRD CPY (Hard Copy) .................................................... 7-J-l 8
11 .oo AUTO CNF (Automatic Configuration) ............................ 7-J-l 9
12.00 SET Function (F8) ........................................................... 7-J-20
7-2
A. Introduction
1 .OO On-Site Administration

Description Successful Login
You can administer the system programming and When you enter the correct password, the
maintenance of the system using a VT220 (loo), terminal displays the Main Menu screen from
Compatibles. For details about communication which you can select administration functions.
parameters, refer to Section 9-D-7.00 By selecting an item from the Main Menu, you
“Communication Interface.” enter a system programming area and can
access specific system parameters and features.
System Security
For security reasons, access to the administration
capabilities of the system is controlled by a
password. To prevent an unauthorized person
from learning the password, the password
characters are not displayed when they are -
entered.
Password
To gain access to the system administration
feature, a valid password (four-digit,
alphanumeric characters*) must be entered.
To be recognized by the system, a password
must be entered exactly as stored in memory.
Factory programmed eight passwords are
provided from the first to fourth levels for on-site
operation and the first to fourth levels for
operation from a remote location.
The followings are the functions available to each

password level.
The 1st Level : To access to all levels

The 2nd Level : To set system level parameters.
The 3rd Level : To set port level parameters.
The 4th Level : To read parameters only.
When you log in to the system using the first level

password, you can execute all functions, but are
increasingly restricted when entering levels 2, 3
and 4.
Passwords are originally factory programmed, but
may be changed when logging in to the system
by entering the first level password.
Refer to Section 7-E “Changing Password.”
l Alphanumeric characters
ASCII codes except special codes (DEL, ESC
etc.) But entering “f’ “w” are not available,
because these characters cannot be displayed
on the LCD of PITS.
Both uppercase and lowercase characters can
be recognized by the system.
7-A-l
I’
I
2.00 System Administration
from a Remote Location
Description Operation
From a remote location, you can execute system Starting up system administration from a remote
programming, diagnosis and traffic measurements location can be done in the following ways:
using a VT220 (loo), Compatibles. Dial “Remote Directory Number” using Direct
For details about communication parameters, refer Inward System Access (DISA) feature.
to Section 9-O-7.00 “Communication Interface.” For further information about “Remote
Directory Number,” refer to Section 9-D-l .02
Conditions “Operation (2/3).”
. RMT card (Modem) must be installed in the For further information about DISA feature,
system and register the telephone number of refer to Section 3-O-2.02 “Direct Inward
modem in the System-Operation “Remote System Access (DISA).”
Directory Number” (FDN: three or four digits) for Program DID feature so that the incoming
accessing the remote administration feature. telephone number is converted to the “Remote
For the assignment of Remote Directory Directory Number.”
Number, refer to Section 9-D-l .02 =Operation For further information about DID feature, refer
(2/3).” to Section 3-D-2.03 “Direct Inward Dialing
. For remote access, a data terminal and modem (DID).” _
are required at a remote location. Assign that a call from a remote-location can
. Factory programmed four types of password access the Remote Administration feature
from the first to fourth levels for remote operation automatically using DIL (1 :l) feature.
c are provided. Passwords are originally factory
programmed, but may be changed at any time.
For further information about DIL (1 :l) feature,
refer to Section 3-D-2.01 “Direct In’Line (DIL).”
(Refer to Section 7-E “Changing Password.“) Remote access by operator transfer
. You can execute remote system administration The call from a remote location can be made
during on-line communication mode only. But on any trunk into the system, and be answered
when you load the system programming data by the operator.
from a remote location, the system shifts to off- The call is then placed on hold and the Remote
line communication mode automatically. Directory Number of the system dialed is
received. The operator transfers the call after
f
.G
Refer to Section 17-B-2.02 ‘Loading Procedure”
for further information. receiving the modem answer tone. The caller
. Starting up system administration from a remote
at a remote location will then hear the modem
answer tone and can proceed with sign-on.
location can be done onl in Dumb mode, so to Refer to Section 4-F-i .05 “Unscreened Call
enter VT mode, press bCTR key + w key Transfer to Remote,” for further information.
simultaneously at the dumb mode initial screen.
When the system administrator at a remote
location accesses the system remote
administration feature, the following message
appears on the display of operators telephone if
display is provided:
1234: RMT Access
After you log in to the system from a remote
location, you can operate the system in the same
way as if you were on-site.
Only one system administration terminal can be
connected to the system at a time.
7-A-2
3.00 Mode Structure
The administration using VT compatible terminai Programming Main Menu
consists of the following modes. Consists of 10 submenu screens and allows you
to administer system-wide programming
parameters.
For further details, refer to Section 7-C-4.00
Pre-entering Mode
“Programming Main Menu.”
f Initial Screen I Test Main Menu Screen
Enables you to test the cards, ports, PIT’s and
Attendant Consoles in on-line communication
C Installati;n Screen ) mode.
For further details, refer to Section 7-C-5.00 “Test
Main Menu.”
Monitor Main Menu . Z-
Consists of three menus and allows you to see
Date and Time Set Up error log, device status and traffic
measurements.
For further details, refer to Section 7-C-6.00
“Monitor Main Menu.”
Main Menu Screen Print Out Menu
I
Allows you to print out the system programming
m parameters and traffic information.

I
Programming Main Menu For further details, refer to Section 7-C-7.00

t “Print Out.” *I
Test Main Menu Change Password
I r I
Enables you to change the password for “On
WI I Monitor Main Menu I1 Site” and “Remote.”
I For further details, refer to Section 7-C-8.00
Print Out Menu “Change Password.”
Change Password Change Date & lime

Enables you to change the date and time.
Change Date & Time 1 For further details, refer to Section 7-C-9.00
1 “Change Date and Time.”
Backup Utilii Main Menu Backup Utility Main Menu
Consists of two submenus, and enables you to
Restart save or load the system programming data and
I 8
I attendant console database.
I t ,
w Exit I For further details, refer to Section 7-C-l 0.00
“Backup Utility.”
Restart
Functions same as if you press the RESET
Pre-entering Mode button.
Consists of five screens starting from Start For further details, refer to Section 7-G-2.00
Screen through Main Menu Screen. “Restart.”
For further details, refer to Section 7-B “Pre-
entering Mode.” Exit
Enables you to return to the initial screen.
For further details, refer to Section 7-G-l .OO
“Exit.”
7-A-3
4.00 Layout of Screen
cl> <2> <3> <4>
Title
I 1 1 1 1
iI & 1 OFL 1 PRGl SCR 1SEL
Screen Editing Field
Command Line
Message Line
-Function field
cl > Displays On-line or Off-line communication <3> Displays whether the cursor is in the Screen
mode. Editing Field or in the Command Line.
Display Mode Display Location
ONL On-line SCR Screen Editing Field

LIN Command tine
OFL Off -line
<2> Displays the stage selected in the main <4> Displays the entry method, select or direct.
menu screen.
/ Display 1 Display Entry Method
PRG Programming SEL Select value by space key

TST Test DIR Enter value directly
MON Monitor
PRT Print Out
PSW Change Password
D&T Change Date & Time
BCK Backup Utility
7-A-4
Title
Displays the title of the programming screen.
Screen Editing Field

Used for displaying or entering data.
Command Line
When pressing the menu number or function
key, displays the messages to execute the
function.
Message Line
Displays messages such as error messages in
programming.
Function Field
Displays each function key.
7-A-5
5.00 Correspondence between
Setting Screen and
Explanation Table
When there are some assigning iteTns in !he
screen, the explanation table descr 2s !?s i!ems
in detail.
<Example> Configuration-System Assignment

screen
Configuration - System Assignment 1 OFL 1 PRG 1 SCR 1SEL
Version 1 .O
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+
1 Expansion Shelf 1 1 Shelf I
1 TSW Additional CONF 1 Yes
+ -- - --- ---- -- -- -- ---------- --- -----------------------------------------------------------+
I Assigning items Default Selection of Value Reference
Expansion Shelf Automatic set No : expansion shelf not installed 1-E-2.00

;l. Shelf : expansion shelf 1 ,available c:
2 Shelves : both expansion shelves 1 and 2
available
TSW Additional CONF Automatic set Yes : conference expansion card installed 4-G-5.01
No : conference expansion card not installed 4-G-5.02
5-E-l .OO
6-H-l .oo
The relationship between the screen and the explanation table is shown
by the arrows above.
cl > Shows the assigning items which depend on the screen items.
<2> Shows the optional and default values.
<3> Shows the reference for the assigning items.
For example, interprets “4-G-l 1 .OO” as follows. “4” indicates
section number, “G” indicates subsection number and “11 .OO”
indicates title number.
7-A-6
B. Pre-entering IMode
1.00 Initial Screen
*-L~lrcu~~II****~~~~*J*J~uII~JJu~u1
--Fe----e ev.veee--r.rCC.l-e~,T-e.r-P-~~
$ *
f Panasonic Hybrid PBX *

* ::
* M-T336 Srstem 5
c *
-JIL-**UW-**-------**IJ**JIL-UJ-*
-ttt)-- .r.v.Fwwl.~~~-r-ex-r~~~~~~~~z
Summary
This screen is displayed first when administration
is activated.
To conclude this screen and advance to the next
screen, press the RETURN key.
7-B-l
2.00 Installation Screen
E*= Panasonic Hybrid PBX Instzilz:izn =:
Please set the following initial datz
-----------------------------------------------------------------
<< Customer & Installation Data >>
Customer Name
Location
Phone No.
Modem No.
Customer Contact :
Date of Installation :
Unit ID
...‘. Insta 1 lers Name
3 Programmers Name :
<< System Password >>
Protection Level 1 :
-_--------------_------------------------------------------------
lmments: Panasonic Hybrid PBX Install
.
Summary
A screen for setting various data relating to the for details.
installation of the system, and for setting system To advance to the next screen without any entry,
passwords. press the PF2 key.
This screen does not appear when administration
data has already been assigned in on-line mode For storing the entered parameters, press the
1 or if you start up the system when CPU Operation PF2 or the PF4 key. For storing operation, refer
Switch (Mode) is set to 0 to 4 and 8 to 9. Refer to to Section 7-H “Key Functions.” f”
Section 2-F-2.00 “CPU Rotary-Switch Features”
I
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value
<Customer & Installation Data>
Customer Name Up to 32 letters, numbers or marks
Location Up to 64 letters, numbers or marks
Phone No. Up to 16 letters, numbers or marks
Modem No. Up to 16 letters, numbers or marks
Customer Contact blank Up to 32 letters, numbers or marks
Date of Installation Up to 16 letters, numbers or marks
Unit ID Up to 8 letters, numbers or marks
) Installers Name Up to 32 letters, numbers or marks
Programmers Name Up to 32 letters, numbers or marks
Continued
7-B-2
Continued
I /
Assigning Items Deiaur: Selection of Value
<System Password>
Protection Level 1 LVL ;
Protection Level 2 LVL 2 Four digits consisting of letters, numbers or marks
Protection Level 3 LVL 3
Protection Level 4 LVL 4
Comments blank Up to 70 letters, numbers or marks
,-2.. .I!,
,/
.--
7-B-3
3.00 Password Entry Screen
Welcome to the Panasonic Hybrid PBX Version 1.0
System Admin i&ration
ON-LINE PROCESS
PASSWORD:
3
Sumarry
The screen is for entering passwords which is If no characters are entered within 30 seconds
necessary to enter into system administration after this screen is displayed, the display returns
mode. Enter the passwords which are assigned to the initial screen.
in System Password “Protection level 1 to 4” of
the installation. , When you enter the correct password and press
the RETURN key, the Hminal displays the next
To prevent an unauthorized person from learning screen.
the password, the password characters are not
displayed when they are entered.
Displays ON-LINE PROCESS screen in on-line

mode, and OFF-LINE PROCESS screen in off-
line mode.
The above screen appears when the system is in
on-line mode.
7-B-4
4.00 Date and Time Set Up Screen
late & Time Set Up IOF. “‘4 1::s
__A
_-__--_-------------------------------------- -- ------ --+ _____ +-- ____ -----+----
Set Date & Time
Date and Time : ‘!j9 JAN. 1 FRI 12:00 AM
-..
Summary
A screen for setting the date and time. AM/PM” by pressing the space key.
This screen may not appear depending on the To advance to the next screen without entering the
setting of the CPU rotary switch. For setting of data, press the PF2 key.
the CPU rotary switch, refer to Section 2-F- To store the entered data, press the PF2 or PF4
2.00 “CPU Rotary-Switch Features.” key.
Enter “Year,” “Day,” “Houf and “Minute” For the storing operation, refer to Section 7-H “Key
Functions.” hi.
directly and setect “Mbnth,” “Day of the Week,”
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value
Year 99 Last two digits of the year
Month JAN JAN/FEB/MAR/APWMAY/JUN/JUUAUG/SEP!

OCT/NOV/DEC
Day 1 1 to 31 : day
Day of the week FRI SUNIMON/TUEMIED/THUIFRl/SAT
Hour 12 1 to12: hour
Minute 00 00 to 59 : minute
Morning/Afternoon AM AM : morning
PM : afternoon/evening
7-B-5
5.00 Main Menu Screen
fain Menu I on I I LIN I DIR
‘-‘----------“-------------------------------+--~--~---+--.
1. Programming
2. Test
3. Monitor
4. Print Out
5. Change Passvord
6. Change Date & Time
7. Backup Utility
8. Restart
9. Exit
Summary
By selecting an item from the Main Menu, you To select an item from the Main Menu, just type the
enter a system programming area and can number of the item you want followed by the return
access specific system parameters and key.
features.
I Menu I Number I Reference I

r;-
1 Programming 1 1 1 7-c-4.00 1
1 2 1 7-c-5.00 1
Monitor 3 7-C-6.00
Print Out 4 7-c-7.00
I Change Password I 5 I 7-C-8.00 I
Change Date & Time 6 7-c-9.00
Backup Utility 7 7-c-10.00
Restart 8 7-c-1 1.00
I Exit I 9 I 7-c-12.00
I
7-B-6
6.00 Operating Flow Chart
Initial Screen
Menu Screen
Press the RETURN

key
l * Panasonic Hybrid PBX Installation
___----------- System Installation
Please set the following initial data Screen
:
,j
ON/OFF Line Switch ON/OFF line select

I I
mm
1 RETURN Press the RETURN
key
Welcome to the Panasonic Hybrid PBX Welcome to the Panasonic Hybrid PBX
_______------------------- Password Entry -.
System Administration System Administration Screen
ON-LINE PROCESS OFF-LINE PROCESS
PASSWORD : PASSWORD :
Password Entry Enter the password
Press the RETURN

key
Enter year, month, day,

Iweek, si AqpM 1 day of the week, hour,
minute, a.m.1p.m.
Press the RETURN
key
Main Menu
---------r---- Main Menu Screen
t 1. Programmmg
L
2. Test
3. Monitor
.
.
9. E;it /
7-B-7
C. Menu Screen
1 .OO Introduction
Enab ss you to assign or change system

orogramrr?ing data by selecting the required
screen. This section explains the procedures for
staR;ng from the menu screen through the
programming main menu screen, to the sub menu
screen.
7-c-i
2.00 Operation of Switching
Screens
(A) Operation (B) Example

Type the item number on the screen. Then press The illustration below shows the procedures for
the RETURN key to advance to the next screen. selecting a programming screen, starting from
the Main Menu screen.
<Example>
f Main Menu 3
LI
r
I
1. Programming Main Menu screen
Type the item number, then 1

I
press the RETURN key. 1 The screen advances to the
-qj-y-J~]
Programming Main Menu
screen.

screen
Type the item number, then 1 I

press the RETURN key. The screen advances to the
Configuration Submenu screen.
Configuration Submenu
screen
Type the item number, then I

press the RETURN key. L The screen advances to the
Setting screen.
Setting screen
._ .
7-C-2
3.00 Returning to Previous Screen
To return to the previous screen, press the PF2

key.
The illustration below shows the operation,
staring from the Setting Screen and returning’to
the Main Menu screen.
<Example>
Configuration-System Assignment
Setting Screen
n PF2
Pressing the PF2 key returns the
screen to the Sub Menu screen.
f Confiauration-Submenu
NL
1. System Assignment Programming Submenu screen
Pressing the PF2 key returns the

nIl.ll
PF2
screen to the Programming Main
Menu screen.
h 01. Configuration &

Programming Main Menu screen.
I I
I Pressing the PF2 key returns the

llI.lo
PF2
screen to the Main Menu screen.
Main Menu
&5 1. Programming Main Menu screen

Pressing the PF2 key while the
I Main Menu screen is displayed
causes no change of the screen
and error entry tone sounds.
7-c-3
4.00 Programming Main Menu
Type “1” and press the RETURN key in :he Main The illustration below shows the submenu
Menu screen then the Programr,ng Ma.:: Menu screens and the setting screens of Programming
is displayed on the screen: Main Menu.
Operation
- Tenant
- System Timer
- Class of Service
I Main Menu
I - Local Access Group
- Numbering Plan
- Communication Interface
- Speed Dialing-System
- Absent Message
JI Group t Trunk Group
Programming ICM/Paging Group
Main Menu I Call Pickup Group
Pager & Music Source
Attendant Console
Toll Restriction Area/Office Code Tables

Office Code Tables (TRS)
I 7/l 0 Digit Toll Restriction Table
ARS I Leading Digit Table
- Office code Table (ARS)
- Route Plan Tables
Route Lists Table
+GzzGq+ Fed Digit Table
I
Miscellaneous Installation Information
Power Failure Transfer
7-c-4
Configuration Miscellaneous
Assigns the data concerning cards, slots and DNs Assigns the installation information and cards ‘sr
(directory numbers). effectuating Power Failure Transfer.
For further details, refer to Section 9-C Refer to Section 9-L “Miscellaneous Screen.‘
“Configuration Screen.”
System
Assigns the elemental data common to the whole
system.
For further details, refer to Section 9-O “System
Screen.”
Group
Assigns the data for trunk groups, ICM paging
groups and pickup groups.
For further details, refer to Section 9-E “Group
Screen.”
Trunk
Assigns various parameters for CO lines, external
pagers and music sources or tenant number for
AGC (Automatic Gain Control).
. Refer to Section 9-F “Trunk Screen.”
Extension
Assigns the parameters for each extension, DSS
consoles, Doorphones and Attendant consoles.
Refer to Section 9-G “Extension Screen.”
Special Carrier Access

Assigns available trunk groups and parameters
necessary for making Equal Access or OCC
(Other Common Carrier) Access calls.
3.< Refer to Section 9-H “Special Carrier Access
Screen.”
Toll Restriction
Assigns parameters for Toll Restriction.
Refer to Section 9-l “Toll Restriction Screen.”
Automatic Route Selection

Assigns the parameters for Automatic Route
Selection.
Refer to Section 9-J “Automatic Route Selection
Screen.”
Special Attended
Assigns parameters for effectuating DISA (Direct
\ Inward System Access) and DID (Direct Inward
Dialing) features, and parameters on UCD
(Uniform Call Distribution) feature.
Refer to Section 9-K “Special Attended Screen.”
7-c-5
5.00 Test Main Menu 6.00 Monitor Main Menu
Type “2” and press the RETURN key in the Main Type ‘3” and press i?e RETURN key in the Main
Menu screen, then the Test Main Menu is Menu screen, then :ce Monlror Main Menu is
displayed on the screen. displayed on the strr?t?r..
This menu consists of three submenus as The illustration below shows the submenu screen
illustrated below. and the setting screens.
Station
Trunk Group
Attendant console
Card Test
DISA
Verifies the card conditions and enables you to
OGMl
detect whether troubles are caused by a card or
OGM2
telephone instruments.
AGC
Port Test
Verifies the port conditions and enables you to ..
detect troubles when telephone instruments don’t Error Log
function well while card condition is good. Displays up to 15 major and minor alarms and up
to 15 light alarms.
PITSand ATT Test For further details, refer to Section 14-G-2.00
Verifies the conditions of PITS and the Attendant “Error Log screen.”
Console (ATT) and enables you to detect troubles
when telephone instruments don’t function well Device Status
while card condition is good. Displays the status of the system, cards, pods
and the conference trunk.
For further details, refer to Section 14-G-3.00
For further details of testing, refer to Section 14-F “Device Status screen.”
“Functional Test by Entering Commands.”
Traffic
Displays traffic measurements of extensions ,
trunk groups, attendant consoles and resources
(DISA, OGMl, OGM2, AGC).
“Traffic Submenu screen.”
7-C-6
7.00 Print Out 8.00 Change Password
Type “4” and press the RETURN key in the Main Type “5” and press the RETURN key in the Main
Menu screen, then the Print Out Menu screen is Menu screen, then the Change Password screen
displayed on the screen. is displayed on the screen.
This screen consists of the following three setting Allows you to change passwords for “On-Site
screens. operation” and “Remote operation” respectively.
For further details, refer to Section 7-E “Changing
Password.”
Main Menu
Programming
Monitor I
1 Change Password 1
Print Stop
Programming
Programming Main Menu for printing out appears
on the screen.
Monitor
Monitor Main Menu for printing out appears on
the screen.
Print Stop
Enables you to stop printing.
For further details of printing out operations, refer

to Section 7-D “Printing Out.”
1
7-c-7
9.00 Change Date and Time 10.00 Backup Utility
Menu screen, then the Change Date & Time Menu screen, then the Backup Utility Main Menu
screen is displayed which is same as the Date & is displayed on the screen.
Time Set Up screen in pre-entering mode. The illustration below shows the submenu
However, you can change the date and time screens and the setting screens.
anytime in this screen.
For further details, refer to Section 7-F ‘Changing
Date and Time.”
I Main Menu I
\I, r All Data

Change Date & Time
~-All Data
f- ATT2 Local Data
Load
Loading the system programming data and
attendant console database from backup device
to the system can be done during off-line mode
only.
Save ,’
Saving the system programming data and
attendant console database from the system to
the backup device can be done during on-line
mode as well as off-line mode.
For further details of Backup Utility, refer to

Section 16 “Backup Utility-On Site.”
7-C-8
11 .OO Restart 12.00 Exit
Menu screen initializes the system and the initial Menu screen, then the initial screen is displayed.
screen is displayed, the result is the same as if Refer to Section 7-G-l .OO “Exit.”
you press the RESET button.
“Restart.”
7-c-9
D. Printing Out
Enables you to print parameters of programming 1. When the following Print Out Menu screen
and monitor. appears, type “1” for Programming submenu
“System-Operation”, SMDR should be assigned screens.
to Wes.” Type “2” for Monitor submenu screens, and “3”
Refer to Section 9-D-l .02 “Operation (U3)” for for stop printing. When you want to stop
the assignment of SMDR. printing, return to this screen and type “3.”
Connect your printer to SIO#2 port on the main
unit of the system.
Refer to Section 9-D-7.00 “Communication
Interface” for information about communication
parameters.
?rint Main Menu 1 OFL 1 PRT I LIN i DIR

----------w--m- ------_______ + ---+-e-+-e--+ ----
1. Prommming
2. Honitor
3. Print Stop
7-D-l
For examp!e, whe- ;c; S&I: -7”. T-S following
Print Out Menu SC-EC a;=p+z’s.
IPrint Out Nenu I OFL I PRT I LIH I DIR

-----------------------------------__-----_--____I -+-----+-----+-----+----
01. Conf isuration

02. SYSta
03. Group
04. Trunk
05. Extension
06. Special Carrier Access
07. Toll Restriction
08. Automatic Route Selection
09. Special Attended
10. Wiscellanems
J 2-l When you want to print all programming,

: ~press the F8 (ALL PRT) key.
2-2 When you want to print each of the screen,

press the key of the desired screen and the
RETURN key. The submenu screen appears.
7-D-2
Note : In :?e following programming submenu screens, specify-
ing ire screen number is available.
l Ciass of Service
==> Class of Service No. (01-32) = D
l Trunk Group
==> Trunk Group No. (01-l 6) = 0
l CO Line
==> Trunk Equipment No. (Physical No.) = 0
l Station
==> Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DNxxxx) =0 ,i._ .
l DSS Console
==> Station Equipment No. (Physical No.) =I
l Equal Access
==> Equal Access No. (1-4) = n
l OCC Access
==> OCC Access No. (l-4) = 0
l Area/Office Code Table (TRS)

==> Area/Office Code Table No. (l-8) = m
l Office Code Table (TRS)

=I> Office Code Table No. (01-64) =)
l Office Code Table (ARS)

==> Office Code Table No. (01-32) = u
l Route Plan Table

==> Route Plan Table No. (01-32) = n
7-D-3
E. Changing Password
Description
Enables you to change passwords for “On Site”
and “Remote.”
hanse Password I OFL I PSW i SCR I DIR

““‘--~~“‘--‘-~----------~~~~~--~~~~~~~-~~~-+-~~-+-~~-~~-+-~~
+-----------------------------------+
I Type I Data I
I ---e-m-- --------- --+------- I
I << OnSite >>
I Protection Level 1 --- 1 I
Protection Level 2 ----I
I Protection Level 3 ---I I
I Protection LeveI 4 ---I
I << Remote >> I I
I Protection Level 1 ---I
I Protection Level 2 ---I I
Protection Level 3 ----I.
I Protection Level 4 ---I i
+-------------------------------+
i
Operation
Enter four digit alphanumeric characters for each
password if you want to change the factory
setting default value.
Default values are as follows:
Items Default Items Default
<On Site> &emote>

Protection Level 1 LVLl Protection Level 1 LVLl
Protection Level 2 LVL2 Protection, Level 2 LVL2
Protection Level 3 LVL3 Protection Level 3 LVL3
Protection Level 4 LVL4 Protection Level 4 LVL4 .
7-E-l
F. Changing Date and Time
Description
Allows you to change the date and time.
Change Date & Tine I OFL I Wi I XR I DIIi
Set Date & Time
Date and Time : ‘99 JAN. 1 FRI 12:OO AM
ii HRD CPYP
Operation
Enter “Year”, “Day”, “Hour” and “Minute” directly
and select “Month”, “Day of the Week”, “AM/PM”
by pressing the space key.
For the input value, refer to the table below.
Assigning items Default Selection of Value
Year 99 last two digits of the year
Month JAN JAN/FEB/MAR/APWMAY/JUN/JUL/AUG/SEP/OCT/NOV/DEC
Day 1 1 to 31 : day
Day of the week FRI SUN/MON/TUE/WED/THU/FRI/SAT
Hour 12 1 to12: hour
Minute 00 00 to 59 : minute
Morning/Afternoon AM AM : morning
PM : afternoon/evening
7-F-l
G. Returning to Initial
Screen
1 .OOExit
Description
Allows you to return to the initial screen and
displays the screen below.
2.00 Restart
Description
Allows you to initialize the system.
Operation
When you execute Restart, the following
message appears at the bottom of the screen.
Are you sure? (Y: yes/N: no)
Type ,Y,” and press the RETURN key to restart.

If you do not want to restart the system, type “N,”
and press the RETURN key.
7-G-l
H. Key Functions
1.00 Moving Cursor by 2.00 Command Execution by
[7l-T-FlI~FjTAB RETURN or ENTER
The cursor (0) is displayed in reverse video on To store the entered data in the line mode or in
the screen and indicates the position for entering the function mode, press the RETURN key or the
the setting values. ENTER key.
You can move the cursor only.in the entry field.
You can move the cursor as follows.
ITI : Moves the cursor to the previous line.
El : Moves the cursor to the next line.

: Moves the cursor to left.
El
m : Moves the cursor to right.
m : Moves the cursor to the beginning of the
next field or to the beginning of the field.
m : Moves the cursor to left while deleting the
displayed character.
7-H-l
3.00 Retruning to Previous Menu
Screen by PF2
To return to the previous menu screen, press the 1) To store entered data, enter “Y” and press
PF2 key. the RETURN key.
Not to save, enter N, then press the RETURN
When no data has been entered: key.
The screen returns to the previous screen.
l Returns to the previous menu screen
2) To cancel the entered data, enter “C,” then
When data has been entered, but not stored by press the RETURN key.
pressing the PF4: The screen does not change.
l The following message appears at the bottom

of the screen.
‘1
.’
Parameter Save OK? (Y:yes/ N:no/ C:cancel)
<Example>
/I<
I
Li!l
PF With data entry, but not stored by PF4
,- The following message is displayed on the
No data entry
+ Parameter Save OK?(Y:yes/N:no/C:cancel)
Press “Y” or “N” or “C” key.
The screen returns to the previous
The screen returns to the previous menu
(Lizi&-,
*-:::
pF2
key* The screen returns to the Main Menu
7-H-2
4.00 Entry of Value by SPACE or
Directly
Entering the value directly or selecting it by

pressing the SPACE key is available.
When “SEL” (Select Input) is displayed at the
right end on the top line, pressing the SPACE key
enables you to select the desired value from
factory programmed parameters.
When the screen displays “DIR” (Direct Input),

enter the appropriate parameters directly.
<Example>
1. (SEL) Select Input by SPACE key 2. (DIR) Direct Input
In System-Operation (2/3) screen, the first item 1) After entering “Yes” for SMDR, move the cursor
is System Administration Device. To select the to Page Length field.
desired device from the four options: VT220/
Dumb/AlTl/AlT2, press the SPACE key. One l The display “SEL” changes to “DIR.”
of the four options is displayed in the following
order. 2) Enter the appropriate number directly from 4 to
99 for Page Length .
When storing the entered data, press the PF2 or

I I ..
PF4 key. -
SEL or DIR
System-Operation
------------
-----------A-- Operation (2/3)

rmT23--
r, System Administration Device *I Yes- - 7I
’ SMDR
I Page Length (4-99) I 6o
i
I Skip Perforation (o-95) , 60 I
I I
7-H-3
5.00 Storage of Set Value by PF4
Storing the entered data
1. Press the PF4 key. 2. Press “Y” key when storing the entered data.
Press “N” key when not storing the entered
l The following message appears at tne bottom data.
of the screen: Press “C” key to cancel the entered data.
Parameter Save OK?(Y:yes/N:no/C:cancel) 3. Press the RETURN key.
<Example>
.:.
I System-Operation
_----__-------ST----
------------ ---
r Tenant Service
I Automatic Route Selection
I
I
I
Press the PF4 key.
The following message’appears

at the bottom of the screen.
+ Parameter Save OK?(Y:yes/N:no/C:cancel)
I
.,n.
Press “Y” or “N” or “C” key.

Press mar nor B
Press the RETURN key.
7-H-4
6.00 Advancing to Next Screen
by NEXT
To advance ?o the next page of the same setting 1) To save the entered data, enter “Y,” then
screen, press the NEXT key. press the RETURN key.
Not to save the entered data, enter “N,”
When no data has been entered: then press the RETURN key.
The screen advances to the next screen.
l Advances to the next page.
2) To cancel the entered parameters, press
When data has been entered, but not stored by “C” key, then press the RETURN key. The
PF4: screen does not change.
l The following message appears at

the bottom of the screen.
Parameter save OK? (Y:yes/N:no/C:cancel)
<Example>
System-Operation
---------es--
t Operation (l/3) 1
Press NEXT key. 1 NEXT u
I The following message is

displayed on the screen.
+ Parameter S&e OK?(Yzyes/N:no/C:cancel)
4@
8tem-Operation
--__________ A ~..~ ,..,-\
uoeratron (Z/J)
7-H-5
7.00 Returning to Previous
Screen by PREV
To return to the previous page of the same setting 1) To store the entered data, enter ‘Y” a-c
screen, press the PREV key. not to store, enter “N.”
Pressing the RETURN key causes the
When no data has been entered: screen to return to the previous page.
l Returns to the previous page. 2) To cancel the entered parameters, press

“C” key, then the RETURN key.
When data has been entered, but not stored by The screen does not change.
PF4 key:
l The following message appears at the

bottom of the screen.
Parameter Save OK ? (Y:yes/N:no/C:cancel)
<Example>
System-Operation
----------m-w-
Press PREV key.

I
I With data entry, but not stored by
No data entry PF4
The following message is displayed
at the bottom of the screen:
w
I
+ Parameter Save OK?(Yzyes/N:no/C:cancel)
IllIon,, iiorm Press “Y” or “N” or “C”

I+ 1 key.
7-H-6
8.00 Canceling Set Value by PF3 9.00 Concluding Function Mode
by CTRL+C
To cancel the set values, move the cursor to the For concluding tne tunctron mode. press [CTRL/+
value to be canceled by using “TAB,” ” ? ,” ” 4 ,” q keys simultaneously.
-+, I) y+’ ,” keys etc. Then press the PF3 key. For details about !he funct!on mode, refer to
The results are as follows: Section 7-l-3.00 “Function Mode.”
l Canceling DIR data : becomes blank

l Canceling SEL data : default value appears on
that position.
To change the entered values, move the cursor on

that value, then enter the new value.
7-H-7
10.00 Key Operation Table for
Various Terminals
FUNCTIONS VT220 VT1 00 Attendant Console

(1) To previous screen (PREVI/~l+~I fTiy+1/ pE-J+)+Il/
pq/+IpFq, ml
(2) To next screen piq/m+wl pi-)+/---q [EMUl+/-q /
piiq+)+(, /--T--j
(3) Ending j--q (pF2J p-l+I+(l
(l+pTq
(4) Canceling value lpF31 ElPF3
(5) Canceling command (CTRLJ+~l pkq+~l m+m
(6) Data storage IpF41 1pF4) /-%--/+)+I~
/TiEiiq/lENTERl piEiiEq (RETURNI

:7) Command execution
:8) Output stop /CTRL(+I~J ICIRL(+j-T-1
19) Output Start /-Eq+(l j-GzldTJ
10) Function key ppFll --.-------- JpF81 pJ+m . ..IpF1I+~ lpFll **-*---***- IpF81
Ii) Mode change ICTRLI+Ipq piiq+pq [CTRLI+m
12) To previous
selection value /Eq+~) j-EEq+IT~ lBEl+m
7-H-8
I. Operation of Function Keys
1 .OO Relation between Function 2.00 Features Assigned to Func-

Keys and Screens tion Keys
Features assigned to function keys are shown in

the drawing below.
For details, refer to Section 7-J “Execution of
Function.”
c ____ ---TT------/ Function keys
Function display line

’ l!F!ll’ ~KZZfor
SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS,
OUS, REMOVE, EXIT )
Numbers 1, 2, - - - - 8 displayed in the function
field correspond to the function key 1, function
key 2, - - - -, function key 8 respectively. Fl : SHOW LV
n (Show Level)
in the following explanations, Fl stands for
function key 1, F2 stands for function key 2 and F2 : CHG LV
so on. n (Change Level)
Usable function keys may change depending on F4 : INS

the selected screen. For unavailable function ml (in Service)
keys, “space” appears in the function field. Features
assigned to F5 : ous
n (Out of Service)
<Example> the function
In the System-Numbering Plan screen, the keys
REMOVE qK
following display appears in the function field.
(Remove) ‘L/_rb
I
In this case, Fl is assigned to COMMON feature.

F2 is assigned to INDEX feature.
F6 is assigned to HRDCPY feature. : COPY
and F3, F4, F5, F7 and F8 are assigned
(COPY)
to no feature.
: READ
(Read)
: HRDCPY
(Hard Copy)
: AUTO CONF
(Automatic Configuration)
: SET
(Set)
7-l-l
3.00 Function Mode
Pressing the function key creates a prompt at the l In function mode, the follwoing keys are not
bottom of the screen. The prompt that appears available: NEXT, PREV, PF2 and PF4.
on the screen is called “Function Mode.”
l To conclude function mode, press the EXIT
l When pressing the following function keys, the (F7) key. Pressing /CTRLl/ and q keys simul-
prompts below are displayed. taneously also concludes function mode or
other modes such as SHOW LV, CHG LV and
so on.
I Function key I Prompt I
COMMON I CMD> I
j-q INDEX INDEX>

I I
In I F3 COPY I COPY> I
II READ READ>
El AUTO CNF AUTOCNF>
I= mF8 SET I SET> I
7-l-2
J. Execution of Function Modes
1.00 COMMON (Fl) and EXIT (F7)
Description Operation Chart

When you want to execute the functions SHOW LV
(Show Level), CHG LV (Change Level), INS (In
Service), OUS (Out of Service) and REMOVE
(Remove), press the COMMON (Fl) key. Pressing
I Press the COMMON key II
I
1
the EXIT (F7) key allows you to conclude the
function mode.
Operation <Function mode>

Entering into COMMON mode
To execute
1. Press the Fl key. uizoFl SHOW LV, press
l The prompt (CMD>) appears and function CHG LV, press

mode is established. INS, press
The cursor is flashing and you can choose a ous, press
desired function from functions displayed on
the function field as follows. REMOVE, Press
r-- --1
I Concluding I
L function mode
-I
Concluding the function mode
1. Press the F7 key. m IPress the EXIT key w1 I
l The function mode is concluded.
Condition
Available for all the setting screens and all the
menu screens.
7-J-l
2.00 SHOW LV (Show Level)
Description Conditions
Enables you to confirm the current password Press the EXIT (F7) key to return to COMMON
level by pressing the SHOW LV (Fl) key after mode.
entering the COMMON mode.
When back in COMMON mode, executing other
Operation COMMON mode functions is possible.
Press the Fl kev. n
‘I) SHOW LV is available for all the menu screens
l The screen shows the current password and the setting screens.
level.
CMD >
““‘Current Level 4 0
Operation Chart
Press the COMMON key Fi
<Function mode> I
--------
r Concluding function mode
1 ) Press the EXIT key m
L -e-m----
-------- J
t
r Showing password level
1
) Press the SHOW LV key m -
L --------
7-J-2
3.00 CHG LV (Change Level)
Enables you to raise or lower the current password Password level can be raised one by one as
level by pressing the CHG LV (F2) key after follows: 4-3-2 --+l
entering COMMON mode.
To lower the current password level, simply press
the RETURN key when “CMD>Enter Password
(Current Level l)=” is displayed.
By every pressing of the RETURN key, password
level is lowerd one by one as follows: 1 -+ 2-9 3
Operation To return to the COMMON mode from the change

Raising a password level level mode, press the EXIT (F7) key.
1. Press the F2 key. n F* The Change Level function is available for all the
menu screens and the setting screens.
I CMD > Enter Password (Current Level 4) = fij
2. Enter 4-digit new password (one level higher

than current level).
I CMD > Enter Password (Current Level 4) = B
l To prevent an unauthorized person from

learning the password, the password
characters are not displayed when they are
entered.
3. Press the RETURN key. 1RETURN
CMD > Enter Password (Current Level ?j = Lr.1

I *““OK
. When newly entered password is allowed by

the system, L1““‘OK ” appears and new
password level is displayed.
7-J-3
Operation Chart
Press the COMMON keyl
<Function mode>
<Change level mode>
------
I- rchh3ging
I
password 1
L- r------7
Flnlshing change level
1 mode and returning to 1
7-J-4
4.00 INS (In Service)
Conditions
Description
The system should be in on-line communication
Allows you to change the status of shelves, cards mode.
and ports from “Out of Service” to “In Service” in
the following screen, after pressing the COMMON For changing lower device such as station, port
(Fl) key. etc.. to “In Service,” upper device such as card
and shelf should be In Service beforehand.
The table below shows the devices to be

changed to “In Service” and their Entry numbers.
Elements Entry numbers
Operation Shelf physical number (1 to 3)

Card physical number (101 to 315) .
<Example> Port physical number (1011 to 3158)
Changing the status of station (physical number Station extension directory number
2158) from “Out of Service” to “in Service.” (DNxxxx: three or four digits), or
physical number (1011 to 3158)
1. Press the F4 key. ~4 Attendant Al, A2 or Port number (1011 to
n Console 3158)
DTMF Receiver f+=Y
/CMD >InSeticeNo.=~ xxx : card physical number
y : 1 for DTMF Receiver 1
2 for DTMF Receiver 2
Conference Trunk Basic conference trunk number
CFBxx (xx : 01 to 08)
Optional conference trunk number
CFOyy(yy:Ol to&I)
2. Enter the physical number of the station “2158.”
If it is impossible to execute the “In Service”

operation, one of the following error messages
appears on the screen.
The error message types depend on the situation.
l **** ERROR : Illegal parameter

l **** ERROR : Not installed
l **** ERROR : Diagnostic failure
3. Press the RETLJRN key. RETURN l **** ERROR : Invalid status
For details about the error messages, refer to

,‘MD > In Service No.=2158 0
““‘OK Section 9-M “Error Message Tables.”
To repeat the “In Service” operation, repeat from
STEP 2.
. U l l* * OK” appears when the station

l To return to the COMMON mode, press the EXIT
(physical number: 2158) becomes “ln- (F7) key.
Service.”
7-J-5
Operation Chart
) Press the COMMON key a
<Function mode>
<In Service mode>
Enter physical number etc.,

then press RETURN key
FfoG~atthe ‘G Service” - 1
l- ./ operation, return to the previ- C
Lous---------
step.
-I
‘;i z hig;Ni mode ,dTer ’

i turning to function mode I
L --------A -I
7-J-6
5.00 OUS (Out of Service)
Description Conditons
Allows you to change the status of shelves, cards The system should be in on-line communication
and ports from “In Service” to “Out of Service” as mode.
shown below after pressing the COMMON (Fl)
key. Devices to be changed to “Out of Service” and
their entry numbers are as same as that of “In
Service.” Refer to Section 7-J-4.00 “INS (In
Service).”
When setting the shelf or card to “Out of Service,”

their lower device such as stations & ports
Operation become “Out of Service” simultaneously.
<Example>
Changing the status of the station (physical number If it is impossible to set “Out of Service”, one of the
2158) from “In Service” to “Out of Service.” following error messages appears on the screen.
A type of error message depends on the situation.
1. Press the F5 key. ~5
n *****Error : Illegal parameter
*****Error : No installed
*****Error : Diagnostic failure
*****Error : invalid status

Section 9-M “Error Messsage Tables.”
2. Enter the physical number of the station “2158.” To repeat the “Out of Service” operation, repeat
from STEP 2.
n2mo To return to COMMON mode, press the EXIT (F7)

key.
I
COMMON > Out of Service No. = 2158 t]
3. Press the RETURN key.
CMD > Out of Service No. = 2158 0

““‘OK
l ” ’ * * OK” appears when the station

l l
(physical number 2185) becomes “Out of

Service.”
7-J-7
Operation Chart
/ pre~ecoMMoNkeyq,
<Function mode>
function mode
JI
<Out of Service mode>
i Enter ol-
rTo-------me
repeat the OUS operation, 1
return to the previous step. t-J
t
4---------
I L ---------
6inishing Out of Service model
and returning to function I
_I
L!!ode.--- -----I
7
Press the EXIT key IF7)
7-J-?l
6.00 REMOVE
Enables you to delete the stored data by The system should be in On-line communication
specifying the devices. This operation should be mode.
done before actually removing the devices.
This function is available in the screen where The specified terminal should be “Out of Service”
‘REMOVE” is displayed.on the function field. or “Fault.”
Operation When it is impossible to execute “REMOVE”

operation, one of the following error messages
<Example>
Remove the programming data of an extension
The error message type depends on the situation.
with physical number 1011.
*****ERROR : illegal parameter
I. Press the Fl key. I]T[
*****ERROR : Parameter is not consecutive set
*****ERROR : Not installed
*****ERROR : Invalid status
*****ERROR : Parameter is empty

Section 9-M “Error Message Tables.”
2. Press the F6 key. n F6
CMD>RemovePortNo. (PhysicalNo./DNxxxx/Ax)=0
3. Enter the physical number 1011.
CMD>Remove Port No. (Physical No./DN xxx~/Ax)=lO11~
4. Press the RETURN key. RETURN

II
Ct$;P,“;ove Port No. (Physical No./DN xxxx/A~)=lOl1 []
;,I I>; [3/ I41: [:I ii/ jljEXll [i-j
- When the message below appears, the

programming data of physical number 1011
is deleted without failure.
““‘OK
7-J-9
Operation Chart
Press the COMMON key m
1Press the REMOVE key ai
Enter physical number or DN

or Attendant Console num-
--------- 1
1To repeat the REMOVE 1
1operation, return to the r
I
L---------_I
-----me-- 1
Lr, Concluding function mode ,
Press the EXIT key m

I
7-J-l 0
7.00 INDEX

Enables you to enter the desired screen
immediately without using the NEXT or PREV
key.
Operation
<Example>
Entering the Class of Service No.=32 screen. <Function mode>
The current screen is Class of Service (COS)

No.=01
System-Class of Service Enter the number of the

setting screen, and press
Class of Service (COS) No. = 01 (l/2) RETURN key.
After showing the desired
screen, function mode ends
automatically.
Condition
1. Press the F2 key. n F2 If “INDEX” operation cannot be executed, one of

the following error messages appears on the
screen.
1 INDEXAass of Service No. (Ol-32)= 1 A type of error message depends on the situation.
*****Error : Illegal parameter

*****Error : Not installed
*****Error : Please save data
2. Enter COS number 32 that you want to enter. *****Error : Parameter is empty
n3 For details about the error messages,

Section S-M “Error Message Tables.”
refer to
INDEXAlass of Service No. (Ol-32)=32 [3

/
System Class of Service
Class of Service (COS) No. = 32 (l/2)
l COS No.=32 screen appears, and the

function mode is finished automatically.
7-J-l 1
In the screen, Toll Restriction “Area/Office Code Reference
Table,” both Area/Office Code Table number and
The INDEX function is avbailble for the screen
Entry number must be entered after depressing
listed below. For the input values, refer to
the INDEX (F2) key.
Section 9 “System Programming (VT).”
INDEX>AreaiOffice Code Table No. (l-8)=2 2 Entry (200-999)= System-Class of Service (l/2) (2/2)
I System-Numbering Plan (l/8) to (818)
System-Speed Dialing-System
Group-Trunk Group (l/2) (212)
Trunk-CO Line
Extension-Station (l/3) (2/3) (3/3)
The example below shows the procedures to Extension-DSS Console (l/3) (2/3) (313)
display the screen of Entry 251 of Area/Office
Toll Restriction-Area/Office
l Code Table
code Table No.2.
2 l Toll Restriction-Office Code Tables
n
l Automatic Route Selection-Leading Digit Table
1. Enter the Area/Office code table number 2.
l Automatic Route Selection-Office Code Table
. Automatic Route Selection-Route Plan Tables
INDEX>Area/Office Code Table No. (l-8)=2 0 Entry (200-999)=
l Automatic Route Selection-Route List Table
I
2. Enter 251 after moving the cursor to the Entry

position by using m key
INDEX>Area/Office Code Table No. (l-8)=2 Entry(200-999)=251 1
Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code Table

Area/Office Code Table No.=2 Entry=251
l Area/Office Code Table No.=2 Entry=251

xrecn appears and the function mode
finishes automatically.
7-J-12
8.00 COPY
Description
This function enables you to copy the desired I
system programming data from specified screen
to multiple screens at a time, and is available in I System-Class of Service 1
the screens where COPY is displayed in the I Class of Service (COS) No. = 01 (i/2) 1
function field.
& COPY>COS No. (01-32)= 01 j COS No.= 30-32 0
Operation ++ttt OK
<Example> 1 1 1 1 1 u QExn H
Copying the data in System “Class of Service”
No.01 to COS No.30 through No.32 l The message below appears when the
original data of COS No.=01 is properly
I System-Class of Service 1 copied to COS No.=30 through 32
Class of Service (COS) No. = 01 (l/2) 1 *****OK
l Press the EXIT (F7) key to finish this mode.
Conditions
To copy the original to only one destination, enter
the same destination number in the first and last
positions. In this case, READ function is useful.
COPY>COS No. (Ol-32)= 0 4 COS= - <Example>

Copying COS No.=01 into COS No. 02
I I
COPY>COSNo. (Ol-32)=01 + COS No.= 02-02
2. Enter the original COS number, 01
COPY>COS No. (Ol-32)=01 0 + COS No.= - Enter the destination numbers in ascending order.
To repeat the “COPY” operation, repeat from step
I I
2. Then press the RETURN key.
If the COPY operation is unsuccessful, one of the

error messages below appears.
3. Move the Cursor to the first COS No. position
Error message types depend on the situation.
to be copied by usinq i. Then enter the
COS number, 30.
llIxllm *****Error : Illegal parameter
*“**Error : Not installed
COPY>COS No. (01.32)=01 -+ COS No.=30 i/-- j-
I / For details about the Error messages, refer to
4. Move the cursor to the last COS No. position

to be copied by using r.~ ) I Then enter the
COS number. 32
COPYXOS No (01.32).=Ol + COS No.=30 32
7-J-l 3
In the Toll Restriction “Area/Office Code Table,” Reference
“TABLE” and “ENTRY” appear in the function
The Copy function is available in the following
display line as below after pressing the COPY
screens.
(F3) key.
For the input values, refer to Section 9 “System
For copying the whole table, press the TABLE
Programming (VT).”
(Fl) key and for copying entries in the same
table, press the ENTRY (F2) key.
l System-Class of Service (l/2) (2/2)
l Toll Restriction-Area/Office Code Table
l Toll Restriction-Office Code Tables
l Automatic Route Selection-Leading Digit Table
l Automatic Route Selection-Office Code Table
l Automatic Route Selection-Route Plan Tables
l Automatic Route Selection-Route List Table
Copying the whole Table

Depress the Fi key. [F[
COPY>TableNo. (l-8)= fl + Table No.= -

I
Copying Entry
Depress the F2 key. n F2
I
COPY>Entry No. (200-999)= 1 - Entry No. = -
I
7-J-l 4
Operation Chart
1 PresstheCOPYkey /F31 1
<Function mode>
I _--------
50 repeat the “COPY” 1
1operkion, set the cursor to the 1
I
1 entry position then return to r’

pe previous stage.
------m-s -I
t
---------
LrI Concluding function mode
1
I
7-J-15
9.00 READ
Description 3. Press the RETURN key. RETURN

L
This function enables you to copy the desired
system programming data from specified screen
into the currety displayed screen quickly. I System-Class of Service
This is available in the screens where READ is
Class of Service (COS) No. = 32 (l/2)
displayed in the function field.
Operation j~~~~fNo;-32J;HH g /+ ,z 1
<Example>
Copying the system programming data of “Class
l The message below appears when the
of Service (COS) No.=Ol” into “COS No.=32.”
stored data of COS No.=01 is copied
properly to COS No.=32.
The current screen is Class of Service (COS)
No.=32.
*****OK
I System-Class of Service I
I--~ Class of Service (COS) No. = 32 (l/2) I Conditions
To repeat “READ” operation, repeat from step 2.
When READ operation is unsuccessful, one of the

following error messages appears on the screen:
Error message types depend on the situation.
1. Press F4. l **** Error : Illegal parameter

lE!l F4 l **** Error : Not installed
I
READ>COS No. (01-32)= 0
I
For details about the error messages,
refer to
To store the copied data, press PF4 or PF2.

To conclude this mode, press the EXIT (F7) key.
Reference
2. Enter the COS number 01 to copied. The READ functicrl is available in the screens
listed below. For the input values, refer to Section
9 “System Programming (VT).”
READXOS No. (01.32)=01 j j l System-Class of Service (l/2) (2/2)

- Group-Trunk Group (l/2) (2!2)
. Trunk-CO Line
l Extension-Station (l/3) (2/3) (3/3)
* Extension-DSS Console (l/3) (2/3) (3/3)
. Automatic Route Selection-Route Plan Tables
7-J-l 6
Operation Chart
Press the READ key m
<Function mode>
After entering number to be

copied, press 1-1
r1 To-----m--B
repeat the “READ” opera-
11
tion, return to the previous
I step. I-
L --------- J
_--------
t rConcluding function mode
1
I
L---------d
I
Press the EXIT key IF7(
7-J- 17
10.00 HRD CPY (Hard Copy)
Description Condition
When an output device such as printer provided When HRD CPY operation is unsuccessful, one of
with RS232C interface etc., is connected to the the following error messages appears on the
system, it is possible to print out the data on the screen.
screen. An error message type depends on the situation.
Refer to Section 9-D-7.00 “Communication
Interface” for further information about *****ERROR : Printer is not ready
communication parameters. *****ERROR : Service Violation
This function is available in the screens
displaying HRD CPY on the function field. For details about the error contents, refer to
Extension - Station
Reference
The HRD CPY operation is availble in the System
Installation screen and all setting screens.
Operation
l All data displayed on the screen is printed

out.
7-J-18
11 .OO AUTO CNF (Automatic
Configuration)
This function sets the telephone type and DSS
consoles automatically. This function is available
in the screens where AUTO CNF is displayed in Press the AUTOCNF key m
the function field.
Extension-Station
Pressm to execute Automatic Configu-

ration.
Press q not to execute Automatic
Configuration.
Then press1 RET
Operation
<Example>
When the Telephone Type is set to PITS in
Extention-Station screen and actually SLT
telephone is connected.
Function mode ends automatically
l The following message appears at the

bottom of the screen. Condition
1 Extension-Station I When Autdmatic Configuration operation fails,

one of the following error messages appears on
Station
--es Equipment No. = 1031
the screen.
Fe&hone Type-- - - - -TPG - - - - 1 An error message type depends on the situation.
1 Model--------------IKX-Tl23250 I
I I I I *****ERROR .: Illegal parameter
ti AUTOCNF> AutomaticConfigurationOK?(Y:yes/N:no)=n *“**ERROR : Not installed
/y H OEYlT H *****ERROR : Diagnostic failure i
For details of the error contents, refer to Section

9-M “Error Message Tables.”
2. Press “Y” key to execute AUTO CNF.
Y
4dl
Reference
Press “N” key not to execute AUTO CNF.
.I.
The AUTO CNF function is available in the
N
u following setting screens.
r--- ---
3. Press the Return key. i RETURNS l Extension-Station (l/3)
l-----1 -. I l Extension-DSS Console (l/3)
Exterlsioll-Slalton
I
Slation Equipment No. 1 1031
r;t:[ephonc:-rype-----T;ty----1
1 M,,,jel. _ -1 _
I
I I I
l/c
$ /‘f
- T&phone Type changes to SLT automatically.
7-J-19
12.00 SET Function (F8)
Description 3. Move the cursor to the right by using “4 “,

Enables you to add or delete office codes without and depress Y.
Y
moving the cursor to the code position. It also n
enables you to designate wide range of codes.
This function is effective in the “Toll Restriction-
Office Code Tables” and “Automatic Route Selec-
tion-office Code Tables.”
I
SETAet Office code No. (200-999) =200 (Y:yes/N:no) Y i]
Operation
<Example l>
Adding office code 200 in Toll Restriction Office 4. Press the RETURN key.
_----_----
w
Code Table
Toll Restriction-Office Code Table Toll Restriction-Office Code Table
Office Code Table No.=01 (l/4) Office Code Table No.=01 (l/4)
---- --e-w
---- ----- 7 EHundred

--e-w Office cod2 [r _---- 3
,01,02,03--- 09
I I II I
I I I I
e
Office code 200 is added
\ Adding office code 200 l “00” appears on the screen and Office code
200 is added. Also the message below
appears to show that the code 200 is added
properly:
1. Press the F8 key. n F8 ***** OK
SET>Set Office code No. (200-999) 0 (YyesiN:no)
2. Enter the office code number 200.
SET:.Sct Oft~ci: code No. (200-999) =200 j 1 (Y:yes/N 1x1
7&20
<Example 2~ 4. Press the RETURN key. /I
i--J
Deleting Office code 220 in Toll Restriction Office

Toll Restriction-Office Code Table
Code Table
Office Code Table No.=01 (l/4)
1. Press the F8 key. IF81
10,11,12,13--- 19
ISET&et Ofiice code No. (200-999) 0 (Yyes/N:no)

I
2. Enter the office code number 220. L Office code 220 is deleted
l Office code 220 is deleted and “ ” (blank)
ISET>Set Office code No. (200-999) =220 u (Yryes/N:no)
I
appears on the screen. Also the following
message shows that code 220 is deleted
properly:
***.. OK
l
Conditions
3. Move the cursor to the right by using “+ “,
and press N. When the SET operation is unsuccessful, the
N
n following error message appears:
1 SETSet Office code No. (200-999) =200 (YryesMno) N 0 ***** ERROR: Illegal parameter
I
For details of the error contents, refer to Section
9-M “Error Message Tables.”
It is also possible to designate wide range of

office code by using N, P, X instead of the
number:
N: 2to9
P : 0,l
x: oto9
For example, then designating the office codes
200 through 209, enter : 20X
7-J-21
Operation Chart
<Function mode>
Then press RETURN
r1To---------
E
execute SET functions
1
- successively, return to the pre- L
I
vious step. I
L -------es -I
---------
l
r Concluding Function mode
1
L _I
Press the EXIT key a

I
7-J-22
Section 8
Preparation for Programming and Maintenance

Dumb Type Terminal
(Section 8)
Preparatiori for Programming and Maintenance

Dumb Type Terminal
Contents
Page
A Introduction ...................... ..- ............................................................................. 8-A-l
1 .OO On-Site Administration.. ......................................................................... 8-A-l
2.00 System Administration from a Remote Location.. .................................. 8-A-2
3.00 Mode Structure ...................................................................................... 8-A-3
4.00 Correspondence between Input Format and Explanation Table ............ 8-A-4
B Entering/Finishing a Mode ............................................................................... 8-B-l

1 .OO Entering a Mode .................................................................................... 8-B-l
1 .Ol Initial Mode.. ................................................................................ 8-B-l
1.02 Pre-entering Mode.. ..................................................................... 8-B-2
1.03 Programming Mode.. ................................................................... 8-B-2
1.04 Operation Mode ........................................................................... 8-B-3
1.05 Changing the Current Mode.. .. ................................................. .:. 8-B-4
2.00 Finishing a Mode ................................................................................... 8-B-5
2.01 EXIT .................... . ....................................................................... 8-B-5
2.02 Restart.. ................................................ -....................................... 8-B-5
3.00 Flow Chart for Changing Modes.. .......................................................... 8-B-6
C Fixed Key Operation . .._............._.............................................._....................... 8-C-l
D input Format-General.. ..................................................................................... 8-D-l

1 .OO Programming Mode.. ............................................................................. 8-D-l
2.00 Operation Mode.. ................................................................................... 8-D-4
E Function Commands.. ...................................................................................... 8-E-l

1 .OO $ EOD.. .................................................................................................. 8-E-l
2.00 $ J Item Number.. .................................................................................. 8-E-l
3.00 $ CLR ..................................................................................................... 8-E-2
4.00 $ CPY .................................................................................................... 8-E-3
5.00 $ SET ..................................................................................................... 8-E-4
6.00 $ CNF .................................................................................................... 8-E-5
8-l
Page
F Maintenance Command.. ................................................................................. 8-F-l
1 .OO Change Level (CHL). ............................................................................. 8-F-l
2.00 Show Level (SHL). ................................................................................. 8-F-l
3.00 In Service (INS) ..................................................................................... 8-F-2
4.00 Out of Service (OUS). ............................................................................ 8-F-3
5.00 Remove (REM) ...................................................................................... 8-F-3
6.00 Print Out (PIT) ...................................................................................... 8-F-4
7.00 Set Date and Time (SDT) ...................................................................... 8-F-4
G Help Function ................................................................................................... 8-G-l

1 .OO Programming Mode ............................................................................... 8-G-l
2.00 Operation Mode ..................................................................................... 8-G-l
8-2
A. Introduction

maintenance of the system using a Dumb terminal displays the Main Menu screen from
terminal. which you can select administration functions.
For details about communication parameters, By selecting an item from the Main Menu, you
refer to Section 9-D-7.00 “Communication enter a system programming area and can
Interface.” access specific system parameters and features.
System Security
For security reasons, access to the
administration capabilities of the system is
controlled by a password. To prevent an
unauthorized person from learning the password,
the password characters are not displayed when
they are entered.
Password
feature, a valid password (four-digit,
alphanumeric characters*) must be entered.
To be recognized by the system, the password
must be entered exactly as stored in memory. f
Factory programmed eight passwords are
provided from the first to fourth levels for on-site,’
operation and the first to fourth levels for
operation from a remote location.

password level.
The 1st Level : To access to all levels.

The 3rd Level : To set port level parameters.
When you log in to the system using the first

level password, you can execute all functions,
but are increasingly restricted when entering the
levels 2, 3 and 4.
Passwords are originally factory programmed,
but may be changed when logging in to the
system by entering the first level password.
Refer to Section 7-E ‘Changing Password.”
* Alphanumeric characters
etc.) But entering “f’ ‘I-” are not available,
because these characters cannot be displayed
on the, LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) of a PITS.
8-A- 1
2.00 System Administration from
a Remote Location
using a Dumb terminal.
For details about communication parameters, Dial “Remote Directory Number” using Direct
refer to Section 9-D-7.00 “Communication Inward System Access (DISA) feature.
Interface.” For further information about DISA feature,
refer to 3-D-2.02 “Direct Inward System Access
Conditions (DISA).”
0 RMT card (Modem) must be installed in the Program DID feature so that the incoming
system and register the telephone number of telephone number is converted to the “Remote
modem in the System-Operation “Remote Directory Number.”
Directory Number” (FDN: 3 or 4 digits) for For further information about DID feature, refer
accessing the remote administration feature. to Section 3-D-2.03 “Direct Inward Dialing.”
For further information about “Remote Directory
Number,” refer to Section 1 O-C-4.00 ‘Operation Assign that a call from a remote-location can
(OPR).” access the Remote Administration feature”
automatically using DIL (1 :l) feature.
., For remote access, a data terminal and modem For further information about DIL (1:l) feature,
are required at a remote location. refer to Section 3-D-2.01 “Direct In tine (DIL).”
l Factory programmed 4 types of password from Remote access by operator transfer
1 st to 4th level for remote operation are The call from a remote location can be made
provided. Passwords are originally factory on any trunk into the system, and be answered
programmed, but may be changed at any time. by the operator.
Refer to Section 8-F-l -00 “Change Level (CHL). The call is then placed on hold and the Remote
n
Directory Number of the system dialed is
received. The operator transfers the call after
l You can execute remote system administration receiving the modem answer tone. The caller
during on-line communication mode only. But at a remote location will then hear the modem
when you load the system programming data answer tone and can proceed with sign-on.
from a remote location, the system shifts to off- Refer to Section 4-F-l -05 “Unscreened Call
line communication mode automatically. Transfer to Remote” for further information.
Refer to Section 17-B-2.02 “Loading Procedure”
for details. When the system administrator at a remote
location accesses the system remote
0 Starting up system administration from a remote administration feature, the following message
location can be done only in Dumb mode. appears on the display of operator’s telephone if
display is provided.
1234:RMT Access
Only one system administration terminal can
access the system at a time.
8-A-2
3.00 Mode Structure
Administration employing a dumb terminal consists When entering a mode except initial mode, the
of the following four modes: prompt depending on the mode appears on the
display. That is, the displayed prompt shows the
l Initial mode current mode.
l Pre-entering mode
l Programming mode The table below shows the mode and the prompt
l Operation mode displayed on the screen:
- Administration employing a dumb -

terminal
c Initial mode
I
( Pre-ente ;ng mode >
I I
.
Programming mode Operation mode
8-A-3
4.00 Correspondence between Input
Format and Explanation Table
The following example shows the relation between the
input format and the explanation table.
Input Format
A
+ The ( ) mark above meay that it can
be omitted depending on the commands.
Enter SH, AT or BT
(Refer to Section 8-D-l .OO “Programming Mode” for
Index Number
r--------------------------------------
I
J I betails about SH, AT, and BT. -
-----1
I
I
-
: Index Number Explanation

I
!
; Physical number (101 to 315)
j i -Y- sll~,~o;;o$ ;
I
: I
I
L------------------,-,-------------------------~
Enter the index number as explained in the table.
Input Value for Item

f------------7 1
L
-1 :
I Item ;
Assigning Item Input Value
,I Number ;
I
f 1 i Port 1
I
I
I
: 2 i Port2
:
II 3 i Port3
I I
I
I 4 i Port4 Three or four digit number : Directory number
I1
: 5 i Port 5
,I I
I
09 6 i Port 6
I
I
I 7 ; Port7
#
II 1
9 : Port 8
0 8
0 t
:-----..--. --J
Enter the item number depending on the assigning items.
When the assigning item appears, enter the For example, if you assign DN of Port 1, enter
value explained in “Input Value” of the tnble. Item Number 1 and when Port 1 appears, enter
three or four-digit number.
8-A-4
B. Entering/Finishing a Mode
1.00 Entering a Mode
1.01 Initial Mode
The mode before going into the Pre-entering mode The following flow chart illustrates the procedures
is defined as “Initial mode.” for advancing the mode from “Initial mode” to
Entering the password level four (forced password) “Pre-entering mode.”
in the “Initial mode” advances the mode to “Pre-
entering mode.”
( Initial mode 1
.
; ’ Panasonic Hybrid PBX: KX-T336 System*
.
t
l et -Initial display
; Press the RETURN key ;
; PASSWORD : c]
+- - Password Entry screen
---------mm--
r Press RETURN
password
after entering the forced 1
I I
: Select the mode

; Programming mode -------- PRG e-- Mode Selection screen
; Operation mode ------------ OPE
; (displays command information-- HLP)
Pre entering mode pry
prompt
Note : To prevent an unauthorized person from learning the

password, the password characters are not displayed
when they are entered,
8-B-1
1.02 Pre-entering Mode 1.03 Programming Mode
The mode before going into the Programming This mode is used to assign or change the
mode or Operation mode is defined as “Pre- system programming data.
entering mode,” that is, for entering the
“Programming mode” or “Operation mode.” The flow chart below illustrates the procedures for
advancing the mode from “Pre-entering mode” to
“Programming mode.”
Pre-entering mode
; Select the mode

; Programming mode ------- PRG < Mode Selection
; Operation mode ------------ OPE screen
; (displays command information-- HLP)
;qJ
-----------
r After entering PRG, press RETURN.
1
L ----- ----- _I
.3
Programming mod
Programming
mode prompt
For details about operation in the Programming

mode, refer to Section 8-D “Input Format-
General” and Section 10 “System Programming
(Dumb Type Terminal).”
a-0-2
1.04 Operation Mode
This mode is for confirming and changing the The following flow chart illustrates the procedures
password level, system maintenance and monitor for advancing the mode from “Pre-entering mode”
etc. except the programming for the system data. to “Operation mode.”
; Select the mode

; Programming mode ------- PRG
; Operation mode -------- OPE
; (displays command information- HLP)
r----- I -----1
I
After entering OPE, press RETURN
i----u --.miJ
T
Operation
mode prompt flr)T)
For details about operation in the Operation

mode, refer to Section 8-E-2.00 “Operation
Mode.”
8-B-3
1.05 Changing the Current Mode
it is possible to change “Programming mode” to

“Operation mode” and vice versa.
The flow charts show the procedures.
l Changing Programming mode to Operation l Changing Operation mode to Programming

mode mode
; PRG> 0 ; OPE> fl
----m-L ,,------A--
r
,
. ---7
After entering OPE, press RETURN. ,
r After entering PRG, press RETURN.
1
L ----- we--- J
3 3
;OPE> 0 ;PRG> 0
The system prompt changes from PRG> to The system prompt changes from OPE> to
OPE>. PRG>.
The current mode now is the Operation Mode. The current mode now is the Programming
Mode.
2.00 Finishing a Mode
2.01 EXIT 2.02 Restart
The flow chart below shows how to concjude the Description

Programming mode or the Operation mode and
Initializes the whole system. Same condition as
return to the Initial mode.
the RESET button is pressed.
(Password level : One)
Input Format
;OPE>RST tl
(Ey-)’ o[ (T)
IAfter entering EXIT, press RETURN.

I
After entering EXIT, press RETURN.
8-B-5
3.00 Flow Chart for Changing Modes
The procedure for changing modes is illustrated below:
Initial mode
. l l
; l Panasonic Hybrid PBX: KX-T336 System *
“I
. l l
Press RETURN
; Password : 0
To condude Pre-entering mode
<Pre-entering mode)
(displays command information --- HLP
I To enter Programming mode I To enter Operation mode I
( (-zi&q’~)’ J
& To change the mode Nb
Programming mode Operation mode
----I---
Fxecution of operation iJ
LOperation
-- mode
_--- -I I
‘I
To conclude Programming mode or Operation mode
8-B-6
C. Fixed Key Operation
n Moves the cursor one character left and deletes the character in that position.
Function command key used for concluding AT or BT mode with characters

($EOD) or ($CPY) etc. For details, refer to Section 8-E “Function Commands.”
In BT mode, entered between indexes as a delimiter.
In BT mode, entered between items as a delimiter. _.. .
1: ..I
When entering characters such as names and locations etc., used for identifying
them.
f
Cancels an operation during programming.
Stops scrolling information on the screen to let you view it.
Resumes screen scrolling.
Changes the mode to VT mode.
lml
Repeats the execution of the last entered command.
Cancels the command line and displays the prompt.
8-C-l
D. Input Format-General
1 .OO Programming Mode Programming Command
System Assignment SYA
input Format-General Slot Assignment SLA
DN Assignment DNA
In the programming mode (when PRG>fl is
Operation OPR
displayed on the screen), enter as follows: Tenant TNN
1 2 3 System Timer TIM
; PRG>M JType -1 Class of Service 1 CSl
A Class of Service 2 cs2
Local Access Group LAG
/_Item Number [Carriage Return (CR@/
Numbering Plan NBP
Communication Interface COM
Note: Be sure to enter one space between the Speed Dialing-System SPD
items. Absent Message ABS
The (4 ) in the followings indicates pressing Trunk Group 1 TGl
the RETURN key. Trunk Group 2 TG2
IChWaging Group IPG
Call Pickup Group CPG
CO Line COL
<Example> External Pager PAG
Displaying “Operation (OPR)” command, SMDR Music Source MUS
(index number 2, Item number 02) Auto Gain Control AGC
Extension EXT
Enter as follows: DSS Console DSS
: PRG>OPR SH 2 02 (J ) DN Button Assignment DNK
PF Button Assignment PFK
DSS Button Assignment DSK
Displays the following: Doorphone DPH
u Qtendant Console ATT
4ttendant Oueue Prioriiy AQP
Equal Access EQU
; INDEX=2 XC Access occ
; 02:SMDR --)Y roil Restriction 1 TRl
; PRG> [I roll Restriction 2 TR2
r0it Restriction 3 TR3
Iutomatic Route Selection 1 AR1
Iutomatic Route Selection 2 AR2
1. Commands Automatic Route Selection 3 AR3
The following programming commands are 4utomatic Route Selection A AR4
iutomatic Route Selection 5 AR5
available in the programming mode. Enter a IISA DIS
command depending on a programming. IISA Code DIC
For further information about programming. refer IISA Password DIP
to Section 10 “System Programming-Dumb Type >ID DID
Terminal.” JCD 1 UC1
JCD 2 UC2
nformation INF
‘ower Failure Transfer PFT
:hange Password CHG
ZPC Detect Time-OutgoIng CPC
automatic Busy-out Count ABC
Vorld Select 1 WSl
Vorld Select 2 ws2
Vorld Select 3 ws3
loice Mall Directory number VMD
4all Box Number MBN
Ipeed Dlallng Boundary SPB
ccount Code Venfled ACV
ccoun! Code Entry on Long ACL
hstance Calls
;O Access Instantly CAI
Ilght Answer Group NAG
‘olarlty Reversal Derectlon PRD
4altmg Second Dial Tone WSD
8-D-l
(30393)
2.Type of Mode 2) Auto Type-AT
Three types of Show type, Auto type and Batch Enables you to show or edit the data in an
type are available. interactive format.
1) Show Type-SH Showing the data

Each item appears one by one by every pressing
Enables you only to read the preset data. of the RETURN key.
The preset data cannot be changed by this type.
Editing the data
<Example> - If you do not want to change the data, press the
Displaying the data in System Assignment RETURN key when : INPUT>>fl is displayed.
If you want to change the data, enter the
Enter: appropriate values after ; INPUT>>fl, then press
; PRG>SYA SH (,+I ) the RETURN key.
Displays the follows: To save the data after changing it. be sure to
a enter $EOD after ; INPUT>> fl, then press the
RETURN key.
; 1EqansionSheli -+N
; 2 AdditionalCONF ---) N <Example>
Changing the data in System Assignment
; PRG>Fj
Enter:
; PRG>SYA AT (4 )
To change N to Y, enter Y ( c]).
Next item appears:

a
; 2:AdditionalCONF ---) Y
; INPUT>>0
To save the data of item 1, enter $EOD bJ):
Concludes AT mode
u
PRG>O
8-D-2
3) Batch Type-BT 3. Index Number
Enter the index number if required. For the
Enables you to edit the data in batch processing. commands without indexes and the commands
which can omit the index numbers, entry of index
Entry of data by batch type number is not necessary. Refer to the list below.
Enter comma (J between items.
Enter slash (/) between indexes.
When the index number is omitted, Item number
Enter only comma (,) or slash (I’) when not should be also omitted.
entering the parameter.
The date of the parameter is not changed.
(Commands without indexes)
To conclude BT mode in the middle of entry, enter
SYA, TIM, LAG, NBP, ABS, A-l-T, TR3, INF,
$EOD after the entry of comma (,) or slash (I). WSl, ws2, ws3
<Example l>
(Commands possible to omit the Index number)
Entering External Pager (PAG) in Batch type mode
SlA, COM, CPG, PAG, MUS, DPH, DIG, DIP,
DID, UCl, UC2, PFT
Enter:
; PRG>PAG BT (.+J )
a Displays:
4. Item Number
Enter when you want to specify an item number.
Possible to be omitted in all commands.
I PAGBT
Enter the appropriate numbers and letters:
l,Y,l,Y,Y(4
Concluds Batch type mode

a
I; PRGO
<Example 2>
Concluding entry in the middle of the entry of
operation (OPR) in the Batch type mode
Enter:
; PRG>OPR BT 1 (,+I )
a Displays:
I OPR ET 1
Enter the appropriate data and cocludes in the

middle:
Y, Y. 2, q ‘!EOD (.+-I )
a Concludes Batch type mode
8-D-3
2.00 Operation Mode
Input Format-General 1. Commands

In the operation mode (when ; OPE> 0 is displayed The following operation commands are available
on the screen), enter as follows: in Operation mode. Enter a command depending
1 2 on an operation.
;OPE>p[ (~1) (j-1)
Operation Command
([j)....i @ST])
ICarriage Return (CR)(J) J Test TST
System Maintenance Monitor SYM
In Service INS
Note: Be sure to enter one space between the
Out of Service ous
items.
The (+f)in the followings indicates pressing Remove REM
Error Log Display ERR
the RETURN key.
Traffic Display TFD
Print Out PRT
<Example>
Set Date and Time SDT
Displaying the first half of Traffic Information
System Programming Data LOD
(Index number 1)
and Attendant Console
Database Load
Enter:
System Programming Data SAV
; OPE>TFD 1 1 (4)
and Attendant Console
Database Save P
The following information appears:
a Change Level CHL
Show Level SHL
I I I I Restart RST
Trafficlnfomdion-Stafion(lf2)
--------A- -L -LI-L-
Feb.221990
2. Index Number
Start Time --9zooAM1o:ooAM 11:ooAM 12:OOAM 1zOOAhI 2mIM When the command is provided with indexes, enter
Incoming Calls - 498 637 590 120 803 760 the index number. For the command without
AnswerCalls- 360 503 476 88 711 662
Outgoing Calls - 405 602 555 103 763 731 indexes or the command which is able to omit the
Complekd Calls - 241 430 411 48 509 SW index number, entry of Index number is not
ccs --- 723 811 780 230 998 889 necessary.
Start me --3:wPM 4:ooPM 5:0oPh4 6:ooPM 7:cow 8.mPM
Incoming Calls - 632 721 611 598 420 311 (Commands without indexes)
AnswerCalls- 531 603 482 445 289 192 SDT, LOD, SAV, CHL, RST
OutgOiIlg Cdk -- &3J 654 6CH) 531 301 191
CornpletedCalls- 442 488 503 461 186 119
(Command which is able to omit the index number)
ccs _-_-__--_--- 800 830 762 750 680 620
PRT
3. Item 1 to item n
Enter the value depending on the item.
Do not enter the item number for the command
without items.
(Commands without items)

SYM, PRT, CHL, SHL, RST
8-D-4
Reference
For details about the following commands, refer to:
TST Section 15-E-3.00 “TST command (Test)
SYM Section 15-F-l .OO “SYM command (System

Maintenance Monitor)
ERR Section 15-D-l .02 “Error Log”
TFD Section 15-F-2.00 “TFD command (Traffic
Display)”
SAV Section 16-B-4.01 “Saving Procedure”

Section 17-B-2.01 “Saving Procedure”
LOD Section 16-B-4.02 “Loading Procedure”
Section 17-B-2.02 “Loading Procedure”
RST Section 8-B-2.02 “Restart”

I I I
8-D-5
E. Function Commands
In Auto type (AT) and Batch type (BT) modes of 2.00 m fl-x-n 1Item Number]
Programming mode, the following function com-
mands are used for ending the modes, copying
data and so on. In AT mode, this command enables you to read
For details about types of modes, refer to Section the desired item immediately.
8-D-l .OO “Programming Mode.” This function is effective for all the commands
provided with items.
<Example>
Reading Operation command Index 1, Item 17
(FDN for General Operator Call)
l In AT mode
If the following is already displayed:
After storing data, concludes AT mode.
Enter this command after “INPUTc<fl” is
displayed. ; INDEX=1
; 01 : Tenant Service jY
l In BT mode ; INPUT>> fl
Concludes BT mode in the middle of entry.

Be sure to enter this command after comma
or slash (/).
(,) a
Enter:
SJl7 (4 1
Displays:
a
; 17 : FDNfor General OperatorCall +
; INPUT>>fl
Every pressing of the RETURN key displays the

next item. After the last item is displayed, the first
item is disolaved bv oressina the RETURN kev.
3.00
Clears data (no data setting) in AT and BT modes. Enter:
This function is effective for the following item $CW+J)
u
numbers of the respective command.
To execute the clearing function, make sure to Displays:
enter $EOD after SCLR.
Command Item number ; 14 : StartTime of Test

OPR (Index 2) 13, 14, 17 ; INPUT>>/-j
TNN 04to19
L4G
NBP
SPD
03 to 18
01 to 87
2
u
Enter:
ABS 07 to 16
02 $EOD(+-b
TGl
TG2 10to25
COL
EXT
DNK
2
0506
04, 09, 14, 19,24, 29, 34,
a The value “09: OOA” is cleared from “13:
Start Time of Traffic Measurement”
concludes this mode:
and
39, 44, 49,54

PFK 02, 04, 06, 08, 10,
16, 18, 20, 22, 24,
30,32
12, 14,
26, 28, .I:PRG>cl 1
DSK 02, 04, 06, 08, 10, - - - -, 64
EQU 02, 07, 09, 11 l In BT mode
occ 02, 07, 09, 11
AR2 001 Enter:
AR3 01 to 32 ; PRG>OPR BT2 13 (& )
AR4 01 to 14
AR5 2 Displays:
1 to 8 u
DIP
DID 3 1 OPR BT2 13 1
INF 01 to 10
PFT
<Example>
1,2
u
Enter
Clenring “Operation” Index 2, Item 13 Start Time w-R (+J,
of Traffic Measurement. The value of item 13 is cleared.
- In AT mode
Enter as follows:
;PRG>OPRAT213(.,+)
8-E-2
4.00 f--i-J p--- p--~ pq
In AT and BT modes, copies the setting data.
This function is effective for the following index
numbers of the respective command. Enter:
a
Command Index number $CPY 01 02-02 (.+J )
CSl 01 to 32 CS No.1 is copied to No.2 and displays

cs2 p1 to 32 0 like the following:
TRl 1 to8
or Entry number 200 to 999 ; Classof ServiceNo. 01
TR2 01 to 64 ; 01:TollRestrictionLevel(Day) + 08
AR1 200 to 999 ; INPUT>>1
AR2 01 to 32
AR3 01 to 32
AR4 01 to 64 + In BT (Batch type) mode
l See Note on the next page. Enter:

; PRG>CSl BT 01 (4 )
input Format
$CPY xxx xxxxxx Displays:
a
2xX
/
I 6.31 BTOI
L i
cl> Enter the index number of copy source
data.
<2> c3> Enter the fisrt and last index numbers. a
Enter:
Note: Enter the index numbers in ascending order.
If you want to copy the s.ource data to one $CPY 01 02-02 ( tr )
destination, enter the same index numbers The data of “Class of Service No.1 * is copied to
into c2> and <3>. that of No.2
Note: In TRl command, copying by the Index

In AT mode, enter $CPY when the first item is number or the entry number is available.
displayed. Copying is unavailable after the entry of In this case, the input format is as follows:
another item.
$CPY 1 or 2 XXX XXX-XXX
<Example>
Enter 1 to copy by the entry number.
Copying the data of “Class of Service No.1” to Enter 2 to copy by the index number.
“Class of Service No.2.”
<Example>
l In AT mode Copying data of entry number 200 to entry
numbers 201 through 900, enter as follows:
Enter:
$CPY 1 200 201-900
; PRG>CSl AT 01 (.+I )
by Entry number
a
I
Displays:
Copying data of Index numbers 1 to Index
number 2 through 8, enter as follows:
$CPY 2 1 2-8
I by Index number
8-E-3
I
In AT and BT modes, used for the entry numbers Enter:
200 through 999 in TR 2 and AR2 commands, to $SET NXX N (+-f )
set “Y” or “N” to all the entry numbers that you All the entry numbers are set to “N”
designated. u and displays:
Input Format
; OfficeCodeTable No. 01
$SET XXX Y/N ; 001 :Areacode +N
TX- ; INPUT>>0
Cl> <2>
<I> Enter the Entry number that you want to set. l In BT (Batch type) mode
When you want to designate multiple
numbers, use N, P, X. Enter:
; PRG>AR2 BT 02 ( .&
N: designates 2 through 9
P: 0 and 1 Displays:
X: 0 through 9. u
<Example> AR2 BT02

When specifying 200 through 209, enter:
u
20x
When specifying 200 through 999, enter:
NXX
When specifying 200,300, 400, -.., 800, 900, Enter:
enter: $SET NXX N (+f )
NO0 All the entry numbers are set to “N.”
c2> Set 7” or “N”.
In AT mode, enter the number while the first item is

displayed.
$SET is ineffective after entering another item.
<Example>
Setting all the entry numbers in the Index number
1 of AR2 to “N.”
- In AT mode
Enter:
8-E-4
Used in AT mode, and sets the Telephone Type
of the extension and DSS consoles automatically.
<Example>
When the telephone type of DN 103 is set to “2”
(PITS) and actually connected telephone type is
“1” (SLT).
Enter:
; PRG>EXT AT DN 103 (4 )
Displays:
a
. 01 : Telephone Type --+ 2

; INPUT>> q
u
Enter:
$CNF
Telephone Type changes to “1”
u automatically and displays:
; 01 : Telephone Type + 1
; INPUT>> q
F. Maintenance Command
1.00 Change Level (CHL) 2.00 Show Level (SHL)
Description Description
Allows you to change the password level. Allows you to confirm the current password level.
(Password level : Four or higher) (Password level : Four or higher)
Input Format input Format
; OPE> m vl ; OPE> wl v]
After pressing the RETURN key and “= 0”

appears, enter the password. However, the
password characters are not displayed when they
are entered.
8-F-l
3.00 In Service (INS)
Description cards and shelves should be “In Service” already. ’
(Password level : Two or higher)
Allows you to change the status of shelves,
For further information about In Service, refer to
cards, ports and stations from “Out of Service” to
Section 15-C-l .Ol “INS (In Service) command.”
“In Service.”
Input Format
mode.
For changing lower devices such as stations and ; OPE> m (I,,p]
ports etc. to “In Service,” upper devices such as
Device Item Number Explanation
Shelf 1 to3 Physical number

1: Basic Shelf
2: Expansion Shelf 1
3: Expansion Shelf 2
Card 101 to315 Physical number

101 to 112: Service Cards in the Basic Shelf
201 to 215: Service Cards in the Expansion Shelf 1
301 to 315: Service Cards in the Expansion Shelf 2
Port 1011 to 3158 Physical number

1011 to 1128: Port number assigned to Service Cards in
the Basic Shelf
the Expansion Shelf 1
the Expansion Shelf 2
Station DNXXXX Extension directory number (XXXX: three or four digit number)
or Physical number
1011 to 3158
Attendant Console Al or A2 Attendant Console number

1011 to 3158 Port physical number
DTMF Receiver Rxxxy xxx:card physical number (101 to 315)

y:l or 2
Conference Trunk CFBxx(Ol to 08) Basic conference trunk number

CFOyy(Ol to 84) Optional conference trunk number
8-F-2
4.00 Out of Service (OUS)
Description For further information about Out of Service, refer

to Section 15-C-l .02 “OUS (Out of Service)
Allows you to change the status of cards, ports
command.”
and stations from “In Service” to “Out of Service.”
Input Format
mode.
When setting the shelves or cards to “Out of ;OPE> jOUSlMp1
Service,” then lower devices, such as stations,
ports etc. become “Out of Service” automatically. Item numbers are same as those listed in 3.00 “In
(Password level : Two or higher) Service (INS)” on the previous page.
5.00 Remove (REM)

Description Before you detach the installed devices, remove
the system programming data of associated
Enables you to delete the stored system
device using this command.
programming data by specifying stations, Attendant
Consoles and so on.
Input Format
mode. ;OPE> ~~~1
Specified terminal must be in Out of Service.
(Password leveLone)
Device Item Number Explanation
Port 1011 to 3158 Physical number
Station DN XXXX Extension directory number (XXXX: three or four

or digit number)
1011 to 3158 Physical number
Attendant console Al or A2 Attendant Console number

or
1011 to 3158 Physical number
8-F-3
6.00 Print Out (PRT) 7.00 Set Date and Time (SDT)
You can print out the system programming data, Allows you to set the date and time
system status, error log, and traffic information
respectively by entering one of the print out
commands described in the following Input Format.
Input Format
1. Printing out the system programming data All items from 1 through 7 must be entered.
associated with all commands of programming
mode. tern Assigning Item Input Value
;OPE>IPRTl(J ) , 1 Year XX: last two digits of the yea
2. Printing out the system programming data by 2 Month 01 to 12: Jan. through Dec.
specifying a command name.
3 Day 01 to 31
mmand Name pl
4 Week 1 : Sunday
2 : Monday
3 : Tuesday
;OPE>mmI(SLAII 4: Wednesday
5: Thursday
6: Friday
3. Printing out the data by specifying the index 7: Saturday
number.
5 Hour 01 to 12
6 Minute 00 to 59
7 AM/PM 1: a.m.
(Example) 2: p.m.
For only reading the preset data, enter ;

OPE>[m I]
4. Stopping the print out.
8-F-4
G. Help Function
1 .OO Programming Mode 2.00 Operation Mode
Used to display brief instructions and a list of Used to display brief instructions and a list of
commands available in the Programming Mode. commands avaialable in the Operation Mode.
Input Format _ input Format
; PRG> m ,mi ; OPE>pl p/
Display
Display
;OPGHLF’cC%
; PRG>HLf’cCR> :c< Command + (Index) + (hem No.1) + (Item Nd.2) + - + (ham No.n) x
: cc Command + Type + (hdex) + (hem No.) >a ;Cdmmand are..
; Command are.. ; TST . ..Tast SYM . ..System ktzintenance Monitor
: SYA . ..System Assignment SIA ...Siot Assignment : INS .-in Service OLls . ..oul of Sewice
: DNA ...DN Assignrnant OPR .,Opaabn ; REM .-Remove ERR . ..Dispiay Error Log
: TNN ...Tenant TIM .-System Fmer ; TFD .-Traffi Diiphv PRT . ..Print Out
: CSl ...class of Swica (l/2) cs2 . ..clas of Sewice (2Q) ; SDT .-Set Date and Time LOD . ..Lnitial Prcgram Load
: LAG -Local Access Group NBP .-Numb&g Plan : SAV ...Propm Data Save CHL . ..Cbnge Level
; CDM...bmmuniraiion interface SPD .-Speed Dialing-System : SHL ..ShowLaval RST . ..Restart
: A& .-Absent Messaga TGl .-Trunk Grwp (IQ) :OPG
: TG2 .-Trunk Group (2Q) IPG ..XkWaging Group
; CPG ..Cali Pip Grciup COL . ..CO Line
: PAG . ..Extarnal Paging MUS . ..Music Source
; AGC . ..AGC EXT .~Staation
: DSS . ..DSS Console DNK . ..SWion ON-Key Assignment
; PFK . ..StatibJSS PF-key Assignment DSK . ..StatiortDSS DSS-Key Assignmel
; DPH .~Dwrphana ATT . ..Anandant Console
: AOP Jttandanr Oua Priwiry EOU &ual Access
, : occ...occ&c%ss TRl .-TRS ArealOfkce Coda Table
: TR2 .-TRS Off- code Tables TR3 .-TRS 7110 Digit Table
: AR1 . ..ARS Leading Digit Table AR2 ..ARS Ofka Code Tables
; AR3 .mARS Route Pian Tables AR4 . ..ARS Route List Table
: ARS . ..ARS Modifti Digit Table DIS .-DISA
DIG .-D&4 code DIP . ..DlSA Passwrd
DID ...DID UC1 .JJul (b-2)
UC2 .JcD (2q INF . ..lnsal&~ux hformation
PFT ...Power Failure Transfer CHG . ..Change Password
Type are...
SH ...Show Type AT..Auu, Advance Set Type BT...Barh Set Type
PRG>
(Note)
The following commands are available in the
Programming Mode, however, not displayed in
the HELP screen above.
CPC SPB
ABC ACV
WSl ACL
ws2 CAI
ws3 NAG
VMD PRD
MBN WSD
8-G-l
(30393)
,
Section 9
System Programming
(Section 9)
System Programming
Contents
Page
A Introduction . . . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . . 9-A-l
B Construction of Programming Mode ............................................ 9-B-l
C Configuration Screen ................................................................... 9-C-l
1 .OO System Assignment. ........................................................ 9-C-l

2.00 Slot Assignment.. ............................................................. 9-C-3
3.00 DN Assignment ................................................................ 9-C-6
D System Screen ............................................................................ 9-D-l
1 .OO Operation ......................................................................... 9-D-l

1.01 Operation (l/3) ....................................................... 9-D-l
1.02 Operation (2/3) ....................................................... 9-D-7
1.03 Operation (313) ....................................................... 9-D-l 1
2.00 Tenant ............................................................................. 9-D-l 4
3.00 System Timer .................................................................. 9-D-l 8
4.00 Class of Service ............................................................... 9-D-22
4.01 Class of Service (l/2) ............................................. 9-D-22
4.02 Class of Service (2/2) ............................................. 9-D-27
5.00 Local Access Group ........................................................ 9-D-31
6.00 Numbering Plan ............................................................... 9-D-33
6.01 Numbering Plan (l/9) ............................................. 9-D-33
6.02 Numbering Plan (2/9) ............................................. 9-D-36
6.03 Numbering Plan (319) ............................................. 9-D-40
6.04 Numbefing,Plan (4/9) ............................................. 9-D-44
6.05 Numbering PIan (5/9) ............................................. 9-D-48
6.06 Numbering Plan (6/9) ............................................. 9-D-52
6.07 Numbering Plan (7/9) ............................................. 9-D-56
6.08 Numbering Plan (8/9) ............................................. 9-D-59
6.09 Numbering Plan (9/9) ............................................. 9-D-63
7.00 Communication Interface.. ............................................... 9-D-65
8.00 Speed Dialing-System ..................................................... 9-D-68
9.00 Absent Message .............................................................. 9-D-70
E Group Screen .............................................................................. 9-E-l
1 .OO Trunk Group .................................................................... 9-E-l

1 .Ol Trunk Group (l/2) ................................................... 9-E-l
1.02 Trunk Group (2/2) ................................................... 9-E-9
2.00 ICM/Paging Group ........................................................... 9-E-l 2
3.00 Call Pickup Group ............................................................ 9-E-l 4
9-l
Page
F Trunk Screen . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. .. .. . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . 9-F-l
1.00 CO Line ..........................................................................

. 9-F-l
2.00 Pager and Music Source ................................................. 9-F-5
3.00 AGC ............................................................................... 9-F-8
I
G Extension Screen . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . . . . .. . . .. 9-G-l
1 .OO Station ............................................................................. 9-G-l

1.01 Station (l/3) ............................................................ 9-G-l
1.02 Station (2/3) ............................................................ 9-G-7
1.03 Station (313) ............................................................ 9-G-l 2
2.00 DSS Console ................................................................... 9-G-l 5
2.01 DSS Console (l/3) ................................................. 9-G-l 5
2.02 DSS Console (2/3) ................................................. 9-G-l 8
2.03 DSS Console (3/3) ....... . ......................................... 9-G-21
3.00 Doorphone ....................................................................... 9-G-24
4.00 Attendant Console ........................................................... 9-G-27
4.01 Attendant Console (l/2) ......................................... 9-G-??
4.02 Attendant Console (2/2) ......................................... 9-G-30
H Special Carrier Access Screen . . . . .. . . .. .. .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . .. .. 9-H-l
1 .OO Equal Access ................................................................... 9-H-l

2.00 OCC Access .................................................................... 9-H-5
I Toll Restriction Screen . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. .. . .. . . . .. . . . .. .. .. .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . ..-............ 9-l-l
LOO Area/Office Code Tables ................................................. 9-l-l

2.00 Office Code Tables .......................................................... 9-l-4
3.00 7/l 0 Digit Toll Restriction Table.. ..................................... 9-l-6
J Automatic Route Selection Screen . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. .. . . . .. .. . . .. . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . .. 9-J-l
1 .OO Leading Digit Table.. ........................................................ 9-J-l

2.00 Office Code Tables .......................................................... 9-J-3
3.00 Route Plan Tables ........................................................... 9-J-6
4.00 Route Lists Table ............................................................ 9-J-9
5.00 Modified Digit Table ......................................................... 9-J-l 3
9-2
Page
K Special Attended Screen . . . . .. . . .. . . .._..__..... . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . ..._.._............. 9-K-i
1.00 DISA ............................................................................... 9-K-l

2.00 DID ............................................................................... 9-K-5
3.00 UCD ............................................................................... 9-K-7
3.01 UCD (l/2) ............................................................... 9-K-7
3.02 UCD (2/2) ............................................................... 9-K-9
L Miscellaneous Screen . .. . . .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . . . . .. . . .. . .. . . . .._....................... 9-L-l
1 .OO Installation Information .................................................... 9-L-l

2.00 Power Failure Transfer Assignment ................................ 9-L-3
M Error Message Tables . .. . . .. . . . .. . .. . . . .. .. .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . .. .. . . .. 9-M-l
1 .OO Error Messages Related to the Assigning Items

in the Same Screen . . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . . . .. . . .. . .. . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . .. . . .. 9-M-l
2.00 Error Messages Related to the Assigning Items
in the Other Screens . .. . . .. . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . ...-...................... 9-M-2
3.00 Other Error Messages . .. . . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . .. . .. . . . 9-M-7
9-3
A. Introduction
This section provides system programming using
VT compatible terminals. Before starting system
programming, Section 7 ‘Preparation for
Programming and Mantenance (VT220 and
Compatibles)” must be read. This section
provides the basic operations required for system
programming.
Programming consists of 10 submenu screens
and each submenu consists of various setting
screens.
The setting screens are used to assign or change

various parameters concerning the system
administration such as Tenant, Class of Service,
Numbering Plan and so on.
The setting screens should be programmed in

order of “First Set,” “Second Set” and “Third Set”
which is illustrated in “Construction of
Programming Mode” on the following page. If
you program a screen in the second set before
setting the first-set screens, an error message
will appear. .For example, if you program
“Extension” before programming “Configuration-
DN Assignment,” an error message is displayed.
In this section, each setting screen is explained

using a screen and an explanation table.
9-A-l
B. Construction of Programming Mode
Password Level
L
11 Programming 1 System Assignment 1
t - 2 Slot Assignment 1
First Set - 3 DN Assianment 1
J.
----_---,
t
1 Operation 2
I
- 2 Tenant 2
I - 3 System Timer 2
I - 4 Class of Service 2
I - 5 Lo&l Access Group 2
1 - 6 Numbering Plan 2
Second Set - 7 Communication interface 2
I - 8 Speed Dialing-System 3
I - 9 Absent Message 3
I
I 03 Group 1 1 Trunk Group 2
2 ICM/Paging Group 2
I
L 3 Call Pickup Group 2
-------
t
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Third Set
I 07 Toll Restriction 1 Area/Office Code Tables 2
I 2 Office Code Tables 2 -
I 3 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction Table 2
I
I 08 ARS 1 Leading Digit Table 2
I 2 Office Code Tables 2
I 3 Route Plan Tables 2
I - 4 Route Lists Table 2
I - 5 Modified Digit Table 2
I
I 4 09 Special Attended f 1 DISA 2
I - 2 DID 2
I - 3 UCD 2
I
I 1 Installation Information 2
I
2 Power Failure Transfer Assignment 2
------------------------a--------
.l
9-B-l
C. Configuration Screen
1 .OO System Assignment
Ionf igurat ion - System Assignment I OFL I PRG i SCR I SEL

--------------------------------- ---------------------+---*------)------+----.
Version 1.0
+----------------------------------------------------------------+
I Expansion Shelf ---------i _--e-c-- 1 1 Shelf
1 TSYAdditional CONF----------------I Yes I
+-----------------------------------------------------------------+
Summary
This screen is used to configure the system for: To expand the conference trunks, T-SW
Conference Expansion Card (KX-T336104) must
l Expansion shelf (1, or both 1 and 2) be installed.
l T-SW Conference Expansion Card (Password level : One)
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference
Expansion Shelf Automatic set No : expansion shelf not installed 1-E-2.00

1 Shelf : expansion shelf 1 available
2 Shelves : both expansion shelves 1 and 2
available
TSW Additional CONF Automatic set Yes : conference expansion card installed 4-G-5.00
No : conference expansion card not installed 4-G-6.00
5-E-l .OO
6-H-1.00
6-H-2.00
9-c-1
Description of Assigning Items
Expansion Shelf Enables the expansion shelf 1 when set to “1 Shelf” and both
expansion shelves 1 and 2 when set to “2 Shelves.”
TSW Additional CONF Enables the expansion of conference trunks when set to “Yes.”
Conditions
None
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.
COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7-i “Operation of Function Keys.”
9-c-2
2.00 Slot Assignment
Configuration - Slot Assignnent I OFL I PRG I SCR I SEL

-----1-1---MB-------------------+--+---+---3--w
~+ --- w----_ me+ --m----------e+ ---------.---w+
I Basic I FSOl I PK I Expansion I FSOl I PLC IExpansion I FSOl I LCOT I
I Shelf I FSOZ I P& I Shelf 1 I FM2 I PLC I Shelf 2 I FSOZ I LCOT I
- 1 Fso3 I PLC I I Fso3 I PLC I I Fso3 I LCOT I
I I FSo4 I PLC I I FSO4 I PLC I I FSO4 I LCOT I
I I ITS05 I PLC I I Fso5 I PLC I I Fso5 I LCOT I
I FS06 I PLC I I FS06 I PLC I IFS06 ILCoTI
i I FSO? I PLC I I FSo7 I PLC I I Fso7 I LCOTI
I FSO8 I Pu: I I FSOS I PLC I IFS08 ILCOTI
f I Fso9 I PLC I I FSO9 I Pu: I I Fso9 I LCOT I
I Es10 1 PLC I I FSlO I PLC I I FSlO I LCOTI
I I FSll I PLC I I FSll I PLC I I FSll I LCOT I
I Fs12 I PLC I I FS12 ILmI I FS12 I LCOT I
I I BSOl I CPU I IFS13 ILCUTI I FS13 I ATLC 1
I BS02 I OHCA I I FS14 I LCOT I I FS14 I DPH I
I Bso3 I TSU I I FS15 I LCOT I I FS15 I RHT i
FS: Free Slot, BS: Basic Slot
Summary
Assigns the type of service cards, inserted in the (Password level : One)
free slots in the basic and expansion shelves.
::#:<:Assigning Items ‘Default Selection ef Value Reference
3asic Shelf FS (01 to 12) Automatic Set Blank : Not assigned 1-A-5.00
PLC : Proprietary Integrated Telephone 1-E-l .OO
System tine Circuit card to 2.00
HLC : Hybrid Line Circuit card 1-E-7.00
SLC : Single Line Telephone Circuit card to 21.oo
SLC : SLC card with Message Waiting
LCOT : Loop Start Central Office Trunk card
LCOT : R-LCOT card
GCOT : Ground Start Central Office Trunk card
DID : Direct Inward Dialing card
AGC : Automatic Gain Control card
DISA : Direct Inward System Access card
OPX : Off Premise Extension card
ATLC : Attendant Console Line Circuit card
DPH : Door Phone Circuit card
RMT : Remote Circuit card
Continued
9-c-3
(30393)
Continuec
Assigning Items Selection of Value IReference
Basic Shelf BS (02) Automatic set Blank : Not assigned 1-A-5.OG

OHCA : T-SW Off-Hook Call Announcement 1-E-1.0O
card to 2.00
1-E-7.00
Expansion Shelf 1 FS (01 to 15) Automatic set Same as Basic Shelf FS to 21 .oo
Expansion Shelf 2 FS (01 to 15) Automatic set Same as Basic Shelf FS

Basic Shelf FS (01 to 12) Defines the type of card installed in the free slots (01 to 12) of the
basic shelf.
Basic Shelf BS (02) Used to utilize the T-SW OHCA card or not
Expansion Shelf 1 FS (01 to 15) Defines the type of card installed in the free slots (01 to 15) of the
expansion shelf 1.
Expansion Shelf 2 FS (01 to 15) Defines the type of card installed in the free slots (01 to 15) of the
expansion shelf 2.
Conditions
. The cursor does not move to BSOl and BS03.
In BS02, assignable value is OHCA or Blank.
If no CO trunk card (LCOT, GCOT, DID) is assigned, Trunk-CO Line” screen

cannot be selected. .,
If no Extension card (PLC, SLC, HLC, OPX) is assigned, ‘Extension-Station” screen
cannot be selected.
If AGC card is not assigned, “Trunk-AGC’ screen cannot be selected.
If DPH card is not assigned, ‘Extension-Doorphone” screen cannot be selected.
If ATLC card is not assigned, “Extension-Attendant Console” screen cannot be

selected.
If DISA card is not assigned, “Spa&al Attended-DISA” screen cannot be selected.
If DID card is not assigned, Special Attended-DID” screen cannot be selected.
When assigning a card, the oard status is Out of Service (OUS). When utilizing the
card, the card status should be set to In Service (INS).
For In Service (INS) and Out of Service (OUS), refer to Section 7-J-4.00 ‘INS (In
Service)” and Section 7-J-5.00 “OUS (Out of Service).”
For confirming whether the card status is INS or OUS, refer to Section 14-G-3.02
“Card Status screen.”
When deleting (selecting blank) or changing the preassigned card type, the condi-
tions should be the followings:
l The card status is OUS or Fault.
All of the port data has been deleted.
l
9-c-4
However, if there exist port data, it is possible to change the 6ards as follows:
PLC card * l HLC card
SLC card tjl HLC card
Deleting the ATLC card will be an error if there is one of the following assignments:
l “Group-Trunk Group”,
Incoming Mode (Day) is set to “ATT.”
Intercept Routing (Day) is set to “ATT.”
l “Extension-Doorphone”,
Doorphone Call Assignment is set to ‘ATT.”
Deleting the DISA card will be an error if there is one of the following assignments:
l “Group-Trunk Group”,
Incoming Mode (Day) is set to “DISA.”
Incoming Mode (Night) is set to “DISA.”
Deleting the HLC, SLC, LCOT or GCOT card will be an error if there is the
following assignment to the slot to be deleted:
l Miscellaneous-Power Failure Transfer Assignment.
. See Section 1 -A-5.00 “Service Cards Description” for installing the cards in
combination.
<Card type display>

l “SLC” is displayed:
When SLC card (KX-T96174) or SLC card with Message Waiting (KX-T96175) is
inserted.
l ‘LCOT” is displayed:
When LCOT card (KX-T96180) or R-LCOT card (KX-T96183) is inserted.
Function
For operation, refer to Section 7-l “Operation of Function Keys.”
f
9-c-5
(30393)
.
3.00 DN Assignment
Conf isuration - DH Assignment I OFL I PRG I SCR I DIR

‘~~~--““-----~~-----~~~~~~-~~----~-+--~-+ ---3--m+--
+-----------------~-~~ ------------------------------*
I Slbt I SLC I PLC I IiLC I OPX I - I - I -
I - I I- - I
I No. I 101 I 102 I 103 I 104 I - I - i -
I - I I - - I
I ----~----~---~----C-13----1*- --+---+
----+--SW+--- I
1 Port 1 DH 1 DN I DN I DN I DH I DN I DN I DN I DN I DN I
I --------*----*---1+----3-----*- --3-s--+--Be-* -B-S---
l 1 I 2101 I 3101 I 4101 I 501 I - I - I - l - I - I - 1
~1 2 i 2102 1 3102 1 4102 I 502 I - 1- I - I - I - 1- 1
I 3 I. 2103 I 3103 I 4103 I 503 I - I - I - I - I - I- I
I 4 I 2104 I 3104 I 4104 I 504 I - I - I - I - I - I- I
I 5 I2105 I3105 I4105 I - I - I - I - I - I - I- I
I 6 12106 I3106 I4106 I - I - I - I - I - .I - I- I
) ; ; 2107 I 3107 I 4107 I - I - I - I - I- I- I
1 3108 I 4108 I - I - I - I - 1: I- I- I
Summary
Assigns a ON (directory number) to each exten-
sion port.
Four DN Assignment screens are provided.
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Fleference
DN 100 to 387 in Three or four numeric digits : directory number 3-B-2.00

physical number
order
Description of Assigning Item

DN Assigns a default directory number to every port of installed extension cards.
Conditions
If no Extension card (PLC, SLC, HLC, OPX) is assigned, DN assignment screen will not be
displayed.
Q-C-6
Function
9-c-7
D. System Screen
1 .OO Operation
1 .Ol Operation (l/3)
System - Operation I OFL I PRG I SCR I SEL
-----------------------------------------------------+-----+-----+-----+---~
Operation (l/3)
+------------------------------- ------------------------------+
I Tenant Service ----- - -----__-__- 1 yes
I Automatic Route Selection -------I Yes i
I Numbering Plan ____---_______-__ -I Flex
I Privacy on DN Key ----------------I yes I
I Restriction Level - Operator ----I 06
I Restriction Level - International -I 05 I
I Home Dialing Plan --------------I Type-A
I DSS Operation Mode -----------I Vitb Transfer I
I BUSYTone _-- ______-_-________ 1 Tone-l I
I Held Call Reminder -----------I yes I
I Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr/Brg-in -----I Yes
I External Paging 1 , 2 -----------I Yes , Yes I
I External Husic Source 1 , 2 -----I Yes , Yes
I Idle Line Preference -----------I DN I
I FDN for General Operator Call ---I 1234 , 5678 I
+-------------------""- --,,-,--------------------------+
Summary
Assigns elemental data common to the whole Operation screen. This is the first of three
system, such as Tenant Service, Automatic screens.
Route Selection, etc., through the first System- (Password level : Two or higher)
Assigning Items Default Selectionof Value G Reference
Tenant Service No No : Tenant Service is unavailable 3-B-4.00

Yes : Tenant Service enabled
3-C-2.00
Automatic Route Selection No Yes : Automatic Route Selection enabled 4-c-3.01
No : Automatic Route Selection is unavailable 5-A-, o,
6-D-i.01 _
Numbering Plan Fixed 1 Flex : feature numbers can be changed 3-B-1.00

Fixed 1 : feature numbers are set to Default 1
Fixed 2 : feature numbers are set to Default 2
4-G-1.00
Privacy on DN Key Yes No : barge in allowed (privacy disabled)
4-G-2.00
Yes : barge in disallowed (privacy enabled)
4-G-3.00
Restriction Level-Operator 01 01 to 16 : the restriction level for a telephone 3-c-1.05
company operator call
Continued
9-D-l
Continued
Assigning l!errs Default Selection of Value Referent e
qestriction Level-International 01 01 to 16 : the restriction level for an international 3-C-1.05

call
iome Dialing Plan Type-A Type-A : 3-c-1.02

long distance call 1 +NPA+NXX+XXXX 3-c-1.04
local call NXX+XXXX 3-C-l .06
Type-B : 3-c-1.07
long distance-call NPA+NXX+XXXX 3-C-2.00
local call NNX+XXXX
Type-C :
long distance call 1+NPA+NXX+XXXX
l+ NNX+XXXX
local call NNXtXXXX
..
1 NPA:Area code, NXX, NNX: Office code
XXXX: Subscriber number
! N : 2 to 9, P : O,l, A=0 to 9, X : 0 to 9 1
ISS Operation Mode With Transfer With Transfer : hold and transfer 4-I-12.01
Without Transfer : disconnect and call
3usy Tone Tone-2 Tone-l : busy tone 1 3-B-14.0(I

Tone-2 : busy tone 2
ield Call Reminder Yes Yes : Held Call Reminder is enabled. 3-E-2.00
No : Held Call Reminder is not enabled.
seep Tone for Bsy-ovr / Brg-in Yes Yes : overriding with beep tone .. 3-B-l 5.0(1
No : overriding without beep tone 4-c-7.00
5-A-5.00
6-D-4.00
External Paging 1, 2 Yes, Yes Yes : using external pager 1,2 2-D-l .OO
No : not using external pager 1,2 3-B-8.02
3-D-2.04
c ,_
L.xj.. 4-D-4.00
4-H-l .03
4-H-l .04
4-H-2.00
5-B-2.00
5-F-l .03
5-F-i .04
5-F-2.00
6-l-l .03
6-l-l .04
6-I-2.00
Continued
9-D-2
Continued
External Music Source 1, 2 Yes, Yes Yes : using external music source 1, 2 2-D-2.00
No : not using external music source 1, 2 3-E-1.00
4-H-2.00
4-l-4.00
5-F-2.00
6-I-2.00
Idle Line Preference DN DN : Off-hook selects an idle line by DN 4-c-1.02

co : Off-hook selects an idle line by CO 12-C-4.0(
FDN for General Operator Call blank Three or four numeric digits : floating directory 3-S-3.00
number for general operator call 1, 2 3-D-2.02
3-D-2.03
3-D-2.05
3-D-2.06
4-F-2.00
5-D-2.00
9-D-3
Tenant Service Enablei or disables the Tenant Service feature.
Automatic Route Selection Enables or disables the ARS j;iuromatic Route Selection) feature.
Numbering Plan Selects the type of numbering plan; The user can assign the desired
feature numbers or use the default setting 1 or 2.
Privacy on DN Key Determines whether or not a PITS telephone user is allowed to barge in
on an existing conversation on a PDN, SDN or SC0 button.
Restriction Level-Operator Assigns the restriction level for calls to the telephone company operator
from an extension.
Restriction Level- Assign the restriction level for international calls from an extension.
International
Home Dialing Plan Selects the home dialing plan. This setting applies to ARS, EQA and
OCC calls.
DSS Operation Mode When “With Transfer” is selected, allows the DSS console operator to
transfer the CO call to an extension user by simply pressing the associ-
ated DN*DSS button on the DSS console.
When “Without Transfer” is selected the CO call is disconnected when
the DN*DSS button is pressed.
Busy Tone Selects busy tone 1 or 2. Busy tone 2 has a unique pattern allowing
users with automatic release SLT’s an extended amount of time to enter
codes when encountering a busy party. ..
Held Call Reminder When assigned to Yes, the system reminds the user that there is a call on
hold. When disabled there is no reminder tone given to the user. In either
case the call will be disconnected after 30 minutes if it is not retreived.
Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr/ If “Yes” is selected, a beep tone will be heard when executing Busy
Brg-in Override or Barge-in. If “No” is selected, there will not be any tone
heard when Busy O&ride or Barge-in i&&e&ted.
External Paging I,2 Assigns external pagers 1 and 2.
External Music Source 1, 2 Assigns external music sources 1 and 2 .
Idle Line Preference This assignment applies to a PITS telephone when “Idle Line Preference-
Calling” is assigned on it. If ‘DN” is selected, an idle DN button is auto-
matically seized by simply going off-hook, and an idle CO button is seized
automatically if “CO” is selected.
FDN for General Assigns the FDN (Floating Directory Number) for General Operator Call.
Operator Call This is used for the following attendant-seeking calls: DID, DISA, Call
Forwarding and Overflowed UCD calls.
There are two entries to allow for two tenants.
9-D-4
Conditions
Tenant Service If ‘NG’ IS selected, some setting screens do not appear. Also some as-
signing items display “-,” which indicates programming is impossible.
Semng screens which do not appear are:

‘System-Tenant”
‘Group-ICM/Paging Group”
Assigning items which indicate Y-n and cannot be programmed are:

“Group-Trunk Group”, Tenant
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, Tenant
“Trunk-AGC”, Tenant
‘Extension-Doorphone”, Tenant
“Special Attended-DISK, Tenant
Automatic Route Selection if set to ‘No,” it is impossible to program “Special Attended-DISA”, ARS
Override (“--” is displayed).
Numbering Plan If set to “Flex, ” “System-Numbering Plan” is changeable.
Home Dialing Plan Dialing Plan must be selected depending on the type of the area where
this system is installed.
Held Call Reminder If set to ” No,” Held Call Reminder does not function. However, program-
ming the following items is possible:
‘System-System Timer”, Held Call Reminder/Held Call Reminder
(Arr)
‘Extension-Attendant Console”, Held Call Reminder
..
External Paging 1,2 If set to “No,” Paging through External Pagers does not function.
However, it is possible to program the items below:
‘System-Class of Service”, External Paging l/2
“System-Numbering Plan”, External Paging/External Paging Answer
If either or both of the External Paging l/2 are assigned to “No”, the
-following item canr;lot.be programmed (5Lappears on the item):
‘Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, External Pager-Tone/BGM
External Music Source 1,2 If either or both of the External Music Source l/2 are assigned to “No,” the
following item cannot be programmed (“-” appears on the item):
Trunk-Pager & Music Source”, Music Source-For Use
If “No” is selected for all the four items of External Music Source l/2, Ex-
ternal Paging l/2, the following screen does not appear:
“Trunk-Pager & Music Source”
When pressing the NEXT key, this screen changes as follows:
Operation + Operation Operation

W3) W3) - (313)
Pressing the PREV key changes the screen in reverse order.
9-D-5
Function
..Y
9-D-6
1.02 Operation (213)
System - Operation 1 CC I PRG I SCR I SEL

---------------------------r-----------------------~-----~-----+-----+----
Operation W31
i YY~” Administration Device -----I VT220

- ‘-‘. y-..------------ - ----- 1 yes
I Page Length (4-99) ----------I 60
I Skip Perf (O-95) ------I 0
1 Dutsoins Duration Log --------I All Call
I Incomins Duration Log -------I Yes
I Attendant Duration -------------I Separate I
I Special Carrier Naae --------I Default
I Print Secret Dial --- -------- -1 yes
I Error Log/Prograaning/Traffic --I Yes, Yes, Yes
1 Start Time of Traffic Measureaent -I 12:00 AlI
I Start Time of Test -------------I p:()o m
I Remote Directory Number --------I 1234
I Remote Alarm ---- ---- - --------- 1 yes I
I Destination Address ----------- I 12345678901234567890123456 I
+----------------------‘------------------------+
Summary
Assigns elemental data common to the whole parameters for SMDR, etc., through the second
system, such as System Administration Device, System-Operation screen.
SMDR (Station Message Detail Recording), (Password level : Two or higher)
Selection of Value Reference

I
Vr220 : VT1 OONT220 Terminal

Dumb : Dumb Terminal
ATT 7 : Attendant Console 1
ATT 2 : Attendant Console 2
SMDR NO No : not using SMDR (Station Message

Detail Recording )
Yes : using SMDR
Page Length (4 to 99) blank 4 to 99 : page length (number of lines)

I
Continued
9-D-7
SMDR ( cont.) 3-F-l .OO

Skip Pet-f (0 to 95) blank 0 to 95: how many lines to skip
l Note : in case of printing out system data :
(page length)- (skip perforation)2_ 23
in case of printing out call processing
information :
(page length)- (skip perforation)2 6
in case of printing out error log
(page length)- (skip perforation)2 4
Outgoing Duration Log blank No : outgoing calls not printed 3-F-l .OO
All Call : print all outgoing calls
Toll Only : print outgoing toll calls only
Incoming Duration Log blank No : incoming calls not printed 3-F-l .OO
Yes : print all incoming calls
Attendant Duration blank Separate : charge call duration to Attendant 3-F-i .OO
Console
Summary : charge call duration to destination
Special Carrier Name blank Default : print default name; OC l- 4, 3-F-l .OO
EQl- 4 e’
User Name: print user’s name
Dial No. : print dialed number
Print Secret Dial blank No : not printed 3-F-l .OO
Yes : print the secret dial numbers 4-I-5.00
6-J-3.00
Error Log /Programming/ blank No : do not print out these items 3-F-l .OO
Traffic Yes : print each item ., 7-D
14-D-1.02
14-G
15-D-l .02
Start Time of Traffic blank . 1 to12 : hour 14G-4.OC
Measurement 00 to 59 : minute 15-F-2.00
AM/PM : a.m. I p.m.
Start Time of Test blank 1 to12 : hour - 14-D-1.01
00 to 59 : minute 15-D-1.Ol
AM/PM : a.m. / p.m.
Remote Directory Number 399 :for “with Three or four numeric digits: Floating Directory 3-B-3.00
RMT” Number for the 4-F-l .05
blank : for remote mainte- 5-D-i .03
“without RMT nance port 6-G-l .05
14-B-2.00
15-8-2.00
demote Alarm No No : not providing Remote Alarm 14-D-l .05
Yes : providing Remote Alarm 15-D-1.05
Destination Address blank Maximum 26 numeric digits : telephone (modem)
number of the destination for Remote Alarm
9-D-8
System Administraion Assigns the terminal device to be used for setting system administration
Device data.
SMDR Enables or disables SMDR ( Station Message Detail Recording).
Page Length (4-99) Assigns the printer page length (number of lines).
Skip Perf (O-95) Determines the number of lines to be skipped and the number of lines to be
printed on each page. The number of lines to skip is simply the number
specified in this parameter. The number of lines printed is the difference
between the page length number and the skip perforation number.
If system data is being printed the difference must be equal to or greater
than 23 to allow one full screen to be printed on each page. If SMDR data
is being printed the difference must be equal to or greater than six to allow
the header and at least one line of SMDR data to be printed.
Outgoing Duration Log Determines which types of outgoing calls will be printed, if any.
Incoming Duration Log Determines if incoming calls will be printed or not.
Attendant Duration Determines whether the attendant or the destination will be charged with
the time for an attendant handled call. If “Separate” is selected, there will be
two lines of SMDR for every attendant handled and transferred call.
Special Carrier Name Assigns the special carrier name type to be printed out.
Print Secret Dial Determines if secret dial numbers will be printed out.
.,
Error Log /Programming/ Determines if error logs will be printed out.
Traffic
Determines if programming data is printed out.
Determines if traffic measurement data is printed out.
Start Time of Traffic Assigns the starting time for

- traffic measurement.
- .a*< .,.L
Measurement
Start Time of Test Assigns starting time of the self- test. The system must be idle
for the test to be performed.
Remote Directory Number Assigns a floating directory number for the remote maintenance port.
If “RMT” is not preset in the “Configuration-Slot Assignment” screen, the
default value is blank. -.
Remote Alarm If this option is enabled alarms will be automatically sent to the telephone
number in the destination address.
Destination Address The destination telephone number for remote alarms.
9-D-9
Conditions
SMDR If set to “No,” the following items cannot be programmed (“-” appears on
the items).
“System-Operation”,
Page Length (4-99)
Skip Perf (O-95)
Outgoing Duration Log
Incoming Duration Log
Attendant Duration
Special Carrier Name
Print Secret Dial
Error Log/Programming/Traffic
Remote Directory Number To assign this item, RMT card is necessary.
Remote Alarm If “RMT” is not assigned in the “Configuration-Slot Assignment”

Destination Address screen, these items cannot be programmed (“--” appears on the items).
If Remote Alarm is set to yes,” Destination Address can be programmed.
If Remote Alarm is set to “No,” Destination Address displays LI-n and
cannot be programmed.
To select this screen, press the NEXT key in the “System-Operation (l/3)” screen.
Function
COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, -EXI;I;) and HRD CPY keys
9-D-l 0
1.03 Operation (3/3)
SY stem - Operation I OFL I PRG I LIN I SEL

------------------------------------------------------+------+-----+------+----~
Operation (313)
+----------------------------------------------------------+
I Operator 1 ~~~~_~___~~~~ em- -em__ 1 A T T:l (Type:No.) I
I Operator 2 - ________ --‘I _--_____ 1 E X T:l2a (Trpe:No.) I
I Night Service ------I-- --- ------ 1 hnual
I Auto Start Tiae : HON.@aY,Night) I 08:OO AH , 05:OO PW I
: TUE. a)w,Night) I 08:OCAM , 05~00 PM
I : WED.(Dw,Night) I 08X10 AH ,' 05:OO PH f
: THU. (Day,Night) I 08:OO AH , 05:OO PM
I : FRI. (Dw,Nish$) I 08:OO AH , 05~00 PM i
: SAT. U)w,Night) I : , : I
I : SUN. (Dw,Night) I : , :
I PITS Prowaning Password ------I 1232 I
I Walking CDSPassvord ------------I 0123 I
+------I---------------------“““--------------+
Note: System or Tenant 1
Summary
Assigns elemental data common to the whole the third System-Operation screen.
system, such as setting terminal type for opera- (Password level : Two or higher)
tors, parameters for Night Service etc., through
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value I’. 1

Operator 1 4lTl : for “with None / EXT / ATT : terminal type
4TLC None : no operator
MY00 : for EXT : setting an extension to Operator 1
‘without ATLC” A-l-r : setting Attendant Console to Operator1
Number:assign number when terminal type is
set to “EXT” or “ATT”
blank : when terminal type is set to “None”
Three or four digit DN :
when terminal type is set to “EXT”
1 or 2 : when terminal type is set to “ATT,”
select Attendant Console 1 or 2
Operator 2 ATT 2 : for “with Same as Operator 1.

4TLC”
Vane : for
‘without ATLC”
9-D-l 1
Night Service Manual Manua! : an operator can set day or night 3-B-8.00
service 4-l-l .oo
Auto : automatic change 5-G-l .OO
6-J-l .OO
Auto Start Time
: MON. ( Day. Niaht) blank 1 to12 :hour
: TUE. ( Dav, Niaht) 00 to 59 : minute
: WED. ( Dav, Niaht) AM I PM : a.m. I p.m.
THII. ( Dm blank : if ‘blank” is assigned for a day or
: FRI. ( Day, Night) days, the previously assigned values
: SAT. ( Day. Night) are maintained for the days until
: SUN. ( Day, Night) other values are set for another day.
PITS Programming 1234 Four numeric digits : password 8-J-9.00

Password lilr,\&rvk &LcPk+4= cos 11-C-l .oo
Walking COS Password blank Four numeric digits: password 4-c-9.00

5-A-7.00
11-C-8.00
.. \ *_
9-D-l 2
Description of Assigning items
Operator 1 Assigns the terminal device for operator 1.
If selecting “EXT” for the terminal type, be sure to assign the directory
number beforehand.
Operator 2 Same as Operator 1.
Night Service If this is set to “Manual,” the operator 1 must dial the feature number for
-“Night Mode Set* for night service or “Night Mode Cancel” for day service.
If this is set to “Auto,” the system will switch the day and night modes at
the programmed time each day. The operator 1, however, can override
the auto setting by dialing the feature number for “Night Service Manual
Mode Set.” To restore the auto mode, the operator 1 must dial the feature
number for “Night Service Manual Mode Cancel.”
Auto Start Time Assigns automatic change-over time for each day of the week for
: MON. ( Day, Night) Day/Night Service.
: TUE. ( Day, Night)
: WED. ( Day, Night)
: THU. ( Day, Night)
: FRI. ( Day, Night)
: SAT. ( Day, Night)
: SUN. ( Day, Night)
PITS Programming Assigns the password for PITS system programming. This password is
Password used when a PITS allowed to program by COS wishes to change PITS
system programming or an Attendant Console wishes to perform CO
verify.
Walking COS Password Assigns the password for Walking COS. Walking COS allows a user to
temporarily change the COS of another extension to that of the user’s
extension. This is generally used for making toll calls from a toll restricted
telephone.
Conditions
Operator 1 This system can accommodate up to two Attendant Consoles.
Oper$or 2 When Tenant Service is employed and if two Attendant Consoles are
- aZQned to tenant 1, no Attendanii)nSdte operator can be assigned-b
tenant 2.
If only one Attendant Console is accommodated, it must be always
assigned to Operator 1.
To select this screen, press the NEXT key in the “System-Operation (U3)” screen.
Function
9-D-l 3
2.00 Tenant
+-~~~~~~~~----~-~~~~-------~~~-~--~-~--~---~~--~--~--~~~~~~~~~~~-~-+
I Ope.rator 1 (Tenant 2) ---------__- 1 A T T:l (.T~pe:No.) I
I Operator 2 (Tenant 2) -------------I E X T:1234 (Type:No.) 1
I Night Service (Tenant 2) ---------I Manual
I Auto Start Time : MON.(Day,Night) --I 08~00 AH , 05:OO PW
: TUE.(Day,Night) --I 08:OO AM , 05~00 PM
: YED.(Day,Night) --I 08%) AM , 05~00 PH
: 'IliU.@y,Night) -I 08:OO Al4 , 05:OO PH
: FRI. (Day,Night) --I 08:OO AH , 05:OO PH
: SAT. @aY.Night) --I : , :
: SUN.(Day,Night) --I : , :
I PITS Program&w Password (Tenant 2) 1 1232
I Walking COS Password (Tenant 2) ----I 0123 I
I Inter-Tenant Calling -----------I Yes
I Speed Dialing - System Boundarr ----I 100 I
I Call Park Boundary ---- --- ----- -1 10 . I
I Hessage b’aitins Boundary -------I 250
I Absent message boundarr -------I 10 t
+____l-_-ll-- --,,----------~~-------------+
Summary
Assigns parameters for tenant 2, such as terminal Speed Dialing, Call Park etc., which are split
type for operators, method of changing Night between tenant 1 and tenant 2.
Service, password for PITS programming etc.. (Password level : Two or higher)
I Also assigns boundaries for functions, such as
Operator 1 (Tenant 2) None None / EXT /ATT: terminal type 3-B-4.00

None : no operator 3-B-5.00
EXT : setting an extension to Operator 1
Al-T : setting Attendant Console to Operator 1
Number: Assign number when terminal type is
set to “EXT” or “ATT”
blank : when terminal type is set to “None”
Three or four digit DN:
when terminal type is set to “EXT”
1 or 2 : when terminal type is set to “ATT,”
selects Attendant Console 1 or 2
Continued
9-D-l 4
Continued
Operator 2 (Tenant 2) None Same as Operator 1 3-B-4.00

3-B-5.00
Night Service (Tenatn 2) Manual Manual : manual change 3-B-4.00

Auto : automatic change 3-B-8.00
4-l-l .oo
Auto Start Time 5-G-l .OO
-: MON. (Day, Night) blank 1 to12 :hour 6-J-l .OO
: TUE. (Day, Night) 00 to 59 : minute
- : WED. (Day, Night) AM / PM : a.m. / p.m.
-: THU. (Day, Night) blank : if “blank” is assigned for a day or days,
: FRI. (Day, Night) the previously assigned values are
: SAT. (Day, Night) maintained for the days until other
: SUN. (Day, Night) values are set for another day.
PITS Programming Password blank Four numeric digits of numbers : password 3-B-4.00
(Tenant 2 ) 6-J-9.00
1l-C-1 .O(
Walking COS Password blank Four numeric digits of numbers : password 3-B-4.00
(Tenant 2 ) 4-c-9.00
5-A-7.00
11-C-8.0(
Inter - Tenant Calling No Yes : Inter-Tenant Calling is available 3-B-4.00

No : Inter-Tenant Calling is unavailable
Speed Dialing - System 200 000 to 200 : boundary number 3-B-4.00

Boundary 000 : tenant 2 only can use all the’bodes 4-C-4.02
200 : tenant 1 only can use all the codes 5-A-2.02
6-D-2.01
Call Park Boundary 20 00 to 20 : boundary number 3-B-4.00

00 : tenant 2 only can use all call park areas 4-E-5.01
20 : tenant 1 only can use all call park areas 5-C-4.01
6-F-3.00
Message Waiting Boundary 500 000 to 500 : boundary number 3-B-4.00

000 : tenant 2 only can use the whole 4-I-8.00
capacity 5-G-6.00
500 : tenant 1 only can use the whole 6-J-4.00
capacity
Absent Message Boundary 16 06 to1 6 : boundary number 3-B-4.00

06 : tenant 2 only can use all the numbers 4-I-7.00
16 : tenant 1 only can use all the numbers 5-G-5.00
9-D-l 5
Operator 1 (Tenant 2) Assigns a terminal device for operator 1.
Operator 2 (Tenant 2) Assigns a terminal device for operator 2.
Night Service (Tenant 2) If this is set to “Manual,” an operator must dial the feature number for
“Night Mode Set” for night service or “Nlght Mode Cancel” for day service.
‘If this is set to “Auto,” the system will switch the day and night modes at
the programmed time each day. An operator,however, can overrride the
auto setting by dialing the feature number for “Night Service Manual
Mode Set.” To restore the auto mode, the operator must dial the feature
number for “Night Service Manual Mode Cancel.”
Auto Start Time Assign automatic change-over time for each day of the week for
: MON. (Day, Night) Day/Night Service.
: TUE. (Day, Night)
: WED. (Day, Night)
: THU. (Day, Night)
: FRI. (Day, Night)
: SAT. (Day, Night)
: SUN. (Day, Night)
PITS Programming Assigns the password for PITS programming. This password is used
Password (Tenant 2) when a PITS allowed to program by COS wishes to change system pro-
gramming or an attendant console wishes to perform CO verify.
Walking COS Password Assigns the password for Walking COS. Walking COS allows a user to
(Tenant 2) temporarily change the COS of another station to that of the user’s
station. This is generally used for making toll calls from a toll restricted
telephone.
Inter-Tenant Calling If this option is set to “Yes” then calling is allowed between extensions in
different tenants. However, it is not possible for an operator to transfer
calls to an extension in another tenant. If this option is set to “No” then no
inter tenant calling is allowed.
Speed Dialing-System Assigns tenant-boundary number for Speed Dialing ( the last number of
Boundary the codes that tenant 1 can use).
Call Park Boundary Assigns tenant-boundary number for Call Park (the last number that
Tenant 1 can use).
Message Waiting Assigns tenant-boundary quantity for Message Waiting (the largest
Boundary quantity that tenant 1 can use).
Absent message Assigns tenant-boundary number for Absent Message (the last number
boundary that tenant 1 can use).
9-D-l 6
Conditions
This screen does not appear if ‘System-Operation”. Tenant Service is assigned to “No.”
Operator 1 (Tenant 2) This system can accommodate up to two Attendant consoles. If two
Operator 2 (Tenant 2) Attendant Consoles are assigned to tenant 1, no Attendant consoles can
be assigned to tenant 2.
Speed Dialing-System If Tenant Service is available, the following items can be split between
Boundary/Call Park tenant 1 and tenant 2. The boundaries are to set tenant-boundary
Boundary/Message numbers. The last number that tenant 1 can use must be assigned in
Waiting Boundary/Absent each boundary for the functions below:
Message Boundary
Speed Dialing-System
Call Park-System
Message Waiting
Absent Message
<Example>
Up to 200 speed dialing codes can be programmed for the system. If you
wish to assign 150 codes to tenant 1 and 50 codes to tenant 2, enter
“150” in Speed Dialing-System Boundary.
Speed dialing codes ~1
Only tenant 1 can use

the codes.
Onlj; tenant 2 can use

the codes.
If tenant 1 uses no code and tenant 2 uses 200 codes, enter “000.”
Function
9-D-17
3.00 System Timer
System - System Timer I OFL I PRG I SCR 1 DIR

-------------------‘-------------------------------+----+ -----+------+-----
+----------------------------------------------------+
I - I Held Call Reminder -----------I
I HeId Cal 1 Reminder (AT?) -------I
@ second (s)
60 second(s)
K~-240)
W-240)
I
I
I Transfer Recall --------------I 30 second(s) (E-240) I
I Pickup Dial Waiting ---------I 1 second(s) (l-5) I
I External First Digit The-Out ---I 10 second(s) ( 5-120) I
I External Interdigit Tile-Out ---- 5 second(s) ( 3- 15) I
I External Interdisit Time-Out (PBX) -- I 5 second(s) ( 3- 10) I
I Toll Restriction Guard Time-Out --I 10 second(s) ( 0- 25) I
I Call Forwarding - No Answer Time-Out I 15 second(s) ( 5- 60) I
I Intercept Routing Time-Out (System) -I 50 second(s) M-240) I
I Intercept Routing Tire-Out (DISA) --I 30 second(s) (15-240) I
I Attendant Overflow Tire ---------I 60 second(s) (15-240) I
I SHDRDuration Time -----------I 10 second(s) ( 0- 15) i
+------------------ -------------------------3
Summary
Executes time-setting on various system timers.
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Referencf

I I
EEL+- 15 to 240 : seconds 3-B-10.00

I 3-E-2.00
15 to 240 : seconds 3-B-10.00

3-E-2.00
Transfer Recall 30 15 to 240 : seconds 3-B-10.00

3-E-3.00
4-F-l .Ol
5-D-1.01
6-G-1.01
6-G-1.02
Pickup Dial Waiting 1 1to 5 :seconds 3-B-10.00

5-A-2.04
Continued
9-D-l 8
(21292)
C0nh-wfk-l
Assigning Hems Defautt Selection of Value FletereM
External First Digit Time-Out 10 5 to 120 : seconds 3-B-10-00

3-E 12.00
3-F-12.00
roG8.w
10-c-61.00
External I nterdigit Time-Out 5. 31015 : seconds 3-B-10.00

3-B-12.00
External Interdigit Time-Out 5 3 to10 : seconds 3-B-10.00

(PBX) 3-B-l 2.00
Toll Restriction Guard lime 10 0 to 25 : seconds 3-B-10.00

out
Call Forwarding-No Answer 15 5 to 60 : seconds 3-B-10.00

Time-out 3-D-2.05
3-D-2.06
4-F-2.03
4-F-2.04
S-D-203
5-D-2.04
c
Intercept Routing Time-Out 60 15 to 240: seconds 3-B-10.00

System) 3-F-5.00
6-J-1200
Intercept Routing Time-Out 30 15 to 240 : seconds .1 3-B-10.00

(DISA) 3-D-202
3-F-5.00
Attendant Overflow Time 60 15 to 240: seconds 3-B-10.00

3-D-l .03
6-G-2.00
.. 6-G-7.00
lo-c-53.00
SMDR Duration Time 5 0 to 15 : seconds 3-6-10.00

3-F-1.00
4-A-4.03
9-D-19
(30393)
Held Call Reminder Sets the time for Held Call Reminder for extensions. When this timer
expires the extension is alerted that there is a call held for an extended
period of time
Held Call Reminder (ATT) Sets the time for Held Call Reminder for the Attendant Console. When
this timer expires the Attendant is rung to indicate an extended hold.
Transfer Recall Sets the time for Transfer Recall on both extensions and Attendant
consoles.
Pickup Dial Waiting Sets the waiting time for Pickup Dialing. The pickup dialing time gives
the user an opportunity to dial digits prior to the automatic dialing taking
place.
External First Digit Sets the maximum time allowed between CO dial tone or pseudo dial
Time-Out tone and the Time-Out first digit dialed.
External Interdigit Sets the maximum time allowed between digits on a CO call. This timer
Time-Out does not apply for CO operator calls.
External Interdigit Sets the maximum time between dialed digits ( Behind PBX).
Time-Out (PBX)
Toll Restriction Guard Sets the time limit between dialing digits for CO operator calls. This
Time-Out prevents a user from attempting to defeat toll restriction.
.,
Call Forwarding-No Sets the Call Forwarding-No Answer timer.

Answer Time-Out
Intercept Routing Time- Sets the time limit for Intercept Routing (System). This timer is used
out (System) when an incoming CO call (DIL 1 :l , DID, TAFAS or night answer and so
on) is not answered. Call forward no answer will override this timer if an
extension has enabled Call Forwarding-No Answer Time-Out.
intercept Routing Time- Sets the time limit for Intercept Routing (DISA). This is used when a
Out (DISA) DISA destination does not answer.
Attendant Overflow Time Sets the overflow time for the Attendant Console. When this timer
expires, a call will be routed to the overflow destination.
SMDR Duration Time Determines the length of the SMDR duration timer. This timer starts
when the system has sent all the digits to the Central Office.
9-D-20
Conditions
Held Call Reminder If these items are programmed however “System-Operation” Held Call
Held Call Reminder (ATT) Reminder is not set to “Yes,” Held Call Reminder does not function.
Function
For operation, refer to Section 7-i “Operation of Function Keys.”
9-D-21
4.00 Class of Service
4.01 Class of Service (l/2)
;ystem - Class of Service I OFL I PRG 1 SCR I DIR
Class of Service KIDS) No. = 01 (l/Z)

+------------------------------
I Toll Restriction Level (Day) --------I 11 1
Toll Restriction Level (Night) ------I 02
Max. Dialing Digits ----- ----l 7 I
Call Forvarding / Do Not Disturb -----I Yes I
Do Hot Disturb Override ---------I yes 1
(x) Formrd w -------m---~~---I yes
(-J-JTransfer w -------------I yes I
Forced Account Code Hode ------------I Yes I
BSSOHCA-----_-----_____-^__------ I Yes
BWOHCA Deny-----------------------I yes I
Executive Busy Override --------------I Yes
Executive Busy Override Deny ----------I Yes 1
Station Lock ---- ----- - ----- - ---- \ yes
Walking Station ---------_-----------I yes I
Maintenance Capabi 1ity --------------I Yes
ARS/Local Access --------------------I u/ RsJp ;
--,-,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,---------------+
COHHON$! INDEX 8 COPY #READ 5 5 HRDCPY gi 8 I

..
Summary
Sets parameters for toll restriction level, maxi- System-Class of Service screen, which consists
mum dialing digits, Call Forwarding, Do Not of 32 groups, each of which has two screens.
Disturb, Do Not Disturb Override, etc., in the first (Password level : Two or higher)
I : cAsksigning items
I
Default Selectionof Value : -
I
Refefenc
Toll Restriction Level (Day)

-1 01 to16
01 to16
: toll restriction level (Day)
: toll restriction level (Night)

3-B-6.00
3-C-l .oo
3-B-61x)
3-c-l 40
Max. Dialing Digits Refer to 2 to 255 : possible to dial the [input value-l] digits 3-B-6-00
fsy c.0 CAtiS Table of 0 : no limit to the number of dialed digits
Defaults 1 : internal calls only
Call Forwarding / Do Not Yes : Call Fowarding / DND is available 3-B-6.00

Disturb No : Call Forwarding / DND is unavailable 4-D-6.00
4-F-2.00
S-B-4.00
5-D-2.00
Continued
9-D-22
Continued
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Relerence
Do Not Disturb Override Yes : DND Override is available 3-B-6.00

No : DND Override is unavailable 4-c-8.00
5-A-6.00
CO Forward Mode Yes : Call Forwarding to CO is available 3-B-6.00

No : Call Forwarding to CO is unavailable 4-F-2.05
5-D-2.05
CO Transfer Mode Yes : Call Transfer to CO is available 3-a-6.00

No : Call Transfer to CO is unavailable 4-F-l .03
4-G-6.00
Forced Account Code Mode No : Account codes not required for outgoing 3-B-6.00
co calls 4-i-2.00
Yes : User must enter an account code for 5-G-2.00
outgoing CO calls
Refer to r
BSS / OHCA Table of No : Override is unavailable 3-B-6.00
Defaults Yes : Ovemde is availabte 4-C-5.04
4-C-5.05
BSS / OHCA Deny No : Override Deny is impossible 3-6-6.00

Yes : Override Deny is possible 4-D-2.03
Executive Busy Override No : Executive Busy Override is unavailable 3-B-6.00

Yes : Executive Busy Override is available 4-c-7.00
5-A-5.00
Executive Busy Override Yes : Executive Busy Override Deny is availabte 3-B-6.00
Deny No : Executive Busy Override Deny is 4-D-5.00
unavailable 5-B-3.00
Station Lock No : Station Lock is unavailabte 3-S-6.00

Yes : Station Lock is available 4-I-9.00
5-G-7.00
_.
Walking Station No : Walking Station is impossibfe 3-B-6.00
Yes : Walking Station is possible 3-F-3.00
Maintenance Capability Yes : PITS system programming is possible 3-B-6.00

No : PITS system programming is impossibfe 11-A
11-c
AM/Local Access WlRSTR : ARSRocal Access is restricted rl 3-B-6.00

No RSTR : no restriction ~2 3-C-l .Ol
No ACCS : calling is impossible 3-C-l -02
-1 When an extension user attempts to make an outside call by “Local Trunk Dial
Access” or “Automatic Route Selection (ARS),” available trunks are
determined by both Local Hunt Sequence and “System-Class of Service”,
Trunk Group Access.
-2 Available trunks are determined by Local Hunt Sequence.
9-D-23
(40993)
Table of Defaults
Assigning Items cos 01 cos 02 cos 03 to COS 32

31
Toll Restriction 01 01 01 16
Level ( Day )
Toll Restriction 01 01 01 16
Level ( Night )
Max. Dialing Digits 0 0 0 0
Call Forwarding Yes Yes Yes No

/ Do Not Disturb
Do Not Disturb Yes No No No

Override
CO Forward Mode Yes No No No
CO Transfer Mode Yes No No No
Forced Account No No No No
Code Mode
BSS / OHCA Yes Yes Yes No

..
BSS / OHCA Deny No No No No
Executive Busy Yes No ,No No

Override
Executive Busy No No No No
Override Deny t
Station Lock No No No No
Walking Station No No No No
Maintenance Yes No No No
Capability
ARS/Local Access W/t?STR W/RSTR W/RSTR No Acts
9-D-24
Toll Restriction Level (Day) Sets toll restriction level (day).
Toll Restriction Level (Night) Sets toll restriction level (night).
Max. Dialing Digits Sets the maximum number of digits which can be dialed for a CO
call.
Call Forwarding / Do Not Assigns whether Call Forwarding / Do Not Disturb is possible or
Disturb not.
Do Not Disturb Override Assigns Do Not Disturb Override .
CO Forward Mode Assigns whether Call Forwarding to CO is possilbe or not .
CO Transfer Mode Assigns whether Call Transfer to CO is possible or not.
Forced Account Code Mode Assigns whether entering Account Code in outgoing CO chills is
necessary or not.
BSS/OHCA Assigns whether BSS (Busy Station Signaling) and OHCA (Off
Hook Call Announcement) are possible or not.
BSS/OHCA Deny Assigns whether BSS / OHCA Deny is possible or not.
Executive Busy Override Assigns whether Executive Busy Override is possible or not.
Executive Busy Override Assigns whether Executive Busy Override Deny is available or not.
Deny .
Station Lock Assigns whether Electronic Station Look is possible or not.
Walking Station Assigns whether Walking Station is possible or not.
Maintenance Capability Enables the maintenance capability of PITS sets to perform

operations such as time and date set, station name change , etc.
ARS/Local Access Assigns whether ARS/Local Access is restricted or not.
Conditions
9-D-25
Function
The +oilow;?g funaions appear on rhe function line of this setting screen.
are available in all setting screens. Other function keys such as INDEX, COPY and
READ are also available in this setting screen. The operation of function keys are
described in Section 7-i “Operation of Funciton Keys.” Only messages are provided
here.
\
!
INDEX>Class of Service No. (01-32)=1
n ii I
COPY>COS No. (01-32)= fl - -> COS No.= -
1 pj H a HaIT H
@I F4
9-D-26
4.02 Class of Service (2/2)
Srstem - CleSs of Service IonI -PE- I SC-f-I DIR

----------------------------------------------------+-----+ --__- +----_ +----,
Class of Service (CCM No. = 01 (Z/2)
+-----------------------------------------------------------+
I Trunk Grout 1 Trunk Group 01 I Y I Trunk Group 09 I Y I
Access I Trunk Group 02 I Y I Trunk Group 10 I Y I
I I Trunk Group 03 I Y I Trunk Group 11 I Y I
I Trunk Group 04 I Y “I Trunk Grow 12 I Y I
i 1 Trunk Group 05 I Y I Trunk Group 13 I Y I
I Trlmk Group 06 I Y I Trunk Grow 14 I Y I
I I Trunk Group 07 I Y I Trunk Grow 15 I Y I
1 Trunk Group 06 I Y I Trulik Group 16 I Y I
I -----------+------ ----- SS--+----+----------+--
I Special Carrier I EQA1 I Y I WA 3 I N I OCC1 I N I OCC3 I N 1
ACCt?S!S IEQA21 Y II?QA41 N IOCC21 N 1OCC41 N I
I ---------+---+---+ -em--+---+w- --+----+----+--we
I Station Paging I PAG 1 I Y I PAG3 I Y I PAG5 I Y I PAG7 I Y i
I Access I PAG2 I Y I PAG4 I Y I PAG6 i Y I PAG8 1 Y l
i External Paging I External Paging 1 I Y I External Pasins 2 Y i

+------------------------------------------------+
Summary
The second screen of the Sytem-Class of (Password level : Two or higher)
Service screen sets the trunk groups available for
access and so on.
Assigning Items :. Default Selection of Value Referenct
Trunk Group Access Yes Y : trunk group available for access 3-B-6.00
Trunk Group (01 to1 6) N : trunk group unavailable for access 3-c-1 .Ol
3-c-1.03
4-c-3.01
4-C-3.02
5-A-1.01
5-A-1.02
Special Carrier Access No N : special carrier unavailable for access 3-B-6.00

EQA (1 to 4) OCC (1 to 4) Y : special carrier available for access 3-c-1.04
4-c-3.03
5-A-1.03
Continued
9-D-27
Continued
Assigning Items Defautt Selection of Value Referent3
Station Paging Access Yes N : paging group unavailable for access 3-B-6.00
PAG (1 to 8) Y : paging group available for access 4-H-l .Ol
4-H-l .02
4-H-l .04
5-F-i .Ol
5-F-l .02
5-F-i .04
External Paging (1 and 2 ) Yes N : not available to access external pager 3-B-6.00
Y : available to access external pager 4-H-l .03
4-H-i .04
5-F-l .03
5-F-l .04
..
9-D-28
Trunk Group Access When set to “Yes,” the associated trunk group is available during direct
Trunk Group (01 to 16) trunk group access. When set to “No” the trunk group is not available
during direct trunk group access.
Special Carner Access When set to “Yes” the Equal Access trunk group and OCC Access trunk
EQA (1 to 4: OCC (1 to 4) group are available during virtual trunk group access. When set to
“No,” the Equal Access trunk group and OCC access trunk groups are
not available during virtual trunk group access.
Station Paging Access Assigns which paging groups are available for access.
PGA (1 to 8)
External Pagtng (1 and 2) Assigns which external pagers are available for access.
Conditions
Special Carrier Access If .Y” is selected but if “Special Carrier Access-Equal Access”, Service
and ‘Special Carrier Access-OCC Access”, Service are set to “No,”
Special Carrier Access via virtual trunk group access does not work.
It is administrable to activate or deactivate the EQU access and/or OCC
access features on a system-wide basis.
Refer to Section 1 O-C-52 “World Select 2 (WS2)” for further information.
Station Paging Access If an extension does not belong to the same tenant as the paging groups
assigned to “Y,” the extension cannot access the paging groups.
External Paging If Y” is selected but if ‘System-Operation” External Paging i/2 is set to

“No,” paging through external pagers is impossible. If,an extension
belongs to the different tenant from the tenant of the External Paging 1
or 2 assigned to “Y,” the extension cannot access the external pager.
To select this screen, press the NEXT key in the “System-Class of Service (l/2)”
screen.
Pressing the TAB key moves the cursor as follows:
l&St- - ClassofSemin IGFLIPRGISCRi DIR
Class of Service @IS) No. = 01 0

. ---------------+
ITrwkGmw ITmkGrcuPOl I IYI
IAecas
i TrwkGrwPo3
I Trunk liralr, 02
Y I TrunkGrou~11
I Y I
IYI
P I
ITi-d~OUPD4 I Y I TmnkGrou~12 IY I
--,-+---+--I
i StationPacim IPhG 1 Ia l PAG 3 I Y IPAG 5 I Y IPAG7 I Y l
IAccess Iphi21 Yh$AGll Y I IPAGCI Y IPAGSI Y I
I --- ------ -c-
t+
_------
I Extend Puinr I Fktei-nal ParinsI‘-t,1 n IExtemdPaeincl2 -E-I
_-___ ----- -----------d
~CUNHJN$lNDEX tDPY 3NEAD 3 BNNDCPYP #
cursor
9-D-29
Function
The following funcitons appear on the function line of this setting screen.
BOMMONBNDEX f&opy ~~~JREAD ‘B ~HRD CPY m 0a
are available in all setting screens. Other function keys such as INDEX, COPY and
READ are also available in this setting screen. The operation of function keys are
described in Section 7-l “Operation of Funciton Keys.” Only messages are
provided here.
INDEX&lass of Service No. (Ol-32)=0
n F2 :
COPY>COS No. (01-32)~ 1 - -> COS No.= -
READ>COS No. (01-32)= 1 .*
9-D-30
5.00 Local Access Group
SrsteB - Local Access Group I OFL I PRG I LIN I DIR

---------------------------------------------------+-----+-----+-----+---,
+-------------------------------------------------------------+
I Toll Restriction Level I 08 I
I ------------------------------+- ---_-----------------------------
I To1 1 Restriction Table I 4 I
+---------------------I--------------------------------+
I Local Access i Hunt Sequence 01 I 06 I Hunt Sequence 09 I
I Trunk Group 02 I 16 I 10 I I
I Hunt Sequence I 03 I 01 I 11 I
I I 04 IO3 I 12 I I
I Enter Trunk I 05 IO5 I 131 1
Group Number I 06 I 14 I
I (01 - 16) I 07 I I 15 I I
I I 081 I 161 I
Summary
Assigns toll restriction level and Area/Office Code after automatic access to an idle CO line.
Table number for outgoing CO calls and the (Password level : Two or higher)
hunting sequence for selecting idle trunk groups

I I
Toll Restriction Level 16 01 to 16 : restriction level 3-c-1.01
I I 3-c-i -02
Toll Restriction Table 1 1 to 8 : restriction table number 13-c-,.o,
Local Access
Trunk Group Hunt Sequence 4-c-3.01
Hunt Sequence 01 01 01 to 16 : trunk group number 5-A-l .Ol
blank : not assigned 6-D-l .Ol
Hunt Sequence (02 to 16) blank Same as Hunt Sequence 01
9-D-31
Toll Restriction Level Assigns the toll restriction level. This is used during toll restriction to
determine if calls will be allowed (if Extension toll restriction level is
equal to or greater than local access toll restriction level) or
whether they must pass through toll restriction checking.
Toll Restriction Table Assigns the Area code/Office code toll restriction table number.
This table is used during 3/6 digit toll restriction.
Local Access Determines the trunk group hunt sequence to be used when
Trunk Group Hunt Sequence placing a CO call using local access. The sequence is used by
Hunt Sequence (01 to 16) both tenants but trunk groups will be skipped if they do not belong to
the same tenant as the caller.
Conditions
None
Function
3)
-. .
9-D-32
6.00 Numbering Plan
6.01 Numbering Plan (I/9)
Numbering Plan ( l/9 1

+------------------------ ____^---- - _----_ - ------ ---+
I No. I Feature I DGl I DG2 I DG3 I DG4 I
---+------------------------------+---+ ----+----+----- I
I 1 I lst Hundred Block Extension-----------I 1 I I - I - I
I 2 I 2nd Hundred Block Extension--------l 2 I
I 3 I 3rd Hundred Block Extension------l 3 I
1 4 1 4th Hundred Block Extension -------I
I 5 I 5th Hundred Block Extension ------I
I 6 I 6th Hundred Block Extension -------I
I 7 I 7th Hundred Block Extension ------I
I 8 I 8th Hundred Block Extension -------I
I 9 I 9th Hmdred Block Extension --------I
I 10 1 10th Hundred Block Extension ------I I
l 11 l 11th Hundred Block Extension -------I I
I 12 l 12th Hundred Block Extension ------- I I
+------------------------------’
.I
Summary
The first screen of the System-Numbering Plan (Password level : Two or higher)
screen sets the extension numbers for first
through 12th Hundred Block Extension groups.
1st Hundred Block Extension 1 3-B-l .OO

0 to 9: set “DGl” and leave “DG2” blank when the 3-W.OO
2nd Hundred Block Extension 2 extension numbers are to be composed of
three digits, and set both “DGl ” and “DG2*
3rd Hundred Block Extension 3 when the extension numbers are to be
composed of four digits.
4th through 12th Hundred Block blank
Extension
9-D-33
1st through 12th Hundred Block Assigns the leading one or two digits for extension DN (Directory
Extension Number). If the leading digit is not programmed the DN assignment
is not possible.
Conditions
“System-Numbering Plan” setting cannot be changed if “System-Operation”,
Numbering Plan is set to “Fixed 1” or “Fixed 2.” If “Flex” is selected, this setting is
changeable.
When entering “DG 1” to “DG 4,” the cursor does not advance nor return automati-
cally. Use the + and t keys to move the cursor. The BS key cannot be used in
this screen.
,.x\_
-1 In any other setting screens than this screen, if you enter some data and press the
NEXT or PREV key without storing the data, the message y ****** Parameter
Save OK ? >n appears on the screens. However, this screen advances or returns
without displaying the message.
Data storage is executed by the PF 4 (Memory) key or the PF 2 (End) key for all
the nine screens at the same time, not respectively as other screens. Logical
check is also performed according to the following logic:
Extension numbers are three or four digits and the leading one or two digits
are assigned in “Numbering Plan (l/9) and (2/S)” screens.
Feature numbers may be one, two, three or four digits.
Those numbers assigned in Numbering Plan screens cannot include the
same number assigned to other feature number as the part or whole of it.
For example, if the digit “2” is assigned to the feature number for ‘Trunk
Group 01-08 Access” and another digits “21” is assigned for “Trunk Group
09-l 6 Access,” it is checked at the time of data storage. Similarly, “35” and
“351” cannot be present at the same time.
1
It is possible to store “0” through “9, ” *,” “#,” as the feature numbers.
However, if *” or “#” is included in the feature numbers, those features are not
accessed by the rotary telephone extensions.
1st to 12th Hundred Extension numbers cannnot include Y3Cnand “#.”

Block Extension
9-D-34
Function
are available in all setting screens. INDEX key is also available in this screen. The
operation of function keys are described in Section 7-l “Operation of Function
Keys.” Only a message is provided here.
INDEX>Numbering Plan (l-9)= @
9-D-35
6.02 Numbering Plan (2/9)
System - Numbering Plan I OFL I PRG I SCR I DIR

---------------------- --___-- ----~--~---+--+--
Numbering Plan ( 219 )
+I------------- ------- -----------W-----V+
I No.1 Feature I DM I D62 I IX3 I D64 I
i 13 I 13th Hundred Block Extension------- i i i-1-i

I 14 I 14th Hundred Block Extension ------- I f i : ; - 1I
I 15 I 15th Hundred Block Extension------- I
i 16 I 16th Hundred Block Extension-------\ t l-l-l
I 17 I Operator Call bneral) ------I 0 I
I 18 I Operator Call (Specific) ------ - I f f I
l 19 I ARShcal CO Line Access ---- ; 91 I I I
I 20 I Trunk Group 01-08 Access --------I
I 21 I Trunk Group 09-16 Access ------- l 88 I 21 I I i
I 22 I Trunk Group 17-24 Access --------I 8131 1
I 23 I Speed Dialing - System -------- *.I 1 I
l 24 I Speed Dialing - Station ------- I * I 2 I
Summary .I
The second screen of the System-Numbering (Password level : Two or higher)

Plan screen sets the numbers for 13th through
16th Hundred Block Extension groups and
functions 17 to 24.
I Assigning Items I Default Selection of Value 3eference
3-B-1.00
0 to 9: set ‘DGl * and leave “DG2” blank when the 3-B-2.00
extension numbers are to be composed of
blank three digits, and set both ‘DGl” and “DG2
when the extension numbers are to be
composed of four digits.
3-B-1.00
Enter from one to four digits composed of 3-B-5.00
si numbers, andthe* and #symbols. 4-c-10.00
5-A-8.00
3-B-1.00
3-C-2.00
4-c-3.01
5-A-1.01
6-D-1.01
i
Continued
9-D-36
(30393)
Continued
Assigning Items Detault Selection of Value Reference
3-B-1.OO
Trunk Group 01-08 Access 81 4-C-3.02
5-A-l -02
Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access 82 6-D-l -02
Enter from one to four digits composed of 3-B-l -00
Trunk Group 17-24 Access 83
numbers, and the * and # symbols. 4-c-3.03
5-A-1.03
6-D-l .03
Speed Dialing-System *1 3-B-l .OO
5-A-2.02
Speed Dialing-Station *2 Enter tram one to four digits composed of 3-B-1.OO
numbers, and *.” 5-A-2.01
..
9-D-37
13th through 16th Hundred Block Assigns the leading one or two digits for extension DN (Directory
Extension Number). If the leading digit is not programmed the DN assign-
ment is not possible.
Operator Call (General) Assigns the feature number for general operator calling. Calls will
always arrive at an Attendant Console if it is connected to the
system.
Operator Call (Specific) Assigns the feature number for specific operator calling. The
required operator is specified by dialing the feature number and “1”
for operator 1 and =2” for operator 2.
AFWLocal CO Line Access Assigns the feature number for Automatic Route Selection or local
access.
Trunk Group 01-08 Access Assigns the feature number for Individual Trunk Group Dial Access
(01 to 08).
Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access Assigns the feature number for Individual Trunk Group Dial Access
(09 to 16).
Trunk Group 17-24 Access Assigns the feature number for the specified EQA or OCC Trunk
Group Access.
Speed Dialing-System Assigns the feature number for Speed Dialing-System.
Speed Dialing-Station Assigns the feature number for Speed Dialing-Station.

..
Conditions
Refer to “Numbering Plan (l/9).”
! 13th to 16th Hundred Extension numbers cannnot include *” and u#.”
Block Extension
Speed Dialing-Station This feature number cannot include “#.”
9-D-38
Function
operation of function keys are described in Section 7-i “Operation of Function
INDEX>Numbering Plan (l-9)= u
9-D-39
6.03 Numbering Plan (319)
I System - Numbering Plan I OFL I PRG~I SCR ITR 1
Numberib Plan ( 3/9 1

+----------------------------------------------------------------+
I --mm+----------------------------------+----+ ----+---+---
I 25 I Doorphone Call (l-4) ---------------I 4 1 0 1 ! t
I 26 I External Paging ----------------------I 4 I 1 I I

I 27 I Station Paging ----------------I 4 I 2 I I
II 29
28 II Station
External Paging
Paging Answer
Answer----- - -------
-------------- 11 44 11 43 11 1 I
II 31
30 II
Night
Night Answer
Ansver 21 __________________
-----------------I ---I 44 11 56 11 I I
I 32 I
Dial Call Pickup ------------------ 1 4 1 7 1 I I
I 33 I
Directed Call Pickup ----- -----I 4 I 8 I I
I34 I Hold Extension Retrieve ----------I 4 I 9 I I
1 35 1 Redial -------------------------I * 1 3 1 “‘i- I
I 36 I External Feature Access -----------I 5 I 0 I I I
+----------------------------------------------)
Summary
The third screen of the System-Numbering Plan (Password level : Two or higher)
screen sets the feature numbers for functions 25
to 36.
Assigning Items Default-’ Selection of Value Referena
3-B-l .OO
Doorphone Call (l-4) 40
4-G-7.00
,- 5-E-2.00
6-H-4.00
. Enter one to four digits composed of numbers, *, 3-B1 OO
External Paging 41 and #. 4-H-1103
4-H-l .04
5-F-l .03
5-F-l .04
6-l-l .03
6-l-l .04
Continued
9-D-40
Continuec
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value I Reference

Station Paging 42 3-B-l .oG
4-H-1.01
4-H-1.02
4-H-1.04
5-F-1.01
5-F-1.02
5-F-1.04
6-l-l .Ol
6-I-1.02
6-l-1.04
External Paging Answer 43 3-B-l
t- .OO
4-H-1.03
4-H-1.04
5-F-1.03
5-F-l .04
Station Paging Answer 44 Enter one to four digits composed of numbers, *, ti-:*F
and #.
t-4-H:1:02
4-H-l .04
5-F-l .Ol
5-F-l .02
5-F-l .04
Night Answer 1 45 t-3-B-l .OO
3-B-8.02
3-D-2.04
Night Answer 2 46 4-D-4.00
4-I-1.01
5-B-2.00
I-
5-G-l .Ol
Dial Call Pickup 47 3-B-l .OO
4-D-3.01
Directed Call Pickup 48 I--

5-B-1.01
3-B-1.00
I
4-D-3.02
5-B-1.02
Hold Extension Retrieve 49 3-B-1.00
4-E-4.00
5-c-3.00
3-B-l .OO
*3
5-A-2.03
External Feature Access 50 3-B-l .OO
4-G-9.00
5-E-3.00
9-D-41
Doorphone Call (l-4) Assigns the feature number for Doorphone calling. After dialing the
feature number, dial 1 to 4 to specify the required doorphone.
External Paging Assigns the feature number for External Paging. After dialing the feature
number, dial 0, 1, 2, or * (all extensions and external paging)
Station Paging Assigns the feature number for Internal Paging. After dialing the feature
number, dial the paging group number (1 to 8), 0 to page all internal
zones and * for all internal and external zones.
External Paging Answer Assigns the feature number for External Paging Answer. After dialing the
feature number, dial 1 (for pager 1) or 2 (for pager 2)
Station Paging Answer Assigns the feature number for Station Paging Answer.
Night Answer 1 Assigns the feature number for Night Answer 1. This feature number is
used to answer calls.assigned to UNA 1 in night service or TAFAS 1 in
day service.
Night Answer 2 Assigns the feature number for Night Answer 2. This feature number is
used to answer calls assigned to UNA 2 in night service or TAFAS 2 in
day service
Dial Call Pickup Assigns the feature number for Dial Call Pickup. This allows a user to
pickup a call arriving at an extension in the same pickup group.
Directed Call Pickup Assigns the feature number for Directed Call Pickup (General). This
allows an extension user to pickup a call ringing at any extension
.* in the
same tenant.
Hold Extension Retrieve Assigns the feature number for Hold Retrieving. This allows an extension
user to retrieve a call held at another extension in the same tenant.
Redial Assigns the feature number for Redial. This is used by an SLT to redial
the last CO number.
External Feature Access Assigns the feature number for sending a switchhook flash to a host PBX
or Centrex service.
Conditions
Same as the “Numbering Plan (l/9).” _-
9-D-42
Function
INDEX>Numbering Plan (l-9)= 1

Ol:, H H m fg f&j HEXIT B
9-D-43
6.04 Numbering Plan (419)
System - Numbering Plan I OFL I PRG I SCR I DIR

~----------------------------------------------------+---+-----+-----+----.
f Numbering Plan ( 419 1
+------------------------------------------------------------~
I ----+--------------------------------------~----+----~----+---- I
1 37 1 Account Code _____ -e-m_- ____ -------I t 1 # 1
I 38 I Hold _____-------------------------- -1 5 1 1 1 f I
1 39 1 Hold Retrieve ---------------------I 5 1 2 1 1
I 40 I Call Park - System --------------I 5 1 3 1 t
I 41 I Call Park Retrieve - System ---------I 5 I 4 I I
i I 42 I Call Park - Station ----- - -------- 1 5 1 5 1 I
I 43 I Call Park Retrieve - Station --------I 5 I 6 I I
I 44 I Call Forvarding - All Call Set ------I :: I o I 2 I I
I 45 I Call Forwarding - BUSYSet -----------I s I o I 3 I I
I 46 I Call Forwarding - No Ansver Set -------I * I * I 4 I -‘I I
I 47 I Call Forwarding - to Trunk ---me ---- * I 4151 I
I 48 I Call Forwarding - Busy/No Ansver ----- I * I t I 6 I I
+--------------------------------------------------------+
Summary
The fourth screen of the System-Numbering (Password : Two or higher)
Plan sets the feature numbers for function 37 to
‘, 48.
-\.: : Assigning Items Default i Selection of Value Referent2
3-B-i .OO
Account Code -n# 4-I-2.00
5-G-2.00
Hold 51 3-B-l .OO

5-c-i .oo
Hold Retrieve 52 Enter one to four digits consisting of numbers, *,
and #.
Call Park-System 53 3-B-1.00
4-E-5.01
Call Park Retrieve-System 54 5-c-4.01
Call Park-Station 55 3-B-1.00

4-E-5.02
Call Park Retrieve-Station 56 5-C-4.02
Continued
9-D-44
Call Forwarding-All Call Set +“2
*x3 3-E-i.cc
Call Forwarding-Busy Set
4-F-2.02
Enter one to four digits consisting of numbers,*, 5-Cq2.G2
and #.
3-E-1.00
Call Forwarding-No Answer Set **4 4-F-2.03
5-D-2.03
**g 3-B-1.00
Call Forwarding-to Trunk Enter from one to four digits consisting of 4-F-2.05
numbers and *. 5-D-2.05
3-B-l.OC
Call Forwarding-Busy/No ++*cg -. Enter from one to four digits consisting of 4-F-2.G
Answer numbers, *, and #. 5-D-2.04
9-D-45
Account Code A:: g-s :-e iea!::re number for entering account codes which may be
ic-Cid 0: ;otionai depending on system programming.
Hold --4 .-._‘--<

, _ ‘-e fea:dre number for Hold. This is used by an SLT to place
3.- ,-2fler
-L. 2’: hold.
Hold Retrieve Assigns the feature number for retrieving Hold. This is used by an SLT
to retrieve a held call.
Call Park-System Assigns the feature number for Call Park-System. This is used by any
extension user to park a call in one of twenty system call park zones.
Call Park Retrieve-System Assigns the feature number for retrieving a call parked by Call Park-
System.
Call Park-Station Assigns the feature number for Call Park-Station. This is used by any
extension user to park a call in that extension’s call park zone.
Call Park Retrieve-Station Assigns the feature number for retrieving a call parked by Call Park-
Station.
Call Forwarding-All Call Set Assigns the feature number for Call Forwarding of all calls.
Call Forwarding-Busy Set Assigns the feature number for Call Forwarding of calls to busy
extensions.
Call Forwarding-No Answer Assigns the feature number for Call Forwarding of calls to no answer
Set extensions. .
Call Forwarding-to Trunk Assigns the feature number for setting the destination of Call Forward-
ing-No Answer to an outside party. ”
Call Forwarding-Busy/No Assigns the feature number for Call Forwarding of calls to extensions
3 Answer which are in busy or no answer status.
Conditions
Call Forwarding-to Trunk This feature number cannot include 3.”
9-D-46
Function
The following faxtions appear on the function line of this setting screen.
H tgj H pj HU,T fj
9-D-47
6.05 Numbering Plan (5/g)
hstea - Numbering Plan I OFL I PRG I SCR I DIR

------------------------------------------------~-----+ ----+------+ ----
Numbering Plan ( 519 1
+--------------------------------- -----------------------------+
I No. I Feature I DG1 I DG2 I DG3 I DC4 1
I ---+---------------------------------- ------+----+-----+-----+----- I
1 49 I Do Not Disturb Set ------------------I g I : I 1 I
I 50 I Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb Cancel -I I I IF I 1 I I
I 51 I Dial Call Pickup Deny Set -----------I 6 I 1 I * I
I 52 I Dial Call Pickup Deny Cancel ----------I 6 I 1 I # I I
1 53 1 call Vaiting Set -------------------I 6 1 2 1 0 1
I 54 I Call Vaiting Cancel ----------------I 6 I 2 I # I I
I 55 I BWOHCA Deny Set ---- ---- -------- 1 6 1 3 1 f 1
I 56 I BWOHCA Deny Cancel _____ - _______--__ 1 6 1 3 1 # 1 I
I 57 I BUSYOverride Denr Set -m--m - -------- 1 6 1 4 1 0 1 1
I 58 I BUSYOverride Deny Cancel ________----- 1 6 1 4 1 t) 1
I 59 I Data Line Security Set -------------I 6 I 5 I t I I
I 60 I Data Line Security Cancel _______----- 1 6 1 5 1 # 1 1
+-------------------------------------------4
COHNON
B INDEX @ I 1 4 HRD CPY 8 t
..
Summary
The fifth screen of the System-Numbering Plan various functions.
screen, constructed with nine screens, sets (Password level : Two or higher)
feature numbers for executing or canceling
I Assigning Items ’ I Default I - Selection of Value -.-

3-B-l .oo
Do Not Disturb Set
4-D-6.00
I **’ I 5-B-4.00
3-B-l .oo
Call Forwarding/Do Not ##0
4-D-6.00
Disturb Cancel
4-F-2.01
Enter one to four digits composed of numbers,*, to 2.05
and #. 5-B-4.00
5-D-2.01
to 2.05
Dial Call Pickup Deny Set 61* 3-B-l .OO
4-D-3.03
5-B-l .03
Dial Call Pickup Deny Cancel 6l#
Continued
9-D-48
Continued
Assigning Item DE"-,: ' Selection of Value Reference
Call Waiting Set j 62 - 3-B-1.00

I 4-D-7.20
5-B-5.00
I I
Enter one to four digits composed of numbers,*,

BSS/OHCA Deny Set 3-B-1.00
and #.
4-D-2.03
I BSSIOHCA Deny Cancel I 63e I

3-B-1.00
4-D-5.00
5-B-3.00
I Data Line Security Set 3-B-1.00

4-I-6.00
IData Line Security Cancel 65#

I
5-G-4.00
9-D-49
Do Not Disturb Set Assigns the feature number for Do Not Disturb S2i.
Call Forwarding/Do Not Assigns the feature number for Call Forwarding , Do No; 1 %;t: C ;-zE’.
Disturb Cancel
Dial Call Pickup Deny Set Assigns the feature number for Dial Call Pickup Deny Set. This .a: :;5s
an extension user to prohibit other extensions from answering calls
arriving at his extension.
Dial Call Pickup Deny Assigns the feature number for Dial Call Pickup Deny Cancel.
Cancel
Call Waiting Set Assigns the feature number for Call Waiting Set. This allows an
extension user to hear a call waiting tone when another call arrives
during an existing call.
Call Waiting Cancel Assigns the feature number for Call Waiting Cancel.
BSS / OHCA Deny Set Assigns the feature number for BSS/OHCA Deny Set.
BSS / OHCA Deny Assigns the feature number for BSS/OHCA Deny Cancel. BSS/OHCA
_ Cancel Deny Cancel is used when the called extension is off-hook. BSS and
OHCA allows a call to be made using the ICM button. BSS sets green
240 wink on the called party’s ICM button while OHCA allows Hands-free
Answerback to PITS KX-I7130, KX-T123230D or KX-T123235.
Busy Override Deny Set Assigns the feature number for Busy Override Deny Set. Enabling this
feature prevents other extensions from using Executive Busy Override
on this extension.
Busy Override Deny Assigns the feature number for canceling Busy Override Deny.
Cancel
Data Line Security Set Assigns the feature number for setting data communication mode.
When set this feature prevents any call progress tones from being sent
to the extension.
Data Line Security Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling data communication mode.
Conditions
Same as the “Numbering Plan (l/9).”
9-D-50
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen
operation of function keys are described in Section 7-l “Operation of Function Keys.”
Only a message is provided here.
INDEX>Numbering Plan (l-9)= B
9-D-51
Srstem - Numbering Plan I OFL I PRG I SCR I DIR

------------------------------------------------------+-----+-----+-----+---~
Numbering Plan ( 619 1
+--------------------------------------------------------------+
I No. I Feature I DGl I DG2 1 DG3 I DG4 I
I ----t---------------------------------------+ ---+---e+-----+-----
I 61 I Pickup Dialing Programming ------------I 6 I 6 I 0 I i
II 63
62 II Pickup
Pickup Dialing
Dialing Set
Cancel ________-________ 11 66 11 6g 11 #g 11
---------___------ f
I 64 I Absent Hessage Set --------------------I :: I 4 I I
I 65 I Absent Message Cancel -------------I # I 4 1 I I
1 66 I Timed Reminder Confirm --------------I * I5101 I
I 67 I Timed Reminder Set --------------------I $ I 5 I 1 1
I 68 I Timed Reminder Cancel _---------------- I 8 I 5 I I
I 69 I Voice Calling Mode Set ___- ______-__-- 1 6 1 7 1 t I I
I 70 I Voice Calling Hode Cancel -------------I 6 1 7 I # _,I _ ;
I 71 I Voice Call ing Denv Set ___-__--_-- ----I 6 1 8 1 0 1
I I 72 I Voice Calling Deny Cancel ________-- --I 6 1 8 1 s 1 1
+-------------------------------”””----------------------------+
B COHHON
8 INDEX 1 I I B HRD CPY1 B
Summary
The sixth screen of the System-Numbering Plan (Password level : Two or higher)
sets the feature numbers for executing or
canceling various functions.
.f
Assigning kerns Default - Selection-&Value Reference
Enter one to four digits consisting of numbers 3-B-l .OO

Pickup Dialing Programming 660 and *. 5-A-2.04
Pickup Dialing Set 66*
Pickup Dialing Cancel 66#
Absent Message Set *4 3-B-l .OO

Enter one to four digits consisting of numbers, *, 4+7 o.
and #. 5G-i.00
Absent Message Cancel #4
Timed Reminder Confirm *50 3-B-i .OO

4-l-3.00
Timed Reminder Set *51 3-B-l .OO

4-I-3.00
5-G-3.00
Continued
9-D-52
Timed Reminder Cancel
i------
Voice Calling Mode Set 1 67* 1 Enter one to four digits consisting of numbers, -, 1 2-3-y X
and #. I4-M33
Voice Calling Deny Cancel I 68# I r

I
3-B-l .3C
4-D-2.02
.c
-- -- -
9-D-53
Pickup Dialing Programming Pickup Dialing is a feature of SLT telephones which allows automatic
calling when going off-hook. This feature allows the extension user to
program the number to be called.
Pickup Dialing Set This feature number enables Pickup Dialing.
Pickup Dialing Cancel This feature number cancels Pickup Dialing.
Absent Message Set Assigns the feature number for setting Absent Message. This is used
by a user when he wants to inform callers of the reason he is away
from his desk. The message will only appear on PITS equipped with
display or Attendant Consoles.
Absent Message -Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Absent Message.
Timed Reminder Confirm Assigns the feature number for confirming the time set by Timed
Reminder. This feature is available only for PITS equipped with
display.
Timed Reminder Set Assigns the feature number for setting Timed Reminder.
Timed Reminder Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Timed Reminder.
Voice Calling Mode Set Assigns the feature number for setting Voice Calling Mode. This is set
at the calling extension. Voice calling uses the ICM button to make an
announcement through the speaker of the called extension when the
called extension is idle.
Voice Calling Mode Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Voice Calling Mode. This
sets signal alerting.
:
Voice Calling Deny Set Assigns the feature number for setting Voice Calling Deny. This is set
by the called extension to deny voice calling.
Voice Calling Deny Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Voice Calling Deny.
_ .. .-.. :*.
Conditions
Pickup Dialing Programming This feature number cannot include “#.”
9-D-54
Function
/ZJHRDCPY m II8
iNDEX>Numbering Plan (l-9)= 0

pj 1 H fg HExr B
---. -..A.
9-D-55
6.07 Numbering Plan(7/9)
System - Numbering Plan I OFL I PRG I SCR i DIR

----me ----I --- ------------------- --+-----+ ---- +----+.----
Numbering Plan ( 7/9 1
+B--S-- ---em- -W-V ---- ------ ------- ------+
I No. I Feature I DGl I DG2 I DG3 l DG4 l
l----+---------------e -+---+--+---+---’
I 73 I Speed Dialing - Station Programming --I 6 I * 1
I 74 I Stat ion Lock Set -------------I :: I 6 I
I 75 I Station Lock Cancel ---------I # 1 6 1
I 76 I Walking COSSet ------------I * I 7 1
I77 Walking COSCancel --I-- ---I 48 I 7 I
1 78 Ualkins Station Set ----------I 0 I 8 I
I 79 Walking Station Cancel --------I # 1 8 1
1 80 )JasageC&t -----------------I $ 1 9 1
1 81 &sage Cancel --------------I # I 9 I I 1
1 82 Station Program Clear ---------I # 1 # 1 # 1
Message Vaiting Reply -------- 15171-1-1
(Reserve) l-l-l-l-l
+------- ---e------ -------------_+
)j COHHON2 INDEX 1 % Fi f$liRDCPYg! !4

..
Summary
The seventh screen of the System-Numbering (Password level : Two or higher)
Plan sets feature numbers for executing or
canceling various functions.

I I I I
Speed Dialing-Station v
Programming I I
Station Lock Set I *6 I
Enter one to four digits consisting of numbers, *,

91 and #.
Walking COS Cancel #7

I I
Walking Station Set
I ** I
Continued
9-D-56
(30393)
Continued
1
Assigning hems Default Selection of Value Reference
Walking Station Cancel #8 3-B-l .OO

3-F-3.00
Message Set *9 5-G-6.00
Message Cancel #9 Enter one to four digits consisting of numbers, * 3-B-l .OO
and #. 4-I-8.00
5-G-6.00
6-J-4.00
Station Program Clear ### 3-B-l .OO

4-l-l 0.00
5-G-8.00
Message Waiting Reply 57 5-G-6.00
9-D-57
(30393)
Descrfption of Assigning ttems
Speed Diating-Station Assigns the feature number for setting Speed Dialing to SLT(Single Line
Program Telephone).
Station Lode Set Assigns the feature number for setting Electronic Station Lock. When set
the extension user cannot place outgoing CO calls from that extension.
Station Lo& Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Electronic Station Lock Out.
Walking COS Set Assigns the feature number for setting Walking COS. Thii allows an
extension user :o temporarily change the COS of an extension to that of
another extension.
Walking COS Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Walking COS.
Walking Station Set Assigns the feature number for starting to move a telephone set to another
location.
Walking Station Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling the moved extension.
Message Set Assigns the feature number for setting Message Waiting indication.
This feature number is available only for SLT’s not for PITS%.
Message Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Message Waiting indication.
Station Program Clear Assigns the feature number for clearing data assigned by other feature
numbers, such as Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb/Timed Reminder, etc..
Message Waiting Reply Assigns the feature number for replying the Message Waitihg indication set
by other extensions.
This feature number is available drily for a Single Line Telephone with
MESSAGE lamp.
Conditions
Same as therNurrtxring Plan (l/9)-.”
Function
B H 1 M m EXIT m
9-D-58
(30393)
Ystel - Number ins Plan I OFL I PRG I SCR 1 DIR

---- -----m--w- ---+---*---+---+----”
Numberins Plan (819)
+--S-------------- -----------------e-+
I No.I Feature I DGl I DG2 1 DG3 I DG4 1
I-------------- --+----+---+---+-- I
I 85 I Hisht Mode Set ---- --l 7 I 0 I * I
I 86 1 Hi&t Hode Cancel - ---I 7 I 0 I * I I
I 87 I Hi&t Service Hand We Set -I 7 I 1 I = I
I 88 I Nisht Service l4mual Hode Cancel --I 7 I 1 I ) I I
I 89 I Flexible Night Service ------ l 7 I 2 I
I 90 I Rerote Station Lock Set -------- 17131* 1 !
I 91 I Remote Station Lock Cancel -------1713lnI I
f 92 I Remote DNDSet --------~----I 7 1 4 1 $ 1
I 93 I Remote DNDCancel ---- ----l 7 I. .4 I I I t
I 94 I Remte FUD Cancel ------w----I 7 1 5 1 1 1
I 95 I. Remote FWDCancel .- One Time -----I 7 1 6 1 1
I 96 I BGHThrouth External Paging -------I 7 I 7 I I I
--,,,,,--,--,--,---------------------------~
Summary
The eighth screen of the System-NumberingPlan (Password level : Two or higher)
sets feature numbers for executing or canceling
various functions.
Night Mode Set 70+ 3-B-8.05

4-t-1.03
Night Mode Cancel 70# 5-G-1.03
Night Service Manual Mode 71+ 3-B-1.00

Set Enter one to four digits consisting of numbers, *, 4-l-1.03
and #. 5-G-1.03
Night Service Manual Mode 71# 6-J-1.02
Cancel
3-B-1.00
Flexible Night Service 72
3-B-6.03
4-I-1.02
5-I-1.02
6-J-1.01
Continued
9-D-59
ontinuec
Remote Station Lock Set i-B-1.OO

73’
.-I-l 1.oo
Remote Station Lock Cancel i-G-9.00
73#
i-J-5.00
Remote DND Set 74*
Remote DND Cancel 74# Enter one io four digits consisting of numbers, *,
I
and tt.
BGM Through External 3-B-l .OO

77
Paging 4-H-2.00
5-F-2.00
6-I-2.00
9-D-60
Night Mode Se: Assigns the feature number for setting Night mode manually (for
operator 1 only). This is used when night mode is set to “Manual.”
Night Mode Cancel Assigns the feature number for setting Day mode manually (for
operator 1 only).
Night Service Manual Mode Assigns the feature number for starting Night Service mode manually
Set (for operator 1 only). This is used when night mode is set to “Auto.”
Night Service Manual Mode Assigns the feature number for starting Night Service mode automati-
Cancel cally (for operator 1 only).
Flexible Night Service Assigns the feature number for setting an answering point in Night
mode (for operator 1 only).
Remote Station Lock Set Assigns the feature number for setting Electronic Station Lock to
extensions (for operators 1 and 2 only).
Remote Station Lock Assigns the feature number for unlocking extensions (for operators 1
Cancel and 2 only).
Remote DND Set Assigns the feature number for setting Do Not Disturb to extensions (for
operators 1 and 2 only).
Remote DND Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Do Not Disturb for
extensions (for operators 1 and 2 only).
Remote FWD Cancel Assigns the feature number for canceling Call Forwarding-No Answer
..
for extensions (for operators 1 and 2 only).
Remote FWD Cancel- Assigns the feature number for canceling Call Forwarding-No Answer
One Time for extensions only once (for operators 1 and 2 only).
BGM Through External Assigns the feature number for sending BGM (background music)
Paging through External Pager (for operator 1 only).
; ‘L
Conditions
Same as the “Numbering Plan (l/9).”
9-D-61
Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen
COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS. OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys are
available in all setting screens. INDEX key is also available in this screen. The
Q E] H M H EX,T H
9-D-62
6.09 Numbering Plan(9/9)
System - Numbering Plan I DFL I PRGI SCRI DIR

--------I---------------_I ----+-a-+ ---+--a+---
Numberins Plan i 919 1
+-------- -----------I- ---w----+
I No.I Feature I DC1 I DGZ I DW I 964 I
I--+---------- A----B+-‘---+---*--- I
I 9’7I Busy Out Trunk ----------- i?t8i*i
I 98 I tInbusy Trunk --------- t7i8igl I
I 99 I OGHRecord-------e--m- l?i9ill
Plwback ---------I
I 100 I OGW , j g 1 2 J I
11011uCDLosIn ------------I * 1 0 1 I
I 102 I ED Log out 7-------- I 8 I 0 I 1
I 103 I Remte Timed Rehder Confirm --- I 7 I L I 0 I
I 104 RemoteTimedReminderSet --- -
I 105 RemteTimed ReminderCancel -----
I 106 (Reserve)
I 107 Okserve)
I 108 (Reserve)
P..
Summary
The ninth screen of the System-Numbering Plan various functions.
sets feature numbers for executing or canceling (Password level : Two or higher)
I-
_ Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Reference
Busy Out Trunk 78* 3-B-1.00

3-F-8.00
Unbusy Trunk 7B# 6-J-l 0.00
OGM Record 791 3-0 1.oo

3-F-4.00
OGM Playback 792 6-J-8.00
1 Enter one to four digits consisting of numbers,
UCD Log In *0 *, and #. 3-B-l .oo
4-D-8.00
UCD Log Out * #I 5-B-6.00
Remote Timed Reminder Confirm 7*0 6-J-13.00
Remote Timed Reminder Set 7*1
Remote Timed Reminder Cancel 7#
9-D-63
(30393)
Busy Out Trunk Assigns the feature number for manually putting a trunk into busy status
(for operator 1 only).
Unbusy Trunk Assigns the feature number for canceling Busy Out Trunk (for operator 1
only).
OGM Record Assigns the feature number for recording OGM (for operator 1 only).
OGM Playback Assigns the feature number for playback of OGM (for operator 1 only).
UCD Log In Assigns the feature number for setting extensions to UCD (Uniform Call
Distribution) se&e.
UCD Log Out Assigns the feature number for removing extensions from UCD service.
Remote Timed Reminder Assigns the feature number for confirming the time set by Remote Timed
Confirm Reminder.
This feature is available for the Operator 1 and 2 at the Attendant Con-
soles only.
Remote Timed Reminder Assigns the feature number for setting Remote Timed Reminder.
Set This feature is available for the Operator 1 and 2 at the Attendant Con-
soles only.
Remote Timed Reminder Assigns the feature number for canceling Remote Timed Reminder.
Cancel This feature is available for the Operator 1 and 2 at the Attendant Con-
soles only.
..
Conditions
Same as the ‘Numbering Plan (l/9).”
Function
The:following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.
are available in all setting screens. INDEX keys is also available in this screen.
The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-l “Operation of Function
9-D-64
(30393)
7.00 Communication Interface
System - Communication Interface I OFL I PRG I SCR I SEL

------------------------------- ---We---+----+ ----J-----*----
I- t-------------------- ------w-------e
I Iter I SIO 81 1 SIO #2 I Remote i

I I Cferrinal) I NDR) I wdem) I
I---------+--------e-- -----*----------
I l&-code I I <m+tF> I <csl+LD I
I Baud Rate I 1200 baud I 1200 baud I X99 baud 13~
I Uord Length I 7 bits I 7 bits I Bbits I
I Parity I Hark I Hark I l?mwnPw~l
I Stop Bit I 1 bit I 1 bit I 1 bit I
+----------,---------- ---------W--W--+
Summary
Assigns parameters for the RS-232 C ‘ports and
Modem (Modulator and Demodulator).
NL-Code <CR+LF> cCR+LF> : Carriage Return and Line Feed 2-D-3.00

<CR> : Carriage Return 3-F- 1.OO
14-B-2.00
Baud Rate 1200 : for 11 O/l 50/300/600/l 200/2400/4800/9600 : 15-8-2.00
SIo4t1.2 Baud rate for SIO 16
300 : for 300/1200 : Baud rate for Remote f7
Remote
I I
Word Length 7 bits : tor 7 bits/8 bits: number of bits for SIO
SIo#H ,2 6 biisI7 bits/8 bits: number of biis for Remote
8 biis : for
Remote
I J
Continued
9-D-65
Continued
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Referencs
Parity Mark : for None/Marl&pace/Even/Odd : Parity for SIO 2-D-3.00

510#1,2 3-F-l .OO
None : for None/Even/Odd : Parity for Remote 14-B-2.OC
Remote 15-B-2.OC
16
Stop Bit 1 bit 1 bit/2 bits : Stop bit for SIO 17
1 bit/l .5 bits./2 bits : Stop bit for Remote
9-D-66
NL-Code Assigns the New Line code, for Carriage Return, for SIO #1 (Terminal),
St0 #2 (SMDR : Station Message Detail Recording) and Remote (MODEM).
Baud Rate Assigns the Baud rate for SIO #1, SIO #I2 and Remote. The baud rate is the
number of bits transmitted per second between this system and the device.
Word Length Assigns the data length for SIO #l , SIO #I2 and Remote. The data length is the
number of bits required per character.
Parity Assigns the type of Parity check for SIO fcl , SIO #2 and Remote. Mark and
space means that there is a fixed polarity parity bit for each character. Even and
odd means that the number of bits including the parity bits is even or odd.
(1,3,5,7,9 etc. is odd 2,4,6,8, etc. is even)
Stop Bit Assigns the number of Stop bit for SIO #l, SIO #2 and Remote. Stop bits are
used to signal the end of a character and that the next bit received is the start bit
of the next character.
Conditions
It is possible to change assigning items in “System-Communication Interface” while
On-site administration or Remote administration is performed or SMDR is being
printed out. New setting becomes effective when those operation modes are
finished.
Function
9-D-67
8.00 Speed Dialing - System
+------------------------------------+
I 0O:NORHAL
+----3--------------------------- I 01:Restriction Level-01
i 001 1 10 I 1234567890123456 I 02:Restriction Level-02
1 002 I 01 I 12345678901234567 I 03:Restriction Level- 03
I 003 I 01 I 123456789012345678 I 04:Restriction Level-04
I 004 I 01 I 2345678901234567890 I 05:Restriction Level-05
1 005 i 01 I 1234567890123456789012 I 06:Restriction Level-06
I 006 I 02 I 1234567890123 I U7:Restriction Level-07
I 007 I 02 I 123456789012345678901 I 08:Restriction Level- 08
I 009 I 02 I 123456789123456 I 10:Respiction Level- 10
I 010 I 09 I 12345678901234567 I 1l:Restriction Level- 11
I 011 I 09 I 1234567890123456789 _-1 12:Restriction Level- 12
I 014 I 16 1 12345678901234567890123456789012 I 15:Restriction Level-15
+----------------------m----me+ 16:Restriction Level- 16
Summary
Assigns toll restriction levels and speed dialing Dialing-System.
codes for Speed Dialing. (Password level : Three or higher)
There are 15 screens provided for Speed
?
Assigning Items Defauft Selection of Value . 1 Referem
Type 00 00 : checked against the system toll 4-C-4.02

restriction feature 5-A-2.02
01 to 16 : first checked against toll restriction 6-D-2.01
level of extension users.
Dial blank Maximum 32 digits composed of numbers, *, # 4-C-4.02

and marks below: 4-I-5.00
P (Pause) 5-A-2.02
F (Flash) 6-D-2.01
- Wphen) 6-J-3.00
[ (Start of secret dialing)
] (End of secret dialing)
9-D-68
No. Speed dialing codes appear on the CRT screen.
Type Assigns the toll restriction level for each of the speed dialing codes.
Dial Assigns the actual digits to be dialed including numbers,*, #, P, F, -, [, ] . There is

a maximum of 32 digits. For hiding the digits, surround them with brackets [ 1. The
dialed digits are not appeared on the display of PITS (if provided) and SMDR call
record.
Conditions
If “System-Operation”, Tenant Service is set to “Yes,” 200 speed dialing codes
can be split between tenant 1 and tenant 2. To split them, “System-Tenant”,
Speed Dialing-System Boundary must be executed.
Function
COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, iNS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
operation of function keys are described in Section 7-l “Operation of Function Keys.” ,,
INDEX>System Speed Dial No. (OOl-200)= 0
H H u m HEXIT fg
- ._,” - .:-.:.
9-D-69
9.00 Absent Message
SysteB - Absent Message I OFL I ?RG I SCR I DIR

---------------------------------------------+ -----+-----+-----+----.
I Fixed Hessage I Flexible Hessage I
1 I Will Return Soon I 7 I &me New York i

I21 Gone Home I81
I 3 I In a Heetins ISI I
I 4lBack at xX:%%%%1101
I 5lhtUntil%W%X Ill1 f
I 6 I At Ext 3XxX I 12 I
I 13 I i
I 1; - I 14 I
I - I 15 I i
I 1; - I 16 I I
+------------------+------------------~
Summary
Sets absent messages.
(Password level : Three or higher)
I Assigning Items 1 Default 1 Selection of Value Referena
Fixed messages which cannot be changed 4-I-7.00

% : enter these at extensions 5-G-5.00
Flexible Message (7 to 16) blank Flexible message

A maximum of 16 digits composed of characters,
numbers, and up to five %
% : enter these at extensions
9-D-70
Fixed Message (1 to 6) Fixed messages to be displayed on a PITS telephone with the display.
These messages cannot be changed by system programming.
Extension user can set the desired one to his or her PITS telephone set.
If the message assigned contains parameters, these should be entered
by the extension user.
Flexible Message (07 to 16) Assigns variable messages to be displayed on a PITS telephone with
the display. These messages can be assigned and changed by system
programming. Extension user can set the desired one to his or her
PITS telephone and if the message contains any parameters, these
should be entered by the extension user.
Conditions
If ‘System-Operation’, Tenant Service is assigned to “Yes,” 10 flexible messages
(7 to 16) can be split between tenants 1 and 2. To split them, “System-Tenant”,
Absent Message Boundary is used. $ix fixed messages cannnot be split between
tenants. They are used by both tenants in common.
A flexible message in use by an extension user cannot be changed or deleted.

If you attempt, the changed data cannot be saved and the following enor message
. appears on the screen.
**** ERROR: Some extensions are using that message.
Function
9-D-71
(30393)
E. Group Screen
1.OOTrunk Group
1.01 Trunk Group(l/2)
Group - Trunk Group I OFL I PRG I SCR I SEL

-----------------------------------------------+----+-----t-----+---~---
Trunk Group’ No. = 01 (l/2)
+-----------------------------------------------+
I Type ------------I DM I
I Nam s---------------- I
I Tenant -------------I 1 I
I IncorindOutgoing -----I Incoming Only
I Incoming Hode CDayY,----I DIL 1:l !
I Incomins Wade (Hisht) --I FLEXIBLE
I Intercept Routing @ayY, -I A T T (T~pe:No.) I
I Intercept Routing (Night) I E X T:5002 (T~pe:No.)
I Toll Restriction Level --I 01 t
I Toll Restriction Table --I 3
I Dialing Plan ------I Type-A I
I CO-CODuration Limit ---I 3 minute M (l-64)
I Disconnect Time -----I 1.5 second w I
I..
I Pause Time --------I 3.5 second (s)
I Hook Svitch Flash Time --I None I
+---------------------------------------+
Summary I
The Group-Trunk Group screen consists of 16 data for trunk groups.
groups, each of which includes two screens. This (Password level : Two or higher)
screen is the first screen used to assign various
1
-Assigning Items ’ Default ’ ?-Selection of Value .t Reference
,
Type DDD ’ DDD : Direct Distance Dialing ~3-B-7.05
FEX : Foreign Exchange 3-c-1 .Ol
\,WATS : Wide Area Telecommunication Service 3-c-l .03
PVL : Private tine 3-c-4.00
PBX : Behind PBX 3-D-2.03
DID : Direct Inward Dialing 3-D-2.07
Name co A maximum of three digits consisting of charac- 3-B-7.05

I ters, numbers and marks : Trunk group name
Tenant blank 1 or 2 : tenant number 3-B-7.05

3-B-4.00
Incoming/Outgoing Both-Way Incoming Only : for Incoming calls only 3-B-7.05

Outgoing Only : for Outgoing calls only
Both-Wav : for both
Continued
9-E-l
ha- -- -ci Ite7-S
.??a>.- De!ault Selection of Value Refeferzs
_ -
ATT: for ATT : placing calls to the Attendant Console Y v ,.--^’

q-1-7
“with ATLC" DIL 1 :l: placing calls by Direct In Line 1 :l 3-D-j.?:
DIL 1:l : DIL 1 :N: placing calls by Direct In Line 1 :N 3-D-2.:'
for “without DISA : placing calls by Direct Inward 3-3-2.E
ATLC’ Sysiem Access 3-D-2.;:
TAFAS 1 : placing calls by Trunk Answer from 4-D-4.X
Any Station-l 5-B-2.K
TAFAS 2 : placing calls by Trunk Answer from
Any Station-2
Incoming Mcde (Night) FLEXIBLE Day Mode : placing calls in Day mode 3-B-7.E
FIXED : placing calls to a Fixed destination 3-B-8.OC
FLEXIBLE : placing calls to a Flexible destination
DISA : placing calls by Direct Inward
System Access
Intercept Routing (Day) None (Type) 3-B-7.05

None : not intercepting 3-F-5.00
ATT : transferring to Attendant Console 3-F-6.OC
EXT : transferring to an extension
(No.) : setting is unnecessary if “None” is

selected for type
Directory number: if “EXT” is selected for type
Intercept Routing (Night) None (Type)

None : not intercepting
EXT : transferring to an extension
(No.) : if “None” is selected for type,

setting is unnecessary
Directory number: when “EXT” is selected for type
Toll, Restriction Level 1.6 01 to 16.: toll8 restriction level 3-B-7.05

.._ 3-c-1.03
Toll Restriction Table 1 1 to 8 : area office code table 3-B-7.05

3-c-1.03
9-l-l .oo
Continued
9-E-2
ononuet
Assigning Items Defal leference
Dialing Plan Non Type-4 l-B-7.05

loncj distance 32: 4 -NPA+NXX+XXXX I-C-1.oo
iocal ct NXX+XXXX i-c-2.00
Type-B :
long distance call NPA+NXX+XXXX
local call NNX+XXXX
Type-C :
long distance call f+NPA +NXX+XXXX
lt NNX+XXXX
local call NNX+XXXX
None : no Toll Restrictron
NPA: Area code NXX, NNX: Office code
XXXX: Subscriber number
,N:2to9 P:O,l A:Oto9 X:Oto9) /
I
CO-CO Duration Limit 10 1 to 64 : CO-CO duration limit (minute(s)) 3-B-7.05
3-B-l 0.00
3-D-2.02
4-F-l .03
4-F-2.05
4-G-6.01
4-G-6.02
5-D-2.05
6-G-1.04
6-H-2.00
Disconnect Time 1C
.w 1.5/4.0 : disconnecting time (second(s)) ‘* 3-B-7.05
3-B-10.00
4-G-8.00
6-H-6.00
Pause Time 3.5 1 S/2.5/3.5/4.5 : pause time (second(s)) 3-B-7.05

3-B-10.00
3-c-4.00
3-B-7.05
Hook Switch Flash Time
s,y None : no Flash Service
80/300~900/1200 : Flash Service hooking 3-B-10.00
time. (milliseconds) 4-G-9.00
%-q & 5-E-3.00
I
9-E-3
Type Assigns a type for each trunk group.
Name Assgns a name to each trunk group.
Tenant Assigns the tenant to which each trunk group belongs.
Incoming/Outgoing Assigns each trunk group to incoming only, outgoing only, or both.
Incoming Mode (Day) Assigns the destination for incoming calls during day service.
Incoming Mode (Night) Assigns the destination for calls during night service.
Intercept Routing (Day) Assigns the destination for Intercept Routing (Day).
Intercept Routing (Night) Assigns the destination for Intercept Routing (Night).
Toll Restriction Level Assigns TRLT (Toll Restriction Level of trunk group).
Toll Restriction Table Assigns Area/Office code table number for Toll Restriction.
Dialing Plan Selects the dialing plan, selecting ‘None” causes no Toll Restriction.
CO-CO Duration Limit Sets the maximum duration for a CO-CO call.
Disconnect Time Sets disconnecting time. This allows the CO time to release its resources
before another call is placed outgoing from the PBX.
Pause Time Sets the pause time used in speed dialing and hook switch
,. below.
Hook Switch Flash Time Assigns whether Flash Service is available or not.
If available, set the hooking time (pause length).
Conditions
The aFig@?g items:Type, incoming Mode (Day/Night), Destination (DIL 1 :N Only)
Type and Number, CO Appeaiairti Type can be changed only when all’ the trunks
belonging to the trunk group are not in use. If any trunk is used, it is impossible to
change.
Tenant If U-” .IS displayed here, “System-Operation”, Tenant Service is set to
“No.”
Incoming Mode (Day) If “Al7 ‘DISA,” “TAFAS 1” or “TAFAS 2” is selected, the followings are
checked:
AlT: Checks whether ATLC card is equipped or not.
DISA: Checks whether DISA card is equipped or not.
TAFAS 1: Checks whether “System-Operation”, External Paging 1 is set
to “Yes.”
TAFAS 2: Checks whether “System-Operation”, External Paging 2 is set
to “Yes.”
9-E-4
Incoming Mode (Night) If “FIXED” or “FLEXIBLE” is changed to another option, it cancels all the
settings of CO lines in Trunk-CO Line”, Night Answer Point (Type:No.)
which belong to the trunk group.
If “FLEXIBLE” is changed to ‘FIXED”, the Night Answer Points are not
canceled.
‘If ‘FIXED” is changed to ‘FLEXIBLE”, the Night Answer Points are not
canceled except that “NAG” is assigned as a Night Answer Point.
Dialing Plan The difference between this and “System-Operation”, Home Dialing Plan
is as follows:
“System-Operation”, Home Dialing Plan selects the type of the office

where this system is installed.
“Group-Trunk Group”, Dialing Plan” selects the type of the office which
each trunk group is connected to.
<Example>
I rI -------
Trunk Group 2 1 -'
1 1 System I I I
I I I
I I I
I I We-B I
I I I
Type-A 1 Offlce 2 is: I
I
1Ofke 1 is: I connected to the I
I located where this I trunk group 2. I
L -. ..
I system is installed. e-D----
J
1 connected to the
trunk group 1.
L -------
In the example above, programming is as follows:
Assign “Type A” in ‘System-Operation”, Home Dialing Plan.
: Assign “Type-A” for trunk group 1 and “Type-B”ffsr$runk group 2 in
“Group-Trunk Group”, Dialing Plan.
Relation between trunk group/CO line setting and PITS DN button setting
1. Private CO setting
If “Extension-Station”, Type is set to “PRV-CO” (Private CO) and Number is set to

the physical number of a CO line,
(1) Conditions for assigning DN buttons
l The designated CO line is assigned to a trunk group by Trunk-CO Line”,

Trunk Group.
The trunk group should have “Group-Trunk Group”, Type assigned to ‘PVL
(Private tine).
1
l The designated CO line should not be assigned by other extensions.
9-E-5
(30393)
(2) Conditions for setting trunk groups
If a trunk group changes “Group-Trunk Group”, Type assigned to “PVL” (Private

Line) to another type and if any CO lines belonging to the trunk group are
selected to be “PRV-CO” (Private CO) in “Extension-Station, Type/Number,
those CO lines are canceled from “Extension-Station”, Type/Number automati-
cally.
2. Single CO, Group CO setting
If “Single CO” or “Group CO” is selected in “Extension-Station”, Type,
(1) Conditions of assigning DN buttons
l The designated CO line is assigned to a trunk group in ITTrunk-CO Line”,

Trunk Group.
The trunk group should have “Group-Trunk Group”, Type assigned to “DDD”
or ‘FEX” or “WATS” or “PBX.”
(2) Conditions of setting ‘Incoming Mode (Day)”
1) If “Incoming Mode (Day)” is changed from “DIL 1 :l” to another mode,

The trunk group changed to another mode in “Group-Trunk Group”, Incoming
Mode (Day) is assigned in “Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk Group. The “Trunk-CO
Line”, Direct Termination setting is canceled.
2) If “Incoming Mode (Day)” is changed from ‘DIL 1 :N” to another mode,

“Group-Trunk Group”, Destination (DIL 1: N only) setting is canceled.
(3) Conditions of setting “CO Appearance Type” - This setting is not valid.
Refer to Section 3-D-2.10 “Flexible SCO/GCO Assignment” for further
information.
(4) Condiiions of setting Type”
Changing “Type” to ‘PVL” (Private Line) from any other modes cancels “Single
CO” or “Group COnassigned to a DN button of an-extension belonging to this.=:,
trunk group in “Extension-Station”, Type.
It is impossible to change from ‘DID” to any other modes or from any other
modes to ‘DID,” if any CO line in “Trunk-CO Line” belongs to the “Group-Trunk
Group.”
9-E-6
(30393)
3. Other Conditions
If the following types are selected for “Type,” the items listed below cannot be
assigned.
We Items Impossible to Assign
DDD DID Digit Modification Table

FEX PBX Access Code (No Restriction)
WATS PBX Access Code (Restriction)
PVL Incoming Mode (Day)

Incoming Mode (Night)
Destination (DIL 1 :N Only)
DID Digit Modification Table
PBX Access Code (No Restriction)
PBX Access Code (Restriction)
CO Appearance Type ..
PBX DID Digit Modification Table
DID Incoming/Outgoing
Incoming Mode (Day)
Toll Restriction Level
Toll Restriction Table
Dialing Plan
CO-CO Duration Limit
Disconnect Time
Pause Time
Hook Switch Flash Time
Destination (DIL 1 :N Only) Type and Number
Max. Dial No. after EFA Signal
CO Appearance Type
If the following types are selected for “Incoming/Outgoing,” the items below cannot
be assigned:
[I
Ir~coming/Outgoing
- - - Items Impossible to Assign
I
Incoming Only Toll Restriction Level
Toil Restriction Table
Dialing Plan
Outgoing Only Incoming Mode (Day)

Destination (DIL 1 :N Only)
9-E-7
If the following types are selected for “Incoming Mode (Day),” the item below cannot
be assigned:
Incoming Mode (Day) items impossible to Assign
Al-T Destination (DIL 1 :N Only)

DIL 1:l Type and Number
DISA
TAFAS 1
, TAFAS 2
If “System-Operaion” External Paging 1,2 is set to“No,” “TAFAS l/TAFAS 2”
cannot be assigned to “Incoming Mode (Day).”
Trunk Trunk Trunk

+ Group + Group + Group -+------
No. 01 (l/2) No. 01 (2/2) No. 02 (l/2)
Function
COMMON (SHO LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys are
available in all setting screens. INDEX, READ keys acealso available in this
screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-l “Operatiot?of
Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.
INDEX>Trunk Group No. (01-l 6)= 0

g pJ B B HEXIT B
READ>Trunk Group No. (01-l 6)= fl
@I F4
9-E-8
1.02 Trunk Group (2/2)
kmuP - Trunk Group i OFL I PRG I SCR I SEL

-I_-----------------__l_____l____ -+-----+---*--p--
Trunk Group Ho. = 01 W2)

-* -----‘--~~-------------------------~~~-~
I Destination (DIL 1:N Only) I PCKuP:Ol , PCKUP:02 t I
I Type and Number I E X T:5001, E X TM1 , I
I I I c W:l , E X T:5003, I
1 I PCKUP:24, PClUlP:2S , I
I DID Digit Hodification Table I 1 I
I PBX Access Code (Ho Restriction) i 811, 812. 813. 814,
I 1 82 t 83, 84 , . I
I PBXAccess Code (Restriction-) I 9 , 841. 85 , ,
I i
I Wax. Dial Ho. after EFA Signal f 0 ‘(O-3;) ’ ’
1 CO Appearance TYW I Single !
+-----------------------------------------------3
Summary
The GroupTrunk Group screen consistsof a assign various data for trunk groups.
maximum of 16 groups, each of which includes (Password level : Two or higher)
two screens. This is the second screen used to
Assigning Items Defautt Selection of Value Retina
Destination (DIL 1 :N Only) blank Type : destination 3-B-7.05

Type and Number blank : if not assigned 3-D-2.01
‘pi h&5 ICM : selecting intercom group
PCKUP : selecting pickup group
EXT : selecting extension
blank Number
blank : when “blank” is selected for type
01 to 32: pickup group number
three or four digits : extension number
1 to 8 : intercom group number
DID Digit Modification Table blank 1 to 4 : table number 3-B-7.05

3-D-2.03
9-K-2.00
Continued
9-E-9
(21292)
Continued
I Assigning Items
PBX Access Code (No
Restriction)
Default
blank 4A maximum of three digits composed of numbers 3-C-1.01
biank : not assigning I3-c-4.00

I
PBX Access Code (Restriction) blank Access codes with restriction 3-B-7.05
A maximum of three digits composed of numbers 3-C-l -ol
Up to eight codes can be assigned. 3-c-1 -03
blank : not assigning 34x00
Max. Dial No. after EFA Signal 0 0 : dialing is not acceptable 3-B-7.05
1 to 32 : maximum dialing digit(s) 4-G-9.00
5-E-3.00
CO Appearance Type Single Single: single CO 3-B-7.05

Group: group CO 3-D-2.01
. (This setting is not valid.) V I$, 9 3-D-2.08
3-O-2.09
44X,btp 3-D-2.10
i,.
9-E-l 0
(30393)
Destination (DIL 1 :N only) Assigns destination type and number only when “Incoming Mode (Day)” is
Type and Number set to DIL 1. N (the functon which enables an incoming call from one CO
line in one trunk group to arrive at one to eight destinations simultaneously
without assistance of operator).
Orderly setting is not necessary and inserting blanks between the items is
permissible.
DID Digit Modification Table Assigns the digit modification table to be used for DID calls. This allows
the DID incoming digits to be modified to match the numbering plan.
PBX Access Code (No In behind PBX or Centrex operation it is necessary for the system to
Restriction) send an access axle to the host PBX or Centrex followed by a pause.
This feature assigns the access code to be sent.
PBX Access Code This is the same as PBX Access Code with Pause except that the digits
(Restriction) following the access code are checked by the system for toll restriction.
Max. Dial No. after EFA Assigns maximum dialing digits after sending EFA (External Feature
Signal Access) signal.
CO Appearance Type This setting is not valid.

I Refer to Section 3-D-2.1 0 “Flexible SCO/GCO Assignment” for further
information.
Conditions
Same as “Group-Trunk Group (l/2)” screen.
Function
COMMON (SHO LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys are
available in all setting screens. INDEX, READ keys are also available in this
screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-l “Operation of
INDEX>Trunk Group No. (01 -IS)= fl
READ>Trunk Group No. (01-l 6)= 0
a B m HEXIT @
9-E-l 1
(30393)
2.00 ICM / Paging Group
TW.rLC ;J; k ‘- [. ,, ‘?
[Group - ICWPa~inc Group I OFL I PRG I SCR I SEL

------------------_--------------------- -----+-W.-s+ -----+----+---.
+-------------------+ +------------------+
t
I ICH Group I Tenant I I PAGGroup I Tenant I

-----v---+------- --------+-----..
-I 1 I 1 i f 1 I1 1
I I I
I2 I1 I I2 I1 I
I I I I
i 3 Ill 3 I 1 I
I I I I I
I4 Ill 4‘11 L
I I I I
I5 Ill 5 I 1 I
I I I L I I
6 I1 I I6 Ill
t I I I
I1 7 I 17 I1 1
t I I I
I8 Ill i 8 I1
+-----..---v----w--+
Summary
Assigns intercom groups and paging groups to
tenant 1 or 2
Assigning items Default Selection okValue Reference
CM Group (1 to 8) 1 1 or 2 : tenant number 3-B-7.01

Tenant
1 1 or 2 : tenant number 3-B-7.04

4-H-l .02
5-F- 1.02
6-I-1.02
9-E-l 2
Description,of Assigning Items
ICM Group (1 to 8)
Tenant Assigns intercom groups from 1 to 8 to tenant 1 or 2.
PAG Group (1 to 8)
Tenant Assigns paging groups from 1 to 8 to tenant 1 or 2.
Conditions
This screen must be programmed before programming “Group-Call Pickup Group” screen.
However, this screen does not appear if “System-Operation”, Tenant Service is set to ‘No.”
Function
. are available in this setting screen.
For operation, refer to Section 7-1 Qeration of Function Keys.”
9-E-l 3
3.00 Call Pickup Group
kOUP - Call Pickup Group I SL I PRG I SCR I DIR

.---------------------------------------------+---------+----+----
+---------------~+ ----____-__ - -__---- -+ -------------------+

1 PICK i ICI4 1 UCd I PAG I PICK I 104 I UCD I PAG I PICK I ICH I UCD I PAG I
I ----+---+----+e--+--m+ ---+-----+----..-+ ------+--+---+----
I 01 1 1 I17 I 1 I 12 I 1 I17 I 1 I 23 I 1 I17 I 1 I
1 02 1 1 l 17 I 1 I 13 I 1 I 17 I 1 I 24
I 1 I 17 I 1 I
I 03 I 1 I17 I 1 I 14 I 1 I17 I 1 I 25
I 1 117 I 1 I
IO4 I1 I17 I1 I15 I1 I17 I1 I26
I1 117 I1 I
1 05 1 1 l 17 1 1 I 16 I 1 I 17 I 1 I 27
I 1 I 17 I 1 I
IO6 I1 117 I1 I17 I1 I17 I1 I28
l1!17 I1 I
1 07 1 1 117 I 1 I 18 I 1 I17 I 1 l 29
I 1 I 17 I 1 l
IO8 I1 I17 I1 I19 I1 I17 I1 I30
I1 I17 I1 I
I 09 I 1 I17 I 1 I 20 I 1 I17 I 1 I 31
I 1 I17 I 1 I
Ii0 Ii 117 vi 121 ii 117 l1 132
l1 117 l1 l
I11I111711I22l111711I I I I I
+-------- ------ +------------ ---- ---+ ---------- -+
PICK:,,Call Pickup Group, ICH: ICH Group, UCD: UCD Group, PAG: Pasing Group
Summary
Assigns ICM (Intercom) group number, UCD pickup groups belong to.
(Uniform Call Distribution) group number and (Password level : Two or higher)
PAG (Paging) group number which the call
I _ ...__ .
I
Assigning Items Default Selection bf Value Reference
PICK (01 to 32) Pickup group number 3-9-7.01

ICM 1 1 to 8 : intercom group number 3-8-7.02
UCD blank 01 to 32 : UCD group number 3-3-7.03

blank : the call pickup group does not belong 3-a-2.05
to any UCD group 3-g-2.06
PAG blank 1 to 8 : paging group number

blank : the call pickup group does not belong
to any paging group
9-E-l 4
PICK (01 to 32)
ICM Assigns the intercom group number which the call pickup groups belong to.
UCD Assigns the UCD (Uniform Call Distribution) group number which the call
pickup groups belong to. UCD Group is comprised of more than one pickup
group.
PAG Assighs the paging group number which the call pickup groups belong to.
Paging Group is comprised of more than one pickup group.
Conditions
If “System-Operation (l/3)“, Tenant Service is set to “Yes,” “Group-ICWPaging
Group” setting must be done before setting this screen.
Pickup Groups must belong to any of the ICM groups. The tenant of a pickup group
is determined by the tenant of the ICM group to which the pickup group belongs.
When assigning a pickup group to a paging group, the tenant of the two groups
must be the same.
A UCD Group is composed of multiple pickup groups.
. Conditions of changing ICM Groups
1) The tenant of the old and new intercom groups must be the same, unless the
system is off-line.
2) All the extensions which belong to the old a_nd newly entered intercom groups
must not be currently used.
If any line is used, it is impossible to change.
Conditions of changing UCD group
All the extensions which belong to the c~~;fz~t and newly entered UCD groups
must not be curret%y used.
If any line is used, it is impossible to change.
Conditions of changing paging group
1) The tenant of the old and new paging groups must be the same, unless the
system is off-line.
2) All the extensions which belong to the old and newly entered paging groups
must not be currently used.
If any line is in use, it is impossible to change.
Table of relation between groups
A pickup group cannot belong to multiple intercom groups.

A paging group cannot belong to two tenants. A UCD group cannot belong to
multiple ICM groups.
9-E-l 5
System I
Tenant 1
RK
‘UP I TRK
group
L
,“i’“‘, II ,,;r2 I_ I
I I
ICM group 3
L Paging
-- group---1 Pas ling group
,---
n
c --7
--
Paging group 3 s
r I ZE- I 1 I I T1 Id
lff!!1
L group
-- 1 J
T 1
Pi&up Pickup Pickup Pickup Pickup Pickup
group 1 group 2 group 3 group 4 group 5 group 7
. . .
T,
. . . .. .. . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..~Tn
Function
9-E-l 6
F. Trunk Screen
1 .OO CO Line
‘runk - CD Line I OFL I PRG I SCR I DIR

-------------------~----~----------~~-----~-+----+----+--~-+~I.
Trunk Equipment No. = 2021

+------------------ ------ -------------+
I Trunk Group ----------- 1 01 I
I Trunk Name ------------I 24 I
‘1 Direct Termination ------I D N :5()m I
I Night Ansver Point (Trpe:Ho.) -I E X TM1
I Dial Wode ----_--------- 1 DT@ i
I DTHF Duration Time ------- 1 89 asecond I
I Pulse Speed --se---------} bv Speed I
I X Break -----------I 60 x
I CPCDetect ion ---------- I 50% msecond (s) I
I DID Start Arransement ------I Immediate Start I
+--------------------- --------------+
Summary
Assigns various parameters for CO lines. 144 screens are provided for CO Line.
This screen does not appear if any CO trunk card (Password level : Three or higher)
(LCOT, GCOT, DID) is not assigned in
Configuration-Slot Assignmentscreen.
Default Selection of Value

I Reference
01 : for CO 01 to 16 : trunk group number 3-B-7.05
16:forDID
Trunk Name TXXXX A maximum of ten digits composed of letters, 4-A-4.04

Physical number numbers and symbols
blank : no trunk name programmed
blank : for ‘With ATLC” DN and directory number (three or four digits): 3-D-2.01
Directory number : for call destination (Extension, Remote FDN,
“without ATLC” in UCD FDN)
physical number order None : no direct termination
of extensions paired
with CO lines
Continued
9-F-l
Continue
Night Answer Point Directory number : fol Type (select input) 3-B-8.OG
(Type : No.) each extension in None : no Night Answer Point 10-c-59.00
physical number UNA : Universal Night Answer
order EXT : Extension User
RMT : Remote Administration
NAG : Night Answer Group
No.
1 or 2 : for “UNA”
three or four digits : extension number
for “EXT”
I
DTMF DTMF: DTMF mode 3-c-3.00
Pulse : Pulse mode 1o-c-51 .oo
80 inset 80 msec/l60 msec : duration time 3-B-10.00
I Pulse Speed blank Low Speed/High Speed : pulse speed I None

blank
(40%)
I
DID Start Arrangement Send Delay Wink Immediate Start : immediate start type
Send Delay Wink : wink start type
3-D-2.03
9-F-2
(30393)
Trunk Group Assigns the trunk group number of the CO line.
Trunk Name Assigns the name of the CO line. This will appear on the CRT screen of
the Attendant Console and the display of PITS telephone (if provided)
when making oi receiving a CO call.
Direct Termination Assigns the directory ntimber of the destination, when the trunk group of
the line is set to “DIL 1 :l” in Incoming Mode (Day).
Night Answer Point Assigns Night Answer point when the “Incoming Mode (Night)” is assigned
(Type : No.) to ‘FIXED” or “FLEXIBLE.”
“NAG” can be selected only when Trunk Group ‘Incoming Mode (Night)” is
assigned to “FIXED.”
. If it is not assigned to “FIXED” nor ‘FLEXIBLE,” @-” appears in the setting
field, and it is impossible to assign a destination.
Dial Mode Assigns the dial type (DTMF or Pulse). This is the output mode regardless
of the dial mode of the telephone used.
If Pulse is selected, refer to Section 1 O-C-51 .OO “World Select 1 (WSl )”
about the following items.
l lnterdigit Pause
l Pulse Type
l % Break Detect
DTMF Duration Time Assigns the duration of the DTMF tones sent.
It is possible to assign this option only when the ‘Dial Mode” is set to
‘DTMF. When the dial mode is set to ‘Pulse,” this field is blank.
..
.
Pulse Speed Assigns the pulse speed.
It is possible to assign this option only when the “Dial Mode” is set to
‘Pulse.” When the dial mode is set to ‘DTMF,” this field is blank.
% break Assigns the % break for pulse digits. This is the ratio between on and off
hook signals during digit transmission.
r: -I
CPC Detection Assigns the &xc&d minimum duration for detecting CPC (Calling Patty -’
Control) signal.
DID Start Arrangement Assigns DID start type.

When the trunk group of the line is set to ‘DID”, there are two methods of
initiating a call. One is immediate start where the system outpulses the
digits as soon as the trunk is seized and the other is where the system
waits for a signal (wink star&) from the far end before any digits are sent.
Conditions
Before setting this screen, “Group-Trunk Group” screen must be programmed.
This screen cannot be selected from Trunk-submenu screen, if no CO trunk card
(LCOT or GCOT or DID) is programmed in “System-Configuration”, Slot Assignment.
If any one of the CO trunk cards is programmed, this screen can be selected.
J
9-F-3
(30393)
When selecting “1. CO Line” in Trunk submenu screen, the setting screen which has
the smallest Trunk Equipment No. appears on the screen first.
If the “Group-Trunk Group” containing the CO line has “Type” assigned to “DID,” the
following items cannot be entered : ” -” is displayed :
l Direct Termination
l Night Answer Point (Type : No)
l Dial Mode
l DTMF Duration Time
l Pulse Speed
l % Break
l CPC Detection
If “the Group-Trunk Group” containing the CO line has “Type” assigned to anything
other than ‘DID,” the following item cannot be entered : ” -” is displayed :
l DID Start Arrangement
Direct Termination This is assignable only when the “Group-Trunk Group” containing the CO
line has “Incoming Mode (Day)” assigned to “DIL 1 :l ,” Otherwise, ” -” is
displayed and setting is impossible.
Night Answer This is assignable only when the “Group-Trunk Group” containing the CO
Point (Type : No) line has “Incoming Mode (Night)” assigned to “FIXED” or ‘FLEXIBLE.”
Otherwise, ” -” -IS displayed and setting is impossible.
When pressing the NEXT key, this screen appears in ascending order of Trunk
Equipment number. After the largest number appears, the smallest one appears.
Function
COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV. INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys
are available in all setting screens. INDEX and READ keys are also available in this
screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-l “Operation of
Only messages are provided here.
INDEX>Trunk Equipment No. (Physical No.)=0
READ>Physical No.=0
m H m m &XIT H
9-F-4
2.00 Pager and Music Source
Trunk - Pager % Husic Source I OFL 1 PRG I SCR I DIR

-~------------““-~--~~~~--~~~-~~--~~~~--~---+-----+~--~+-~-+-’-
l ----------------------------------------------+
I I Tenant I Tone I Ml4 I

I--“‘-------11------+--------~-------+-------- I
I III 1 IYes I Yes I
I External Pager I----+--------+- ---+----
I I 2 I 1 I Yes I Ho I
+----------------------+
+-----------------------------+
I I Tenant I For Use I
----------------I--+--------~------ l
i Ill 1 I Hold&BGW I
I Husic Source I -----+---1--B+----- I
I -121 1 I HolcmGWI
+----------------------------------+
Summary
Assigns external pagers and music sources. Music Source 1,2” are set to “No” in thee sys-
This screen does not appear when all the assign- ternoperation (l/3) screen.
ing items of ‘External Paging 1,2” and ‘External (Password level : Three or higher)
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value- Fkiemnce
f3temal Pager l/2 3-D-2.04

Tenant 1 1 : tenant 1 4-D-4.00
2 : tenant 2 4-H-l .03
4-H-l .04
4-H-2.00
5-B-2.00
SF-l.03
5-F-1.04
5-F-2.00
6-l-1.03
6-l-1.04
6-i-2.00
Continued
9-F-5
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Referena
External Pager l/2 3-B-15.N

Tone No Yes : sending confirmation tone 4-H-1.03
No : not sending confirmation tone 4-H-1.04
4-H-2.00
5-F-1.03
5-F-1.04
5-F-2.00
6-I-l .03
6-l-l .04
6-I-2.00
BGM No Yes : sendii BGM - of TkFU.S J<(s-/ 4-H-2.()0

No : not sending BGM S-F-2.00
6-I-2.00
Music Source l/2 3-E-1.00

Tenant 1 1 : tenant 1 3-f-13.00
2 : tenant 2 4-H-2.00
4-l-4.00
For Use Hold & BGM Hold : Using for SOUR33 Of f&Sic On HOti 5-F-2@I
BGM : using for source of BGM 6-I-2.00
Hold 8 BGM : using for source of Musk on Hold
or BGM
9-F-6
(40993)
External Pager 1.2 Assigns :r.e tenant number which the pager and music source belong to.
Tenant
3e:erm;nes whether confirmation tone will be sent or not at the beginning
Tone of using the external pager.
Assigns whether BGM will be sent or not when the external pager is idle.
BGM
Music Source l/2 Assigns the tenant number which the pager and music source belong to.
Tenant
Assigns usage. This determines at which times the music sources will be
For Use used.
?
Conditions
This screen cannot be selected if “System-Operation”, External Paging 1, 2IExternal
Music Source 1, 2 are all set to “No.”
External Pager
Y-” will be displayed here if “System-Operation”, Tenant Service is set to
Tenant
“No.”
Tone/BGM II-” will be displayed here if “System-Operation”, External Paging 1.2 is

set to “No.”
Music Source Us” will be displayed here if “System-Operation”, Tenant .Fervice is set to
Tenant “No.”
u-” will be displayed here if “System-Operation”, External Music Source
For Use
1, 2 is set to “No.”
.i Function
The following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen. --L;’
9-F-7
3.00 AGC
Trunk - AGC I Ol?L I PRG I SCR I DIR

.---------------------------------------------- --+----+-----+-----+----
+-----------------------------+
I AGCcard I Shelf No. I Slot No. I Tenant I
-------+- ------+------+------ I
11 I1 lO3llI
2 04 I 1 I
I 3 I 05
I 4 I 2 I 11
+--------------+-------------+
I ToneDetect I Yes I
+--------------..--- +-------------+
Summary
Assigns tenant number which the AGC (Password level : Three or higher)
(Automatic Gain Control) card belongs to, and
executing tone detection or not.
Y, * ML.
I Assigning Items I Default I Selection of Value IReferencf

AGC card (1 to 4) 3-D-2.02
Tenant 1 1 : tenant 1 4-G-5.00
2 : tenant 2 4-G-6.00
5-E-l .OO
Tone Detect Yes Yes : tone detection is available 6-H-l .OO
No : tone detection is unavailable 6-H-2.00
9-F-8
AGC card (1 to 4)
Tenant Assigns the tenant number which the AGC card bebngs to.
Tone Detect Assigns whether detecting of the CPC (CatMg Party Control) signal is done
at the end of the CO-CO conversation or not.
Conditions _
This screen cannot be selected if “System-Configuration,” Slot Assignment has no
AGC card programmed.
AGC card
Tenant “-“will be displayed here if “System-Operation”, Tenant Service is set
“No.”
Function
COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys ..
9-F-9
G. Extension Screen
1 .OO Station
1.01 Station (l/3)
Extension - Station I OFL I PRG I SCR I SEL

-I------I------------- ---- -+---+----+---+--
Station hkment No. = 1012 (l/3)

+-S--W---------------- ------ ---------+
I Telephone TYW -------I PIE 1

1 tide1 ----------- I Kx-Tl23235(7130) I
I OBCACircuit --------I yes
I Rimrr Directory Number --I 5000
I Intercom Humher -- -l 11
1 Station Name -------I B&r&on
I ICW Group --------I 1 I
I Pickup Group -----e-m 1 None I
I Next Hunt Station ----I E X T:5001
I Class of Service -- -i 32
I Data Line Security -- I
.
I Auto&xc Callback - Trunk ; ;: I
I ParaIIeI Connect ------I No I
1 Hesswe Yaitim Indication-l -
+-- ---- -,--,--------..-+
J
Summary
This is the first screen of Extension-Station each of which has three screens.
which sets the parameters for each extension. (Password level : Three or higher)
There are 288 screens are provided for Station,
&signing Items Default Selection pf Value Referem

Telephone Type SLT : for SLC PITS: Proprietary Integrated Telephone System 3-B-9.00
PtTS : for PLC SLT : Single tine Telephone 3-F-2.00
and HLC OPX : Off Premise Extension
i
OPX : for OPX
Model M-T1 23235 KX-Tl23250 4-A-2.00
(7130) KX-Tl23220
KX-T123230
KX-Tl23235 (7130)
KX-T61650
KX-T61620
KX-T61630
KX-T30850 (705s)
KX-T30820
KX-T30830
KX-I7050
KX-T7020
KX-l7030
Continued
9-G-l
(30393)
vu3 1.111”L”
Assigning items Default Selection of Value Referenct
OHCA Circuit No No : without OHCA circuit 4-C-5.05

Yes : with OHCA circuit 4-G-r 1.0
Primary Directory Number loo-: for each Three or four digit extension number 4-B-3.01
extension number
in physical
number order
Intercom Number blank One or two digit intercom number 3-B-7.01
blank : no intercom number 4-B-3.03
4-C-5.02
to 5.05
Station Name blank A maximum of ten digits using letters and/or 4-A-4.06
numbers 11-c-5.01
ICM Group 1 1 to 8 : intercom group number 3-B-7.01

4-C-5.02
to 5.05
Pickup Group None Type (select input) 3-B-7.02

None : when not in a pickup group 4-D-3.00
pckup : when in a pickup group 5-B-l .oo
No. 6-G8.00
01 to 32 : pickup group number when
“Pickup” is selected
Next Hunt Station None Type (select input) 3.D5.01

None : no setting “Next Hunt Station”” to 5.02
EXT : Next Hunt Station
No.
Three or four digits : extension directory
number when setting
‘Next Hunt Station”
XsS of Service : .F.

‘ ‘- 3-B-6.00
01 :for DN 100 01 to 32: COS number
02 : for the others
Data tine Security No YeS : Data Line Security mode is available 4-l-6.00
No : Data Line Security mode is unavailable 5-G-4.00
(normal mode only)
l\utomatic Callback-Trunk Yes Yes : Automatic Callback-Trunk is available 4-C-6.01

No : Automatic Callback-Trunk is 5-A-4.01
unavailable
3arallel Connect No Yes : Parallel Connection is available 2-C-4.00

No : Parallel Connection is not available 3-F-9.00
Message Waiting None None : The KX-l7051 can not receive the 5-G-6.00
Indication message waiting indication
Lamp : The KX-I705 n receive the message
uh!T6(Q 4,&f
9-G-2
(30393)
Description of Assigning hems
Telephone Type Selects the telephone type to be connected.
Model Selects the model number when PITS is set as the telephone type in the
above item. .
OHCA Circuit Determines whether the selected phone supports OHCA or not.
Primary Directory Number When a ‘ON” is assigned in the Configuration-DN Assignment screen,
the PDN (Primary Directory Number) is assigned automatically. k is
possible to select a new PDN provided it matches the numbering plan
and there is no conflict.
Intercom Number Assigns an intercom number. This field is optional.
Station Name Assigns the station name of the extension. This is displayed on the CRT
display of Attendant Console and display of PITS telephone (if provided).
ICM Group Assigns the intercom group number of the extension.
Pickup Group Assigns the pickup group number of the extension. This item is optional.
Next Hunt Station Assigns the next hunting destination in the hunting sequence. This item
is optional.
Class of Service Assigns the COS (Class of Service) level for the extension.
Data tine Security Assigns whether “Data tine Security mode” is available or not.
When set to “No,” setting “Data Line SecunYty mode” bydialing the
feature number is impossible.
Automatic Callback-Trunk Assigns whether the Automatic Callback-Trunk feature is available or

not.
Parallel Connect Assigns whether the Parallel connection of PITS and SLT is available or
not. ,. ‘A, -4
Message Waiting Indication Assigns whether a Single Line Telephone with MESSAGE lamp can
receive the message waiting indication or not.
condltbns
This screen cannot be selected from Extension-submenu screen if “System-
Configuration”, Slot Assignment does not have any of extension cards (PLC, SLC,
HLC, OPX) programmed or if ‘System-Configuration”, DN Assignment does not
have the extension number programmed.
If PITS telephone KX-Tl2323OD is connected, select KX-T123235 (7130) for PITS

Model.
PlTS KX-T123230D is functionally equivalent to KX-T123235 and KX-17130.
9-G-3
(30393)
Telephone Type Assignable telephone types differ depending on the card types connected
to the extensions, as follows:
Card Type Telephone Type Assignable
PLC . PlTS
SLC SLT
HLC PITS or SLT
OPX OPX
If “SLT” or ‘OPX” is selected, O-” will appear in the following items in

‘Extension-Station (l/3)” screen and setting is impossible:
Modell
OHCA Circuit
l
Intercom Number
l
Parallel Connect
l
OHCA Circuit This setting applies not to executing side but to receiving side.
Intercom Number Intercom numbers can be one or two digits.

Within an intercom group, if one digit intercom number is assigned, it is
prohibited to use the digit as the leading digit of another two-digit intercom
number.
For instance, if the digit “2” is assigned as an intercom number, the digits
“20’ cannot be assigned as another intercom number in the same intercom
group.
Next Hunt It is impossible to store the extension number of the setting extension, as well
Station as the extension numbers assigned by other extensions as to be their Next
Hunt Station. ..
Parallel Connect Parallel Connection with SLT is available only when PITS telephone
interfaced with HLC card is selected.
If PITS telephone interfaced with PLC card is selected, ” - “will appear in
Parallel Connect field and parallel connect assignment is not avialble.
Message Waiting Indication The setting of?Lamp” is valid only when the extension is an SLT with
MESSAGE lamp which is interfaced with the KX-T96175 (SLC card with
Message Waiting).
If an extension card other than the KX-T96175 is installed, “-* appears

and this item cannot be assigned.
Note:
Be sure to select None’ for this setting if an SLT without MESSAGE lamp
is interfaced with the KX-T96175.
Station Station Station

4 Equipment 4 Equipment + Equipment + ------
‘\
! No. 1 (l/3) No. 1 (2/3) No. 1 (313)
‘
9-G-4
(30393)
Conditions for Assigning the MESSAGE button
. KX-T1232XX series PITS’s:

The MESSAGE button cannot be assigned, for
these PITS’s are already provided with the
MESSAGE button.
l KX-T616XX series PITS’s:

Assignable to the DN-06 button only.
DN-06 button
CM button
l KX-T30820, KX-T30850
Assignable to the DN-03 button only.
DN-03 button
, k .-..ICM button
l KX-T30830
Assignable to the DSS 8 button only.
DSS 8 button
.
.
.
.
s
.
IIis ICM button
9-G-5
Function
are available in all setting screens. INDEX, READ and AUTO CNF keys are also
available in this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-l
“Operatin of Funciton Keys.” Only messages are provided here.
INDEX>Station Equipment No. (Physical NoJDNxxxx)= 1

n h I
READ>Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DNxxxx)= 0
AUTO CONF>Automatfc Configuration OK? (Y: yes/N: no)=1
@j pJ fg pJ fJEXrr H
..
9-G-6
1.02 Station (2/3)
Extention- Station
-----------------------------------------------------+-----+-----+-----+
I OFL I PRG I SCR I SEL 1
t -I
Station Equipment No. = 1012 (2/3)
+------------------------------------------------------------------+
I Key I Type I Numher I SDN CDS I Dar Ring I Night Rinsl
--------+---------+- ----------------+------+--------+----------
I DN-Ol I PDN I 5000 I I Delawd 3 I Instantly I
I DN-02 I PDN I 5000 I I Delsmd 3 I Instantly I
I DN-03 I PDN I 5000 I I Delared 3 IInstantlr I
I DN-04 I SDN I 5001 I Station I Instantly IInstantly I
I DN-05 I SDN I 5002 I DN I Delawd 1 I Delayed 1 I
I DN-06 I SDN I 5003 I DN I Delayed 3 IDelayed 3 I
I DN-O? I SDN I 5004 I DN I Instantly I No Rim I
I DN-08 I SDN I 5005 I DN I Delayed 1 IDelved 1 I
I DN-09 I PRV-CO I 2021 I I I I
I DN-10 I PRV-CHGI
I DN-11 I DSS(ICH) I 16 I I I I
I DN-12 I ONE’IOUCHI 1234567890123456 I I I I
+----------------------------------------------------------+
Note: PITS Only
CONMONg INDEX /j IREAD # 8 HRD CPYa fj . I
Summary
Assigns DN buttons when “Telephone Type” is (Password level : Three or higher)
set to “PITS” in the Extension-Station (l/3)
screen.
Assigning Items Default . Selection of Value‘ Referena
DN-(01 to 12) 3-D-2.07

Type PDN for PDN : Primary Directory Number button to 2.09
_ : DN-01 SDN : Secondary Directory Number button 4-B-2.66
blank for the PRV-CO : Private CO button 4-B-3.00
others OHCA : Off Hook Call Announcement button 4-c-3.64
MW : Message Waiting button 4-c-4.01
LOGIN : UCD Log In button 4-D-8.00
ALARM : Local Alarm button 4-E-5.01
SINGLE CO : Single CO button 4-E-5.02
GROUP CO : Group CO button 4-E-6.00
DSS (DN) : Direct Station Selection (DN) button 4-F-f 64
DSS (ICM) : Direct Station Selection (ICM) button 4-G-2.06
ONETOUCH: One Touch button 4-G-3.00
PRV-CHG : Privacy Change button 4-G-9.00
EXT FEAT : External Feature Access button (cont.)
Continued
9-G-7
- - . - __
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Referent
IN-!01 to 12) (cont.) (cont.

TYW CALL PAR : Call Park System button 4-G-l 2.0(
CALL STA : Call Park Station button 4-t-8.00
RNG TRAN : Ringing Transfer button 14-D-l .O!
SPLIT : Call Split button
TONE-BRK : Tone Through Break button
Number blank Three or four digits : directory number for “PDN,” 3-B-7.01
“SDN”, “DSS (DN)” 3-D-2.07
1011 to 3158 : physical number for “PRV-CO,” to 2.09
“Single CO 4-B-3.01
One or two digits : intercom number for YDSS(lCM)n 4-B-3.02
01 to 16 : trunk group number for “Group 4-8-3.04
co to 3.06
Maximum 16 digits : destination number for 4-c-3.04
“ONETOUCH” 4-c-4.01
SDN COS blank Station : using COS of own extension 4-B-3.02

DN : using COS of PDN
Day Ring blank No ring : with lamp only, not ringing 3-6-l o.oc
Instantly : instantly ringing 3-D-3.01
Delayed 1 : delayed 1 ring to 3.02
Delayed 3 : delayed 3 rings
Delayed 6 : delayed 6 rings
Night Ring blank Same as “Day Ring” ..
9-G-8
DN-(01 to 12)
Type Assigns the use of the DN buttons. The DN-01 button is fixed to PDN and cannot
be changed or deleted.
Number Assigns the number for each DN button which is preset to ‘PDN,” “SDN,” ‘PRV-
CO,” “DSS (DN),” ‘DSS (ICM),” “Group CO” or “ONETOUCH”
SDN COS Assigns whether the COS of the SDN button is that of the extension (PDN-Primary
Directory Number) or the COS of the SDN (Secondary Directory Number)
extension.
Day Ring Assigns whether incoming calls have immediate or delayed ringing on PDN, SDN,
SC0 or GCO buttons in Day mode. The ringing assignment of the first PDN can
also be changed with this option.
Night Ring Assign similarly as the above item except this applied in Night mode.
-.
Conditions
This screen cannot be selected if “Extension-Station (l/3)“, Telephone Type is set
to SLT* or ‘OPX.”
Some items cannot be programmed depending on the setting of “Extension-Station

(l/3)“, Model. They are indicated by y-.”
Assignable items are DN buttons of the programmed model. For example, if KX-
T30830 is programmed as the model, assignable items will be as follows:
.,
<Example>
kted ion - Station IO?% IPRG ISCR ISEL
------+--v-b-----
Station Edment No. = 1012 (2/3)
Automatic- I SDKCOSI DOWRing I Hkht~Rizs~ 1

setting --
i I - Programmabte
I items
I L
IDN-04 Ii - I - - - - II
I DN-05 l-l - I -1-l-l
IWO6 I I - I - -l- - Not program-
I DN-O? 11 ; 1 :;-I- mable items
IDN-08 I- I - i-l -I I
IDN-08 l-l - I -I-ITj
I Dn-10 l-l - - - -
I DN-11 l-l - I -1-I-l
I DN-12 I-I -_ I-I-1-J
.-- -I_-------- --3
9-G-9
The DN-01 through 03 b&ons are assigned as the PDN buttons automatically.
The DN-01 buzon IS Cxec !o a PDN button and cannot be changed to another
assignable feawe button
The PDN buttons assignee to the DN-02 and 03 buttons can be changed to another
assignable feature button and we versa.
When two or three PDN buttons are used, they must be arranged consecutively.
For example, it is not possible to program as follows:
(DN buttons on PITS 7000 series)
(DN buttons on PlTS type 20,30 and 50)
Type If ‘PRV-CO” (Private CO) is selected, a physical number of the selected

CO line must be programmed in ‘Number.”
The CO line of the physical number belongs to a “Trunk-CO tine”, Trunk
Group.
The trunk group where the CO line belongs must have ‘Group-Trunk
Group”, Type assigned to “PVL” (Private tine).
.If “Single Co” is selected, a physical number of the selected CO line must
be programmed in “Number.”
The CO line of the physical number belongs to a Trunk-CO Line”, Trunk
Group. The trunk group of the CO line must have ‘Group-Trunk Group”,
Type assigned to ‘DDD” or “FEX” or “WATS”, or “PBX.”
If “Group CO” is selected, a trunk group number of the selected trunk

group must be programmed in ‘Number.”
The programmed trunk group must have “Group-Trunk Group”, Type
assigned to ‘DDD” or ‘FEX” or “WATS” or ‘PBX.”
To select this screen, press the NEXT key in the ‘Extension-Station (l/3)”
screen.
9-G-l 0
(30393)
Function
The toilowq funCftOnS appear on the function line of this setting screen.
are available in all setting screens. INDEX and READ keys are also available in
this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-l “Operatin
of Fun&on Keys.’ Only messages are provided here.
INDEX>Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DNxxxx)= i
READsStation Equipment No. (Physical No./DNxxxx)= 0
n F4 :
.. .*.
9-G-l 1
1.03 Station (313)
lxtention - Station I OFL I PRG I SCR i SEL

--------------------^-----------------------------+-----+-----+-----+-----
Station Equipment Ho. = 1012 (3,‘3)
+----------------------------------- +--------------------------------^’+
I PF I Type I Number I DSS I TYW I Number
IKeuI -.‘I I Key I I I
+------+----------+----------------+------f- ---------+-----------------+
I 01 I ONETOUCHI 1234567890123456 I 1 I ONETOUCHI 1234567890123456 l
I 02 I Dssmo I 14 I 2 I I I
I 03 I EXTFEAT I I 3 I I I
I 04 I RNGTRN I I 4 I I
105 I I 5 I I f
10s I I I6 I I
I07 I I I 7 I i
IO8 I ,t I 8 I I I
I09 I I I I I I
I10 I I I I I
Ill I I I t I I
I12 I I I I I I
+_----------__---__---- - e-v-- +---------------------- -----+
Note: PI’IS Only
Summary
Assigns PF (Programmable Feature) buttons and screen.
DSS (Direct Station Selection) buttons (model This screen does not appear when “Telephone
KX-T30830 only) when “Telephone Type” is Type” is preset to any other type.
.) preset to “PITS” in the Extension-Station (l/3) (Password level : Three or higher)
I Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Referenci
PF Key (01 to 16) 4-B-2.00

Type blank DSS (ICM) : Direct Station Selection (ICM) button 4-c-4.01
ONETOUCH : one touch button 4-c-4.05
EXT FEAT : External Feature Access button 4-D-6.00
CALL PAR : Call Park system button 4-E-5.01
CALL STA : Call Park station button 4-E-5.02
RNG TRAN : Ringing Transfer button 4-E-6.00
FWD / DND : FWDIDND button 4-F-l .04
SPLIT : Call Split button 4-F-2.01
TONE-BRK : Tone Through Break button to 2.05
SNR : Saved Number Redial button 4-G-9.00
4-G-12.00
Number blank Maximum 16 digits : destination number for 3-B-7.01
“ONETOUCH” 4-c-4.01
One or two digits : intercom number for “DSS(lCM)”
Continued
DSS Key ( 1 to 8) 4-B-2.00

Type blank MW : Message Waiting button 4-c-4.01
LoGIN : UCD Log In button 4-D-8.00
DSS( DN) : Direct Station Selection button 4-E-5.02
DSS( ICM) : Direct Station Selection (ICM) button 4-E-6.00
ONETOUCH : One Touch button 4-F-l .04
EXT FEAT : External Feature Access button 4-G-3.00
CALL PAR : Call Park System button 4-G-9.00
CALL STA : Call Park Station button 4-G-12.00
RNG TRAN : Ringing Transfer button 4-I-8.00
SPLIT : Call Split button 14-D-1.05
blank : not assigned
Number blank Three or four digits: directory number for “DSS(DN)” 3-B-7.01
One or two digits : intercom number for “DSS(ICM)” 4-C-4.01
Maximum 16 digits : destination number for
“ONETOUCH”

PF Key (01 to 16)
Type Assigns the type of the programmable feature buttons. ,
Number Assigns the number for individual. PF button which is preset to “ONE
TOUCH” or “DSS (ICM)” .
DSS Key (1 to 6 )
Type Assigns the type of the DSS buttons.
.Number Assign the riurribei‘for each DSS button which is preset to ‘ONETOUCH,”
“DSS (DN),” or “DSS (ICM)“.
9-G-l 3
Conditions
To select this screen, press the NEXT key in the “Extension-Station (U3)”
screen.
Only the PF3 button on PITS type 50 and KX-T7050 can be programmed to the
FWD/DND button.
Only the PFl button on PITS type 50, KX-T7020 and KX-T7030 can be
programmed to the SNR button.
Function
of Funciton Keys.” Only messages are provided here.
1 INDEX>Station Equipment No. (Physical ~o./DNxxxx)= d
1 READ>Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DNxxxx)= i
9-G-i 4
btension - DSS Console I OFL I PRG I SCR I SEL
-----------------I--------------------------------+--------+-----+--~
Station Equipment No. = 1012 (l/3)
+--------------------------------------------------------------+
I MO&l I KX-T123240 (7040) I
I ----------- ------- -------+ __-------- --- ----- - ---- --we I
I Pair Extension I 5000 I
+------------------------+------------------------------+
I PF I Type I Number I PF I Type I Number
I Key I I I Key I I I
+----+------+ --~~------+-~--- +----- ---+------------+
I 01 I ONE3’OllCliI 1234567890123456 I 09 I ON!ZlWCH I 1234567890123456 I
lo2 I I I10 I I I
103 I Ill I I
lo4 I t I12 I I I
105 I I I13 I
lo6 I I I14 I I I
107 I I I15 I
lo8 I I I16 I I i
c--------------------------- +----..-------------- ---------I+
Summary
This is the first screen of Extension-DSS Console There are 16 screens provided for DSS
which assigns parameters and PF (Program- Console, each of which has three screens.
mable Feature) buttons on DSS consoles. (Password level : Three or higher)
Model l&T123240 KX-T123240 (7040) l-B-2.00

(7040) KX-T61640 4-l-l 2.00
Pair Extension blank Three or four digits : directory number
PF Key (01 to 16) 4-C-4.01

Type blank ONETOUCH: One Touch button 4-E-5.01
DSS (ICM) : Direct Station Selection (ICM) button 4-E-5.02
EXT FEAT : External Feature Access button 4-E-6.00
CALL PAR : Call Park System button 4-F-l .04
RNG TRN : Ringing Transfer button 4-G-12.0(
SPLIT : Call Split button
Continuec
9-G-l 5
Continued
3
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Refer-
PF key (01 to 16) (cont.) 3-57.s:

Number blank One or two digits : intercom number for “DSS(ICM)” 4-c-4.,31
‘ONETOUCH”
..
9-G-l 6
Model Assigns the type of DSS console used.
Pair Extension Assigns the DSS Console and paired extension’s directory number.
A DSS Console does not work without this assignment.
PF key (01 to 16)

Type Assigns the type of each of the programmable feature buttons.
Number When presetting each PF button to “ONETOUCH” or ‘DSS (ICM),” set the
number.
This assignment is not necessary when the PF key type is preset to any
other types than “ONETOUCH” or “DSS (ICM)” and *-” appears in the
setting field.
Conditions
This screen is not displayed, if no DSS console is connected to the system.
Function
The following funcitons appear on the function line of this setting screen. I
. are available in all setting screens. INDEX, READ andAUTO CNF keys are also
available in this screen. The operation of function keys .&e described.in Secti&i 7-l
“Operatin of Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.
1 INDEX>Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DNxxxx)= i
1 READ>Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DNxxxx)= 1
AUTO CNF>Automatic Configuration OK? (Y:yes/N:no)= fl

n F7 : ,.:.
Cl‘1 II2 III3 n4 II5 06. BEXrr tgl
9-G-l 7
2.02 DSS Console (2/3)
btension - DSS Console I OFL I PRG I SCR I SEL

---------------------------------------------------+-----+----~-----+---~
Station ‘Esuipment No. = 1012 (2/3)
+---------------------------------+------------------------------+
I DSS I Type I Number I DSS I Type 1 Number I
I Key I I I Key I I I
+-----+---------+----------------+-----+-------- +--------------+
; 0; ; ONETOUCHI 1234567890123456 I 09 I ONETOUCHI 1234567690123456 l
I10 I
103 I I Ill I I t
104 I I I12 I I
105 I I I13 I I .I
106 I I I14 I I I
107 I I I15 I I I
lo6 I I I16 I I I
+ _------- -----------me +----------------I- -------+
Summary
This is the second screen of Extension-DSS Console.
Console used to assign DSS (Direct Station (Password level : Three or higher)
J Selection) buttons from 01 to 16 on the DSS
DSS Key ( 01 to 16) 4-B-2.00

Twe blank MW : Message Waiting button 4-c-4.01
DSS(DN) : Direct Station Selection button 4-E-5.02
DSS(ICM) : Direct Station Selection (ICM) button 4-E-6.00
ONETOUCH: One Touch button 4-F-1.04
RNG TRAN : Ringing Transfer button 4-I-8.00
SPLIT : Call Split button 14-D-1.05
blank :notassigned
Continued
9-G-18
Cnntinl IP~
DSS Key (01 to 16) (cont.) 3-B-7.01

Number blank Three or four digits : directory number for “DSS(DN)” 4-C-4.01
One or two digits : intercom number for “DSS(ICM)”
“ONETOUCH”
. .:
9-G-l 9
DSS Key (01 to 16)
We Assigns the type for each of the DSS (Direct Station Selection) buttons.
Number Used to set the number for each DSS button programmed to “ONETOUCH,”
“DSS (DN)” or “DSS (ICM).”
Conditions
To select this screen, press the NEXT key in the “Extension-DSS Console (l/3)”
screen.
Function
. this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-l “Operatin
INDEX>Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DNxxxx)= fl
READ>Station Equipment No. (Physical No./DNxxxx)= g
>H pJ pJ<.H meH,Tffj
9-G-20
2.03 DSS Console (3/3)
Extension - DSS Console I OFL I PRG I SCR I SEL

---‘--‘-----“----‘-------------‘-------------------+-----+---+-----+----
Station Equipment No. = 1012 (3/3)
I DSS I Type I Number I DSS I Type I Number

I Key I I I Key I I
+-----+----w---+ -------------+-----+----------+ ..--------..--------+
1 17 1 ONETOUCUI 1234567890123456 I 25 I ONEMUCH I 1234567890123456 I
I18 I I26 I I
I19 I I 127 I I I
120 I I 128 I I I
I21 I 129 I I I
I22 I I 130 I I
123 I I I31 I i I
124 I I I32 I I I
t----------------------------+- -----------..------e-e+
_..
Summary
The third screen of the Extension-DSS Console (Password level : Three or higher)
is used to assign DSS (Direct Station Selection)
buttons from 17 to 32 on the DSS Console.
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value - Refereno
DSS Key ( 17 to 32) 4-B-2.00

Type blank MW : Message Waiting button 4-c-4.01
DSS(DN) : Direct Station Selection (DN) button 4-E-5.02
DSS(ICM) : Direct Station Selection (ICM) buttor 4-E-8.00
ONETOUCH: One Touch button 4-F-l .04
PRVT-CHG : Privacy Change button 4-G-2.00
CALL STA : Call Park Station button 4-G-l 2.01
RNG TRN : Ringing Transfer button 4-I-8.00
SPLIT : Call Split button 14-D-l .O!
Continued
9-G-21
Continued
Assigning kerns Default Selection of Value Referenct
DSS Key (17 to 32) (cont.: 3-B-7.01

Number blank Three or four digits : directory number for “DSS(DN)” 4-C-4.o1
One or two digits : intercom number for “DSS(ICM)”
“ONETOUCH”
9-G-22
Tbw Assigns the type for each of the DSS (Direct Station Selection) button.
Number Used to set the number for each DSS button programmed to “ONETOUCH,”
“DSS (DN)” or “DSS (ICM)”
Conditions
This screen does not appear if “Model” is assigned to “KX-T61640” in the
Extension-DSS Console (l/3) screen.
To select this screen, press the NEXT key in the “Extension-
DSS Console (2/3)” screen.
Funciton
’ are available in all setting screens. INDEX and READ keys are also available in
of Fun&on Keys.” Only messages are provided here.
..
1 INDEX>Station Equipment No. (Physical NoJDN xxxx)= 8
READsStation Equipment No. (Physical No./DN xxx+ 1

._-,
9-G-23
3.00 Doorphone
Extension - Doorphone I OFL I PRG I SCR I DIR

-----------------------------------------------+-----+----+----+----
I Doorphone No. I 1 I 2 I 3 I 4 I
I --------------+--------------t -------------+---------------+--------------
I Tenant I 1 I 1 1 1 I 1
I Open Duration1 10 I 0 I 0 I 3 I
I -----------+------------ ..+-I-- - ---- +_---____- -+---______----
I Doorphone I Type I No. I Trpe I No. I Type I No. I Type I No. t
I Call I-----+------+ -----+---+--------+- ------+------+-----.. I
I Assisnment I PCKIJPI 01 I PCKUP I 10 I PCKUPI 20 I E X T I 5002 I
I IICWll IICHI4 lICHl6 I
I I ATT I IATTI I I I I f
I IEXT150011EXT1401 I I I I I
Summary
Assigns parameters for each doorphone.
-Assigning Items >* Defautt .: Selection of Value ~ Referencc ?

I
Door-phone No. (1 to 4) 4-G-7.00

Tenant 1 1 : tenant 1 5-E-2.00
2 : tenant 2 6-H-4.00
Open Duration 0 1 to 10 : door opening duration in second

0 : Door cannot be opened.
Doorphone Call Assignment

Type ATT: for Call destination
“with ATLC” ICM : intercom group
EXT 100 : for PICKUP: pickup group
“without ATLC” Al-T : Attendant Console
EXT : extension
Continued
9-G-24
Continued
,
Assigning items Default Selection of Value Reference
Doorphone Call Assignment

(cont.)
No. 1 to 8 : Intercom group number for “ICM”
01 to 32 : pickup group number for “PICKUP”
1 or2 : Attendant console 1 or 2
Three or four digits : directory number for “EXT”
9-G-25
Doorphone No. (1 to 4)
Tenant Assigns the tenant number which the doorphone belongs to.
Open Duration Assigns the door opening duration (seconds).
Doorphone call Assignment

Type Assigns the destination for incoming calls from doorphones.
No. Assign group number o: directory number when type of call placing is set
to “ICM,” “PICKUP” or “EXT”. Assign the console number when the
destination of the doorphone call is the Attendant Console.
Conditions
j This screen cannot be selected if “System-Configuration”, Slot Assignment has no
“DPH” card programmed. _
Funciton
COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys ,,
are available in this setting screen. The operation of function keys are described in
Section 7-l “Operatin of Funciton Keys.”
.. -
9-G-26
4.00 Attendant Console
4.01 Attendant Console (l/2)
Aens ion - Attendant Console I 4lFL : PRG I SC3 I DIR
- ------ -- --------______--- - -------______-------- + ----- l -----a ---- --+---.
Attendant Conso Ie (l/2)

c 4dC*
+----------------- o\r -&
-----I-------+ +----------------------------+
I ITenantI DN I TRSLV I PAG I lAlt PositionlTensnt 1lTenant 21
I -----+-----+- --+-.-----+----- 1 I---..-----+ ---+--------+
I ATTl I 1 I 6001 I 02 I INT I I Overflov I 5001 I 4001 l
-+----+----+-----+------ I I -------+-----+---W-D
Lk I 2 I I 03 I El I I Night I 5002 I 4002 f
+--------------------------+ c--------------------+
f--------------------------------”””---------------+
I Busy-Out I TG01 I 5001 I ‘D.i05 I 5001 I TG 09 I 5001 I Tti 13 I 5001 I

I Extension I ‘hi 02 I 5001 I TG06 I 5001 I TG 10 I 5001 I Tti 14 I 5001 I
I I TG03 I 5001 I l-G07 I 5001 I TG 11 I 5001 I m 15 I 5001 I
I I TG04 l 5001 I TG08 I 5001 I TG 12 I 5001 I TG16 I 5001 I
*----------------------------------------------------
Summary
The first screen of Extension-Attendant Console is (Password level :Two or higher)
used to assign parameters for the Attendant
Consoles. The screen consists of two subscreens.
ATTl& A-IT2 3-B-3.00

DN blank Three or four digits of numbers : Floating DN
TRS LV 01 01 to 16 : toll restriction level 3-c-1 .oo
PAG El &E2 INT : Paging All Extensions 6-l-i .05

El : Paging External Pager 1
E2 : Paging External Pager 2
E 1 & E 2 : Paging External Pagers 1 and 2
ALL : Paging All Extensions and External
Pagers
Continued
9-G-27
Continuel
Alt Position 6-G-2.00

Tenant 1 & Tenant 2 blank Three or four digit numbers : extension directory
Overflow number
blank : no destination
Night blank Three or four digit numbers : extension directory ~-~-8.o~

number
blank : no destination _
Busy-Out Extension blank Three or four digit numbers : extension directory 6-A-1.00
number
blank : no destination
. . . . . . I
9-G-28
DN Assigns the Floating DN of the Attendant Console. This is used to call the
Attendant directly.
TRS LV Assigns the toll restriction level for the Attendant Console.
PAG Assigns the available Paging types for the Attendant Console. This can
be set to internal, external or all.
The types of External Paging are limited to those preset to “Yes” in the
System-Operation (l/3) screen. If Paging External Pagers 1 and 2 are
both preset to y No” in the screen, ‘-” appears on this item.
Overflow Assigns the destination of Overflow calls in the Day mode. Overflow
occurs when all the loop keys are active, another call arrives and one of
the calls has exceeded the time allowed for overflow. The calls are
queued at the overflow destination as well as the console.
Night Assigns the destination of the attendant-seeking calls (DPH, DID, DISA,
Extension) in the Night mode.
Busy-Out Extension Assigns the destination of incoming calls, if the trunk group’s call destina-
tion is programmed to Attendant Console but the Attendant Console is in
Busy Out status (ATT-FWD switch on the attendant console is set to ON).
. Conditions
This screen cannot be selected if “System-Configuration”, Slot Assignment has
no “ATLc* card programmed.
Y-” will be displayed if “System-Operation”, Tenant Service is set to “No.”
Tenant
Function
are available in this setting screen. The operation of function keys are described
in Section 7-l “Operatin of Funciton Keys.”
9-G-29
4.02 Attendant Console (2/2)
Zxtension - Attendant Console I OFL I PRG I SCR I DIR

----------------------------------------------------+------+ ----+------+----~
Attendant Console (Call Priority) (2/2)
+-----------------------------------+---------------------------------+
I Internal Calling Station I 01 I External Calling TG 01 I 01 I
I I I TG 02 I 02 I
I Internal Calling Doorphone I 02 I TG 03 I 03 I
I I TGo4 I 04 I
I Console Calling I 03 f TG 05 I 05 I
I I I TGo6 I 06 I
I Transfer Recall I 04 I TGo7 I 07 I
I I I TGo8 I 08 I
I Serial Calling Recall I 05 I TGo9 I 09 I
I I I TG 10 I 10 I
I Cal 1 Park Recall I 06 I TG 11 I I
11
I I TG 12 I 12 I
I Intercept Routing I 07 f TG 13 I 13 I
I I I TG 14 I 14 I
I Held Call Reminder I 08 I TG 15 I 15 I
I I I TG 16 I 16 I
+-------------------------I-+----------------------------~
Summary
Assigns the priority to incoming calls when the screen of Extension-Attendant Console
ANSWER key is used at the Attendant Console. (Password level : Two or higher )
Assignment is performed through the second
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value 3eferencr
I Internal Calling Station i-E-1.00
01 01 to 24 : Priority
I Call Park Recall
Intercept Routing
Continued
9-G-30
Continued
Held Call Reminder 6-E-1.00

01 01 to 24 : Priority
External Calling
(TGOl toTG16)
..
9-G-31
Internal Calling Station \
Internal Calling Doorphone
Console Calling
Transfer Recall
Assigns the call priority level for each of the 24 items.
Serial Calling Recall > “01 n is the highest level, “24” is the lowest level.
Call Park Recall It is permissible to assign the same level to multiple items. In this case
calls are processed in FIFO (First In First Out) order.
Intercept Routing
Held Call Reminder
External Calling
(TGOl toTG16)
/
Conditions
This screen cannot be selected if “System-Configuration”, Slot Assignment has no
“ATLC” card programmed.
Held Call Reminder Regardless of this program, Held Call Reminder will not
function if “System-Operation”, Held Call Reminder is not
programmed to “Yes.”
..
Function
are available in this setting screen. The operation of function keys are described
in Section 7-l “Operatin of Funciton Keys.”
9-G-32
H. Special Carrier Access Screen
1 .OO Equal Access
Equal Access No. = 1

+-----------------------------------I +----------------I--+
I Trunk Group 01 i Yes 1
I Trunk Group 02 1 Yes 1
I Equal Access Carrier Code I 222 I Trunk Group 03 I Yes I
I Toll Restriction Level I Trunk Group 04 I Yes I
1 Toll Restriction Table I 8 I Trunk Group 05 I Yes I
1 Digit Hodificstion I Trunk Group 06 I Yes 1
I Long Distance(Delete) I 1 I Trunk Group 07 I Yes I
ansert) I =xX I Trqnk Group 08 I Yes I
I Local Toll (Delete) I 1 I Trunk Group 09 I Yes I
unsert> I XxXx I Trunk Group 10 I Yes I
(Delete) I 0 I Trunk Group 11 I Yes I
(Insert) I xXxX I Trunk Group 12 I Yes 1
I Trunk GROUP 13 I Yes I
I Trunk GROUP 14 I Yes 1
I After lO+&wal Access 1 I Trunk Group 15 I YesI

Carrier Code) I I Trunk Group 16 1 Yes I
___-___ __ ._-- -------------+-----------
Summary
Assigns available trunk groups and parameters number from 1 to 4.
necessary for making Equal Access calls. (Password level : Two or higher)
Four screens are provided for Equal Access

-7
Service No Yes : Equal Access is available 3-c-1 .&I
No : Equal Access is unavailable 4-G3.03
5-A-l .03
Name blank letters, numbers, marks within three digits G-D-1.03
blank: not assigning
Equal Access Carrier Code blank three digit number
Toll Restriction Level blank 01 to 16
Toll Restriction Table blank 1 to 8: Area/ Cffice Code table number
Continued
9-H-l
Continued
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Rcferena2
Digit Modification 3-c-1.04

Long Distance 4-c-3 03
Local Toll 5-A-1.03
Local 6-D-1.03
(Delete) blank 1 to 4 : digits to be deleted
0 : deleting no digits
(Insert) blank maximum four digit number : dialing number

to be inserted
Trunk Group (01 to 16) blank Yes : calling is available

No : calling is unavailable
9-H-2
Service Assigns whether Equal Access is available or not.
If set to “No,” “-” appear in all the setting fields of this screen, and
setting is impossible.
Name Assigns the Carrier’s name to be used in making Equal Access calls
Equal Access Carrier Code Assigns the Carrier code for making Equal Access calls.
Toll Restriction Level Assigns the toll restriction level on Special Carrier Access used for
Toll Restriction.
Toll Restriction Table Assigns the Area/ Office Code table number used for Toll Restriction.
Digit Modification
Long Distance
Local Toll
Local
(Delete) Assigns the number of leading digits to be deleted.
(Insert) Assigns the number to be inserted which follows the Carrier code.
Trunk groupjO to 16) Assigns the available trunk groups for making Equal Access calls.
Conditions
Service If “No” is selected, all the assigning items below this display I‘-” and
setting is impossible.
If “No” is assigned, it is possible to program “System-Class of

Service”, Special Carrier Access. However, Equal Access of the
screen which has “No” assigned will not be active.
Digit Modification When making a long distance call using Equal Access function, the
dialed number will be modified as the following example.
<Example>
Programmings are:
Equal Access Carrier Code : 222
Digit Modification
Long Distance (Delete) : 1
(Insert) : blank
Dialed number is:

1 201 123 4567
Modification procedures are:

(1) Deletes the initial digit.
201 123 4567
(2) Inserts no digit.
201 1234567
(3) The final digits to be sent to trunk are
10 222 201 123 4567
9-H-3
Equal Equal Equal Equal

+ Access + Access + Access + Access -
No.1 No.2 No.3 No.4
Function
- - “ .
9-H-4
2.00 OCC Access
Special Carrier Access - OCC Access I OFL I PRG I SCR I SEL

‘--------------------------------------~-------+---~-~-~~-+-~--~~--+-~--
OCC Access No. = 1
+---------------------------------------+----------------+
I Service -------- - ----- 1 yes I Trunk Group 01 I Yes I
1 Nzue --------------_-_ 1 I Trunk Group 02 I Yes I
I Local Access Code -------I 9501001 (Max. 8 DG) I Trunk Group 03 I Yes I
I Toll Restriction Level ---I 16 I Trunk Group 04 I Yes I
I Toll Restriction Table --I 8 I Trunk Group 05 I Yes I
I Digit Modification I I Trunk Group 06 I Yes i
I Long Distance@elete) --I 1 I Trunk Group 07 I Yes I
I (Insert) --I P 11234563PH I Trunk Group 08 I Yes I
I Local Toll Mete) --I 1 I Trunk Group 09 I Yes I
I (Insert) --I 12345678901234567890 I Trunk Group 10 I Yes I
I Local (Delete) --I 0 I Trunk Group 11 I Yes I
I hsert) --I Pw3456lPH I Trunk Group 12 I Yes I
I I I Trunk Group 13 I Yes I
I Note: (Insert) I I Trunk Group 14 I Yes I
I After (Local Access I I Trunk Group 15 I Yes I
I Code) + (Pause) I I Trunk Group 16 I Yes I
+-----------------------------------I------------+
Summary
Assigns available trunk groups and parame- Four screens are provided for OCC Access
ters necessary for making OCC (Other numbers from 1 to 4.
Common Carrier) Access calls. (Password level : Two or higher)
.
Service No Yes : OCC Access is available 4-c-3.03

No : OCC Access is unavailable 5-A-l .03
6-D-l .03
Name blank three digit letters, numbers or marks
I Local Access Code blank maximum eight digit numbers
Toll Restriction Level blank 01 to 16 3-c-1.04
Toll Restriction Table blank 1 to 8: Area/ Office Code table number 3-c-i .04
I I I I
Continued
9-H-5
Digit Modification 4-c-3.03

Long Distance, 5-A-l .03
Local Toll, 6-D-l .03
Local
(Delete) blank 1 to 15: number of digits to be deleted
0 : no digit deletion
(Insert) blank maximum of 20 digits consisting of numbers

, * , # and marks below :
H : Home position
P : Pause
D : Switch to DTMF
[ : start of secret number
1 : end of secret number
(enter secret marks in a pair)
- : Hyphen
Trunk Group (01 to 16) blank Yes : calling is available 3-c-1.03

No : calling is unavailable 4-c-3.03
5-A-l .03
6-D-i .03
..
9-H-6
Service Assigns whether OCC Access is available or not.
Name Assigns the Carrier’s name to be used in making OCC calls.
Local Access Code Assigns the Carrier code for making OCC Access calls.
Toll Restriction Level -Assigns the Toll Restriction level for special Carrier Access which is
used for Toll Restriction.
Toll Restriction Table Assigns the Area /Office Code table number used for Toll Restriction
Digit Modification
Long Distance
Local Toll
Local
(Delete) Assigns the number of leading digits to be deleted.
(Insert) Assigns the number to be inserted, which follows the Carrier code.
Trunk group (01 to 16) Assigns the available trunk groups for making OCC Access calls.
Conditions
Service If set to “No,” all the assigning items below display U-n and setting is
impossible.
If set to “No,” it is possible to program “System-Class of Service”, Special

Carrier Access. However, OCC Access of the screen which has “No”
assigned will not be active.
Digit Modification When making a call using OCC Access function, the dialed number will be
modified as the following example.
<Example 1>
Programmings are:
’ Local Access Code: 9501901 1
Digit Modification
Long Distance (Delete) : 1
(Insert) : P123456 PH
Dialed number is :
1 201 123 4567
Modification procedures are :

(1) Deletes the initial digit.
201 123 4567
(2) Inserts the dial programmed.
P123456 P 201 123 4567
(3) The final digits to be sent to trunk are:
9501001 PP 123456 P 201 123 4567
T Automatically added.
9-H-7
Function
7% fdlcwing functions appear on the function line of thissetting screen.
i
HHRD CPY B 0,8
..
9-H-8
I. Toll Restriction Screen
1 .OO Area/Off ice Code Tables
Toll Restriction - Area/Office Code Tables I OFL I PRG I SCR I SEL

-------------~-~~~~~-~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~-~~~~~~~~~-+~~~---+ ----+--m.--+--m.-
Area/Office Code Table No. = 1 Entry = 200
ICode IL,RL,OC ICode IL,RL,OC ICode iL,RL,OC ICode lL,RL,K ICode lL,RL,OC I
I ---+------+----+ ------+---+-------+-----+-------+-----c------ I
1 200 IY,O1,32 t 210 IY,O1,32 I 220 IY,O1,32 I 230 IY,Ol,32 1 240 IY,O1,32 I
1 201 1Y,O1,32 I 211 IY,O1,32 I 221 IY,O1,32 I 231 IY,O1,32 I 241 IY,O1,32 1
I 202 lY,O1,32 I 212 IY,O1,32 I 222 IY,O1,32 I 232 IY,O1,32 I 242 IY,O1,32 I
I 203 IY,O1,32 I 213 IY,O1,32 I 223 IY,O1.32 I 233 IY,O1,32 I 243 IY,O1,32 l
I 204 IY,O1,32 I 214 IY,O1,32 I. 224 IY,O1,32 I 234 lY,O1,32 I 244 IY,O1,32 1
I 205 lY,O1,32 I 215 IY,O1,32 I 225 IY,O1,32 I 235 IY,O1,32 I 245 IY,O1,32 I
I 206 IY,O1,32 I 216 lY,O1,32 I 226 IY,O1,32 I 236 IY,OI;32 I 246 IY,O1,32 l
I 207 lY,O1,32 I 217 IY,O1,32 I 227 lY,O1,32 I 237 IY,O1,32 I 247 IY,O1,32 1
I 203 IY,O1,32 I 218 IY,O1,32 I 228 IY,O1,32 I 238 IY.Ol.32 I 248 IY,O1,32 I
I 209 lY,O1.32 I 219 IY,O1,32 I 229 IY,O1,32 I 239 IY,O1,32 I 249 iY,O1,32 I
+------------c--------+------------ +--M----w--- +--- -------- +
L : Local Call Access (Y/N), RL: Restriction Level (01-16)

UC: Office Code Table Number (No Use:Blank,01-64)
COHNOH!$j INDEX 1 COPY 1 fj NRD CPY%

-
Summary
Assigns local call control, toll restriction level and Table numbers from 1 to 8.
office code table number for area or office codes. (Password level : Two or higher)
Eight screens are provided for Area/Office Code
L N Y : not executing 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction 3-C-l .06

N : executing 3/6 Digit Toll Restriction
RL 16: for 411,800, 01 to 16 : toll restriction level

911, NNX
01: for NPX
except the
above codes
oc blank Office Code table number

blank : for 3 digits Toll Restriction
01 to 64 : for 6 digits Toll Restriction
9-l-l
L Assigns whether Tol! Resr:lc:ron is executed for local calls or not.
When “Y” is set, 3 6 Digit Toll Restnctlon IS not executed.
RL Assigns toll restriction level.

This setting does not restrict the extension user when RL s TRLE
(toll restriction level of each extension).
oc Office Code table number

blank : Call restricted if TRLEeRL
0 to 64 : Office Code table number, for 6 Digits Toll Restriction. If the office code
dialed is in the office code table, the call proceeds to 7/l 0 digit toll restriction. If it is
not then the call is restricted.
1
Conditions
~~H~H~~------~~t
..’1
9-l-2
Function
The fdlowinc ‘zr0or-6 appear on the function line of this screen,
are available in all setting screens. INDEX and COPY keys are also available in
this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-l “Operation
of Function Keys.” Only messages are provided here.
1 INDEX>Area/Office Code Table No. (i-8)= 0, Entry (200-999)=
1
--M--e
opying
------ all the tables
a
COPY > Table No. (l-8)= u - + Table No.= -
@ pJ H pJ HEXIT m
pJ H
------
rCopying an entry 1'
within
--A---the table J
COPY > Entry No. (200-999)= t] - 3 Entry No.= -
9-l-3
2.00 Office Code Tables
Toll Restriction - Off ice Code Tables I OFL I PRC I SZI I SEL
----------------------‘--------------------------------+-----+-----+-----r----
Office Code Table Ho. = 01 (l/4)

+------------------------------3 t-----------------------------+
; ---------------------
2 Hundred Office - -------;
Code I
I-----------------------
3 Hundred Office Code
____-_I
t 00,01,02,03,04,05,06,07,08,09 I I 00,01,02,03,04,05,06,07,08,09 I
1 10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19 I I 10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19 1
1 20,21,22,23,24,25,26,27,28,29 I I x),21,22,23,24,25,26,n,28,29 I
1 30,31,32,33,34,35,36,3’7,38,39 I I 30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39 1
I 40,41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49 I I 40,41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49 I
1 50,51,52,53,54,55,56,57,58,59 I I so,51,52,53,54,55,56,57,58,$9 I
1 60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67,68,69 I I 60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67,68,69 1
1 70,71,72,73,74,75,76,77,78,79 I : I 70,71,72,73,74,75,76,778,7879 I
1 80,81,82,83,84,85,86,87,88,89 I 1 80,81,82,83,&1,85,86,87,88,89 1
1 90,91,92,93,94,95,96,97,98,99 I I 90,91,92,93,94,95,96,97,98,99 I
+------------------------------+ +-------------------------+
COMlulH B IHDEX I COPY )y 1 -kj HRD CPYa I SET
Summary
Assigns the office codes which are restricted and numbers from 01 to 64, each of which consists of
which are allowed to proceed to the 7/i 0 digit four screens.
restriction check. (Password level : Two or higher)
-64 screens are provided for Office Code Table II -
Hundred Office Code blank blank : restricts 3-C-l .06

00 to 99: allowable number for outgoing calls

Hundred Office Code Assigns office codes to be admitted for 6 Digits Toll Restriction.
blank :Call denied based on office code dialed.
9-l-4
Conditions
Pressing the NEXT button changes this screen as follows:
~~fj%J-H~~----- jz-,

Toll Restriction - Office Code Tables I on I PUG i SCR I sn
-p--p ----------~---t-------
Office Cede Table Ho. = 01 (l/4)

+-----------* +-..--------------
2 Hundred Office Co&z I 3 Hundred Office Code I
f P-------m I ; ------- - ____---,
I
f I*< 3’
I
I :: 1 I ““““’ I
T
cursor
Function
The following funcitons appear on the function line of this screen.
this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Sectioii 7-l “Operatin
INDEX> Office Code Table No.(Ol-64)= 0
n F2 : pj /j m /g @ fj HEXIT B
COPY>Table No. (01-64) 0 -+ Table No. -

-
I)F3 :
SET> Set Office Code No. (200-999) 0 (Y: yes / N: no)
n F8 :
m Ll m M M u ~EXI-~ m
9-l-5
3.00 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction Table
Toll Restriction - 7/10 Digit Toll Restriction Table l OFL l PRG l SCR l DIR
I ENT. Number IENT. Number IENT. I Number IENT. I Number I ENT.,I Nunber 1
I ---- .-- -- -- -- +- --- ----m---v+-----+ ---------+---+---------+---- -+.--------- I
I 01 1234567 I 16 1234567 I 31 I 1234567 I 46 I 1234567 l 61 I 1234567 1
I 02 5551212 I 17 I 32 I I 47 I I 62 I I
I 03 I 18 I 33 I 1481 I 63 I I
I 04 I 19 I 34 I I 49 I I 64 I
I 05 I20 I 35 I I501 I I
I 06 I I 21 I I 36 I I 51 I
I 07 I 1221 I 37 I I 52 I
I 08 I I231 I 38 I I 53 I I I I
I 09 I I 24 I I 39 I I 54 I-. I I I
I 10 I 1251 I 40 I I 55 I I I I
I 11 I I 26 I I 41 I 1561 I I I
I 12 I 1271 I 42 I I 57 I I I
I 13 I I 28 I I 43 I I581 I I I
I 14 I I 29 I 1441 I 59 I I I I
I 15 I I 30 I I 45 I Isol I I I
+-----------mm- +-------------+ --------------+-------------a+--------- -------+
COMHON4 p 8 B g HRDCPY!j n ..
Summary
Assigns 10 D.igit Toll Restriction when the call is (Password level : Two or higher)
a long distance call; and assigns 7 Digit Toll
Restriction when the call is a local call.
Assigning Item Default Selection of Value Reference
EXT. (01 to 64) 3-c-1.07

Number blank The last seven digits of the dialed number

EXT. (01 to 64)
Number Assigns the office code and subscriber number to be checked by toll
restriction.
9-l-6
Conditions
None
Function
9-l-7
J. Automatic Route Selection Screen
1.00 Leading Digit Table
4utomatic Route Selection - Leading Digit Table I OFL I PRG I SCR I DIR
------------------------------------------------------~-----+-----+-----+----
Leading Digit Table Entry = 200
+--------------+-------------+ -------------+---------------+-------------+
IEntrvl AC, OC /EntryI AC, DC IEntry! AC, OC lEntry AC, DC lEntry AC, OC I
I-----+--------+----- +--.-----+ ----- +-------+-----+-------+-----+-----’- I
I 200 I 10, 14 I 210 I 10, I 220I , 14 I 230 I , 14 I 240 I , 14 I
I 201 I 12, 13 I 211 I 12, I 221 I , 14 I 231 I , 14 I 241 I , 14 1
I 202 I 10, 14 I 212 I 10, I222 I , 13 I232 I ,13 I242 I I13 I
I 203 I 12, I 213 I 12, I 223 I , 14 I 233 I f 14 I 243 I , 14 I
I 204 I 10, 14 I 214 I 10, I 224 I , 14 I 234 I , 14 I 244 I t 14 I
I 205 I 12, I 215 I 12, I 225 I , 13 I 235 I , 13 I 245 I . 13 1
I 206 I 10, I 216 I 10, I226 I , 13 I236 I , 13 I246 1 t 13 1
I 207 I 12, I 217 I 12, I227 I , 14 I237 I , 14 I247 I , 14 I
I 208 I 10, 13 I 218 I 10, I 228 I , 14 I 238 I , 14 1 248 1 , 14 1
I 209 I 12, I 219 I 12, I 229 I , 13 I 239 I , 13 I 249 I , 13 I
+--------------+-------------+------------ +-----------+-----------+
AC: Enter Route Plan Table No. vhen area code ulo lJse:Blank,Ol-32)
DC: Enter Route Plan Table No. vhen office code o(o lJse:Blank,Ol-32)
COHNON8 INDEX fl COPY 8 I I HRDCPYI 1 -‘;
Summary
Assigns the route plan table number to be used (Password level : Two or higher)
depending on the area code or office code dialed.
? 16 screens are provided for Leading Digit Table.
AC blank blank : not using area code 3-C-2.00

01 to 32 : route plan table number
oc blank blank : not using office code

01 to 32 : route plan table number
9-J-l
AC ( Area code ) When the leading digits represent an Area code, this field assigns the
Route Plan table number.
When not dialing an Area code, leave “blank.”
Also if the numbering plan is Type C, assign the Area code even
if the leading digits represent a Local Toll dial.
OC ( Office code ) When the leading digits represent an Office code, this field assigns the
Route Plan table number.
When not using the Office code, leave “blank .”
Conditions
Pressing the NEXT button changes this screen as follows:
Entry Entry Entry Entry

+ 200 250 300 ------ 4 .‘950
Function
..
this screen. The operation of function keys are desctibed in Section 7-l “Operatin
1 INDEX> Leading Digit Table Entry (200-999)=
COPY>Entry No. (200-999) -+ Entry No. -
9-J-2
2.00 Office Code Tables
Automatic Route Selection - Office Code Tables I OFL I PRG I SCR i SEL
-------------------------------------------------------+-----+-----+-----+----,
Office Code Tabie No. = 01 (l/4)

+-------------------------------+ +-----------------------------+
I 2 Hundred Office Code I I 3 Hundred Office Code
I ------------------------------- I I __---------------------------- I
I 00,01,02,03,04,05,06,07,08,09 I I 00,01,02,03,04,05,06,07,08,09 1
I 10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17,18,19 I I 10,11,12,13,14,15,16,17.18,19 i
I 20,2l,22,23,24,25,26,27,28,29 I I 20,21,22,23,24,25,26,n,28,29 1
I 30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39 I I 30,31,32,33,34,35,36,37,38,39 I
I 40,41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49 I I 40,41,42,43,44,45,46,47,48,49 I
I 50,51,52,53,54,55,56,57,58,59 I .-I 50,51,52,53,54,55,56,57,58,59 I
I 60,61,62,63,64,65,66,67,68,69 I I ~0,61,62,63,64,65,66,67,68.69 I
I 70,71,72,73,74,75,76,77,78,79 I I 70,71,72,73,74,75,76,77,78,79 1
I 80,81,82,83,84,85,86,87,88,89 I I 80,81,82,83,84,85,86,87.88,89 I
I 90,91,92,93,94,95,96,97,98.99 I I 90,91,92,93,94,95,98,97,98,99
I
+----------------------------+ +------------------------------+
+-~-~---~~~~~-~~-~~-+-~~-~~-~~~--~~~~~~~~~~-~-----~~ -,------e-w------+
I Area Code I 201 I Route Plan Table No. when hit data (01-32) I 21 I
+-------------------+ _-------------------------------- m-e-------w----+
COMMON1 INDEX B COPY # I ii HRDCPY#j g SET
Summary
Assigns all office codes used in each area code numbers from 01 to 32, each of which consists of
1 in every hundred unit. four screens.
32 screens are provided for Office Code Table (Password level : Two or higher)
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Referenct 7

Hundred Office Code blank blank : not using office code table 3-C-2.00
00 to 99 : office code
Area Code blank blank : not assigning area code

200 to 999 : area code
Route Plan Table No. 01 01 to 32 : route plan table number
9-J-3
Hundred Office Code Assigns all office codes corresponding to the area code.
Area Code Assigns the area code.
Route Plan Table No. Assigns route plan table number.
Conditions
Pressing the NEXT key changes this screen as follows:
Office Code Office Code

4 Table Table T&je +------ Table
No. 01 (l/4) No. 01 (2/4) No. 01 (314) No. 64 (414)
-El

kttaatiehuta 3drtim - offl.3 codeTables IC+LIPRGlSCRISR
--e-a
offfa c& Table lb. = 01 (1/U

l . ---
I 2 uwked office cd0 I I 3liudredoIfies code I

I
Ir !!I
I
I
I
I ..
f
f
l
-_--
I buta Plr Tdbl. no. when hit data (0GG-i
+---I---- --+
cursor
To move the cursor to “Route Plan Table No. when hit data (01-32),” use them
key when the cursor is located in ‘Area Code.”
office k& Table no. = 01 (l/4)

l , c----,
I 2 uunw offlm b& I I 3&%JnbdofficeGde I

I- -l ------I
I . . 1
I t
f :: I **‘**‘***
I * * I I I
I . . I I I
I . * I I I
. . I I I
. . I I
* . i I I
I . I I I
. ---+ c-- ----.
l ---------------•
I kmccde I I Pout0 Plm Table no. rben hit dsta (Ol-32, I1 I

l -s-s----c- ---__----
--T’
cursor
9-J-4
Function
The following funcitons war on ‘3 e func:;or; line of this setting screen.
INDEX> Office Code Table No.(Ol-32)= @

n h I
COPY>Table No. (01-32) fl - + Table No. -
SET> Table No. (01-32) 0
pJ H pgj /j HEXIT B
.,
9-J-5
3.00 Route Plan Tables
Automatic Route Selection - Route Plan Tables I OFL I PRG I SCR I SEL
.------------------------------r-------------------------+-----+-----+-----+----
Route Plan Table No. = 01

+-------------------------------------------------+
I Start Hour I Route List Number ( 01 - 64 1 I
I --------------+-------------------------------------- I
I Hour I AH/PM I HON.1 TUE.1 WED.1 THU.1 FRI.1 SAT.1 SUN.1
i 8 AH i 01 i 02 i 03 i 04 i 05 i 06 i 07 i
I ------+-------+-----+----t----+-----t-----+----- l
i 12 1 AM I 08 I 09 I 09 I 10 I 11 I 12 I 13 I
I -----+-------+-----+-----+-----+---+----+-----+-----+--- I
f 1 I PH I 14 I 15 I 16 I 17 I 18 I 19 I 20 I
------+--------+----+ ----+-----+------+------+------+----- I
1 5 1 PH I 21 I 22 I 23 I 24 I 01 I 02 I 03 1
+---------------------------------------------------+
COMMON1 INDEX 1 COPY ff READ h 1 HRDCPY$j 1 ”
Summary
Sets route plan tables by assigning time zones 32 screens are provided for Route Plan Table
and route list numbers applied to each time zone numbers from 01 to 32.
of each day of the week (Password level: Two or higher)
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Referenct
start Hour 3-C-2.00

Hour blank 01 to 12: hour
AM/PM blank AM/PM : a.m./p-m.
Route List Number (01 to 64)

MON.
TUE.
WED. blank 01 to 64: route list number
THU.
FRI.
SAT.
SUN.
9-J-6
Start Hour
Hour Assigns starting time of applied Route List.
When assigning “Hour,” enter each item without leaving any blank.”
AM/PM Assigns a.m. or p.m. of the starting time.
Route list number(MON) 1,
Route list number(TUE) i

,
Route list number(WED) j
i Assigns Route List number.
Route list number(THU) i Be sure to assign Route List number for each specified “Hour.- without
/ leaving any “blank.”
Route list number(FRI) j
I
Route list number(SAT) /
Route list number(SUN) /
Conditions
Route Plan Route Plan Route Plan

+ Table + Table -+ Table +------AT1
No. 01 No. 02 No. 03
9-J-7
Function
~c0MM0~ BNDEX &OPY a READ @ @-iADCPY u u
are available in all setting screens. INDEX, COPY and READ keys are also
available in this screen. The operation of function keys are described in Section 7-l
“Operatin of Funciton Keys.” Only messages are provided here.
1 INDEX:, Route Plan Table No. (Ol-32)= 0
1 COPY>Table No. (01-32) a - + Table No. - I
READ> Table No. (Ol-32)= @
9-J-8
4.00 Route Lists Table
Automatic Route Selection - Route Lists Table I OFL I PRG I SCR I DIR
--------------------------------------------------+-----+ -----+---+-----
Route Lists Table (l/6)
+------------------------------------------------------------------------+
IRoutel Priority11 Priority 2 I Priority 3 I Priority 4 I
1 Listl----------+----------------+---------------+-------------------+
I 1 ‘It 1 HOD lUTl ALV I TG I HOD IVTI ALV I ‘IX I HOD lVrl f&V I ‘IX I HOD I
I -----+---+-----+--+----+----+ -----+-------+---+----+-+-----++------+-----+
I go1 I 01 I 00 IY I 00 I 02 I 01 IY I 00 I 03 I 01 IY I 00 I 04 I 01 I
I go2 I 02 I 00 I Y I 01 I 02 I 01 IY l 02 I 03 I 01 l Y I 03 I 04 I 01 I
I fm3 I 03 I 00 I Y I 01 I 02 I 01 IY I 02 I 03 I 01 I Y I 03 I 04 I 01 I
I #04 I 04 I 00 I Y I 01 I 02 I 01 I Y I 02 I 03 I 01 IY I 03 I 04 I 01 I
I HI5 I 05 I 00 IY I 01 I 02 I 01 IY I 02 I 03 I 01 IY I 03 I 04 I 01 I
I SO6 I 06 I 00 IY I 01 I 02 I 01 IY I 02 I 03 I 01 IY I 03 I 04 I 01 l
I go7 I 07 I 00 I Y I 01 I 02 I 01 IY I 02 I 03 I 01 IY I 03 I 04 I 01 I
I #08 I 08 I 00 IY I 01 I 02 I 01 IY I 02 I 03 I 01 IY I 03 I 04 I 01 l
I to9 I 09 I 00 IY I 01 I 02 I 01 I Y I 02 I 03 I 01 IY I 03 I 04 I 01 I
I #lo I 10 I 00 IY I 01 I 02 I 01 IY I 02 I 03 I 01 IY I 03 I 04 I 01 I
I #ll I 11 I 00 IY I 01 I 02 I 01 IY I 02 I 03 I 01 IY I 03 I 04 I 01 I
I #12 I 12 I 00 IY I 15 I 02 I 01 IY I 02 I 03 I 01 IY I 03 I 04 I 01 I
+---------------------------------------------------------+
fj COHHDN fj INDEX g COPY 1
Summary
Assigns trunk groups in order of economical (Password level: Two or higher).
priority (1 to 4) and parameters on each priority.
The screen consists of six screens.
Priority 1 3-C-2.00
TG blank blank : local trunk
01 to 16: real trunk
MOD blank blank : when YG” is blank

01 to 32: modified digit table number
Priority 2
WT No Y : sending warning tone
N : without warning tone
ALV blank blank : when “TG” is blank

! 01 to 16: restriction level
Continued
9-J-9
Continuec
-
Assigning items Default Selection of Value leferencej
----I
Priority 2 ia I^4 _._‘_
) ,- - 1
TG 00 00 : local trunk
01 to 16: trunk group number
MOD blank blank : when “TG” is blank

01 to 32: modified digit table number i
Priority 3
WT No Y : sending warning tone
AVL blank blank : when “TG” is blank

01 to 16: restriction level
TG 00 00 : local trunk

Priority 4
No Y : sending warning tone
blank blank : when “TG” is blank

01 to 16: restriction level
TG 00 00 : local trunk .,

9-J-l 0
Priority 1
TG Assigns the most economical trunk group number.
MOD Assigns modified digit table number to modify the digits to suitable ones for the
preset trunk group.
Priority 2
WT Assigns sending warning tone or not, before going around to the secondary
economical trunk group.
ALV Assigns restriction level of the secondary economical trunk group number.
TG Assigns the secondary economical trunk group number.
MOD Assigns modified digit table number for modifying the digits suitable ones for
secondary economical trunk.
Priority 3
Assigns sending warning tone or not, before going around to the third economical
:
trunk group.
ALV Assigns the thirdly economical trunk group.
TG Assigns the thirdly economical trunk group.
MOD Assigns the modified digit table number for making the most suitable digits for the
thirdly economical trunk group.
Priority 4
Assigns sending warning tone or not, before going around to the fourth economical
trunk group.
ALV Assigns the restriction level of the fourth economical trunk group.
TG Assigns the fourth economical trunk group.
MOD Assigns the modified digit table number for making the most suitable digits for the
fourth economical trunk group. .
Conditions
:) Pressing the NEXT key changes this screen as follows:
--.
Route Lists Route Lists Route Lists
- Table (l/6) - Table (2/6) - Table (3/6) * ------
9-J-l 1
Function
The following funcitons appear on the function line of this screen.
SUMMON @~DEX &OPY M E?;1 @!RDCPY m II8:
INDEX> Route List Table No. (01-64)= 1
Ell:, p.J /3&J pJ @ f#J HEXIT H
COPY>Route List No. (01-64) 0 -3 Route List No. = -
B @J H B HEXTT H
9-J-l 2
5.00 Modified Digit Table
Automatic Route Selection - Wodified Digit Table I OFL I PRG I SCR I DIR
-----------------------------------------------------+----+-----+-----+----
Hodified Digit Table (l/2)

+------------------------ -----------+-----------------------------------+
IENT. IDELI Digits to be Inserted IENT.lDELI Digits to be Inserted I
I-----+----+-------------------------+----+---+---------------------- I
1 01 I 1 I 12345678901234567890123456 I 09 I 1 I 12345678901234567890123456 1
I 02
03 I 1 I 11 I 1 I
I 10 I
104lll I 12 I 1 I I
IIO6lll
05 I 1 I 14 I 1 I
I 13 I
I 07
08 I 1 I I 16
15 I 1 I i
+----------------------+--------------------------+
H: Home Position P: Pause (5 seconds) D: Switch to DTHF
1: Secret &art) 3: Secret (End)
COMMON1
Summary
Assigns digits to be deleted and digits to be (Password leve: Two or higher)
inserted.
The screen consists of two screens.
Assigning items Default Selection of Value Reference
DEL 0 0 to 9 : digit to be deleted 3-C-2.00
Digits to be Inserted blank Digits to be inserted

Maximum 26 digits consisting of numbers, *, #
and marks below :
H : Home Position
P: Pause
D: Switch to DTMF
[ : Start of secret number
1 : end of secret number
(Enter [ ] in a pair)
9-J-l 3
Del Assigns the number of the digits to be deleted from the dialed digits.
Digits to be inserted Assigns numbers and marks to be added.
Conditions
Function
.,
9-J-l 4
K. Special Attended Screen
1.00 DISA
Special Attended - DISA I OR I PRG I SC3 I DIR

---------U---r-------------- 4-----*--+---
-------------I-------- -C-------- ------
1 DISAHo. I Shelf I Slot I For Use I Tenant I I
-me+---- +----+- --we- I I I
f -1 1 1 1 05 I DISA I 1 I DelayedAnswer I After 1 rins I
I 2 I 2 I 04 I OGWl I 2 I ProlongTibe I 2 minute(s)I
I 3 I 1 IO5 I oGH2 I 1 I Control CodeI** I Yes I
I 4 I 2 I 04 I W-UPI 2 IToneDetect I Yes I
+I---- -------- -- ------
I DISA Code I User Cock I AR3 Override I Toll LVL I Forced I Rolonlr I Tenant I
I --- -M+----+ -------+---B..B+~- -*----B--w--- I
I 1 I YeS I 10 I X0 I Yes I 1 I
I2 I f Yes I I Ho I Yes I 1 I
I3 I I YeS I :: I Ho I Yes I 2 I
I4 I I Yes I 16 I No I Yes I 2 I
5 I I Yes I 10 I No I Yes I 1 I
i 6 I I Yes I 11 I No I Yes I 1 I
I7 I YBS I 11 I Ho I Yes I 2 I
I8 I I Yes I 16 I Ho I Yes I 2‘ I
------__--------------I__--- ---
Summary
Assigns parameters for effectuating DISA (Password level : Two or higher)
(Direct Inward System Access) function.
Assigning Items Defablt Selection of Value Refer&a
DISA No. (1 to 4) DISA : For DISA feature 3-D-2.02

For Use DISA OGMl : For UCD-OGM 1 3-D-2.06
OGM2 : For UCD-OGM 2 3-F-4.00
W-UP : For Wake-up Call 3-F-13.01
4-I-13.00
6-J-8.00

2 : tenant 2
DISA Code (1 to 8)
User Code blank Four digit numbers : DISA user code 3-D-2.02
blank : not assigning
ARS Override NO Yes : specifying a trunk group is available 3-D-2.02

No : specifying a trunk group is unavailable
Continue
9-K-l
(40993)
Continued
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Referma
DISA Code (1 to 8) (cont.) 3-D-2.02

Toll LVL 01 01 to 16 : toll restriction level
Forced No Yes : forced 3-D-2.02

No : option
Prolong - Yes Yes : probnging duration is available 3-O-2.02

No : probnging duration is unavailable

2 : tenant 2
Delayed Answer After 2 rings Immediately : immediately 3-B-l 0.0

After 1 ring : 1 ringing 3-D-2.02
After 2 rings : 2 ringings
After 3 rings : 3 ringings
Prolong Time 5 0 to 7 : minute 3-B-10.0

3-D-2.02
Control Code “* ” Yes Yes : Control Code is available 3-D-2.02

No : Control Code is unavailable
Tone Detect Yes Yes : executing tone detection 3-D-2.02

No : not detecting tone
9-K-2
DISA No. (1 to 4)
For use Assigns the usage of DISA cards.
Tenant Assigns Tenant number which each of the DISA cards one through four
belongs to.
DISA Code
User Code Assigns User Code required for making outgoing CO call vial DISA feature.
ARS Override Assigns whether admitting both calling by specifying a trunk group and local
trunk calling or admitting only local trunk calling.
Toll LVL Assigns toll restriction level in making outgoing calls.
Forced Assigns account code input mode in making outgoing calls.
Prolong Assigns admitting the prolonged duration of conversation between two

*: .
outside parties.
Tenant Assigns the tenant number which is able to use the User Codes.
Delayed Answer Assigns the delayed answer time (from detection of DISA arriving to
answer).
Prolong Time Assigns allowable prolonged time limit for conversation between two
outside parties.
.Control Code “* ” Assigns recalling and disconnecting operation is possible or.L not by using
“*n key.
Tone Detect Assigns whether executing tone detection during CO-CO conversation or
not.
9-K-3
Conditions
This screen cannot be selected from “Special Attended-Submenu,” if
“Configuration-Slot Assignment” has no DISA card programmed.
Tenant Displays ‘I-” if “System-Operation”, Tenant Service is set to -No.-
ARS Override Displays y- ” if “System-Operation”, Automatic Route Selection is set tc

“No.”
Special Attended - DISA I OFL I PRG I SCR I DIR 1
-----------_- ----c------------c------
DISA Ho. I Shelf I Slot I For Use I Tenant I

---c---c-
..
cursor
Function
9-K-4
2.00 DID
+-------------------------------------------------------- -M---V+
I Table 1 I Table 2 I Table 3 I Table 4 1

------------------+-----------+--------+---------+----------
I Receive Digit I 4 I 5 I 5 I 7
-------..----m------+ ----------+---------+---------+--------
1
I Delete Digit I 1 I 2 I 2 I 6 I
------------------+---------+---------+---------+---------
I Insert Dial No. I
+--------------I--------------------------------------------+
Summary
Makes up the DID modification table for
effectuating DID (Direct Inward Dialing) function.
) (Password level : Two or higher)
Selection of Value I Referencc
1 to 7 : number of receiving digit(s)
Delete Digit 0 1 to 6 : number of deleting digit(s)
Insert Dial No. blank Maximum three digit numbers: dialing number
to be added
blank : inserting no digit
9-K-5
Table 1 to 4
Receive Digits Assigns receiving dialing digits.
Digits exceeding assigned digits are omitted.
Delete Digits Assigns the leading digits to be deleted from received dialing number.
insert Dial No. Assigns dialing number to be inserted.
Conditions
This screen cannot be selected from “Special Attended-Submenu,” if “Configuration-
Slot Assignment” has no DID card programmed.

3~ecial Attended - DID I DPL I PRG I SCR I DIR
------------------------*- -c--+-w---
c----------------- l
I Itcl I Table 1 I Table 2 I Table 3 I Table 4 I

I -----c------c- -+-----~
I Receive Ditit II41414B-c-e---+------ 1
I -----
+-t---’
cursor
.
Function
9-K-6
3.00 UCD
3.01 UCD (li2)
Special Attended - KD I OFL I PRG I SCR I DIR

-------------------------------‘-”---------------------+~ ---+-----+-----+----.
‘UCD (l/2)
+------------------v-e ------ +---------------________ 3------------------------+
1 UCD 1 FDN l OFDN I OT I UCD I FDN I OFDN I OT I UCD I FDN I OFDN I OT I
I -“‘+‘-“-c---+-----+---+^--,,,+-,,,,+-,,- +-----+------+------+---- I
I 01 I 1234 I 5678 I - 1 12 I 1234 I 5678 I 8 I 23 I 1234 I 5678 I 8 1
I 02 I 1234 I 5678 I - 1 13 I 1234 1 5678 I 10 I 24 I 1234 I 5678 I 8 1
1 03 1 1234 1 5678 I - I 14 I 1234 I 5678 I 10 I 25 I 1234 I 5678 I 8 I
1 04 1 1234 I 5678 I - I 15 I 1234 I 5678 I 8 I 26 I 1234 I 5678 1 8 1
lO5'l1234l567818 I16 112341567818 127 112341567818 I
IO6 I1234 I5678 I8 I17 I1234 I5678 I8 I28 I1234 15678 I8 I
I07 i 1234 15678 I8 I18 I1234 I5678 I8 I29 11234 15678 I8 l
I 08 I 1234 I 5678 I I 19 I 1234 I 5678 I 8 I 30 ‘I 1234 I 5678 I 8 I
IO9 I1234 I5678 I I 20 I 1234 I 5678 l. 8 I 31 I 1234 1 5678 18 l
1 10 1 1234 I 5678 I I 21 I 1234 I 5678 I 8 I 32 I 1234 I 5678 l 8 l
1 11 1 1234 I 5678 I 122 11234 1567818 I I I l I
+---------------------+ --------------------+----------------------+
FDN: Floating DN(No Use:Blank), OFDN: Overflov DN(No Use:Blank),
UCD: UCD Group, 0T:Overflov Tine (No U.se:Blank,l-10)
Summary
Assigns the parameters on each UCD (Uniform (Password level : Two or higher)
Call Distribution) group.
:) This is the first screen of two screens.
Assigning Items 1 Default 1 Selection of Value ~ Referenc
UCD (01 to 32) _,._ 3-B-3.00

FDN blank Three or four digits : Floating Directory Number 3-D-2.05
blank : without FDN to 2.06
OFDN blank Three or four digits : Overflow DN 3-D-2.05

I I blank : without OFDN to 2.06
UCD (05 to 32) 3-D-2.05

OT blank 1 to 10 : minute(s) ; Overflow timer
blank : without Overflow timer
9-K-7
UC3 :Cl ta 32)
FDN Assigns the pilot number of UCD groups.
OFDN Assigns the call placing destination in case of overflowing.
UCD (05 to 32)

OT Assigns the Overflow timer.
Timer starts at the beginning of calls entering into the UCD queue.
Conditions
Function
are available in this setting screen. For operation, refer to Section 7-l “Operation
of Function Keys.”
9-K-8
L. Miscellaneous Screen
1 .OO Installation Information
Miscellaneous - Installation Information I cm I PRG I SCR I DIR

---__---_-----^--- -----------------------------------+-----+----+-----+----
---------------------------------------=-------------------------
<< Customer & Installation Data >>
Customer Hame
Location
Phone No.
Uodem No.
Customer Contact
Date of Installation
Unit ID .,
Installers ‘Nke
Programmers Name
-----------------------------------------------------------------
omments: Panasonic Hybrid PBX Install
Summary
1 Assigns the customer’s name, adress, telephone

number etc., of the installation point.
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value leferencl e
I Customer Name I blank Letters, numbers, marks within 32 digits None
I Location Letters, numbers, marks within 64 digits
I Phone No. I blank Letters, numbers, marks within 16 digits
1 Modem No. 1 blank Letters, numbers, marks within 16 digits
I Customer Contact I blank Letters, numbers, marks within 32 digits
Letters, numbers, marks within 16 digits
Letters, numbers, marks within eight digits

L
ontinued
9-L-l
Comnued
Assigning Items Default Selection of Value Fleference
installers Name blank Letters, numbers, marks wlthin 32 clg ts None
Programmers Name blank Letters, numbers, marks within 32 digI’s

.
Comments blank Letters, numbers, marks within 70 digits

None
Conditions
None
Function
Tl7e following functions appear on the function line of this setting screen.
.I
COMMON (SHOW LV, CHG LV, INS, OUS, REMOVE, EXIT) and HRD CPY keys ..
For operation, refer to Section 7-i “Operation of FunctionKeys.”
.-
9-L-2
2.00 Power Failure Transfer Assignment
Miscellaneous - Power Failure Transfer Assignment I OFL I PRG I SCR I DIR

_____---------------------------------------------------+-----+-----+-----+-----
Paver Failure Transfer Assignment

+-----------------------------------~--------------------~--------------+.
I I Trunk I Extension I I Trunk I Extension 1
1 No. I-______________+m_____________ + No. 1____________m--+ _______-------- 1
I I Shelf I Slot I Shelf I Slot L I Shelf I Slot L Shelf I Slot I
I----- + ------ +------- +____-_+_------ + _____
+ ---- --+_------ +------- +-v-m - I
I 1 I 1 I 01 I 1 I 07 I 10 I 2 I 04 I 2 I 10 I
1 2 1 1 I 02 I 1 I 08 I 11 I 2 I 05 I 2 I ll I
I 3 I 1 I 03 I 1 I 09 I 12 I 2 I 06 I 2 I 12 I
I 4 I 1 I 04 I 1 I 10 l-13 I 3 I 01 I 3 I 07 I
I 5 I 1 I 05 I 1 I 11 I 14 I 3 I 02 I 3 I 08 I
I6 I 1 Io6T’i I12 115 I 3 IO3 I 3 I09 i
I 7 I 2 I 01 I 2 I 07 I 16 I 3 I 04 I 3 I 10 I
I 8 I 2 I 02 I 2 I 08 I 17 I 3 I 05 1 3 I 11 1
1 9 1 2 1 03 1 2 1 09 1 18 1 3 i 06 1 3 1 12 1
+-------------------‘----------------~--,------------- ------.--___----- -m-m-- +
Summary
For effectuating Power Failure Transfer, assigns onto HLC (Hybrid tine Circuit) Card or SLC
LCOT (Loop Start Central Office Trunk) Card or (Single Line Telephone Line Circuit) Card.
GCOT (Ground Start Central Office Trunk) Card ( Password level : Two or higher).
Assigning items 1 Default 1 Selection of Value Reference
TrunkNo.( 1 to18) blank 1 : for Basic shelf 14-H-l .OO

Shelf 2 : for Expansion shelf 1
3 : for Expansion shelf 2
1 blank : not assigning
Slot blank 01 to 12: for Basic shelf
01 to 15: for Expansion shelves 1 and 2
Extension No. ( 1 to 18 ) blank 1 : for Basic shelf

Shelf 2 : for Expansion shelf 1
3 : for Expansion shelf 2
Slot blank 01 to 12: for Basic shelf
01 to 15: for Expansion shelves 1 and 2
9-L-3
Trunk No. ( 1 to 18 )
Shelf Assigns shelf number of COT (LCOT, GCOT).
Slot Assigns slot number of COT (LCOT, GCOT).
Extension No. ( 1 to 18 )
Shelf Assigns shelf number of extensions (SLC, HLC ).
Slot Assigns slot number of extensions (SLC, HLC ).
Conditions
None
Function
9-L-4
M. Error Message Tables
1 .OO Error Messages Related to

the Assigning Items in the
Same Screen
If there is a wrong entry in the displayed screen, The (XXX) indicates one of the error message
the following appears on the message line when numbers shown below and possible causes of the
storing the entry: “Contradict the relative item errors and countermeasures for them are as
internal (XXX).” follows.
Error Message No.

Probable Cause Countermeasure
ww
010 (page length)-(skip length) < 6 Make (page length)-(skip length) z 6.
011 (receive digit) 2 (delete digit) is not established Make (receive digit) z(delete digit).
in - Special Attended DID screen.
012 Restriction Level-Operator _I.Restriction Level Make Restriction Level-Operators Restriction

-International is not established in - Operation Level-International
(l/3) soreen
020 Day-night combination in the incoming mode is Check the day-night combination in incoming
t- not correct. mode.
I 040 Combination of the terminals of operators 1,2

is incorrect.
Check the combination of terminals for
operators 1,2.
I
I
050 I DN is not installed.
I
I Designate the installed DN.
I
I 051 Attempting to assign FDN’s of UCD # 1 to # 4 Set FDN of other UCD, or extension directory
I for the overflow destination of UCD # 5 to # 32 I number.
Attempting to assign ita own extension number Specify the number except its own extension
on the key which cannot be assigned to its own number.
extension number.
<example> DSS(ICM)
‘g DSS(DN) .T.e-y. ----
SDN
070 Specifying UCD number inoorreotly. Assign UCD to only one ICM.
I
100 Date value is incorrect on the check of month, Check the date setting.
and leap year in the time and date setting
screen.
9-M-l
2.00 Error Messages Related to
Other Screens
If there is a wrong entry related to the assigning The (XXX) indicates an error message number
items in the other screens, the following appears shown below and possible causes of the errors
on the message line when storting the entry: and countermeasures for them are as follows.
“Contradict the relative item external (xxx).”
Error Message No. Probable Cause Countermeasure
010 Setting DN which is not stored in the hundred Enter data in hundred block. Or, set DN
block. which is stored in hundred block
011 Specified extension DN is not stored. Store the extension DN.
012 Telephone type of the extension paired with Paired extension should be changed to a
DSS console is not PITS. PITS.
020 Setting DN to the DSS button. Set DN to assignable port.
030 Setting trunk group except DID on CO-line on Assign trunk group to the correct kind of
DID card. Or, assigning trunk group of DID to card.
CO-line on the card except DID.
040 Tenant is different. Assign the same tenant.
041 As assigned to the destination of 1 : N of trunk Cancel the 1 : N destination.

group, impossible to change tenant.
042 As assigned to the destination of doorphone Cancel the doorphone call destination.
call, impossible to change tenant. ..
043 Setting one pickup group to ICM & PAG group Set it to the same tenant. Or, change tenant
belonging to diierent tenant. after deleting pickup group.
044 Changing tenant of ICM/PAG group without Change after canceling extensions.
canceling extensions. Impossible to move extensions to the other
tenant.
Y. .
045 As assigned to the destination of paging from Change the destination of attendant paging.
attendant console, impossible to change Tenant.
046 As assigned to call placing mode of Trunk Change assigning of incoming mode.
group, impossible to change Tenant.
047 As assigned to night answer point forCO-line, Change assignment of night answer point.
impossible to change Tenant.
048 Attempting to change the tenant of Trunk group Change after removing the CO lines.
without removing the CO lines which belong to Impossible to move CO lines to the other
the trunk group. tenant.
049 Attempting to change the tenant of Trunk group Change after canceling 1: N destination.
without canceling the setting of 1 :N destination
for the trunk group.
050 Deleting is impossible because it is assigned in Change the item beforehand.

another item.
9-M-2
Tl
Error Message No. Probable Cause
052 Extws on assgned to NEXT HUNT STATION is Assign another extension or clear the
a!:eazb assig.med to NEXT HUNT STATION for
ano!-er exterslon.
053 Re:a:lon between ICM group and Pickup group Make them in proper relation.
ass;gr,ed for an extension is incorrect.
054 As PRV-CO is assigned by PITS button Cancel the assignment of the PITS button.
assignment, impossible to change the type of
the trunk group to any other than PRV.
055 As assigned to Single CO by PITS button Cancel the assignment of the PITS button.
assignment. impossible to change the 1:l
destination of the line to a different PITS.
056 Attempting to change the tenant of Trunk group Change the tenant after clearing all 1:l
without canceling the setting of 1 :I destination. destinations of CO lines belonging to the
group.
057 UCD group is not assigned. Assign Pickup group to a UCD group.
058 Attempting to assign DID to Trunk group which Assign DID after clearing all CO lines
has CO lines belonging to the group. belonging to the group.
060 Attempting to assign the unstored ICM number Assign stored ICM number.
to the DSS (ICM) button.
Attempting to assign the ATT which is not Register the ATT as an operator, or specify
registered as the operator to the maintenance another device.
1 111 idevice. ..
Specified CO line does not exist. Specify proper CO line.
I 081 ISpecified CO line is not the PVL. Specify proper CO line.
Specified CO line is already assigned as a DIL Specify another CO line or cancel the
1 :I or PRV-CO by another extension. assignment of the desired line.
Impossible to assign because the programming: Change call placing type to 1:l , or change
for specified CO does not satisfy the condition. group type to unique type.
084 Impossible to assign because the programmings Change call placing type to 1:N, and group
for specified CO does not satisfy the condition. type to group.
090 Specified External Pager is not existing. Specify an existing pager.
101 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the assignment as an operator.
registered as an operator of the tenant.
102 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the assignment as the destination.
registered as the destination of intercept routing
for the Trunk group.
103 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the assignment as an ATT busy out
registered as an ATT busy out extension of extension.
Trunk group.
9-M-3
lrror Message No. Probable Cause Countermeasure
i.3 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the storage as an ATT overflow
registered as an ATT overflow extension for extension.
Trunk group.
105 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the storage as an overflow
registered as an overflow extension for UCD destination.
group.
106 Attempting to delete the extension/RMT which Cancel the storage as a DIL 1:l call
is registered as a DIL 1 :I call destination of CO destination.
line.
107 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the storage as a night answer point.
registered as a night answer point of CO line.
108 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the storage as a walking station.
registered as a walking station.
109 Attempting to delete the PITS paired with DSS- Change the PITS paired with DSS Console.
console.
110 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the storage as night answer point.
registered as a night answer point for tenant.
111 Attempting to delete the extension which is set Cancel the assignment of SDN. ..
to SDN.
113 Attempting to delete the ATT when the ATT is Change the incoming mode destination othe
assigned for day incoming mode in Trunk than All-.
group. .,
114 Attempting to delete RMT when the RMT alarm Cancel the assignment of RMT alarm.
is assigned.
115 Attempting to delete the external pager which is Change the night answer point.
registered as UNA point for CO line.
116 Attempting to delete the external pager which is Change the incoming mode.
registered as a TAFAS fordmght incoming -ID’ ‘-I;-
mode for Trunk group.
117 Attempting to delete the external pager which is Change the paging destination.
registered as a paging destination for the ATT.
118 Attempting to delete the ATT which is specified After changing maintenance device, delete
for maintenance device. the ATT.
119 When deleting ATT, combination of operators 1 Check the combination of operators.
and 2 is incorrect.
121 Impossible to delete the card, for all of the ports Delete all the ports belonging to the card.
belonging to the card is not made pm-installed.
122 Impossible to delete the card, for DN is Delete all the ports belonging to the card.
assigned to an extension port.
9-M-4
123 Deleting the card is rmpossrtoie. for ;: IS Change the maintenance device.
assigned as a maintenance device
124 Deleting the card is impossrble. because i: is Change the intercept routing destination.
assigned for the intercept routing deshnation for
the Trunk group.
125 Deleting the card is impossible, because it is Cancel the doorphone call destination.
assigned for doorphone call destination.
126 Attempting to delete the ATT which is specified Change the incoming mode destination.
for incoming mode destination.
127 Attempting to delete the DISA which is speafied Change the incoming mode.
for incoming mode.
128 Attempting to assign NAG as Night Answer Assign Incoming Mode (Night) to FIXED.
Point of a CO line belonging to a Trunk Group
whose Incoming Mode (Night) is not FIXED.
130 Changing Tenant Service from ‘Yes” to Wo’ is Assign ATT’s to tenant 1.
impossible as all ATTs are not assigned to
tenant 1.
131 Changing Tenant Service from ‘Yes” to ‘No” is Assign music sources to tenant 1.
impossible as all music sources are not
assigned to tenant 1.
132 Changing Tenant Service from ‘Yes” to ‘No” is Assign external pagers to tenant 1.
impossible as all external pagers are not
assigned to tenant 1. ..
133 Changing Tenant Service from Yes” to ‘No” is Assign doorphones to tenant 1.
impossible as all doorphones are not assigned
to tenant 1.
134 Changing Tenant Service from ‘Yes” to ‘No” is Assign DISA’s to tenant 1.
impossible as ail DISA’s are not assigned to
tenant 1.
135 Changing Tenant Service from Yes’ to ‘No” is Assign AGc’s to tenant 1.
impossible as all AGC’s are not assigned to
tenant 1.
136 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to ‘No” is Assign all paging groups to tenant 1.
impossible as all paging groups are not
137 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to ‘No” is Assign all ICM groups to tenant 1.
impossible as all ICM groups are not assigned
to tenant 1.
138 Changing Tenant Service from ‘Yes” to ‘No” is Assign all trunk groups to tenant 1.
impossible as all trunk groups are not assigned
to tenant 1
140 Deleting expansion shelf is impossible, as one Delete all the cards in the expansion shelf.
or more cards are assigned to the expansion
shelf.
9-M-5
(30393)
150 Impossible to &ange the Numbering Plan to Clear DN’s which should be blank.
‘Fixed.’ because there exist DN’s which should
be blank in the ‘Fuec!’ mode in the Hundred
Block.
I I I
160 Impossible to change KS&Paging group, for the Change after deleting all the extensions in the
pickup group bebnging to the ICI&Paging pickup group.
- group contains extensions.
9-M-6
3.00 Other Error Messages
Error Messaae 1 Probable Cause Countermeslire
Illegal parameter Unacceptable value is assigned. Assign an allowable value.
Parameter is not Space exits between items. Remove the space.

consecutive
This parameter Assigned selection value is not for the item. Set the assignable value.
cannot assign
Duplicate parameter The number which is set previously in this Set the number different from the previous
definition internal screen is assigned again. number.
Duplicate parameter The number which is set previously in a differen Set the number different from the previous
definition external screen is assigned. number.
Not installed Device is not installed. Assign the installed device.
Invalid status Status of the specified device does not accept Change the status of the device to be
this command. acceptable for the command.
Diagnostic failure Diagnostic error is checked when In-Service Execute test.

command is executed..
Insufficient privilege Privilege level is lower than specified level. Increase the privilege level through the
Change level function.
Failure Port test is made during a card malfunction. Repair the malfunctional card.
Service violation Specified service is not executed. Check specified service. ,
Already accessed Another maintenance device (remote, PITS, Wait until another device is finished or let him
by another device system) is in use. finish.
Printer is not ready Printer is not connected to the system or the Connect the printer, and make the power on.
power is off.
C,annot print out in Print out.-isunavailable from Remote. Execute print out on-site.
remote
Waiting Changing of program data is suspended Wait for a while or cancel the setting by
because call placement is going on. ‘CTRL+C”
Calender IC trouble Calendar IC malfunction. Repair calender IC.
Device error Backup device is not connected (only when Connect the backup device to SIO # 1 Port.
maintenance device is ATT).
Version error Different version at the time of backup. Match the backup version.
Checksum error A checksum error has been detected. Communication line is defective, or backup
data is destroyed.
9-M-7
Error Message Probable Cause CoLintermeasure
I I
Illegal code detected Improper data is received. Communication link IS defectwe. or backup
data is destroyea. I
Off line Execution is impossible during off-line. Execute during on-iine.
Status is already set Impossible change such as impossible.

[INS] 4 [INS], [OUS] + [OUS]
iS attemDted. i
9-M-8
Section 10
System Programming
Dumb Type Terminal

(Section 10)
System Programming
Dumb Type Terminal
Contents
Page
A Introduction ...................................................................................................... 1O-A-l
6 Construction of Programming Mode ................................................................ 1 O-B-1
C Programming Commands ................................................................................ 1o-c-1
1 .oo System Assignment (SYA) ..................................................................... 1 O-C-l

2.00 Slot Assignment (SLA) ........................................................................... 1 o-c-2
3.00 DN Assignment (DNA) ........................................................................... 1 o-c-5
4.00 Operation (OPR) .................................................................................... 1 O-C-6
5.00 Tenant (TNN) ......................................................................................... 10-c-11
6.00 System Timer (TIM) ............................................................................... 1 o-c-14
7.00 Class of Service 1 (CSl) ....................................................................... 10-C-15
8.00 Class of Service 2 (CS2) ....................................................................... 10-c-17
9.00 Local Access Group (LAG) .................................................................... ; i-:-A:
10.00 Numbering Plan (NBP) .......................................................................... - -
11 .oo Communication Interface (COM) ........................................................... 1 O-C-25
12.00 Speed Dialing-System (SPD) ................................................................ 1 O-C-26
13.00 Absent Message (ABS) ......................................................................... 1 O-C-27
14.00 Trunk Group 1 (TGl )t.. .......................................................................... 1O-C-28
15.00 Trunk Group 2 (TG2) ............................................................................. 1o-c-31
16.00 ICM/Paging Group (IPG) ....................................................................... 1 O-C-32
17.00 Call Pickup Group (CPG) ....................................................................... 1 o-c-33
18.00 CO Line (COL) ....................................................................................... 1 o-c-34
19.00 Pager (PAG) ......................................................................................... 1 O-C-36
20.00 Music Source (MUS) .............................................................................. 1 o-c-37
21 .oo Automatic Gain Control (AGC) .............................................................. 1 O-C-38
22.00 Extension (EXT). .................................................................................... 1 O-C-39
23.00 DSS Console (DSS) .............................................................................. 1 O-C-42
24.00 DN Button Assignment (DNK) ............................................................... 1 o-c-43
25.00 PF Button Assignment (PFK) ................................................................. 1 O-C-46
26.00 DSS Button Assignment (DSK) ............................................................. 1 O-C-48
27.00 Doorphone (DPH) .................................................................................. 1 o-c-50
28.00 Attendant Console (ATT) ....................................................................... 1 o-c-51
29.00 Attendant Queue Priority (AQP) ............................................................ 1 O-C-53
30.00 Equal Access (EQU) .............................................................................. 1 o-c-54
31 .oo OCC Access (OCC) ............................................................................... 1 O-C-56
32.00 Toll Restriction 1 (TRl) .......................................................................... 1 O-C-58
33.00 Toll Restriction 2 (TR2) .......................................................................... 1 O-C-59
34.00 Toll Restriction 3 (TR3) .......................................................................... 1 O-C-60
35.00 Automatic Route Selection 1 (ARl) ....................................................... 1 O-C-61
36.00 Automatic Route Selection 2 (AR2) ....................................................... 1 O-C-62
37.00 Automatic Route Selection 3 (AR3). ...................................................... 1.-O-C-63
- -.
38.00 Automatic Route Selection 4 (AR4) ....................................................... 10-c-64
39.00 Automatic Route Selection 5 (AR5). ...................................................... 10-C-65
40.00 DISA (DIS) ............................................................................................. 1 O-C-66
10-l
Page
41 .OO DISA Code (DIC) ................................................................................... 1 O-C-67
42.00 DlSA Password (DIP) ............................................................................ 10-C-68
43.00 DID (DID) ............................................................................................... 1 O-C-69
44.00 UCD 1 (UCl) ......................................................................................... 10-C-70
45.00 UCD 2 (UC2) ......................................................................................... 1 o-c-71
46.00 Information (INF). ................................................................................... 1 O-C-72
47.00 Power Failure Transfer (PFT) ................................................................ 1 O-C-73
48.00 Change Password (CHG) ...................................................................... 1 O-C-74
49.00 CPC Detect Timing-Outgoing CO Calls (CPC) ...................................... 1 O-C-75
50.00 Automatic Busy-Out Count (ABC) ......................................................... 1 O-C-76
51.00 World Select 1 (WSl) ............................................................................ 10-C-77
52.00 World Select 2 (WS2) ............................................................................ 1 O-C-79
53.00 World Select 3 (WS3) ............................................................................ 1 O-C-81
10-2
A. Introduction
This section provides system programming using
Dumb type terminal. Before starting system
programming, Section 8 “Preparation for
Programming and Maintenance (Dumb Type
Terminal)” must be read. This section describes
the basic operations for programming.
Programming mode consists of 53 commands,
which enable users to assign or change various
parameters concerning the system administration
such as Tenant, Class of Service, Numbering
Plan and so on. A list of all programming
commands is provided on the following page.
1 O-A-1
B. Construction of Programming Mode
Password Level
$-
(System Assignment) ’ T
: . FiLret
2
2 t
2 I
I
I
(Class of Service 1) 2
I
(Class of Service 2) 2 I
(Local Access Group) 2 I
2 Se&d Set
(Communication Interface) 2
(Speed Dialing - System) 3
(Absent Messaqe) 3
t-j PAG (External Pager) 3 )
t-j PFK (Pf- Button Assiqnment) 3 1

(DSS Button Assiqnment) 3
3
(Attendant Console) 2
(Attendant Queue Prioritv) 2
2
2
--- INF (Information) 2 These programs must be done

--- PFr (Power Failure Transfer) 2 in order from “First Set” “Second
--- CHG (Change Password) 1 Set” to “Third Set” shown in the
--- WC (CPC Detect Timing-Outgoing) 3 table. For example, if you
---_ ABC (Automatic Busy-out Count) 3 program Operation (OPE)
--- WSl (Worfd Select 1) 2 before doing System
--- ws2 (World Select 2) 2 Assignment (SYA) program, an
--- ws3 (World Select 3) 2 error message appears.
1O-B-l
C. Programming Commands
1.00 System Assignment (SYA)
Description
This command is used to configure the system
for:
Expansion Shelf (1, or both 1 and 2)
l
lT-SW Conference Expansion Card
To expand the conference trunks, T-SW

Conference Expansion Card (KX-T336104) must
be installed.
Input Format
Input Value for Item Number

Item
Number Assigning Items Input Value
1 Expansion Shelf N : expansion shelf not installed
1: expansion shelf 1 available
2: both expansion shelves 1 and 2 available
2 TSW Additional CONF Y : conference expansion card installed

N: conference expansion card not installed
Conditions
None
1o-c-1
2.00 Slot Assignment (SLA)
Description
To assign the type of card equipped in each free
slot on the basic and expansion shelves, such as
PLC (Proprietary Line Circuit), HLC (Hybrid Line
Circuit), SLC (Single Line Circuit) etc..
Input Format
* In the AT mode, to display or edit in the <Example>

conversation style, do not enter the When you enter: PRGsSLA AT (4 )* the
index number : display starts from the slot number 101 and
moves one by one.
Index Number
Index Number Explanation

x xx Physical number (101 to 315)
- slot (01 to 15)
T shelf (1 to 3)
lzber Assigning Items Input Value
1 Card Type xx (00 to 13)
00 : none
01 : PLC (Proprietary Integrated Telephone System Line Circuit)

card
02 : HLC (Hybrid Line Circuit) card
03 : SLC (Single Line Telephone Circuit) card

04 : OPX (Off Premise Extension) card
05 : LCOT (Loop Start Central Office Trunk) card
06 : GCOT (Ground Start Central Office Trunk) card

07 : DID (Direct Inward Dialing) card
08 : ATLC (Attendant Console Line Circuit) card

Continued
1o-c-2
Continued
- .___
tern
Assigning Items Input Value
bmtzer
09 : DPH (Doorphone Circuit) card
10 : AGC (Automatic Gain Control) card

11 : DISA (Direct Inward System Access) card
12 : RMT (Remote Circuit) card
13 : TSW-OHCA (Off-Hook Call Announcement) card
Conditions
If “SLA” command is entered without index number, all physical slot numbers (except 113 and
115) will be displayed in ascending order (from 101 to 315).
It is impossible to select Index No.1 13 and 115, because Index No.1 13 is fixed to CPU card and
115 is fixed to T-SW card.
If Index No.1 14 is selected, assignable input value is limited to “00: none” or “13: OHCA.”
:
If no CO trunk card (LCOT, GCOT, DID) is assigned, it is not possible to program
.“CO Line (COL).”
If AGC card is not assigned, “Automatic Gain Control (AGC)” cannot be

programmed.
If DPH card is not assigned, “Doorphone (DPH)” cannot be programmed.
If ATLC card is not assigned, it is not possible to program “Attendant Console

(ATT)” and “Attendant Queue Priority (AQP).”
If DISA card is not assigned, it is not possible to program “DISA (DIS)“, “DISA
Code (DIC)” and “DISA Password (DIP).”
If DID card is not assigned, ft is not possible to program “DID (DID).”
When assigning a card, the card status is Out of Service (OUS). When using the
card, the card status should be set to In Service (INS).
For In Service (INS) and Out of Sevice (OUS), refer to Section 8-F-3.00 “In
Service (INS)” and Section 8-F-4.00 “Out of Service (OUS).”
For confirming whether card status is INS or OUS, refer to Section 15-F-1.02 “Card
Status Screen.”
When deleting or changing the pre-assigned card type, the conditions should be
the followings:
The card status is OUS or Fault.
l
All of the port data has been deleted.

l
However, if there exist port data, it is possible to change the cards as follows:
lPLC card- HLC card
lSLC card v HLC card
1 o-c-3
Deleting the ATLC card will be an error if there exist the following assignments:
9 “Trunk Group (TGl)“,
Incoming Mode (Day) is set to “1 (ATT).”
intercept Routing (Day) is set to “A (ATT).”
“Doorphone (DPH)“,
l
Doorphone Assignment is set to “A(ATT).”
Deleting the DISA card will be an error if there exist the following assignments:
l “Trunk Group (TGl)“,
Incoming Mode (Day) is set to “4 (DISA).”
Incoming Mode (Night) is set to “4 (DISA).”
Deleting the HLC, SLC, LCOT or GCOT card will be an error if there is the
following assignment to the slot to be deleted:
l “Power Failure Tansfer (PFT)”
See Section 1-A-5.00 “Service Cards Description” for installing the cards in
combination.
1o-c-4
3.00 DN Assignment (DNA)
Description
To assign a ON (directory number) to each port.
Input Format
Index Number

x xx Physical number (101 to 315)
T- slot (01 to 15)
\ shelf (1 to 3)
Item
’ I Port 1 I
*t&-j Three or four numeric digits: directory number
Conditions
None
1 o-c-5
4.00 Operation (OPR)
Description
To assign data common to the whole system, by
using indexes 1 and 2.
Input Format
Index Number
1 The first Operation block
Item
UUmber
01 Tenant Service Y : Tenant Service is available

N : Tenant Service is unavailable
02 Automatic Route Selection Y: Automatic Route Selection is available

N : Automatic Route Selection is unavailable
03 Numbering Plan 1 : set manually

2 : Fixed 1
3 : Fixed 2
04 Privacy on DN Key 1 : privacy enabled

2 : privacy disabled
05 Restriction Level - Operator 01 to 16 : the restriction level for telephone company operator
call
06 Restriction Level - International 01 to 16 : the restriction level for international call
07 Home Dialing Plan A : Type A : long distance call 1 +NPA+NXX+XXXX

local call NXX+XXXX
B : Type B : long distance call NPA+NXX+XXXX
local call NNX+XXXX
C : Type C : long distance call 1+N PA+NXX+XXXX
1 +NNX+XXXX
local call NNX+XXXX
(N: 2 to 9, P: 0.1, A: 0 to 9, X: 0 to 9)
Continuec
1 O-C-6
Continued
rem
lumber
08 DSS Operation Mode 1 : disconnect and call
2 :’ hold and transfer
09 Busy Tone 1 : busy tone 1

2 : busy tone 2
10 Held Call Reminder Y: Held Call Reminder is enabled

N : Held Call Reminder is disabled
11 Beep Tone for Bsy-ovr / Y: overriding with beep tone

Brg-in N : overriding without beep tone
12 External Paging 1 Y: using external pager 1

N : not using external pager 1
13 External Paging 2 Y : using external pager 2

N: not using external pager 2
14 External Music Source 1 Y : using external music source 1

N : not using external music source 1
15 External Music Source 2 Y : using external music source 2

N : not using external music source 2
16 Idle Line Preference 1 : off-hook selects an idle DN button

2 : off-hook selects an idle CO button
17 FDN for General Operator 0: no FDN

Call 1 DN XXXX (XXXX: three or four numeric digits): FDN for general
operator call 1
18 FDN for General Operator 0 : no FDN

Call 2 DN XXXX (XXXX: three or four numeric digits): FDN for general
operator call 2
. Conditions
Item
Number
01 Tenant Service If “N” is selected, the assigning items listed below cannot be programmed:
“Trunk Group 1 (TG l)“, Tenant
“Pager (PAG)“, Tenant
“Music Source (MUS)“, Tenant
“AGC (AGC)“, Tenant
“Doorphone (DPH)“, Tenant
“DISA(DIS)“, Tenant
02 Automatic Route lf Set to “N,” it is impossible to program “DISA Code (DIG)“, ARS Override.
Selection
1o-c-7
03 Numbering Plan If set to “1 ,I’ “Numbering Plan (NBP)” is changeable.
07 Home Dialing Plan Dial type must be selected depending on the type of the area where this
system is installed.
10 Held Call Reminder If set to “N,” Held Call Reminder does not function. However, it is possible
to program the items below:
“System Timer (TIM)“, Held Call Reminder/Held Call Reminder (ATT)
“Attendant Queue Priority (AQP)“, Held Call Reminder
12, 13 External Paging 1,2 If both are set to “N,” Paging through External Pagers does not function
and “Pager (PAG)” does not appear.
However, it is possible to program the items below:
“Class of Service 2 (CS2)“, External Paging l/2
“Numbering Plan (NBP)“, External Paging/External Paging Answer
If either is set to “N,” it is not possible to program its “Pager (PAG)“, Tone/
BGM.
14, 15 External Music If both are set to “N,” “Music Source (MUS)” does not appear.
4 Source 1,2 If either is set to “N,” it is not possible to program its “Music Source
(MUS)“, For Use.
1O-C-8
Index Number
2 The second Operation block
Input Value for item Number
tern
VU*
Assigning items Input Value
01 System Administration Device 1 : VT220NTlOO

2 : Dumb terminal
3 : Attendant Console 1
4 : Attendant Console 2
02 SMDR Y: SMDR enabled

N : SMDR disabled
03 Page Length 04 to 99: page length (number of lines)
04 Skip Perf. 00 to 95: skip perforation

lNote : if printing out system data:
(page length)- (skip perforation)223
if printing out call processing information :
if printing out error log data :
05 Outgoing Duration Log 0 : do not print outgoing calls

1 : print outgoing toll calls
2: print all calls
06 Incoming Duration Log Y : print incoming calls

N: do not print incoming calls
07 Attendant Duration 1 : Attendant Console duration recorded

2 : Attendant Console duration included with destination
08 Special Carrier Name 1 : print out default value

2 : print out users name
3 : print out dialing number
09 Print Secret Dial Y: print secret dial numbers

N : do not print secret dial numbers
10 Print Error Log Y: print the error log

N : do not print the error log
11 Print Programming Y : print programming

N : do not print programming
Continued
1 o-c-9
Continued
Item
Numter
12 Print Traffic Y : print traffic
N : do not print traffic
13 Start Time of Traffic

Measurement 01 to 12: hour
00 to 59: minute
a.m. or p.m.
14 Start Time of Test xx: xxx

01 to 12: hour
00 to 59: minute
AorP : a.m./p.m.
15 Remote Directory Number 0: none

DN XXXX (XXXX: three or four numeric digits) : Floating
Directory Number
16 Remote Alarm Y : Remote Alarm enabled

N : Remote Alarm disabled
17 Destination Address Maximum 26 numeric digits : telephone (modem) number of the

destination for Remote Alarm
Conditions
Item
Number
02 SMDR If set to “N,” the following items cannot be programmed:
“Operation (OPR)“, (Index Number 2)
Page Length
Skip Perf.
Outgoing Duration Log
Incoming Duration Log
Attendant Duration
Special Carrier Name
Print Secret Dial
Print Error Log
Print Programming
Print Traffic
15 Remote Directory To assign this item, RMT card is necessary,

Number
16,17 Remote Alarm/ Impossible to program if “12”(RMT card) is not assigned in the “Slot
Destination Address Assignment (SLA).” If Remote Alarm is set to “N,” Destination Address
cannot be programmed.
10-c-10
5.00 Tenant (TNN)
Description
To assign tenant data (specifying terminal type
for the operators, the method to change over
Night Service mode, the password for PITS
programming etc.).
(Password level: Two or higher)
Input Format
Index Number

1 or2 tenant number
tern CLR
GllbH
01 Operator 1 Type of Terminal:

0 : no operator
Al : Attendant Console 1
A2 : Attendant Console 2
DN XXXX (XXXX: three or four numeric digits):
extension directory number
02 Operator 2 Same as operator 1
03 Night Service 1 : manual change

2 : automatic change
04 Auto Start Time : MON. (Day) 0
05 Auto Start Time : MON. (Night) 0
06 Auto Start Time : TUE. (Day) 0
07 Auto Start Time : TUE. (Night) L 0
08 Auto Start Time : WED. (Dav) 0
09 Auto Start Time : WED. (Night) 0
10 Auto Start Time : THU. (Day) xx:xxx 0
11 Auto Start Time : THU. (Night) T L A or P : a.m./p.m. 0
12 Auto Start Time : FRI. (Day) T 00 to 59 : minute 0
13 Auto Start Time : FRI. (Night) 01 to12: hour 0
14 Auto Start Time : SAT. (Day) 0
15 Auto Start Time : SAT. (Night) 0
16 Auto Start Time : SUN. (Day) _ 0
17 Auto Start Time : SUN. (Night) 0
continued
10-C-l 1
Continued
I-
tern
t
Assigning Items input Value CLR
t \llJmber
18 PITS Programming Password four numeric digits

0
19 1 Walking COS Password 1 four numeric digits
I 0
20 Inter-Tenant Calling Y : Inter-Tenant calling is available
N : Inter-Tenant calling is unavailable
21 Speed Dialing-System 000 to 200 : boundary number

Boundary 000 : all for tenant 2
200 : all for tenant 1
22 Call Park Boundary 00 to 20 : boundary number

23 Message Waiting Boundary 000 to 500 : boundary number

24 Absent Message Boundary 06 to 16 : boundary number

u
0 : clearing function is effective
* The item numbers 20 through 24 are for tenant 2
for the item
only when tenant service is employed.
Conditions
Index Number 2 does not appear if “Operation (OPR)” Tenant Service is set to “N.”
Item
Number
01, 02 Operator l/2 This system can accommodate up to two Attendant Consoles. When
Tenant Service is available and if two Attendant Consoles are assigned to
tenant I, no Attendant Console can be assigned to tenant 2.
If only one Attendant Console is accommodated, it must be assigned only
to Operator 1.
10-c-12
21 to 24 Speed Dialing- If Tenant Service is available, the following items can be split between
System Boundary/ tenant 1 and tenant 2. The boundaries are to set tenant-boundary num-
Call Park Boundary/ bers. The last number that tenant 1 can use must be assigned in each
Message Waiting boundary for the functions below:
Boundary/Absent
Message Boundary Speed Dialing-System
Call Park-System
Message Waiting
Absent Message
<Example>
Up to 200 speed dialing codes can be programmed for the system. If you
wish to assign 150 codes to tenant 1 and 50 codes to tenant 2, enter
“150” in Speed Dialing-System Boundary.
Speed dialing codes 001

002
.
> Only tenant 1 can use
the codes.
I!
,
, Only tenant 2 can use
the codes.
If tenant 1 uses no code and tenant 2 uses 200 codes, enter “000.”
10-c-13
6.00 System Timer (TIM)
Description
To assign a value to the various system timers.
input Format
Item
Assigning Items input Value
Number
01 Held Call Reminder 15 to 240 : seconds
I O2 I Held Call Reminder (ATT) I 15 to 240 : seconds

03 Transfer Recall 15 to 240 : seconds
04 Pickup Dial Waiting 1 to 5 : second(s)
05 External First Digit Time-Out 5 to 20 : seconds
06 External Inter digit Time-Out 3 to 15 : seconds
07 External Inter digit Time-Out 3 to 10 : seconds

WX)
08 Toll Restriction Guard Time- 0 to 25 : second(s)

out
I I
09 Call Forwarding-No
Time-Out
Answer
I
5 to 60 : seconds
I I
10 Intercept Routing Time-Out
(System) I
15 to 240 : seconds
I I
11 Intercept Routing Time-Out
(DISA)
15 to 240 : seconds
I l2 I Attendant Overflow Time I 15 to 240 : seconds

1 13 1 SMDR Duration Time I oto15 : second(s)
Condltlons
Item
Number
01 to 02 Held Call Reminder/ If these items are programmed but if “Operation (OPR)” Index Number 1,
Held Call Reminder Held Call Reminder is set to “N,” Held Call Reminder does not function.
(ATT)
1o-c-1 4
7.00 Class of Service 1 (CSI)
Description
This is the first Class of Service block which is
used to assign toll restriction level, maximum
dialing digits, Call Forwarding, Do Not Disturb, Do
Not Disturb Override and so on.
Input Format
, .
Index Number

01 to32 Class of Service number
Itslrn
NL rrrber
01 Toll Restriction Level (Day) 01 to 16
02 Toll Restriction Level (Night) 01 to 16
03 Max. Dialing Digits 002 to 255 : maximum number of dialed digits [input value -11
000 : no limit to digits dialed
001 : cannot dial
04 Call Forwarding/Do Not Y : Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb is available

Disturb N : Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb is unavailable
05 Do Not Disturb Override Y : Do Not Disturb Override is available

N : Do Not Disturb Override is unavailable
06 CO Forward Mode Y : Call Fowarding to CO is available

N : Call Forwarding to CO is unavailable
07 CO Transfer Mode Y : Call Transfer to CO is available

N : Call Transfer to CO is unavailable
08 Forced Account Code Mode Y : account codes are required for outgoing CO calls
N : account codes are optional for outgoing CO calls
09 BWOHCA Y : Override is available

N : Override is unavailable
b/u1 1111iutw
10-c-15
Continued
T Input Value
Y : Override Deny is possible
N : Override Deny is impossible
I I
11 Executive Busy Override Y : Executive Busy Override is available
N : Executive Busy Override is unavailable
I I
12 Executive Busy Override Deny Y: Executive Busy Override Deny is available
N : Executive Busy Override Deny is unavailable
Y : Station Lock is available

N: Station Lock is unavailable
Y: Walking Station is possible

N : Walking Station is impossible
Maintenance Capability Y: PITS system programming is possible

N : PITS system programming is impossible
16 ARS/Local Access 1: With restriction

2: No restriction
3: No access
Conditions
None
1 O-C-l 6
8.00 Class of Service 2 (CS2)
Description
This is the second Class of Service block which is
used to assign the trunk groups available for
access and so on.
Input Format
Index Number
1
01 to 32 Class of Service number

DL
...
Y : trunk group available for access
N : trunk group unavailable for access
Continued
10-c-17
Continued
17 EQA 1
1 18 1 EQA2 1
Y : special carrier available for access
N : special carrier unavailable for access
1 23 1 OCC 3 I
1 24 1 OCC4 I
25 PAG 1
26 PAG 2
27 PAG 3 Y : paging group available for access
28 PAG 4 N : paging group unavailable for access
29 PAG 5
30 PAG 6
31 PAG 7
32 PAG 8
33 External Paging 1 Y : external paging group available for access
34 1 External Paging 2 N : external paging group unavailable for access
Conditions
Item
Number
17to24 EQAl to4 If W” is selected but if “Equal Access (EQU)“, Service and “OCC Access
. occ1to4 (OCC)“, Service are set to “N,” Special Carrier Access via virtual trunk
group access does not work.
It is administable to activate or deactivate the EQU Access and/or OCC
Access features on a system-wide basis.
Refer to Section 1O-C-52.00 “World Select 2 (WS2)” for further
information.
25to32 PAGl to8 If an extension does not belong to the same tenant as the paging groups
assigned to “Y,” the extension cannot access the paging groups.
33, 34 External Paging l/2 If “Y” is selected but if “Operation (OPR)” Index 1, External Paging l/2 is
not set to “Y,” Paging through external pagers is impossible.
If an extension belongs to the other tenant than that of the External
Paging 1 or 2 assigned to “Y,” the extension cannot access the external
paging group.
10-C-18
9.00 Local Access Group (LAG)
Description:
Assigns the toll restriction level and hunt
sequence for idle trunk groups when using local
access.
Input Format
I-
Rem Assigning Items Input Value CLR
NlJmber
01 Toll Restriction Level 01 to 16 : restriction level
I 02 Toll Restriction Table 1 to 8 : restriction table number
03 Hunt Sequence 01 0
t-
I 05 Hunt Sequence 03 0
t 07 Hunt Sequence 05 0
Hunt Sequence 06 0
Hunt Sequence 07
01 to 16 : trunk group number I 0
0
Hunt Sequence 08
Hunt Sequence 09 0
Hunt Sequence 10 0
t
I- 15
16
17
Hunt Sequence
Hunt Sequence
Hunt Sequence
13
14
15
0
0
0
t- 18 Hunt Sequence 16 0
for the item
Conditions
None
1 o-c-1 9
10.00 Numbering Plan (NBP)
Description
This is used for assigning the first one or two
digits of extension numbers, and feature
numbers. Entry is possible only when the
“Numbering Plan” is assigned to “1 (manual)” in
the Operation (OPR) program.
Input Format

Item Input Value
Assigning Items
Number
One or two numeric digits
16 16th Hundred Block Extension 0

17 Operator Call (General) 0
18 Operator Call (Specific) Maximum four digits consisting of numbers, *, I# 0
19 AFWLocal CO Line Access 0
Continued
1 o-c-20
Continued
Item Input Value CLR
Number Assigning Items
20 Trunk Group 01-08 access 0

21 Trunk Group 09-l 6 access Maximum four digits consisting of numbers, *, # 0
22 Trunk Group 17-24 access

I
0
23 Speed Dialing-System ( 0
Maximum four digits consisting of numbers, *, #
Call Park Retrieve-Station
Continued
Continued
1k? 1 Assigning items Input Value CLR
Call Forwarding-Busy/No Answer 0

0
I 50I Call Forwarding/Do

Cancel
Not Disturb
0
51 Dial Call Pickup Deny Set 0
I
1 52 1 Dial Call Pickup Deny Cancel 0
Maximum four digits consisting of numbers, *, # 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Maximum four digits consisting of numbers, *, # 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Continued
1 o-c-22
Continuec
Maximum four digits consisting of numbers, *, #

for the item
1O-C-23
Conditions
“Numbering Plan (NBP)” setting cannot be changed if “Operation (OPR)” Index 1,
Numbering Plan is set to “2 (Fixed 1)” or “3 (Fixed 2).” If “1” is selected, this setting is
changeable.
Logical check is performed by every storage according to the following logic:
Extension numbers are three or four digits and the leading one or two digits
are assigned in this screen.
Feature numbers may be one, two, three or four digits.
Those numbers assigned in this screen cannot include the same number
assigned to other feature number as the part or whole of it. For example, the
digit “2” is assigned to the feature number for ‘Trunk Group 01-08 Access” and
another digits “21” is assigned for ‘Trunk Group 09-l 9 Access,” it is checked at
the time of data storage. Similarly, “35” and ‘351” cannot be present at the
same time.
It is possible to store “0” through ‘9, ” *,” “#,” as the feature numbers. However, if “*”
or “#I” is included in the feature numbers, those features are not accessed by the
rotary telephone extensions.
Item
.‘Number
01 to 16 1st to 16th Extension numbers cannot include “*” and 3.”
Hundred Block
Extension
24147161 Speed Dialing- These feature numbers cannot include “#.”

Station/Call
Forwarding-to
Trunk/Pickup Dialing
Programming
1O-C-24
11.OOCommunication Interface
Description
To set parameters for the RS-232C and Modem
(Modulator and Demodulator) ports.
Input Format
Index Number

1 SIO # 1 (terminal)
2 SIO # 2 (SMDR)
3 Remote
input Value for item Number
tern
&Jmber
1 NL-code 1: CR+LF
2: CR
2 Baud Rate 11 O/l 50/300/600/l 200/2400/480019600 : for SO

300/1200 : for Remote
3 Word Length 6 : 6 bits (for Remote only)

7 : 7 bits
8 : 8 bits
4 Parity 1: none
2: mark (for SIO only)
3: space (for SIO only)
4 : even
5 : odd
5 Stop Bit 1 : 1 bit

2 : 1.5 bits (for Remote only)
3 : 2 bits
Conditions
It is possible to change assigning items in “Communication Interface (COM)” while
on-site administration or remote administration is performed or SMDR is being
printed out. New setting becomes effective when those operation modes are
finished.
1O-C-25
12.00 Speed Dialing-System (SPD)
Description
To assign toll restriction levels and telephone
numbers for speed dialing codes.
(Password level: Three or higher)
Input Format
Index Number

001 to 200 Speed dialing code
Item CLR
Numke~
1 Restriction Level 00 : a call is checked against the system toll
restriction feature
01 to 16 : a call is first checked against the toll
restriction level of Extension Users
2 Dial Maximum 32 digits consisting of numbers, +, # and 0

marks below :
P: pause
F : flash
_. [ : start of secret number
] : end of secret number
- : hyphen
(Enter [ ] in a pair.)
for the item
Conditions
If “Operation (OPR)“, Tenant Service is set to ‘Y (Yes),” 200 speed dialing codes
can be split between tenant 1 and tenant 2. To split them, “Tenant (TNN)“, Speed
Dialing-System Boundary must be executed.
1 O-C-26
13.00 Absent Message (ABS)
Description
To assign absent messages.
input Format
Item
Numb
01 Will Return Soon
02 Gone Home
03 In a Meeting Fixed messages

% : must be input by the extension user
04 Back at % % : % % % %
05 Out until % % I % %
06 At Ext % O/o% %
07 Flexible messages
Maximum 16 digits
t0 Valid characters are letters, numbers and up to five % 0
16 % : input by the extension user
(Be sure to enter * before and after the message.)
0 : clearing function is e ‘ective
for the item
(Zondil ions
If “Operation (OPR)“, Tenant Service is assigned to “Y (Yes),” 10 flexible messages
can be split between tenants 1 and 2. To split them, “Tenant (TNN)“, Absent
Message Boundary is used. Six fixed messages cannot be split between tenants.
They are used in common.
If a flexible message in use is changed, the current message on the extension is

automatically canceled.
1O-C-27
14.00 Trunk Group 1 (TGI)
Description
To assign information for the 16 trunk groups.
This is the first of two blocks.
Input Format ’
Index Number
01 to 16 Trunk group number
tern CLR
hJrnbf Assigning Items Input Value
01 Type 1 : DDD(Direct Distance Dialing)

2 : FEX(Foreign Exchange)
3 : WATS (Wide Area Telecommunication Service)
4 : PVL (Private Line)
5 : PBX (Behind PBX)
6 : DID (Direct Inward Dialing)
02 Name Trunk group name

Maximum three digits composed of characters, numbers, 0
and marks
(Enclose the name with double quotes I’.)
03 Tenant l/2: tenant number (not assignable when ‘Tenant

Service” is set to “N”)
04 Incoming/Outgoing 1 : incoming only

2 : outgoing only
3 : both way
(Not assignable when the Trunk Group type is DID)
Continued
1O-C-28
cc inued
let-n
Assigning items Input Value CLR
Jumbe
05 Incoming Mode (Day) 1 : ATT (Attendant Console)
2 : DIL 1 :l (Direct In Line 1 :l)
3 : DIL 1:N (Direct In Line 1:N)
4 : DISA (Direct Inward System Access)
5 : TAFAS 1 (Trunk Answer From Any Station 1)
6 : TAFAS 2 (Trunk Answer From Any Station 2)
(Not assignable when the Trunk Group type is DID or
PVL, or CO line access is outgoing only)
06 Incoming Mode (Night) 1 : same as Incoming Mode (Day)

2 : fixed
3 : flexible
4: DISA
(Not assignable when Trunk Group type is DID or PVL. or
CO line access is outgoing only)
07 Intercept Routing (Day) 0 : none

A : transfer to the Attendant Console
DN XXXX (XXXX: directory number) : transfer to
an extension
08 Intercept Routing (Night) 0 : none

DN XXXX (XXXX: directory number) : transfer to
an extension
09 Toll Restriction Level 01 to 16

(Not assignable when the Trunk Group type is DID, or CC
line access is incoming only)
Toll Restriction Table 1 to 8

Dialing Plan 0 : none

A : Type A : long distance call 1 +NPA+NXX+XXXX
local call NXX+XXXX
B : Type B : long distance call NPA+NXX+XXXX
local call NNX+XXXX
C : Type C : long distance call 1 +NPA+NXX+XXXX
1+NNX+XXXX
local call NNX+XXXX
(N: 2 to 9, P: O,l, A: 0 to 9, X: 0 to 9)
12 CO-CO Duration Limit 01 to 64 : minute

13 Disconnect Time 1 : 1.5 seconds

2 : 4.0 seconds
continued
1 o-c-29
Continued
tern
Assigning Items Input Value CLR
bl?4X?f
14 Pause Time 1 : 1.5 seconds

2 : 2.5 seconds
3 : 3.5 seconds
4 : 4.5 seconds
15 Hook Switch Flash Time 0 : none

1 : 80 milliseconds
2 : 300 milliseconds

for the item
Conditions
The assigning items:Type, Incoming Mode (Day/Night), Destination (DIL 1 :N Only)
Type and Number, CO Appearance Type can be changed only when all the trunks
belonging to the trunk group are not in use. If any trunk is used, it is impossible to
change.
Item
Number
03 Tenant If “***” is displayed here, “Operation (OPR)“, Tenant Service is set to
“N (No).”
05 Incoming Mode Refer to Section 9-E-l .Ol ‘Trunk Group (l/2).”

(Day)
06 Incoming Mode If “2 (Fixed)” or ‘3 (Flexible)” is changed to another option, it cancels all

(Night) the settings of CO lines in “CO Line (COL)“, Night Answer Point (Type:
No.) which belong to the trunk group.
If “2 (Fixed)” is changed to “3 (Flexible)” and vice versa, the Night Answer
Points are not canceled.
11 Dialing Plan Refer to Section 9-E-l .Ol ‘Trunk Group (l/2).”

For the relation between trunk group/CO line setting and PITS DN button setting,
refer to Section 9-E-l .Ol “Trunk Group (l/2).”
1 o-c-30
15.00 Trunk Group 2 (TG2)
Description
This is the second block to assign various data
for trunk groups.
Input Format
Index Number

01 to 16 Trunk group number
’ Input Value for Item Number
tern
4Jti
01 Destination (DIL 1: N Only) I X (X : 1 to 8): ICM group number
P XX (XX : 01 to 32) : pickup group number
to DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digits): extension number
0 : none
08 (Assignable only when “Incoming Mode (Day)” is set to
DIL 1: N)
09 DID Digit Modification Table 1 to 4 : table number

(Assignable when the Trunk Group type is DID)
10 PBX Access Code Maximum three digit numbers

to (No Restriction) (Assignable when the Trunk Group type is PBX, and CO 0
17 line access is both way)
18 PBX Access Code Maximum three digits of numbers

to (Restriction) (Assignable when the Trunk Group type is PBX, and CO o
25 line access is both way)
26 Max. Dial No. 1 to 7 : maximum dialing digits

after EFA Signal 0 : cannot dial after external feature access
27 CO Appearance Type 1 : single CO

2 : group CO
0: clearing function is effective

Conditions for the item
--
Refer to Section 1 O-C-l 4.00 ‘Trunk Group 1 (TGl).”
1 o-c-31
16.00 EM/Paging Group (IPG)
Description
To assign intercom groups and paging groups to
tenant 1 or 2.
Input Format
Index Number
lndex Number I Explanation
1 For ICM groups
2 For PAG groups
item
Number
1 ICM or PAG Group 1
2 ICM or PAG Group 2
3 1 ICM or PAG Group 3
Conditions
This screen does not appear if “Operation (OPR)“, Tenant Service is set to
“N (No).”
This must be programmed before programming “Call Pickup Group (CPG)“.
I’
1O-C-32
17.00 Call Pickup Group (CPG)
Description
To assign the ICM (intercom) groups, UCD
(Uniform Call Distribution) groups, and paging
groups which call pickup groups belong to.
input Format
Index Number
01 to 32 Pickup group number

Item
NlJmber
1 ICM Group Number 1 to 8 : ICM Group 1 to 8
2 UCD Group Number 01 to 32 : UCD Group 1 to 32

00 : none
3 Paging Group Number 1 to 8 : Paging Group 1 to 8

00 : none
Conditions
If “Operation (OPR)” Tenant Service is set to “Y (Yes)“, “lCM/Paging Group (IPG)”
setting must be done before setting this screen.
Refer to Section 9-E-3.00 “Call Pickup Group” for the other conditions.
1 o-c-33
18.00 CO Line (COL)
Description
To assign parameters on a CO line basis. DATA
ERROR appears on the entry of parameters if no
LCOT (Loop Start Central Office Trunk) card,
GCOT (Ground Start Central Office Trunk) card, or
DID (Direct Inward Dialing) card is assigned in the
Slot Assignment (SLA) programming.
Input Format
pzimq~~(IlndexNumber](IltemNumberl)~~
Index Number
Four digit numbers (1011 to 3158) Physical number of the CO line
tern
hnksi Assigning Items Input Value
1 Trunk Group 01 to 16 : trunk group number
2 Trunk Name Maximum ten digits consisting of letters, numbers and marks
(Enclose the name with double quotes “.)
^ -.
3 Direct Termination DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digits) : extension number
:
.._.. 0 : none
(Not assignable when the Trunk Group type is DID or Incoming
Mode (Day) is set to any mode except DIL 1 :l)
4 Night Answer Point DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digits) : extension number
(Type : No.) Ul : universal night answer 1
U2 : universal night answer 2
0 : none
RMT: Remote Administration
(Not assignable in case of DID, PVL outgoing only)
5 Dial Mode 1 : DTMF mode
2 : Pulse mode
6 DTMF Duration Time 1 : 80 milliseconds
(Not assignable when the Trunk Group type is DID, or the dial
type is pulse)
Continued
1 o-c-34
Continued
lmll
Number
7 Pulse Speed 1 : low (10 pps)
: high (20 pps)
FNot assignable when the Trunk Group type is DID, or the dial
type is DTMF)
8 % Break 1 : 60% break
: 67% break
FNot assignable when the Trunk Group type is DID or the dial type
is DTMF)
9 CPC Detection 00 : none
01 : 6.5 msec. detection
02 to 75 : 8N msec. detection
10 DID Start Arrangement 1 : immediate start
2 : delayed wink start
(Assignable when the Trunk Group type is DID)
Conditions
Before setting this screen, “Trunk Group (TGl) (TG2)” must be programmed.
” This cannot be programmed if LCOT or GCOT or DID card is not programmed in
“Slot Assignment (SLA).” If any one of the cards is programmed, this screen can
be programmed.
If the “Trunk Group (TGl)” containing the CO line has ‘Type” assigned to “6 (DID),”
the following items cannot be entered : ‘w*++” is displayed :
. Direct Termination
l Night Answer Point (Type : No)
Dial Mode
l
l DTMF Duration Time

l Pulse Speed
% Break
l
. CPC Detection
If the “Trunk Group (TGl)” containing the CO line has “Type” assigned to anything
other than “6 (DID),” the following item cannot be entered : u+“y is displayed :
l DID Start Arrangement
Item
Number
3 Direct Termination This is assignable only when the “Trunk Group (TGl)” containing the CO
line has “Incoming Mode (Day)” assigned to “2 (DIL 1 :l).” Otherwise, “+&*”
is displayed and setting is impossible.
4 Night Answer This is assignable only when the “Trunk Group (TGl)” containing the CO
Point (Type : No.) line has “Incoming Mode (Night)” assigned to ‘2 (Fixed)” or “3 (Flexible).”
Otherwise, ” ++++! is displayed and setting is impossible.
5 Dial Type If “Pulse mode” is selected, refer to Section 1 O-C-51 .OO “World Select 1
(WSl)” about the following items:
l Interdigit Pause
l Pulse Type
l % Break Detect
1 o-c-35
19.00 Pager (PAG)
Description
To assign items concerning external pagers.
Input Format
Index Number
1 or2 External pager number
input Value for Item Number
Item
Number
1 Tenant 1 : tenant 1
2 : tenant 2
2 Tone Y : sending confirmation tone when accessing the external

pager
N : no confirmation tone
3 BGM Y: BGM heard over external paging

N: BGM not heard
Conditions
This cannot be programmed if “Operation (OPR)“, External Paging l/2 are set to
“N (No).”
Item number 1 “Tenant” cannot be assigned if “Operation (OPR)“, Tenant Sewice

is set to “N (No).”
1O-C-36
20.00 Music Source (MUS)
Description
To assign items concerning the music source.
Input Format
Index Number
1 or2 Music source number

I I
input Value for item Number
item
Number Assigning Items input Value
1 Tenant 1 : tenant 1
2 : tenant 2
2 For Use 1 : used when a call is put on hold

2 : used for BGM
3 : used for hold + BGM
Conditions
This cannot be programmed if “Operation (OPR)“, External Music Source l/2 are
set to “N (No).”
Item number 1 “Tenant” cannot be assigned if “Operation (OPR)“, Tenant Service

is set to “N (No).”
1 o-c-37
21 .OOAutomatic Gain Control (AGC)
Description
To assign the tenant number for the AGC
(Automatic Gain Control) card, and to determine
if the tone detection is executed.
Input Format
piEiiq~ModelpJCRcl1
Index Number

x xx
l=- slot (01 to 15) Physical card location (101 to 315)
L- shelf (1 to 3)
000 Tone detect

Slot No. XXX 1 : tenant 1
2 : tenant 2
Tone Detect Y : with tone detection

N : without tone detection
Conditions
This cannot be programmed if “Slot Assignment (SLA)” has no AGC card
programmed.
Slot No. %**” will be displayed here if “Operation (OPR)“,

%i Physical Tenant Service is set “N (No).”
number
To assign Tone Detect only, enter “000” as the index number.
1O-C-38
22.00 Extension (EXT)
Description
To assign extension parameters.
Input Format
Index Number
DN XXXX Extension directory number (XXXX : three or four

digits)
Four’iigit number (1011 to 3158) Physical location of extension
’ Input Value for Item Number

Telephone Type 1 : SLT (Single Line Telephone)
2 : PITS (Proprietary Integrated Telephone System)
3 : OPX (Off Premise Extension)
02 PITS Model 01 : KX-T123250

02 : KX-T123220
03 : KX-T123230
04 : KX-T123235 (7130)
05 : KX-T61650
06 : KX-T61620
07 : KX-T61630
08 : KX-T30850
09 : KX-T30820
10 : KX-T30830
11 : KX-T7050
12 : KX-T7020
13 : KX-T7030
(for “PITS” only)
03 OHCA Circuit Y : with OHCA circuit

N : without OHCA circuit
(for “PITS” only)
04 Primary Directory Number Three or four digit extension directory number
05 Intercom Number One or two digit number

(Assignable only for “PITS”)
Continued
1o-c-39
Continued
Item
Number
06 Station Name Maximum ten digits consisting of letters and/or numbers
I (Surround each entry with double quotes I’.) I
07 ICM Group 1 to 8 : ICM group number
08 Pickup Group 00 : none

01 to 32 : pickup group number
09 Next Hunt Station 0 : none

DN XXXX (XXXX: three or four digits) : extension
directory number
10 Class of Service 01 to 32 : COS number
11 Data Line Security Y : Data Line Security is available

N : Data Line Security is disabled
12 Automatic Callback-Trunk Y : Automatic Call Back-Trunk is available

N : Automatic Call Back-Trunk is unavailable
13 Parallel Connect Y : Parallel Connection is available

N : Parallel Connection is not available
-
0: clearing function is effective
for the item
Conditions
This screen does not appear if “Slot Assignment (SLA)” does not have any of PLC,
SLC, HLC, OPX cards programmed or if “DN Assignment (DNA)” does not have
the extension number programmed.
Index
Number
01 Telephone Type Assignable telephone types differ depending on the card
types connected to the extensions, as follows:
1 Card Type 1 Telephone Type Assignable 1
PLC PITS
SLC SLT
HLC PITS or SLT
OPX OPX
If “SLC” or “OPX” is selected, “***” will appear in the

following items and cannot be assigned:
l Model
l OHCA Circuit
l Intercom Number
l Parallel Connect
1 o-c-40
Note:
Parallel connection assignment is available only when PITS telephone interfaced with
HLC card is selected.
If PITS telephone interfaced with PLC card is selected, ‘+++” will appear in Parallel
Connect field and parallel connection assignment is not available.
02 If PITS telephone KX-T123230D is connected, select 04: KX-T123235

(7130), for PITS Model.
For OHCA Circuit, Intercom Number, Next Hunt Station, refer to Section 9-G-l .Ol
“Station (l/3).”
1 o-c-41
23.00 DSS Console (DSS)
Description
To assign parameters for DSS consoles.
Input Format
p?iiFiq ( (IndexNumberl (lfeml)[CRcJI
Index Number
Index Number 1~ Explanation
I Four digit number 1 Physical number of the extension port I
item
1 DSS Console Model 1 : KX-T123240 (7040)
2 : KX-T61640
2 Pair Extension DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digits) : extension directory
number
0 : none
Conditions
If HLC (Hybrid Line Circuit) or PLC (Proprietary Line Circuit) is not assigned in the
“Slot Assignment (SLA)” program, DATA ERROR appears on the screen.
1O-C-42
24.00 DN Button Assignment (DNK)
Description
This is used to assign the function of the DN buttons
when the telephone type is set to “2 (PITS)” in the
Extension (EXT) program.
Input Format
Index Number
DN XXXX Extension directory number (XXXX : three or

or four digits)
Four digit number Physical location of extension
.
lcta Assigning Items Input Value CLR
01 DN-01 Day Ring 1 : lamp indication only (no ringing)

2 : ring immediately
02 DN-01 Night Ring 3 : delayed 1 ring
4 : delayed 3 rings
5 : delayed 6 rings
03 DN-02 Type 01 : DSS (DN) button
02 : DSS (ICM) button
03 : One Touch button
04 : Privacy Change button
05 : External Feature Access button
06 : Call Park System button
07 : Call Park Station button
08 : Ringing Transfer button
09 : Call Split button
11 : Tone Through Break button
12 : SNR button
13 : PDN button
14 : SDN button
15 : Private CO button
16 : OHCA button
17 : Message Waiting button
18 : UC0 Log In button
19 : Local Alarm button
20 : Single CO button
21 : Group CO button
1 o-c-43
““I 1111 l”ci”
I-
tern CLR
JUVbW
04 DN-02 Number Three or four digits : directory number for “PDN,” “SDN,”
“DSS (DN)”
One or two digits : intercom number for “DSS (EM)”
Maximum 16 digits : destination number for “One Touch”
Four digit number : physical location for “Private CO” 0
and “Single CO”
01 to 16 : trunk group number for “Group CO
05 DN-02 SDN COS 1 : use the COS of the station

2 : use the COS of the PDN
06 DN-02 Day Ring

Same as the items 01 and 02
07 DN-02 Night Ring
08-l 2 DN-03
13-17 DN-04
18-22 DN-05
23-27 DN-06
28-32 DN-07 Same as the items from 03 to 07
33-37 DN-08
38-42 DN-09
13-47 DN-10
48-52 DN-11
53-57 DN-12

for the item
1 o-c-44
Conditions
When “+++“s appear, they cannot be assigned.
The “Type” and “Number” of the DN-01 (fixed to PDN) is set automatically.
The “Number” displays the number assigned to the DN in “DN Assignment (DNA).”
Up to three PDN buttons can be assigned consecutively to DN-01 button through

DN-3 button.
PDN buttons must be consecutive. For example, it is not possible to program as
follows:
PDN SDN PDN
(DN buttons on PITS 7000 series)

(Dv, buttonsan PITS type 20,30 and 50)
DN-XX Type If “PRV-CO” (Private CO) is selected, a physical number of the selected
CO line must be programmed in “Number.”
The CO line of the physical number belongs to a “CO Line (COL)“, Trunk
Group.
The trunk group where the CO line belongs must have “Trunk Group 1
(TGl)“, Type assigned to “4 PVL (Private Line).”
If “Single CO” is selected, a physical number of the selected CO line must

be programmed in “Number.”
The CO line of the physical number belongs to a “CO Line (COL)“, Trunk
Group. The trunk group of the CO line must have “Trunk Group 1 (TGl)“,
Type assigned to “1 (ODD)” or ‘2 (FEX)” or “3 (WATS)“, or “5 (PBX)” and
also “Trunk Group 2 (TG2)“, CO Appearance Type assigned to “1 (Single
CO) .I’
If “Group CO” is selected, a trunk group number must be programmed in

“Number.”
The programmed trunk group must have Ytunk Group 1 (TGl)“, Type as-
signed to “1 (DOD)” or “2 (FEX)” or “3 (WATS)” or “5 (PBX)” and also
“Trunk Group 2 (TG2)“, CO Appearance type assigned to “2 (Group CO).”
1 o-c-45
25.00 PF Button Assignment (PFK)
Description
This is used to assign the function of the PF
(programmable feature) buttons of PITS telephones
and DSS consoles.
Input Format
Index Number

or four digits)
..
tern
%Jmber
01 PF-01 Type 00 : not assigned

05 : External feature Access button
10 : FWD/DND button
12 : SNR (Saved Number Redial) button
02 PF-01 Number One or two digits : intercom number for “DSS (ICM)” 0
03.04 PF-02
0506 PF-03
07,08 PF-04 Same as the items 01 and 02
09,lO PF-05
l1,12 PF-06
Continued
1 O-C-46
Continued
item
Number
13,14 PF-07
1516 1 PF-08
11 SameastheitemsOl and02
23,24 1 PF-12
2526 1 PF-13 (DSS console only) 1
---I
27,28 I PF-14 (DSS console only)

for the item (‘-
Conditions
If “Extension (EXT)“, Telephone Type is not assigned to “2 (PITS)“, DATA ERROR
Only the PF3 button on PITS type 50 and KX-T7050 can be programmed to the
FWD/DND button.
Only the PFl button on PITS type 50, KX-17020 and KX-T7030 can be
programmed to the SNR button.
In case of a PITS telephone, item Nos. 25 through 32 cannot be selected.
1 o-c-47
26.00 DSS Button Assignment
(DSK)
Description
This is used to assign the function of the DSS
(Direct Station Selection) buttons on a DSS
console and PITS KX-T30830.
Input Format
index Number
Index Number I Explanation

or four digits)

tern
brltH
01 DSS-01 Type 00 : not assigned
01 : DSS (DN) button
04 : Privacy Change button
05 : External Feature Access button
17 : Message Waiting button
18 : UCD Login button
19 : Local Alarm button
02 DSS-01 Number Three or four digits : directory number for “PDN,” “SDN.”
“DSS (ON)”
One or two digits : intercom number for “DSS (ICM)”
13,04 DSS-02
Same as the items 01 and 02
! 3506 DSS-03
./
07,oa DSS-04
Continued
1 O-C-48
Continued
item
Number
09,lO DSS-05
11,12 DSS-06
13,14 DSS-07
15,16 1 DSS-08
17,18 1 DSS-09 (DSS console only) 1
19,20 1 DSS-10 (DSS console only) 1
21,22 1 DSS-11 (DSSconsoleonly) Same as the items 01 and 02
29,30 DSS-15 (DSS console only)

. .
. . (DSS console only)
. .
6334 DSS-32 (DSS console only)
Conditions
In case of PITS KX-T30830, Item Nos.1 7 through 64 cannot be selected.
1 o-c-49
27.00 Doorphone (DPH)
Description
To assign parameters for doorphones.
Input Format
Index Number
index Number Explanation
1 to 4 Doorphone number
Item
Numter Assigning items input Value
1 Tenant 1 : tenant number 1
: tenant number 2
Fnot assignable when “Tenant Service” is assigned to ‘IN”)
2 Open Duration 01to10 : door opening duration (seconds)

00 : door opening disabled
3 Doorphone Assignment Doorphone call destination

0 : none
4 Doorphone Assignment P XX : pickup group number (XX : 01 to 32)
I X : ICM group number (X :l to 8)
5 Doorphone Assignment A : Attendant Consoles
DN XXXX : extension directory number (XXXX: three or four
6 Doorphone Assignment digits)
Conditions
If DPH (Doorphone) card is not assigned in the “Slot Assignment (SLA)” program,
DATA ERROR appears on the screen.
1 o-c-50
28.00 Attendant Console (ATT)
Description
To assign parameters for Attendant Consoles.
Input Format
tern
Assigning items input Value
JUmber
01 ATT 1 Tenant Number Not assignable (fixed to tenant 1)
02 Al-l-l FDN DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digit number) : FDN

0 : none
03 Al-l-1 TRS LV 01 to 16: toll restriction level
04 AT-t-1 PAG 1 : Paging All Extensions

2 : External Pager 1
3 : External Pager 2
4 : External Pager 1 & 2
5 : Paging All Extensions and External Pagers
05 ATT 2 Tenant Number Not assignable (fixed to tenant 2)
06 A-l-T2 FDN DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digit number) : FDN

0 : none
07 All 2 TRS LV 01 to 16: toll restriction level
08 ATT2 PAG Same as the item 04
09 Tenant 1 Overflow DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digit number): extension

directory number
0 : none
10 Tenant 1 Night DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digit number): extension

directory number
0 : none
11 Tenant 2 Overflow DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digit number): extension

directory number
0: none
(Not assignable when “Tenant Service” is assigned to “N” )
Continued
10-c-51
Continued
Item
12 Tenant 2 Night DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digit number) : extension
directory number
0 : none
(Not assignable when “Tenant Service” is assigned to “N” )
13 Busy-Out TG 01
16 I Busy-Out TG 04
17 1 Busy-Out TG 05 I
18 1 Busy-Out TG 06
19 1 Busy-Out TG 07 I
DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digit number) : extension
directory number
]iO:none
23 I Busy-Out TG 11 I
24 Busy-Out TG 12
25 Busy-Out TG 13
26 Busy-Out TG 14
27 Busy-Out TG 15
28 Busy-Out TG 16
Conditions
If ATLC (Attendant Console Line Circuit) card is not assigned in the “Slot
Assignment (SLA)” program, DATA ERROR appears on the screen.
1o-c-52
29.00 Attendant Queue Priority (AQP)
Description
To assign incoming call priority when several calls
arrive at the Attendant Console at the same time.
Input Format
01 to 24 : call priority
Conditions
If ATLC card is not assigned in the “Slot Assignment (SLA)” program, DATA
ERROR appears on the screen.
Regardless of the assignment of Held Call Reminder, Held Call Reminder does not
function if “Operation (OPR)“, Held Call Reminder is assigned to “N.”
1o-c-53
30.00 Equal Access (EN)
Description
To assign parameters and trunk groups necessary
for making Equal Access calls.
Input Format
pimiq pizq piizizqNumber](/~)I)ICRtl/
Index Number
1 to 4 Equal Access number
,rn Assigning Items Input Value CLR

Jrnber
01 Service Y : Equal Access service is available
N : Equal Access service is not available
(If “Service” is assigned to “N,” all items below are not
assignable.)
02 Name Up to three digits consisting of letters, numbers and

marks 0
(Enclose the name with double quotes I’.)
03 Equal Access Carrier Code Three digit number
05 Toll Restriction Table 1 to 8: Area/Office Code table number
06 Long Distance (Delete) 1 to 4: number of digits to be deleted to a maximum of

four
0 : no digits deleted
07 Long Distance (Insert) Up to four digits to be inserted 0

08 Local Toll (Delete) 1 to 4: number of digits to be deleted to a maximum of
four
09 Local Toll (Insert) Up to four digits to be inserted 0

Continued
1o-c-54
Continuec
CLR
Y : trunk group is available

N : trunk group is unavailable

for the item
Conditions
If “N (No)” is assigned to “Service”, “Class of Service 2 (CS2)“, EQA 1 to 4 can be
programmed. However, Equal Access which has “N” assigned here does not
function.
For conditons on Item Numbers 06 to 11, refer to Section 9-H-l .OO “Equal Access.”
It is administable to activate or deactivate the Equal access feature on a system-

wide basis.
Refer to Section 1 O-C-52.00 “World Select 2 (WS2)” for further information.
1o-c-55
31 .OOOCC Access (OCC)
Description
To assign parameters and trunk groups
necessary for OCC (Other Common Carrier)
Access calls.
Input Format
Index Number
1 to 4 OCC Access number

em
Assigning Items input Value CLR
Umber
01 Service Y : OCC Access service is available

N : OCC Access service is not available
(If “Service” is assigned to “N,” all items below are not
assignable.)
02 Name Up to three digits consisting of letters, numbers and

marks 0
(Enclose the name with double quotes “.)
03 Local Access Code Maximum eight digit number
05 Toll Restriction Table 1 to 8 : Area/Office Code table number
06 Long Distance (Delete) 00 to 15 : number of digits to be deleted to a maximum

of four
07 Long Distance (Insert) Digits to be inserted up to a maximum of 20 digits

consisting of numbers, *, # and marks below:
0
H : home position
I : end of secret number
P: pause
D: switch to DTMF
- : hyphen
Continued
1 O-C-56
ccIn tinued ’
item
Assigning items Input Value CLR
Nurrker
08 Local Toll (Delete) Same as the Item 06
I 09 I Local Toll (Insert) Same as the Item 07 0

I 10 I Local (Delete) I Same as the Item 06
I ” I Local (Insert) I Same as the Item 07 0

12 Trunk Group 01
13 Trunk Group 02
1 14 1 Trunk Grouo 03 I
15 Trunk Group 04
16 Trunk Grouo 05
17 1 Trunk Group 06
23 Trunk Group 12
24 Trunk Group 13
25 Trunk Group 14
26 Trunk Group 15
27 Trunk Group 16

for the item
Conditions i\
../
If “N (No)” is assigned to “Service, ” “Class of Service 2 (CS2)“, OCC 1 to 4 can be
programmed. However, OCC Access which has “N” assigned here does not
function.
For conditons on Items Numbers 06 to 11, refer to Section 9-H-2.00 “OCC Access.”
It is administable to activate or deactivate the OCC access feature on a system-

wide basis.
Refer to Section 1 O-C-52.00 “World Select 2 (WS2)” for further information.
1o-c-57
32.00 Toll Restriction 1 (TRI)
Description
To assign local call control, toll restriction level, and
office code table number for area or office codes.
Input Format
i, index Number
1 to 8 Area/office code table number
Item
0001 Entry=200 Local Call Access Y : do not execute 3/6 digit toll restriction
N : execute 3/6 digit toll restriction
0002 Entry=200 Restriction Level 01 to 16 : toll restriction level

00 : none
0003 Entry=200 Office Code Table 01 to 64

Number 00 : not used
0004 Entry=201 Local Call Access

. .
. . Same as the items from 0001 to 0003
23’98 Entry=999 CM&e Code Table

Number
Conditions
None
10-C-58
33.00 Toll Restriction 2 (TR2)
Description
Used to assign yes or no to entry numbers in an
office code table.
Input Format
Index Number
01 to64 Office code table number
Input Value for Item Numer

I
I1:em Input Value
Assigning items
hlumber
001 Entry=200 Y : applicable
N : not applicable
..
002 Entry=201
. .
. . Same as the item 001
&I En&=999
Conditions ^’ -’
None
10-c-59
34.00 Toll Restriction 3 (TR3)
Description
To assign IO digits toll restriction for a long
distance call and to assign 7 digits toll restriction
for a local call.
‘(Password level : Two or higher)
input Format
Item Assigning Items Input Value

Number
01 to 64 Number Seven digit number
Conditions
None
1 O-C-60
35.00 Automatic Route Selection 1 (ARl)
Description
To assign the route plan table number for dialed
area or office codes.
Input Format
Index Number
200 to 999 Entry number

Number a-
l Route Plan Table No. When 00 : not using area codes
Area Code 01 to 32 : route plan table number
2 Route Plan Table No. When 00 : not using office codes

Office Code 01 to 32 : route plan table number
Conditions
None
..
1 O-C-61
36.00 Automatic Route Selection 2 (AR2)
Description
To assign all the office codes used in each area
code. (Password level : Two or higher)
Input Format
Index Number
,_-
01 to 32 Office code table number
c / Area c:ning Items Input Value CLR
200 to 999 : area code 0

002 Route Plan Table No. 01 to 32 : route plan table number
I
003 Entry=200 Y : usable as an office code
N : not usable
004 Entry=201
. .
. . Same as the item 003
8;2 En&999
0 : c$$;yt~;ction is effective
Conditions
None
1 O-C-62
Description
To make up route plan tables by assigning time
zones and route list numbers to each time zone
for each day of the week.
Input Format
Index Number
I_ -.. . ~---.~.
01 to 32 Route plan table number
item CLR
01 Start Hour 1 X X X : starting time for the time zone
T A or P : amJp.m. 0
01 to 12: hour
02 Route List Number MON.

03 Route List Number TUE.
04 Route List Number WED.
05 Route List Number THU. 01 to 64 : route list table number 0
06 Route List Number FRI.
07 Route List Number SAT.
08 Route List Number SUN.
09 Start Hour 2 Same as the item 01 -
10 to 16 Route List Number (MON. Same as the items from 02 to 08

to SUN.)
17 Start Hour 3 Same as the item 01
18 to 24 Route List Number (MON. Same as the items from 02 to 08

to SUN.)
25 Start Hour 4 Same as the item 01
26 to 32 Route List Number (MON. Same as the items fro;r 02 to 08

to SUN.)
- _. ..
0 : clearing function IS ettecflve
Conditions for the @-n
None
1 O-C-63
Description
To assign trunk groups in order of economical
priority (1 to 4) and assign parameters on each
priority.
Input Format
Index Number
..
1 Index Number Explanation
I
01 to 64 ~ I Route lists table number
Item
Assigning Items Input Value 1CLR
01 Priority 1 Trunk Group No. 01 to 16 ‘0
02
I
Priority 1 Modified List No.
I
01 to 32 : modified digit table number i0
i
4
03 Priority 2 Warning Tone Y : send warning tone
..
N : do not send warning tone
04 Priority 2 ARS Restriction Level 01 to 16 0

05 1 Priority 2 Trunk Group No. 1 Same as the item 01
I 0
A 0
06 1 Priority 2 Modified List NO. 1 Same as the item 02
07 Ptiority 3 Warning Tone S&e as the item 03 L.. ) 0

08 Priority 3 ARS Restriction Level Same as the item 04 0
09 1 Priority 3 Trunk Group No. 1 Same as the item 01 -i 0
10
11
12
I Priority 3 Modified List No.
I Priority 4 Warning
~ Tone
---~I
I Same as the item 02
Same as the--rItem 03
I Priority 4 ARS Restriction Level1 Same as the item 04
=I 0
0
0
13 I Priority 4 Trunk Group No. I Same as the item 01 i0
14 I Priority 4 Modified List No. ~ I Same as the item 02 01
$ 0 : clearing function is effective
Conditions for the item
None
1O-C-64
Description
To make up modified digit tables.
Input Format
Index Number
01 to 32 Modified digit table number
tern CLR
1 Delete Digits 1 to 9 : number of digits to be deleted to a maximum of
nine
0 : no deletion
2 Insert Digit Digits to be inserted up to a maximum of 26 digits

consisting of numbers, *, # and marks listed below :
0
H : home position
P: pause
D : switch to DTMF
]>&snd
_. of secret number e-.4.
- : hyphen
for the item
Conditions
None
10-C-65
40.00 DISA (DE)
Description
To assign parameters for the DISA (Direct Inward
System Access) feature.
Input Format -
Index Number
000 Block 1
Physical Number (101 to 112,201 to 215. Physical slot number for Block 2
301 to 315) ,

tern Assigning Items Input Value
1 Delayed Answer i 1: lring
2 : 2 rings ..
3: 3rings
4 : immediately
2 Prolong Time 1 to 7 : minute(s)

Block 1
3 Control Code *” Y : control code entry is possible
I. N : control code entry is not allowed
4 Tone Detect Y : executing tone detection

N : no tone detection
For Use 1 : DISA

2: OGMl
3: OGM2
Block E 4: W-UP
Tenant 1 : Tenant 1
2 : Tenant 2
Conditions
If a DISA card is not assigned in the ‘Slot Assignment (SLA)” program, DATA
Tenant Not assignable, if “Operation (OPR) ” Index 1, Tenant Service is
set to “N (No).”
1 O-C-66
(40993)
41.00 DISA Code (DIC)
Descrlptlon
To assign parameters on each DISA code.
Index Number
1 to8 DISA code number

1 ARS Override Y : specifying a trunk group is avail&k
N : specifying a trunk group is unavailable
Toil Restrictiin Level 01 to 16 ..
Account Code Y: forced

N : optional
Prolong Y : probnging is available

N : probnging is not available
Ten& - 1: tenant1
2: tenant2
(not assignable if ‘Tenant Service” is preset to ‘YIN”)
condltlons
If a DISA card is not assigned in the “Slot Assignment (SLA)” program, DATA
Item
Number
1 ARS Override Not assignable if “Operation (OPR)” Index 1,
Automatic Route Selection is set to ‘N (No).”
1 O-C-67
42.00 DISA Password (DIP)
Description
To assign the users’ passwords for DISA required
for making outgoing CO call via DISA feature.
Input Format
* Show Mode is denied.

Number
1 to 8 DISA Password Four digit number 0
(Not displayed on the screen)

for the item
Conditions
If the DISA card is not assigned in the ‘Slot Assignment (SLA)” program, DATA
ERROR appears on the screen;
1 O-C-68
43.00 DID (DID)
Description
To define the characteristics of the DID ;Direa
Inward Dialing) modification table.
Input Format
Index Number
1 to 4 DID modification table number I

I

Number
1 Receive Digit 1 to 7: number of received digit(s)
2 Delete Digit 1 to 6: number of digits to be deleted to a maximum of

six
0 : no digits to be deleted
3 Insert Dial No. The digits to be inserted to a maximum of three 0

for the item
Conditions
This is impossible to program if.“Slot Assignment (SIA)” has no DID card
programmed.
1 O-C-69
44.00 UCD 1 (UCI)
Description
To assign UCD (Uniform Call Distribution) group
parameters.
Input Format
Index Number
-3
01 to 32 UCD group number

Number
1 Floating DN DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digit number) : Floating DN
0 : no Floating DN
2 Overflow DN DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digit number) : Overflow DN

0 : no Overflow DN
3 Overflow Time 01 to 10 : minute(s) ; Overflow timer

00 : no Overflow timer
(Not assignable for UCD groups 01 to 04)
- . _.
Conditions
None
1 o-c-70
45.00 UCD 2 (UC2)
Description
To specify the treatment of calls that are placed on
the UCD groups and queued into the busy queue.
Input Format
Index Number
1 to 4 UCD group number
01 : timer (15 sets)


06 : sending OGM 2 (if busy, w’ating until idle status)
07 : sending OGM 1 (if busy, skipping)

08 : sending OGM 2 (if busy , skipping)
09 : send the hold tone
10 : transfer to the overflow destination
11 : disconnect the line
Conditions
None
1 o-c-71
46.00 Information (INF)
Description
To assign the customer’s name, address,
telephone number etc..
Input Format
numbers or marks
..)
t Be sure to enclose all entries with quotation marks.
Conditions
None
1O-C-72
47.00 Power Failure Transfer (PFT)
Description
To assign the relationship between CO lines
(LCOT, GCOT) and extensions (HLC, SLC)
during a power failure.
input Format
Index Number
01 to 18 Power Failure Transfer number
I
Item
Number I Assigning Items
I
Input Value I CLR
1 Trunk Slot No. Physical slot number (three digit number) : 101 to 315 0
2 Extension Slot No. Physical slot number (three digit number) : 101 ‘io 315 0

for the item
Conditions
None
1o-c-73
48.00 Change Password (CHG)
Description
To assign passwords for each level.
Input Format
Index Number
.. :.
3
1 On-Site
2 Remote
Item
Assigning items Input Value *
Number
1 Protection Level 1 Password Four digits consisting of letters or numbers
* Enclose all entries in’.qlrotation marks. .. :
Conditions
None
1 o-c-74
49.00 CPC Signal Detect Timing-
Outgoing CO Calls (CPC)
Description
CPC command is used to make CPC (Calling Party Control) signal detection
effect on outgoing CO calls as well as on incoming CO calls.
Refer to Section 3-F-7.00 “Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal Detection” for
further information.
Input Format
p)qqxzj~~ICRc-I]
Index Number
I
I Index Number Explanation
1011 to 3158 I Physical Number of the Trunk Port I
Input Value for ltem Number
& Assigning Items Input Value
None CPC signal detect timing 00 : CPC signal is not detected .*

(for outgoing CO calls) 01 : 6.5 ms
0?:16ms(8Nms N=2to75)
.
7; : 600 ms
(Default = 00)
Conditions
Some switching system of central office may send CPC-like signal in dialing
sequence and the attempt of making a call may be terminated.
If your switching system does not send CPC-like signal in dialing sequence,
we recommend to make CPC signal detection work on outgoing CO calls.
CPC signal detection can be assigned to incoming CO calls only or both on

incoming and outgoing CO calls. If CPC signal detection is assigned to
outgoing CO calls only, it does not function.
1o-c-75
50.00 Automatic Busy-out Count (ABC)
Description
it is administrable to busy out the invalid CO line automatically to prevent
extension users from accessing it by monitoring the loop current sent through
CO line.
One of the following three options is assignable on a CO line basis.
(1) N=O
On CO calls, the system monitors a loop current sent through the CO line,
and if a bop current is not detected, busy tone is sent to the caller.
(2) N=l to 240
On CO calls, the system monitors a loop current sent through the CO line,
and if a loop current is not detected pre-assigned times (1 to 240)
consecutively, busy tone is sent to the caller.
Then the system busies out the corresponding CO line automatically.
(3) N=241
On CO calls, the system does not monitor the loop current sent through the
CO line, therefore, CO line is always seized by extension users whether
.loop current is running or not.
Refer to Section 52.00 WS 2” L-COT/G-COT Busy Out Looprelay.
. Input Format
Index Number
1011 to 3158 Physical Number of the Trunk Port

.I.
iEibF# Assigning ltems Input Value
Nom? Automatic Busy-out Count xxx (0 to 241)

(Loop Current Detection) (Automatic Busy-out)
0: Yes No
1 to 240 : Yes Yes
if loop current is not
detected by the pre-
assigned times (1 to 240)
241 : No No
(Default = 241)
1 O-C-76
51.00 World Select 1 (WSI)
Description
‘WSl’ command provides the following six assignments,
(1) Interdigit Pause (For Dial Pulse Trunk)
Interdigit Pause is used to distinguish between pulse signals.
To meet the requirements of your central office, select the appropriate value
that represents the delay between dial pulses.
This setting is only required when using dial pulse trunks.
(2) Pulse Type (For Dial Pulse Trunk)
The system supports the following three types of dial pulse signaling.
Select the appropriate option to your area.
Normal Type, New Zealand Type, and Sweden Pulse.
This setting is only required when using dial pulse trunks.
(3) Automatic Redial Retry Count
Automatic Redialing will be repeated 15 times automatically by-defauft and
can be administered within 1 to 32 times.
(4) Automatic Redial Retry Interval
Automatic Redialing will be repeated at a 40-second intenral automatically
by defauft and can be administered within 10 to 320 seconds.
Refer to Section 4-C-4.04 “Automatic Redial” for funher information.
(5) % Break Detect (SLT)
Dialed digits from diil pulse type Single Line Telephone (SLT) is transmitted
to the System by making and breaking a loop current (dc path), thereby
interrupting loop current.
Duration time required to detect the number of breaks depends on the SLT
connected and can be administered to ‘16 to 96 ms” or “16 to 136 ms” by
thii command.
(6) Flash Detect (SLT only)
ft is assignable that the Flash signal transmitted from SLT is detected or not
_. .-
by the system. .P.y.,_
If V=No” is selected, the system does not detect the Flash signal
transmitted from SLT.
0 : No (Flash signal transmitted from SLT is not detected by the system)

1 : Yes (Flash signal transmitted from SLT is detected by the system)
Input Format
~pz--~I(~~)~~
Index Number
None
1 o-c-77
(40993)
2s 1 Assigning Items Input Value
1 Interdigit Pause x(1 to3)

1:630ms
2 : 830 ms
3 : 1030 ms
(Default = 2)
2 Pulse Type x (1 to 3)
1 : Normal
2 : New Zealand
3 : Sweden
(Default = 1)
3 Automatic Redial Retry Count xx (01 to 32)

01 : 1 time
.
.
.
32 : 32 times
(Defautl = 15)
4 Automatic Redial Retry Interval XX (01 to 32) (10 to 320 see)

01 : 10 seconds .b
.
.
.
32 : 320 seconds
(Defautl = 04)
5 % Break Detect x(1 to2)

1 : 16 to 96:msec -_
2 : 16 to 136 msec
(Default = 1)
6 Flash Detect x (0 to 1)
0 : No
1 :Yes
(Default = 1)
1 O-C-78
(40993)
52.00 World Select 2 (WS2)
Descrlptlon
WSZ” command provides the following six assignments.
(1) First Dial Timer
On outgoing CO calls, the system waits at least 0.5 seconds after seizing
the CO line, before sending the dialing digits required by the central off ice.
This allows the central off ice enough time to accept the dialing digits
correctly.
Defauft setting is 1 .O second and can be ranged from 0.5 to 8.0 secondS.
(2) EQU Access
Used to activate or deactivate the ECU Access feature on a system-wide
basis. If P(” is selected by this command, brogramming screen of “Special
Carrier Access’ Equal Access is not accessible.
(3) OCC Access
Used to activate or deactivate the OCC Access feature on a system-wide
basis. lf 75” ls selected by this command, programming screen of ‘Special
Carrier Access” OCC Access is not accessible.
(4) Outgoing CO Back Tone
On outgoing CO calls, dialed number is toned out, which informs the
extension users that dialed number has been dialed.
CO Dialing Tone is usually toned out by defautl setting, select ‘N” to turn off
the CO dialing tone.
(5) L-COT Busy Out Looprelay
When CO line is busied out either manually by the operator or automatically
by the system, the state of Loop Relay is controlled by this setting.
(6) G-COT Busy Out Looprefay
When CO line is busted out either manualfy by the Operator 1, or
automaticalfy by the system, the state of Loop Relay and Ring-FG are
controlled by this setting.
Input Format
Index Number
None
1 o-c-79
tern
dumber Assignrng Items Input Value
1 First Dial Timer xx (01 to 16) (0.5 to 8.0 set)

01 : 0.5 set
.
.
.
16 : 8.0 set
(Defautl = 02 : 1.0 set)
2 EQU Access (Y or N)
Y : EQU Access is allowed
N : EQU Access is not allowed
(Defautt = Y)
3 OCC Access (Y or N)
Y : OCC Access is allowed
N : OCC Access is not allowed
(Defautt = Y)
4 Outgoing CO Back Tone (Y or N)

Y : Dialed digits is toned out
N : Dialed digits is not toned out
(Defautt = Y) .,
5 L-COT Busy Out Looprelay (Y or N) (ON or OFF)

Y : Loop Relay ON
N : Loop Relay OFF
(Defautt = N)
6 ~ G-COT Busy Out-Looprelay --‘S ” x (1 to 3) (ON-*& OFF)

1 : Loop Relay ON + Ring-FG Open
2 : Loop Relay OFF + Ring-FG Close
3 : Loop Relay OFF + Ring-FG Open
(Defautt = 3)
1 O-C-80
53.00 World Select 3 (WS3)
Description
WS3’ Command provides the following seven assignments.
(Passworo level: Two or higher)
(1) DIL 1: N CO Key Only (PITS only)

It is programmable that an incoming CO call routed via ‘DIL 1: N” feature
arrives at “CO button onv or “CO button or PDN button’ as follows.
(Parameters)
Y : An incoming CO call routed via DIL 1: N feature only arrives at a PITS
telephone which has associated CO button (SCO, GCO).
If no CO button is assigned on a PlTS, an incoming CO call will not
arrive at that extension.
N : An incoming CO call routed via DIL 1: N feature arrives at CO button
(SCO, GCO) or PDN button.
If no CO button is available on a PITS, an incoming CO call will arrive at
PDN button available. (default)
(2) EXT Off-hook BLF (PITS only)

The status indicator on DSS (DN) button reflects the idle/busy status of the
associated extension user under one of the following settings.
(Parameters)
Y : The status indicator on DSS (DN) button is lighted steadily either v&n
the associated extension user goes off-hook, or when all PDN buttons
are busy. (default) I
N : The status indicator on DSS (DN) button is lighted steadify only when all
PDN buttons on the associated extension are busy.
(3) DTMF-Tone Integration

On extensions with the Voice Mail Port parameter enabled, the KX-T336
system can send codes (DTMF tones) to indicate the state of the call (busy,
answered, ringing, disconnect, etc.) in addition to the normal call progress
tones. These codes enable the Voice Proces6kg system .to imrned&tely
recognize the current state of the call and improve its call handling
performance.
(Parameters)
Y : The KX-T336 system sends codes (DTMF tones) to the VPS.
N : The KX-T336 system does not send codes (DTh4F tones) to the VPS.
(default)
1 O-C-81
(30393)
(4) SLT On-hook Operation Mode
In single line telephone procedures, ac;ve call is put on consultation hold
when the switchhook is pressed down ;c: appronmately ! ‘2 second and
released.
In this case, consultation hold recall tone will ring immediately if you replace
the handset on the switchhook without dialing any digits.
Then you may hear recorder tone when you lift the handset to reply this
ringing -
This may happen sometimes if the handset is replaced on the switchhook

after hopping on it.
To prevent such unexpected consultation hold tone from ringing, select “2

for this setting.
When setting “2” is selected,

a call put consultation hold will be disconnected if you replace the handset
on the switchhook without dialing any digits.
When “1” is selected. - default

,;, RING! , ,
@ING!;;* . .
B
(1) Talking (2) Hooking (3) On-hook (4) Recall
Talking with a Acallisputon Without dialing Consultation hold
caller. consuftation any digits. tone rings.
hold.
When “2 “. IS selected
(1) Talking (2) Hooking (3) On-hook (4) Disconnection

Talking with a A call is put on W&out dialing A call on
caller. consultation any digits. consultation hold
hold. is disconnected.
(Note)
To hang up and make another call right away, an SLT user should be sure to
hold down the switchhook for more than two seconds.
(Parameters)
1 : Hang-up causes ringing of consultation hold recall tone. (default)
2 : Hang-up disconnects a call on consultation hold.
1 O-C-82
(30393)
(5) Mode Selection of Calls Arriving at ATT
When two attendant consoles are connected to the system, one of the
following three types of incoming Mode can be selected.
Options 2 and 3 work only for me incoming outside call routed via a CO line
which belongs to the Trunk Group whose Incoming Mode (Day) is assigned
as “ATT.”
(Parameters)
1. Load Sha_ring
Incoming outside calls are distributed evenly to two attendant consoles
so that they can share the same load. (default)
2. Simultaneous Ringing
An incoming outside call rings at two attendant consoles simultaneously.
3. Interconsole IRNA
If an incoming outside call ringing at one attendant console is not
answered within a specified time period (Attendant Overflow Time), it will
be automatically transferred to another attendant console automatically.
(6) Centrex ARS Mode

In ARS mode, not only a 7digit or 1O-digit number but a number equal to or
less than 6digit (such as CENTREX feature access code) that follow the
ARS access code (default: 9) can be routed via an outside line.
A number equal to or less than 6digit is routed via Local Trunk Dial Access
procedure after passing toll restriction process.
A 7digit or 1 O-digit number is routed via ARS procedure after passing toll
restriction process.
(Parameters)
Y : A number equal to or less than 6-digit can be routed via an outside line
in ARS mode.
N : A number equal to or less than 6digit can not be routed via an outside
line in ARS mode. (defautt)
(7) Waiting for Second Dial Tone Mode

In some area, upon- completion of faciwaceess &de entry, the extension
user must ensure the reception of the second dial tone from the Central
Office before continuing to dial the telephone number.
(Parameters)
Y : The system waits for the second CO dial tone.
N : The system does not wait for the second CO dial tone. (default)
Input Format
Index Number ’
None
1 O-C-82-l
(30393)
I
n
m&r Assigning Items Input Value
1 DIL 1: N CO Key Only (Y or N)

Y: Arrives at CO button only
N : Arrives at CO button or PDN button
(Default = N)
EXT &f-hook BLF c/ or NJ

Y: DSS indicator lights when all PDN buttons of
the associated extension are busy or Off-Hook
N: DSS indicator lights only when all PDN buttons
of the associated extension are busy
(Default = Y)
3 DTMF-Tone Integration (Y or N)
Y : The KX-T336 system sends codes (DTMF
tones) to the VPS.
N : The KX-T336 system does not send codes
(DTMF tones) to the VPS.
(Defauft = N)
4 SLT On-hook Operation mode X (1 or 2)
1 : Hang-up causes ringing of consultation hold
recall tone (default).
2 : Hang-up disconnects a call on consultation
.,
hold.
(Default = 1)
5 Mode Selection of Calls Arriving at ATT x (1 to 3)
1 : Load sharing.
2 : Simuftaneous Ringing.
.(_. 3 : Interconsole IRNA
(Default = 1)
Centrex ARS Mode (v or NJ
Y : A number equal to or less than 6digit can be
routed via an outside line in ARS mode.
N : A number equal to or less than Gdigit can not
be routed via an outside line in ARS mode.
(Default = N)
Waiting for Second Dial Tone c/ or NJ
Y : The system waits for the second CO dial tone.
N : The system does not wait for the second CO
dial tone.
(Default = N)
1 O-C-82-2
(30393)
54.00 Voice Mail Directory Number (VMD)
Description
Used to assign DN of a Voice Mail port (the extension pon to whim the Vote
Mail system is connected.)
This means the KX-T336 system will send the mailbox number of the
extension (on which a call forwarding feature is assigned) with DTMF tones
to a Voice Mail port, when a call forwarded to a Voice Mail port is answered.
Calls from any Voice Mail port will not be forwarded, if forwarding destination
is another Voice Mail port.
Input Format
Index Number
None
i-zzber Assigning ttems Input Value
01 Voice Mail DN DNxxxx: Directory Number ,-

. 0: None
1; (Defautt = 0)
Programming
(&ample)
When DN 109 to 112 are connected to the Voice Mail ports.
1 To assign the Voice Mail DN 1

-.
1. Afthe programming prompt (PRG>), type:
+ ; PRG>VMD AT 01 ( J)
The screen displays the input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:
; PRG> VMD AT 01
; 01: Voice Mail DN . . . . .. .. . . .. . .. .0
+: INPUT >>
2. At Input prompt (INPUT >>), type:

: PRG> VMD AT 01
; 01: Voice Mail DN ____....__.
_._..0
+; INPUT >> DN109 (J )
The screen displays the next Input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:
; PRG> VMD AT 01
; 01: Voice Mail DN . ..__.._..._....0
INPUT >> DN109
; 02: Voice Mail DN . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . .0
+; INPUT >>
1 o-c-63
(21292)
3. Follow the step 2 for each Voice Mail DN you want to store.
4. To store the assigned voice mail DN to the system,

at input prompt (INPUT >>), type:
; PRG> VMD AT 01
; 01 : Voice Mail DN . . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. 0
INPUT >> DN109
; 02: Voice Mail DN . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . 0
, INPUT >> DNll 0
*, 03: Voice Mail DN . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . .0
, INPUT >> DNlll
; 04: Voice Mail DN . .. . . .. . .. .. .. . .0
, INPUT>> DN112 --
; 05: Voice Mail DN . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . .0
+; INPUT >> $EOD ( J)
This assigns the Voice Mail DN to the system, and the programming
prompt (PRG >) appears again.
To confirm the assignments

At the programming prompt (PRG >), type:
+ ;PRG>VMDSH (J)
The screen displays the Voice Mail DN assignments as follows.

;PRG>VMDSH (J)
; 01 : Voice Mail DN . .. . . .. . .. .. .. . . DN109
; 02: Voice Mail DN . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . DNllO
; 03: Voice Mail DN . .. . . .. . .. .. .. . . DNlll
; 04: Voice Mail DN .. . . .. . .. . .. .. .. DN112
f. 05: Voice Mail DN .. . . .. . .. . .. . . .. 0
; 06: Voice . Mail DN . . . . .. . .. . .. . . .. 0
.
; 16: Voice Mail DN . . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. 0
;PRG>
To remove the existing Voice Mail DN
1. At the programming prompt (PRG >), type:

+ ;PRG>VMDATOl (J)
The screen displays the Input prompt (INPUT W) as follows:

; PRG> VMD AT 01
; 01 : Voice Mail DN . . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . DN109
+; INPUT >>
2. At input prompt ( INPUT >>), type:

; PRG> VMD AT 01
; 01 : Voice Mail DN . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .DN109
+; INPUT >> $CLR ( J)
1O-C-84
(21292)
The screen displays the next input prompt (INPUT >>) as folloWs:
; PRG> VMD AT 01
., 01 : Voice Mail DN . . .. . . . .. . .. . .. . DN109
INPUT >> $CLR
; 02: Voice Mail DN . . . .. . . . .. . . .. .. DNllO
+; INPUT >>
3. Follow the step 2 for each Voice Mail DN you want to remove.
4. To store the changed data to the system,

at Input prompt (INPUT >>), type:
; PRG> VMD AT 01
; 01: Voice Mail DN . .. . . . .. . . .. . .. . DN109
2.
, INPUT >> $CLR
; 02: Voice Mail DN . .. . . . .. . . .. .. . . DNllO
, INPUT >> $CLR
; 03: Voice Mail DN . . . .. . . . .. .. . . .. DNlll
, INPUT >> $CLR
; 04: Voice Mail DN . . . .. . . . .. . . .. .. DNi12
., INPUT >> $CLR
; 05: Voice Mail DN . .. . . .. . . .. . .. .. 0
+; INPUT>> !$EOD (J)
This assigns the changed data to the system, and the programming
To finish the programming

+ ;PRG>EXlT (J)
The screen displays the initial prompt (>) of the Dumb programming
mode as follows.
; PRG> EXIT._
+ ; >
To return to the VT programming mode
At initial prompt ( > ), press:
+ LCTRL] and q keys simultaneously.

The screen displays the Main Menu of the VT programming mode.
1O-C-85
(21292)
55.00 Mailbox Number (MBN)
Description
This program tells the KX-T336 system what mailbox number is assigned for
each extension.
By default, mailbox number identical with each extension number is
assigned to all extensions.
That is, mailbox number for DNl 00 extension is 100.
This means when a call is forwarded (via DNI 00) to a port that is assigned
as a voice mail port, the system will sent 100 with DTMF tones automatically
when the voice mail port answers the call.
Input Format
Index Number

four digits)
Four-digit numb: (1011 to 3158) Physical location of extension

kern Input Value
Number Assigning Items .I
None Mailbox Number Up to 10 digits of numeric characters (O-9), “SC”and ‘##”
I I 1 (Default = Same as the extension number) I
Mailbox number specific to each extension (Same as the extension number)

is assigned to all extensions by default..
Programming
To change the default setting

1. At the programming prompt (PRG>), type:
+ ; PRG> MBN AT DN1 00 (J )
The screen displays the Input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:
; PRG> MBN AT DNIOO
1 : Mail Box Number .. .. . . . .. . . 100
+; INPUT >>
1O-C-86
(21292)
; PRG> MBN AT DNlOO
1: Mail Box Number . .. . . .._.._100
+; INPUT >> 200 (J )
; PRG> MBN AT DNl 00
9 1 : Mail Box Number . .. . .. . . .. . 100
, INPUT >> 200
t 1: Mail Box Number . .. . .. . . .. .200
+; INPUT >>
3. To store the new Mailbox Numbecto the system,

; PRG> MBN AT DNlOO
f 1: Mail Box Number . .. .. . . . .. . 100
, INPUT >> 200
t 1: Mail Box Number .. . .. . . . .. .200
+; INPUT >> $EOD (J )
This assigns the new Mailbox Number to the system, and the
programming prompt (PRG >) appears again.
1 To change the defauft setting for another extension 1

4. At the programming prompt (PRG >), type:
, 1: Mail Box Number . . . .. . . . .. . 100
, INPUT >> 200
I 1: Mail Box Number . .. .. . . . .. .200
, INPUT >> $EOD
+ ;PRG>MBNATDNlOl (J)
The screen displays the next Input prompt as follows:
; PRG> MBN AT DNlOO ‘.
, 1: Mail Box Number . .. .. . . . .. . 100
t INPUT >> 200
t 1: Mail Box Number . .. . . .. . .. .200
9 INPUT >> $EOD
8 1: Mail Box Number . .. . .. . . .. . 101
+; INPUT >>
1 O-C-87
(21292)
z
_ 2.i li!ptit p?CTZr (INPUT >>), type:
: PRG> FvlSNAT DNlOO
1 : Maii Box Number . . .. . . . .. . . 1GO
INF JT >> 200
I : Mail Box Number . . .. . . . .. . .200
INFUT >> $EOD
1: Mai! Box Number. .. . . .. . . .. 101
+ ; INFUT >> 201 ( J)
The screen ospiays the next input prompt (INPUT >>) as fdkx:
; FRG> MBN AT DNl 00
1 : Mali Box Number . . . ..._.... 100
, INPUT >> 200
3 1 : Mail Box Number ._......... 200
INFUT >> $EOD
; PRG> lilBN AT DNlOl
! : Mall Box Number . . .. . . . .. . . 1Cl
iNF_T >> 201
I: ?,‘z 30x Ncmkxr ._......... 2.Z’
-31 IN? -:T >>
=.
.- To store the -t:v Mailbox Number ic :tie system.
at Input prcr? (INPUT >>), type:
c’1.--
, r,ti> i,,‘3N AT DNiOO
1 : h?aii Box Number . . .. . . . .. . . 100
INPUT >> 200
1 : Mail Box Number . . . .. . . . .. .200
INPUT >> $EOD
;) 1 : Mail Box Number . . .. . . .. . . . 101
INPUT >>:201 - \
1 : Mail Box Number .. . . .. . . .. .201
+; INPUT >> $EOD
This assigns the new Mailbox Number to the system, and the
programming prompt (PRG >) appears again.
/
1 To remove the existing Mailbox Number
1. At the programming prompt (PRG>)? type:
; PRG> MBN AT DNl 00 (J )
; PRG> MBN AT DNlOO
1 : Mail Box Number . . . .. .._. ..lOO
+; INPUT >>
1O-C-88
(21292)
; PRG> MBN AT DNlOO
1 : Mail Box Number . .. . .. . . .. . 100
3; INPUT >> $CLR (J )
The screen displays the next Input prompt as follows:
; PRG> MBN AT DNi 00
, 1 : Mail Box Number .. . . .. . .. . . 100
, INPUT >> $CLR
, 1: Mail Box Number . .. . .. . . .. .
+; INPUT >>

; PRG> MBN AT DNlOO
, 1: Mail Box Number . .. . .. . .. . . 100
, INPUT >> $CLR
, 1: Mail Box Number . . .. . .. . .. .
-+; INPUT >> $EOD ( J)
This assigns the changed data to the system, and the programming

3 ;PRG>EXlT (J)
The screen displays the initial prompt ( 7 ) of the Dumb programming

mode as follows:
; PRG> EXIT
+ ;7
1 To return to the VT
^. programming
+ mode ]
At initial prompt (>), press:
I CTRL and qV keys simultaneously.

1 O-C-89
(21292)
56.00 Account Code Verified
Description
Account Code Vetified is used to prevent the extension users from making
unauthorized outside calls by checking the validity of the entered account code.
In default mode, the validity of the entered account code is not checked by the
system.
When Account Code Verified is utilized, account code entered before making an
outside call is checked against the list of system account codes.
If the entered account code matches one of the codes on the list, the outside call is
completed.
If the entered account code is not found on this list, reorder tone is returned to the
extension user and !he outside call is restricted.
System Account Codes for this feature can be registered in the Speed Dialing
Screen by dividing it into two areas using SPB command.
This feature is applied to the extension user whose Class of Service No. is
assigned to “YES” by entering ACV command at dumb programming mode.
System Account Codes are not assignable, if Tenant Service is employed.
To utilize this feature, the following programming should be done beforehand.
(1) Programming the System Account Codes-Speed Dialing Boundary (SPB)
To register the System Account Codes, first divide the System Dialing Screen
into two areas by entering SPB command as an example shown below.
When divided, the first area is used to register Speed Dialing Codes and the
second area is used to register System Account Codes.
SPB command is available only when tenant service is not employed.
<Example>
To assign 80 Speed Dialing Codes and 120 System Account Codes in the
Speed Dialing Screen, enter as follows.
; PRG>SPB ATcCR>
; Speed Dial Boundary ------------- 200
t INPUT>> 080 <CR>
I-Speed Dial Boundary ----------- 080
, INPUT>> $EOD <CR>
; PRG>
As a result, System Speed Dialing area will be divided into two areas as
follows.
Entry 08’ 1-1 + Divided by SPB command

Entry 081 1 System Account Code 1
Entry200 L
1o-c-90
(21292)
Boundary number is ranging from “000” to “200.”
If “000” is entered in Speed Dial Boundary, whole system speed dialing

screen is used to register the System Account Codes.
If “200” is entered in Speed Dial Boundary, whole system speed dialing
screen is used to register a number for Speed Dialing.
After Speed Dial Boundary is determined, register System Account Codes

at “System-Speed Dialing-System” screen.
(2) Assigning Account Code Verified (ACV) Feature to the Extension

ACV command is used to assign Account Code Verified feature to each
extension user on a basis of COS No. for that extension.
When Account Code Verified feature is assigned “Yes” to COS No.2, the
account code entered is checked against the System Account Code List.
If match is found on the table, a call is completed, if not found, a call is
stopped and reorder tone is sent.
To program Account Code Verified feature, enter ACV command as follows.

Then enter “Y” to activate this feature, or enter “N” to deactivate this feature.
<Example>
; PRG>ACV ATcCR>
; Class of Service No. 01 ---------- N
INPUT>> Y <CR> 2; r
I Class of Service No. 02 --------------- N

INPUT>> Y <CR>
i Class of Service No. 03 ------------- N
INPUT>> Y <CR>
i Class of Service No. 04 ---------------- N
INPUT>> $EOD .<CR>
; PRG>
Input Format
Index Number
(1) None
(2)
Index Number I Explanation
01 to 32 I COS (Class of Service) Number I
1 o-c-91
(21292)
Input Value for Index Number
(1)
tern
Vumber Assigzng items Input Value
None Speed Dial Boundary 000 to 200 : Boundary Number

000 : Up to 200 System Account Codes can be
registered
200 : Up to 200 Speed Dialing Codes can be
registered
(Default = 200)
L
(2)
._
’ Esber Assigning Items Input Value
None Account Code Verified Mode Y : Enabled

N : Disabled
(Default = N)
Reference
. It is helpful to use this feature together with ACL feature.
Refer to Section 3-F-l 1 .OO “Call Accounting Summary” for further information.
1 o-c-92
(21292)
57.00 Account Code Entry on Long Distance Calls (ACL)
Description
Used to allow :he extension user to override the restrictions on numbers
programmed by 7%~Toll Restriction Table.
When this feature IS utilized, the call is completed even if the last 7-digit of the
dialed outside number is found on the table, by entering the appropriate account
code before making an outside call.
This feature works on a basis of COS (Class of Service) assigned to each
extension.
To utilize this feature, the extension user must enter an account code before
making an outside call.
The validity of the account code entered, however, is not checked by the system.
To check the validity, assign “Account Code Verified (ACV)” feature.
Input Format
index Number
Index Number Explanation r
01 to 32 COS (Class of Service) Number
I Assigning Items Input Value
Account Code on Long Distance Calls Y : Enabled

N : Disabled
j (Default = N)
Assigning Account Code Entry on Long Distance Calls (ACL)

To activate this feature, enter ACL command and then W (Yes)” as follows.
<Example>
; PRG>ACL AT&R>
; Class of Service No 01 _________ - ___________
N
INPUT>> Y <CR>
i Class of Service No 02 _______ - ______N
- _____
INPUT>> Y <CR>
i Class of Setice No 93 ______ - ______________
N
INPUT>> Y <CR>
i Class of Service No 94 ______________________N
INPUT>> $EOD <CR>
; PRG>
1 o-c-93
(21292)
Conditions
None
Reference
Section 3-C-l .OO “Toll Restriction”
Section 3-F-i 1 .OO “Call Accounting Summary”
Section 4-I-2.00 “Account Code Entry”
Section 5-G-2.00 “Account Code Entry”
Section 1 O-C-56.00 “Account Code Verified”
It is helpful to use this feature together with ACL feature.

Refer to Section 3-F-11 .OO “Call Accounting Summary” for further information.
1 o-c-94
(21292)
58.00 CO Access Instantly (CAI)
Description
When an extension user makes an outside call. the sys:ez seizes a CO line (if
available) and sends out dial signal after the toll restriction procedure in default
mode.
In some region, CO dial tone is returned to the system In a delayed timing.
If you want to send out dial signal after receiving the CO dial tone, program CO
Access Instantly feature.
When this feature is activated, a CO line is seized (if available) directly after
pressing a CO button or dialing a CO line access code.
Then the extension user can send dial signal to the central office after receiving
CO dial tone.
This feature is programmable on a trunk group basis.
In case of Local Trunk-Dial Access, system decides the mode by the top trunk
group of Local Trunk Hunt Sequence.
(1) Assigning “CO Access Instantly” on a Trunk Group

This feature can be assigned on a trunk group basis by entering CAI
command at dumb programming mode as follows.
Then enter w” to activate this feature, and enter “N” to deactivate this
feature.
<Example>
; PRG>CAI AT&R>
; Trunk Group No. 01 ______________________
N
INPUT>> Y <CR>
i Trunk Group No. 02 ______
- __-____------ N
INPUT>> Y <CR>
iTrunk Group No. 03 --------___---- - N
INPUT>> Y <CR>
i Trunk Group No. 04 ___- -__---__-_----- - N
INPUT>> $EOD <CR>
; PRG>
Input Format
Index Number
01 to 16 Trunk Group Number

m-l Input Value
Number Assigning Items
None CO Access Instantly Y : Enabled

N : Disabled
(Default = N)
1 o-c-95
(21292)
Condftlons
(External First Digit Time-Out timer assignment)
When CO Access Instantly is utilized, we recommend to set System-System
Iimer ‘External First Digit lime-Out” timer longer than length of CO dial tone
delay.
This setting can be ranged from 5 to 120 seconds.
Refer to Section 9-D-3.00 “System Timer” or
Section 1 O-C-6.00 “System Timer (TIM).”
‘b
1O-C-96
(21292)
59.00 Night Answer Group (NAG)
Description
A single group of extensions (called the Night Answer Group) can be created to receive calls at night.
Calls from more than one CO line may arrive at this group.
The size limit of the group is 32 extensions.
Refer to Section 3-B-8.01 “Directed Night Answer” and Section 3-B-8.04

“Fixed Night Service” for further information.
Input Format
!,tzaer
index Number
r
None
. Input Value for Item Number
01
to
32
Assigning items
De&nation
(Night Answer Group
Extensions)
Input Value
DN XXXX (XXXX : three or four digits): extension number

0 : none
(Available only when Trunk Group ‘Incoming Mode (Night)”
is set to ‘FIXED”)
(Default = 0)
Programming ?. -- ..A
(Example) *
To assign the Night Answer Group Extensions
1. At the programming prompt (PRG>), type:
+ ;PRG>NAGAT (J)
; PRG> NAG AT
., 01: Night Answer EXT . .. . . .. . .0
3; INPUT >>
; PRG> NAG AT
; 01: Night Answer EXT .. . .. . . .. 0
+; INPUT >> DN109 (J )
1o-c-97
(30393)
: PRG> NAG AT
; 01 : Nigh: Answer EXT .. . .. . .. . 0
INPUT >> DN 109
; 02: Night Answer EXT _._.__._. 0
+; INPUT >>
3. Follow the step 2 for each Night Answer Group Extensions you want to assign.
4. To store the assignments to the system, at Input prompt (INPUT >>), type:
; PRG> NAG AT
*, 01: Night Answer EXT . .. . . .. . .0
, INPUT >> DN109
*. 02: Night Answer EXT . . . .. . . ..0
, INPUT >> DNllO
., 03: Night Answer EXT .. . .. .. .. 0
., INPUT >> DNlll
; 04: Night Answer EXT .. . .. .. .. 0
I INPUT >> DN112
; 05: Night Answer EXT . .. . . .. .. 0
+; INPUT >> $EOD (J )
This assigns the Night Answer Group Extensions to the system, and the
\ . programming prompt (PRG >) appears again.
.,.
To confirm the assignments
At the programming prompt (PRG >). type:
+ ;PRG>NAGSH (A)
The screen displays the current assignments as follows.

-
;PRG>NAGSH (J)
.t 01: Night Answer EXT . . .. . . .. . DNlO9
; 02: Night Answer EXT . .. . . . .. . DNll 0
; 03CNight Answer EXT...,,,DNlll
; 04: Night Answer EXT . . .. . . .. . DN112
. 05: Night Answer EXT .. . .. . . .. 0
; 06: Night Answer EXT .. . .. . . .. 0
.
* 32: Night Answer EXT . . .. . . .. .0
IPRG>
To remove the existing Night Answer Group Extensions
1. At the programming prompt (PRG B), type:

+ ;PRGrNAGAT (J)

; PRG> NAG AT
; 01: Night Answer EXT . .. . . .. . .DN109
+; INPUT >>
1 O-C-98
(30393)
2. At input prompt ( INPUT >>), type:
; PRG> NAG AT
; 01 : Night Answer EXT ._....... DN109
+ ; INPUT>> $CLR (J)
The screen displays the next Input prompt (INPUT Z-Z-)as follows:
; PRG> NAG AT
; 01: Night Answer EXT . . . .. . . .. DN109
I INF’UT >> $CLR
; 02: Night Answer EXT . . . .. . . .. DN110
+; INPUT >>
3. Follow the step 2 for each Night Answer Group Extension you want to remove.

; PRG> NAG AT
-, 01: Night Answer EXT . .. .. . . .. DN109
.t INPUT >> $CLR
-9 02: Night Answer EXT . .. . . .. . .DNllO
.1 INPUT >> $CLR
; 03: Night Answer EXT . .. . . .. . . DNlll
.
9 INPUT >> $CLR
; 04: Night Answer EXT . .. . . .. . . DN112
, INPUT >> $CLR
-, 05: Night Answer EXT . . ...- 0
+; INPUT >> $EOD (J ) ..
This assigns the changed data to the system, and the programming prompt
(PRG >) appears again.
1 To finish the programming 1

.> 5
+ ;PRG>EXlT (J)
The screen displays the initial prompt (>) of the Dumb programming mode as
follows.
; PRG> EXIT
+;>
1 To return to the VT programming mode 1
At initial prompt ( > ), press:
+ I=] and q keys simultaneously.

1O-c-99
(30393)
60.00 Polarity Reversal Detection (PRD)
Descrlptlon
When an R-LCOT card (KX-T96183) is installed, reversal of CO hne polarity
is monitored at each port by default.
The PRD command is used to deactivate this monitoring function, or to

activate this monitoring function when it has been deactivated.
This command is not valid when an R-LCOT card (KX-T96183) is not

installed in the system.
Input Format
Index Number
Four-digit number (1011 to 3158) Physical number of the CO line port

\ .

.,
Polarity Reversal Detection VOW

Y: Detects reversal of CO line polarity.
N: Does not detect reversalof CO line polarity.
(Defauft=Y)
Programming
1 To enter the Dumb Programming mode 1
1. Press /=I key and q key simultaneously when Main Menu screen
is displayed at VT programming mode.
2. At the Dumb programming initial prompt (; > ), type:
;>PRG (-I)
The screen displays the programming prompt (PRG>) as follows:
; PRG>
1 o-c-1 00
(30393)
1 To change the default setting 1
(Deactivating the polarity reversal detection)
1. At the programming prompt (PRG>). type:
+ ;PRG>PRDAT (L)
The screen displays the input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:
; PRG> PRD AT
; Equipment No.2011 .. . .. . . . . .. . . ..._Y
+; INPUT >>
2. At input prompt (INPUT >>), type:

; PRG> PRD AT
; Equipment No.2011 .. . .. .. . . .. . . .. . .Y
+; lNPUT>>N (J)
The screen displays the next input prompt (INPUT >>) as follows:
; PRG> PRD AT
; Equipment No.2011 . .. . . . . .. .. . . .. . .Y
.t INPUT >> N
; Equipment No.2012 .. . . . .. .. . .. . . .. .Y
+; INPUT >>
. 3. Follow the step 2 for other CO line ports of an R-LCOT card.
4. To store the new assignments to the system,

; PRG> PRD AT
; Equipment No.2011 .. . .. . . . .. . . . .. . .Y
, INPUT >> N
; Equipment No.2012 . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . .Y
t INPUT>> N
I
.: ..
; Equipment Lo.2013 . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. Y
I INPUT >> N
; Equipment No.2011 . . . .. . . .. . . .. .. . .N
+ INPUT>> $EOD (J)
This assigns the new setting to the system, and the programming prompt
(PRG >) appears again.

+ ;PRG>EXlT (J)
The screen displays the initial prompt ( > ) of the Dumb programming
mode as follows:
; PRG> EXIT
+ ;>
1 O-c-1 01
(30393)
To return to the VT programming mode
At initial prompt (B), press:
ml and q keys simultaneously.
! .
1 o-c-1 02
(30393)
61.00 Waiting for Second Dial tone (WSD)
Description
In some areas, upon completion of area code entry, the extension user must
ensure the reception of the second dial tone from the central off ice before
continuing to dial the rest of the telephone number.
The WSD command is used to assign the area code and pause time
required to support the above mentioned special dialing procedures.
Refer to Section 3-F-12.00 Waiting for Second Dial tone” for further
information.
Proaramm
Register the facility access code required and pause time as follows.
;PRG>WSDAT(J)
; Dial Entry Table No. 01
; 1 : Dial . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. .. . 811
; 2 : Pause . . . .. .. .. . . . .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . .. .. .. . . 1
<Note>
(j) Dial
One through four digits number consisting of numeric characters 1 - 9
can be entered.
One character ‘X’ can be used as a wild card character that substitutes
any numeric character in its position.
(2) Pause
One digit (l-4) which indicates the number of pause characters.
A pause character may be used to help ensure the receipt of dial tone
from Central Office.
Each pause character causes a fixed rdfafing delay of four and one-half
(4.5) seconds.
Up to four pause characters may be used consecutively, if a longer
pause is required.
Input Format
index Number
lnaex Number Explanation
I I I
01 to 32 Dial Entry Table No. I
1o-c-1 03
(30393)
Item
1 Dial One through four digits number consisting of numeric

characters l-9.
“X’ can be used as a wild card character.
(Defautk None)
2 Pause One digit (l-4) which indicates the number of pause
characters.
Each pause character causes a fixed dialing delay of
four and one-half (4.5) seconds.
(Default=O)
1o-c-1 04
(30393)
D. Error Message Tables
Same Command
If there is a wrong entry in the displayed screen, The (XXX) indicates one of the error message
the following appears on the message line when numbers shown below and possible causes of the
storfng the entry: ‘DATA ERROR (XXX).” errors and countermeasures for them are as
follows.
DATA ERROR No. Probable cause Countermeasure

WW
100 (page length)-(skip length) e 6 Make (page length)-(skip length) h 6.
101 (receive digit) 2 (delete digit) is not established Make (receive digit) r(delete digit).
in - Special Attended DID screen.
102 Restriction Level-Operator $ Restriction Level- Make Restriction Level-Operation 6

International is not established in - Operation Restriction Level-International
(l/3) screen
110 Day-night combination in the incoming mode is Change the day-night combination in
not correct incoming mode.
130 Combination of the terminals of operators 1.2 Change the combination of terminals for
is incorrect. operators 1.2.
--.
140 DN is not installed. Designate the installed DN.
141 Attempting to assign FDN’s of UCD # 1 to # 4 Set FDN of other UCD. or extension directory
..
for the overfbw destination of UCD # 5 to # 32 number.
150 Attempting to assign its own extension number Specify the number except its own extension
on the key which cannot be assigned to its own number.
extension number.
<example> DSS( ICM)
DSS(DN)
..+sPy .
160 Specifying UCD number incorrectly. Assign UCD to’only one ICM.
190 Date value is incorrect on the check of month, Check the date setting.
and leap year in the time and date setting
screen.
1 O-D-l
(21292)
Other Commands
If there is a wrong entry related to the assigned The (XXX) indicates an error message number
by the other commands, the following appears on shown below and possible causes of the errors
the message line when stoning the entry: &DATA and countermeasures for them are as follows.
ERROR (xxx).”
DATA ERROR No. Probable Cause Countermeasure
300 Setting DN which is not stored in the hundred Enter data in hundred block. Or, set DN
block. which is stored in hundred block.
301 Specified extension DN is not stored. Store the extension DN.

__.
-3 302 Telephone type of the extension paired with
DSS console is not PITS.
Paired extension should be changed to a
PITS.
310 Setting DN to the DSS console. Set DN to assignable port.
320 Setting trunk group except DID on CO-line on Assign trunk group to the correct kind of
DID card. Or, assigning trunk group of DID to card.
CO-line on the card except DID.
I 330 Tenant is different. Assign the same tenant.
I--
331 As assigned to the destination of 1 : N of trunk Cancel the 1 : N destination.
group, impossible to change tenant.
332 As assigned to the destination.of doorphone Cancel the doorphone call destination.
call, impossible to change tenant. ..
Setting one pickup group to ICM & PAG group Set it to the same tenant. Or, change tenant
belonging to different tenant. after deleting pickup group.
Changing tenant of ICfWPAG group without /Change after canceling extensions.

canceling extensions. Impossible to move extensions to the other
tenant.
As assigned to the destination of paging from Change the desti&tion of attendant paging:
attendant console, impossible to change Tenani t.
As assigned to call placing mode of Trunk Change assigning of incoming mode.

group, impossible to change Tenant.
As assigned to night answer point for CO-line, Change assignment of night answer point.
impossible to change Tenant.
338 Attempting to change the tenant of Trunk group Change after removing the CO lines.
without removing the CO lines which belong to Impossible to move CO lines to the other
the trunk group. tenant.
/
‘\
I 339 Attempting to change the tenant of Trunk group
without canceling the setting of 1:N destination
Change after canceling 1: N destination.
for the trunk group.
340 Deleting is impossible because it is assigned in Change the item beforehand.

t- another item.
I
1 O-D-2
(21292)
342 Extension assigned to NEXT HUNT STATION is Assign another extension or clear the
already assigned to NEXT HUNT STATION for previous assignment.
another extension.
343 Relation between ICM group and Pickup group Make them in proper relation.
assigned for an extension is incorrect.
344 AS PRV-CO is assigned by PITS button Cancel the assignment of the PITS button.
assignment, impossible to change the type of
the trunk group to any other than PRV.
345 As assigned to Single CO by PITS button Cancel the assignment of the PITS button.
assignment, impossible to change the 1:l
destination of the line to a different PITS.
346 Attempting to change the tenant of Trunk group Change the tenant after clearing all 1 :l
without canceling the setting of 1:l destination. destinations of CO lines belonging to the
group.
347 UCD group is not assigned. Assign Pickup group to a UCD group.
348 Attempting to assign DID to Trunk group which Assign DID after clearing all CO lines
has CO lines belonging to the group. belonging to the group.
350 Attempting to assign the unstored ICM number Assign stored ICM number.
to the DSS (ICM) button.
360 Attempting to assign the ATT which is not Register the ATT as an operator, or specify
registered as the operator to the maintenance another device.
device.
370 Specified CO line does not exist. Specify proper CO line. ”
371 Specified CO line is not the PVL. Specify proper CO line.
372 Specified CO line is already assigned as a DIL Specify another CO line or cancel the
I:1 or PRV-CO by another extension. assignment of the desired line.
373 _ Impossible to assign because the programmings Change call placing type to 1 :l , or change
for specified CO does not sati* the condition. group type % &ique type. -h ’
374 Impossible to assign because the prograrnmings Change call placing type to 1 :N, and group
for specified CO does not satisfy the condition. type to group.
391 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the assignment as an operator.
registered as an operator of the tenant.
392 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the assignment as the destination.
registered as the destination of intercept routing
for the Trunk group.
393 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the assignment as an ATT busy out
registered as an ATT busy out extension of extension.
Trunk group.
394 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the storage as an ATT overflow
registered as an ATT overflow extension for extension.
Trunk group.
1 O-D-3
(21292)
lDATAERRORNo
395 Attempting
Probable Cause
to delete the extension which is

Countermeasure
Cancel the storage as an overflow

registered as an overflow extension for UCD destination.
group.
396 Attempting to delete the extension/RMT which Cancel the storage as a DIL 1:l call
is registered as a D!L 1 :l call destination of CO destination.
line.
397 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the storage as a night answer point.
registered as a night answer point of CO line.
398 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the storage as a walking station.
registered as a walking station.
399 Attempting to delete the PfTS paired with DSS- Change the PITS paired with DSS Console.
console. I
400 Attempting to delete the extension which is Cancel the storage as night answer point.
registered as a night answer point for tenant.
I 401 Attempting to delete the extension which is set Cancel the assignment of SDN.
r
to SDN.
403 Attempting to delete the ATT when the ATT is Change the incoming mode destination other
assigned for day incoming mode in Trunk than ATT.
\ . group.
I 404 Attempting to delete

is assigned.
RMT when the RMT alarm Cancel the assignment of RMT alarm.
I 405 Attempting
registered
to delete the external pager which is
as UNA point for CO line.
Change the night answer paint.
406 Attempting to delete the external pager which is Change the incoming mode.
registered as a TAFAS for day/night incoming
mode for Trunk group.
I I
I I I
407 Attempting to delete the external pager which is Change the paging destination.
registered as aTpaging destination for’the AlT. -,.,. >.
r
408 Attempting to delete the ATT which is specified After changing maintenance device, delete
for maintenance device. the ATT.
409 When deleting ATT, combination of operators 1 Check the combination of operators.
and 2 is incorrect. I
411 Impossible to delete the card, for all of the ports Delete all the ports belonging to the card.
belonging to the card is not made pre-installed.
412 Impossible to delete the card, for DN is Delete all the ports belonging to the card.
assigned to an extension port.
)I Deleting the card is impossible, for it is

assigned as a maintenance device.
Change the maintenance device.
1 O-D-4
(21292)
414 Deleting the card is impossible, because it is Change the intercept routing destination.
assigned for the intercept routing destination for
the Trunk group.
415 Deleting the card is impossible, because it is Cancel the doorphone call destination.
assigned for doorphone call destination.
418 _ Attempting to assign NAG as Night Answer Assign Incoming Mode (Night) to FIXED.
Point of a CO line belonging to a Trunk Group
whose Incoming Mode (Night) is not FIXED.
420 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to ‘No” is Assign ATT’s to tenant 1.
impossible as all ATPs are not assigned to
tenant 1.
421 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to ‘No” is Assign music sources to tenant 1.
impossible as all music sources are not
422 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to ‘No’ is Assign external pagers to tenant 1.
impossible as all external pagers are not
423 Changing Tenant Service from Yes” to ‘No” is Assign doorphones to tenant 1.
impossible as all doorphones are not assigned
to tenant 1.
424 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to ‘No” is Assign DISA’s to tenant 1.
impossible as all DlSAk are not assigned to
tenant 1.
425 Changing Tenant Service from @Yes” to ‘No” is Assign AGc’s to tenant 1. ”
impossible as all AGC’s are not assigned to
tenant 1.
426 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to ‘No” is Assign all paging groups to tenant 1.
impossible as all paging groups are not
.- 427 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to “No” is AssigtMll ICM groups to tanaWl.
impossibla as all ICM groups are not assigned
to tenant 1.
428 Changing Tenant Service from “Yes” to ‘No” is Assign all trunk groups to tenant 1.
impossible as all trunk groups are not assigned
to tenant 1
430 Deleting expansion shelf is impossible, as one Delete all the cards in the expansion shelf.
or more cards are assigned to the expansion
shelf.
440 Impossible to change the Numbering Plan to Clear DN’s which should be blank.
“Fixed,” because there exist DN’s which should ._.
be blank in the “Fixed” mode in the Hundred
Block.
450 Impossible to change ICfWaging group, for the Change after deleting all the extensions in
pickup group belonging to the ICM/Paging the pickup group.
group contains extensions.
1 O-D-5
(30393)
3.00 Fixed Error Messages
DATA ERF?OR No. Probable Cause Countermeasure

I I
003 Jnaccep!able value is assigned. Assign an allowable value.
!
004 I Soace exists between items. Remove the space.
005 Some items are left blank. Assign all required items, or leave all items
blank. I
I 006 At least one blank should be left among

Items.
multipl Leave at least one blank.
I
I 007 I Assigned selection value is not for the item. I Set the assignable value. I
008 The number which is set previously in this Set the number different from the previous
screen is assigned again. number.
k
009 The number which is set previously in a different Set the number different from the previous
screen is assigned. number.
012 Device is not installed. Assign the installed device.
013 Status of the specified device does not accept Change the status of the device to be
this command. acceptable for the command.
I 016 Privilege level is lower than specified level. Increase the privilege level through
Change level function.
the
Diagnostic error has been detected when INS Verify the related device.
command is executed.
.
I 018 Specified service is not executed. Check specified service.
019 Another maintenance device (remote, PITS, Wait until another device is finished or let him
system) is in use. finish. I
LiizGr-/
..:;) 020 Printer is not connected to the system or the Connect the printer, and make the power on.
power is off.
021 Print out is unavailable from Remote.
Entered parameters for Item or Index is out of Enter the parameters within the specified
the specified range. I range. I
F / p&;r;;m,;X> n is entered in BT (Batch) Correct the wrong entry.
I 024 I
Calendar IC malfunction.
I
Repair calender IC.
I
027 Backup device is not connected (only when Connect the backup device to SIO # 1 Port.
maintenance device is All). I
029 Different version at the time of backup. Match the backup version.
10-D-6
(21292)
1 DATA ERROR No. 1 Probable Cause I Countermeasure I
030 A checksum error has been detected. Communication line is defective, or backup
data is destroyed.
031 Improper data is received. Communication link is defective, or backup

data is destroyed.
040 Execution is impossible during off-line. Execute during on-line.
041 Impossible change such as Impossible.

[INS] + [INS], [OUS] + [OUS]
is attempted.
042 Some required items are omitted. Enter the required items.
1 O-D-7
(21292)
4.00 Other Error Messages
I Error Message Prooa3ie Cause Countermeasure
I PASSWORD ERROR I Assrgneo password Is cot correct. ~--I- Enter the correct password. I
MODE ERROR Selected moae 6 n0i correct. Change the mode.
COMMAND ERROR Entered command is no1 correct. I Enter the correct command.
I TYPE ERROR I Selected type is not correct. --I-- Select the

~~~ correct type. (SH, AT, BT) I
INDEX ERROR Entered index number is not correct. Enter the correct index number.
ITEM ERROR Entered item number s not correct. Enter the correct item number.
-: LOGICAL ERROR Programming data assigned’in off-line mode Assign the correct data.
3 has some logical error.
I DATA ERROR I Assigned data is invalid. I Refer to the DATA ERROR No. list. I
10-D-8
(21292)
Section 11
System Programming
Proprietary Integrated Telephone System (PITS)
.1
(Section 11)
System Programming
Contents
Page
A Introduction ...................................................................................................... 11-A-l
B Function of PITS Buttons in PITS Programming.. ............................................ 11-B-l
C Operation ......................................................................................................... 11-C-l
1.00 Entering PITS System Programming Mode.. ......................................... 11 -c-2

2.00 Setting Date and Time ........................................................................... 11 -c-4
3.00 Storing Speed Dialing-System.. ............................................................. 11 -C-6
4.00 Changing Extension Number.. ......................................................... .:. ... 11 -c-9
5.00 Changing Extension Name.. .................................................................. 11-c-11
6.00 Changing PITS Programming Password ............................................... 11-c-14
7.00 Changing DISA User Code.. .................................................................. 11-C-16
8.00 Changing Walking COS Password ........................................................ 11-C-18
..
11-1
A. Introduction
There are two programming types using PITS The following are the conditions required to
(Proprietary In?egrated Telephone System): execute PITS system programming:
1. PITS system programming 1) The extension must be assigned to “Yes” in

2. PITS station programming “System-Class of Service”, Maintenance
Capability.
PITS system programming is performed in PITS Refer to Section 9-D-4.01 “Class of Service
system programming mode. (Described in this (l/2)” for information on system
section) programming.
PITS station programming is performed in PITS 4 It is recommended to use PITS telephones

station programming mode. (Described in Section provided with the display, which are:
‘2)
KX-T7030, KX-T7130, KX-T123235, KX-
T123230D, KX-T123230, KX-T61630, and
PITS system programming is used to program the
KX-T30830.
following system data:
3) The system is on-line communication mode.

1) Setting Date and Time
2) Storing Speed Dialing-System
Changing Extension Number 4) Password for PITS system programming is
3) required to enter into PITS system
4) Changing Extension Name
programming mode. The password is
5) Changing PITS System Program Mode
assigned in “System-Operation”, PITS
Entry Password
Programming Password. (Refer to Section
6) Changing DISA User Code
9-D-l .03 “Operation (3/3).“) If Tenant
7) Changing Walking COS Password
Service is employed, the password for
Tenant 2 is assigned in “System-Tenant”,
PITS Programming.Password (Tenant 2).
5) It is impossible to enter into’PlTS system

programming mode if the system has
already been accessed by other System
Administration Devices, such as VT220,
compatibles, Attendant Console, Dumb
terminal, or if an extension in the same
tenant is in PITS system programming.
6) To enter into PITS programming mode, the

telephone set must be on-hook. If it is off-
hook or in the state of speaker phone
activated, programming mode is not
established even if the MEMORY switch is
set to the “PROGRAM” side.
11 -A-l
B. Function of PITS Buttons
in PITS Programming
In PITS system and PITS station programming
modes, the functions of the fixed feature buttons
on a PITS are changed as illustrated below:
- For users with PITS type 30 (KX-T30830,

KX- T61630, KX-T123230D, KX-T123230,
KX-T123235);
PAUSE button , CLEAR button

Programmable Feature
+ button
+ button
Overlay sheet *
\
Directory Number (DN)

buttons
c For the convenience of PITS system/station

programming, function names for programming are
printed on the overlay sheet. This sheet is
provided for PITS telephones equipped with the
display.
11-B-l
l For users with PITS Model. KX-l7030.
SECRET
+,-
I)
CLEAR
Overlay sheet PAUSE

STORE/AUTO
SELECT
PREV- - NEXT
I I
FLASH I LEND
l For users with PITS Model. KX-T7130.
Ir , I
:.?
f
Overlay sheet
11 -B-2
C. Operation
Introduction
P:o&ures for setting PITS system programming
mow and performing PITS system programming
are cescribed in tables and operation charts.
The tables show the procedures in the following

form.
1) Describes actual operation.

2) Shows the result from the operation.
3) Comment or note on the operation.
Operation charts are attached to the tables to

help you to understand the flow.
The procedures for setting PITS system program-

ming mode are explained first in “Setting PITS
System Programming Mode.”
The procedures for PITS system programming

are explained in each programming item.
Note: The procedures in this section are

described from the viewpoint of type 30
PITS telephone users. If KX-l7030 or
KX-T7130 is used in PITS system
programming mode, press the STORE
button instead of MEMORY button.
11 -C-l
1.00 Entering PITS System Programming Mode
Procedures for seting PITS system programming mode :
Operation Result Comment/Note
1. Set the MEMORY switch at l The message below appears l This display is called “Initial
the rear of PITS to “PRO- on the display: display for PITS station
GRAM.” programming mode.”
1 PITS-PGM No? + 1 . If the programming data of your
PITS is already accessed by
l The MEMORY button another system administration
indicator lights in red. device, the following message
appears on the display.
Already Accessed
2. Dial U* #.” (program number l The PITS programming pass-

word entry screen appears on
the display:
ENTER PASSWORD ]
l The MEMORY button

indicator light goes out.
3. Dial the PITS Programming l The message below appears l This display is called “Initial
Password: four digits. on the display: display for PITS system pro-
gramming mode.”
1 SYS-PGM No? I l The password characters are
not displayed when they are
l The MEMORY button entered for security reason.
indicator lights in red. . Entry of an incorrect password
causes an alarm tone.
l If the following message
-- s:--- -+. appears, the system is already I.
accessed by another admini-
. .. stration device:
Already Accessed
When nothing is entered within one minute after “Initial

display for PITS system programming mode” is dis-
played, “Initial display for PITS station programming
mode” is displayed again.
You can return to the operation mode whenever you

slide the MEMORY switch to SET.
11 -c-2
Operation chart for setting PITS system programming mode
May 18 12:OO AM
Present time is displayed.
I( Slide the MEMORY switch to PROGRAM

to enter PITS station programming mode.
1
PITS-PGM No? * 1
Initial display for PITS station programming
Dial r3c #“to set PlTS system

programming mode.
v
ENTER PASSWORD I
The PITS programming password entry
screen appears on the display.
Dial the four digit password.”
SYS-PGM No? *
Initial display-for PITS system
[ prwramminq mode
I
ri%~~pr~g~rn~u%t~~ 1
1-: .
1 perform PITS system
Note:
To finish PITS system programming mode and return to PITS
station programming mode, press the END button while ‘Initial
a Operation
display for PlTS system programming mode” is displayed.
In PITS system programming mode, you can return to ‘Initial I Result
display for PITS system programming mode” (status 1) by pressing
the END button.
11 -c-3
2.00 Setting Date and Time
Used to change date and time.
1. Set PITS system program- - The message below appears l Refer to Section 11 -C-l .OO
ming mode. on the display: “Entering PITS System Prograrr
ming Mode.”
SYS-PGM No? -+
l The MEMORY button indicator

lights in red.
2. Dial ‘0 0.” (program number) l The current date and time ap-
ml mi <Ex;i;
l Displayed details and conditions
for entry are as follows:
>a.m./p.m.: 0:a.m. l:p.m.

> Minute : 00 to 59
) Hour : 01 to12
) Day of the week :
0: SUN. 1: MON.
2: TUE. 3: WED.
4: THU. 5: FRI.
6: SAT.
) Day : 01 to 31.
) Month : 01 to 12
) Year : 00 to 99
light goes out.
3. Enter the current date and l Dialed digits appear in dialed l if you want to clear a wrong
time. order. -i entry%press the END button and
enter the data again from step
<Example>
2.
When you set 9:00 a.m., July 6,
Friday, 1990: l Setting is completed when all
the above items from “Year” to
90 07 06 5 I “a.m./ p.m.” are entered.
\1
90 07 06 5 9: 00 0
4. Press the MEMORY l The MEMORY button indicator l An incomplete entry returns
button to store the entry. ’ lights in red. alarm tone, and the MEMORY
AUTO
l Confirmation tone sounds. button indicator does not light.
In
clMEMORY
11 -c-4
Operation chart for setting date and time
(I’)
PlTS.sy#em ,programming
mode ‘::.<;:,...f..::
<Status 1>
SYS-PGM No? 4
Initial display for PITS system programming
mode
W
The current date and time appears on
the display.
The MEMORY button indicator light goes
out.
l Dial the date and time.

l To clear a wrong entry, press the END
button, then dial “0 0” and enter again.
W
Dialed number appears on the display.
Confirmation tone sounds.

The MEMORY button indicator lights in
red.
L
a Operation
Note:
0 Result
In PITS system programming mode, you can return to
“Initial display for PITS system programming mode”
(Status 1) by pressing the END button.
11 -c-5
3.00 Storing Speed Dialing-System
This is used to store telephone numbers for For further information about Speed Dialing
speed dialing which all the extension users in the feature, refer to Section 4-C-4.02 “Speed Dialing-
system can use to call outside parties. Up to 200 System.”
speed dialing codes can be stored.
1. Set PITS system program- * The message below appears l Refer to Section 11 -C-l .OO
ming mode. on the display: ‘Entering PITS System
Programming Mode.”
SYS-PGM No? +

lights in red.
2. Dial “01.” (program number) l Speed dialing code entry

screen appears on the display:
pqpq Speed No? +

light goes out.
3. Dial the appropriate speed l Current entry for the selected l If the NEXT button is pressed,
dialing code: three digits code appears on the display: the number for the speed
(001 to 200). dialing code ‘001” appears.
<Example>
q
19.3 l After the current entry is
450
755 100: 01,9555-1212 displayed, pressing the PREV
Y button displays the number of
100: Speed dialing code the previous speed dialing
01 : Toll restriction level code.
9 : Feature number for l When Tenant Service is
selecting the CO line employed,, you can store the
555-1212 : Telephone number speed dialing codes of your
.; .-* tenant.
l If nothing is stored: l When more than 10 digit-s are
stored, it can be confirmed by
100: Not Stored scrolling the display with the
I
*or ) button.
123
4. Dial the toll restriction level:
two digits (00 to 16).
l Dialed digits appear on the
display: l After dialed number is
q <Example> displayed, ” , ” appears

454
7L)o automatically.
* 100: 16,
Continued
11 -C-6
Continued
5. Dial the feature number for 9 Dialed number appears on the . The feature numbers for select-
selecting a CO line and, if display: ing a CO line are:
necessary, trunk group ‘AFWLocal CO Line Access”
<Example>
specifying number (1 to 8). “Trunk Group 01-08 Access”
100: 1’6, 9 “Trunk Group 09-l 6 Access”
(23
499 “Trunk Group 17-24 Access”
7e*
*
L!!Rl
6. Dial the telephone number. l Dialed number appears on the l Up to 32 digits consisting of the
display: feature number and telephone
125
490 number can be stored.
<Example>
729
* . You can enter : 0 to 9, *, #,
100: 16, 9 5551212 Pause, Flash, - (hyphen),
r!!8l
SECRET button. _J
l If you want to clear a wrong
entry, press the CLEAR button
and dial again.
7. Press the MEMORY button l The MEMORY button indicator

to store the entry. lights in red.
l ConfirmatiW tone sounds.
In
YYDAY
rl
11 -c-7
Operation chart for storing speed dialing
PITS system programming.

mode I ;;
<Status 1>
SYS-PGM.No? +
Initial display for PITS system
. wogramminn mode
<Status 2> v
Speed No. ? + I
out.
the speed dialing code.

l Press the NEXT button to designate the
speed dialing code “001 .”
l After dialing 001 or pressing the NEXT
button, press the PREV button to
designate the speed dialing code ‘200.”
w -4 l Current number appears on the display. 1
on level (00 to 16).

(2) the feature number for selecting a CO
(3) the telephone number.

l To clear a wrong entry, press the CLEAR
button and dial again.
.
I L
l Dialed number appears on the display.
.y.- I>_
I
W
(>I l Press the MEMORY button to store the
l Confirmation tone sounds. c

l The MEMORY button indicator lights in
next speed dialing

I / code, press the NEXT button. . .
Note: l To return to the previous speed dlallng
Pressing the END button in any status after <Status l> \ w;, press the PREVFuyon. .
restores <Status I>. l The MEMORY button Indicator light goes
\ Pressing the SELECT button in any status atter <Status 2>
restores <Status 2~.
* You can also advance to the next speed dialing code \‘1 Operation
by pressing the NEXT button and return to the 0 Result
previous code by pressing the PREV button.
11 X-8
4.00 Changing Extension Number
This is used to change extension directory the following sub-sections.
numbers. Section 3-B-l .OO“Flexible Numbering”
Before changing Extension Number, please read Section 3-B-2.00 “Directory Number (DN)”

1. Set PITS system program- * The message below appears l Refer to Section I 1-C-l .OO
ming mode. on the display: “Enterfng PITS System
SYS-PGM No? +
lights in red.
2. Dial “0 2.” (program number) l A message appears on the

display, to require you to enter
the directory number of the ex-
that you want to
CHG DN? + DN
light goes out.
3. Dial the directory number of l The following message

the extension that you want appears on the display and
to change : three or four requires you to enter the new
digits. directory number.
<Example>
DN 100 => DN I
4. Dial the directory number l Newly entered number appears l If you want to correct a wrong
that you want to set : three or OF the display as follows: d entry, press the CLEAR button
four digits. and dLal again.
DN 100 =>DN 2000
5. Press the MEMORY button to l The MEMORY button indicator l If the directory number you are
store the entry. lights in red. trying to assign is already
l Confirmation tone sounds. assigned, you hear alarm tone.
11 -c-9
Operation chart for changing extension number
c zyyn programming)
<Status 1>
11linitial display for PITS system
programming mode
I
w
<Status 2>
CHG DN? + DN
out.
To designate the extension that you want

to change, dial the directory number of ths
extension : three or four digits.
l To designate the extension which has the
lowest directory number, press the NEXT
button.
l To designate the extension which has the
highest directory number, press the NEXT
button and then the PREV button.
W
The message appears on the display to
require you to enter the new directory
number.
I Dialed number appears on the display. 1
l Press the MEMORY button to store the
w
1 red. .
I
Note:
I
l To return to the previous directory number
Pressing the END button in any status after <Status l>
restores <Status l>. l The MEMORY button indicator light goes
Pressing the SELECT button in any status after <Status 2>
restores <Status 2>.
* You can also advance to the next directory number by a Operation
pressing the NEXT button and return to the previous 0 Result
directory number by pressing the PREV butron.
11-c-10
5.00 Changing Extension Name
This is used to change extension names.
1. Set PITS system program- * The following message ag + Refer to Section 1 l-C-1 .OO
ming mode. pears on the display: “Entering PITS System
SYS-PGM No? +

lights in red.
2. Dial “03.” (program number) l A message appears on the

display and requires you to
qq enter the directory number of

the extensron whose name
youwanttbchange.
CHG Name? -+ DN

-light goes out.
3. Dial the directory number of Current entry appears:

l
the extension whose name <Example>

you want to change: three or
four digits. # 100: Smith I
4. Dial new name of the exten- l Dialed name appears on the l To enter the name, use 0
sion. display: through 9, *, #, and SELECT
SELECT button winks one by one on the display.

l Confirmation tone sounds.
11-c-11
Registration of extension name <Example>
Here is an example of changing a name to “Jack”
To enter extension nar;es, LS& the buttons from at step 4 on the previous page.
“0” to ug,” 4.X” and ‘#r- and the SELECT button. Refer to Combination Table at left.
Multiple pressing of the SELECT bu;ton select a Display Resulted
Operation
different column of letters. numbers or special
characters.
1. Dial “5.”
For instance, dialing ‘1” and pressing the
SELECT button once give the letter ‘Q.” Dialing
“1” and pressing the SELECT button twice give
the letter “q,” and so on.
2. PrezLECT Gives the letter “J.”
Combination Table (AUTO ANSVMUTE)
button once. # 100: J 1
1Pressing‘SELECT 1 I I I I 1 I
.:. I\ (Times) I.l,l,I
I 2 Y 4
.I-l-1
5 b
AUTO
ANa
1 Di?
-4 0
‘InHun
LDial- 1-- 1 Qqz z ! ? LJ
--.----.-__ -em---
3. Dial ‘2.” # 100: J2 1
Dial 2 2 AaB b C c
- - a- --.----.___ ------
Dial 3 3 DdE e F f
--.- --.----.--_ ------
Dial 4 4 GgH h I i 4. Press the SELECT Gives the letter “a.”
--_- --.-e--.-m_ ---- --
(AUTO ANS/MUTE)
Dial 5 5 J j K k L I button twice. # 100: Ja 1
--.----.--_ -mm- --
Ll
AUTOANB
Dials 6 MmN n 0 0
--.- --.----.--- -mm- -- II
Dial 7 7 p p R r S s YlJlE .
- - -- --.----.--- ---- -- 5. dial ‘2.” # 100: Ja2
Dial 8 8 T t u u v v -’
ICI
- - .- m-.-e--.--- -mm--- ABC
Dial 9 9 wwx X y Y 2
.------
:.) Dial 1 .. .5
6. PresGLECT Gives the letter “c.”
(AUTO ANS/MUTE) # 100: Jac 1
button six times.
LJ
AUTOM
IIJ
7. Dial “5.” # 100: Jac5 1
8. Press the SELECT Gives the letter “k.”

(AUTO ANSYMUTE)
button four times. # 100: Jack 1
I 1
MOANS
aJ
I I
ow “Jack” is entered.
11-c-12
Operation chart for changing extension name
(z.7y-T)
pKJ!i system programming.
I
<Status l>
SYS-PGM No? +
I proqamming mode
I
out.
<Status 2> v
CHG Name No? + DN
> Current contents appear on the display.
l To correct an error entry, press the CLEAR
Dialed name appears on the display.

I
+-JyF--
Confirmation tone souds.
l Press the MEMORY button to store the

red.
l To return to the previous extension
l The ME’MORY button indicator light goes

L
Note:
Pressing the END button in any status after <Status l>
restores <Status lx a Operation
Pressing the SELECT button in any status after I Result
cStatus 2> restores <Status 2~
* You can also advance to the next extension
number by pressing the NEXT button and return
to the previous extension number by pressing the
PREV button.
11-c-13
6.00 Changing PITS
Programming Password
The following operation is used to change the PITS

programming password which is required to enter
into PITS system programming mode.
1. Set PITS system program- * The message appears on the . Refer to Section 11 -C-l .OO
ming mode. display: Setting PITS System
SYS-PGM No? +

lights in red.
2. Dial “0 4.” (program number) l Current password appears on

light goes out.
3. Dial new password: four l Dialed password appears on l Values from 0 to 9, *, # can be
digits. the display. entered. ..
<Example>
System PW: 5555 I
4. Press the MEMORY button : .lIe MEMORY button indicator

11-c-14
Operation chart for changing PITS programming password
SYS PGM No? +

oroaramminn mndn ’ 1
Current password appears on the display.
l Dial four digit password.

l To correct an error entrv, press the CLEAR
I button and dial again. - I
Dialed password appears on the display.
Press the MEMORY button to

.. store the
v
red.
( Operation
0 Result
Note:
Pressing the END button in PITS system programming mode
restores the Initial display for PITS system programming mode.
11-c-15
7.00 Changing DISA User Code
This is used to change the DISA user code. to Section 3-D-2.02 “Direct Inward System
For further information about DISA feature, refer Access (DISA).”
1.’ Set PITS system program- . The following message appears l Refer to Section 1 l-C-1 .OO
ming mode. on the display: “Entering PITS System
SYS-PGM No? +

lights in red.
2. Dial “0 5.” (program number) l A messageappearson the

display and requires you to enter
the DISA code number:
pq-pq
DISA CD No? -+

light goes out.
to 8).
125
3. Dial DISA code number (1 l Current user code of the selected
DISA code number appears on
the display:
q 45*
,a*
* <Example>
8
USR.CD 8 : 1234 1
: DISA code number
1234 : DISA user code
l If nothing is stored:
USR. CD 8 : ‘m
4. Dial DISA user code: four l Dialed digits appear on the l Digits 0 through 9 can be
digits. display: entered as the DISA user code.
,*3
4se [ USR CD 8 : 5555
*780 I
EEI

to store the code. lights in red.
11-C-16
Operation chart for changing DISA user code
I
<Status l>
SYS-PGM No? + I
I proaramminn mode
v
<Status 2~
DISA CD No? +
The MEMORY button indicator light
goes out.
l To designate the DISA code number, dial
l To desigkrate the DISA code number 1,

,-‘:.I--
l To designate the DISA code number 8,
press the NEXT button and then the PREV
v
> Current user code appears on the

display.
l To enter or change the DISA user code,

dial the new DISA user code: four digits.
Dialed code appears on the display.

red.
next DISA code number.

l Press the PREV button to return to the
previous DISA code number.
Note: \ l The MEMORY button indicator light goes
Pressing the END button in any status after <Status l> out.
restores <Status I>.
a Operation
Pressing the SELECT button in any status after <Status 2>
restores <Status 2>. 0 Result
* You can also advance to the next DISA code number
by pressing the NEXT button and return to the previous
DISA code number by pressing the PREV button.
11-c-17
8.00 Changing Walking COS
Password
This is used to change the walking COS password Section 4-C-9.00 “Walking COS (Class of
for performing Walking COS. Service).”
For further information about Walking COS, refer to
1. Set PITS system program- * The message appears on the l Refer to Section 11 -C-l .OO
ming mode. display: “Entering PITS System
SYS-PGM No ? 4

lights in red.
2. Dial “0 6.” (program number) l Current password appears on
WafkPW: 1111
l The MEMORY button

..
3. Dial new password: four l Dialed password appears on l Values from 0 to 9, * , # can be
digits. the display: entered for the password.
<Example>
Walk PW: 5555 I
4. Press the MEMORY button. l The MEMORY button A

to store the newly dialed- indicator lights in red.
password.
11-C-18
Operation chart for changing Walking COS password
SYS-PGM No? 4 I
programming mode
Current password appears on the display.

out.
l To clear an error entry, bress the CLEAR
l To remove the password for Walking COS,
Dialed password appears on the display.
Press the MEMORY button to store the
v
red.
<I‘Operation
I Result
Note:
Pressing the END button in PITS system programming mode restores
the Initial display for PITS system programming mode.
11-c-19
Section 12
._.-.
-1
Station Programming

(Section 12)
Station Programming
Contents
Page
A Introduction .. . . .. . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. .. . . .. . .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. .. 12-A-l
B Function of PITS Buttons in PITS Programming . . . .. . .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . .. .. . 12-B-l
C Operation .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. . .. .. . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. .. .. . . . .. .. . . . .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. .. . .. . 12-C-l
1 .OO DN (Directory Number) Button Assignment ........................................... 12-c-2

2.00 PF (Programmable Feature) Button Assignment ................................... 12-C-7
3.00 DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button Assignment ............................... 12-c-1 1
4.00 Automatic tine Hunting (Calling) Selection ........................................... 12-c-15
5.00 Automatic Answering Selection ............................................................. 12-C-l 8
6.00 Call Waiting Tone Selection ................................................................... 12-c-21
7.00 Confirmation of Directory Number/Port Number .................................... 12-C-24
8.00 PITS Automatic Test .............................................................................. 12-C-26
12-l
A. Introduction
This section provides information for the If the programming data of your PITS is already
programming of various features unique to each accessed by another administration device, the
PITS telephone and DSS console in PITS station following message appears on the display:
programming mode. ) Already Accessed
The assignable features are:
PITS station programming can be done at any
extension simultaneously.
1) Assigning DN (Directory Number) Buttons
2) Assigning PF (Programmable Feature)
Be sure the handset is on the cradle and the SP-
Buttons on PITS and DSS console
PHONE button is off. If it is off-hook or the
3) Assigning DSS (Direct Station Selection)
speaker-phone is on, PITS programming mode is
Buttons on PITS and DSS console not established even if the MEMORY switch is
4) Automatic Line Hunting (Calling) Selection
set to the “PROGRAM” side.
5) Automatic Answering Selection
6) Call Waiting Tone Selection
7) Confirmation of Directory Number/Port
Number
8) PITS Automatic Test
Note:
The assignment of PF and DSS buttons on the
DSS console can be done using the
associated PITS telephone.
In the programming procedures described in
Section 12-C-2.00 “PF Button Assignmenr
and 12-C-3.00 “DSS Button Assignment,”
press a PF or DSS button on the DSS console
instead of pressing a PF or DSS button on the
PITS telephone.
Refer to Section 4-B-2.00 “Assignable Feature
Buttons” for further information about features
assignable to DN buttons, PF buttons and
DSS buttons.
12-A-1
B. Function of PITS Buttons
in PITS Programming
In PITS system and PITS station programming
modes, the functions of the buttons are
changed as illustrated below:
l For users with PITS type 30 (KX-T30830,

KX-T61630, KX-T123230D, KX-T123230,
KX-T123235);
PAUSE button -, I, CLEAR button

+ button - FVoarammable Feature
(PFjbuttons
* button
- Liquid Crystal
Diiay (LCD)
Overlay sheet *
:.. FLASH button ,

END button NEXT button
c For the convenience of PITS system/station

programming, function names for programming are
printed on the overlay sheet. This sheet is
provided for PITS telephone equipped with display.
12-B-l
l For users with PITS Model. KX -T 7030.
Overlay sheet
STORUAUTO-
l For users with PITS Model. KX-17130.
Overlay sheet
CLEAR
PAUSE
STORE/AUTO
PREV
FLASH
12-B-2
C. Operation
Introduction
Procedures for performing PITS station
programming are described in tables and
operation charts.
The tables show the procedures in the following

form:
1 Operation 1
I
Result lComment/Not~
I
I I
1) Describes actual operation.

2) Shows the result from the operation.
3) Comment or note on the operation.
Operation chartsare attached to the tables to help

you to understand the flow.
Note:
The procedures in this section are described
from the viewpoint of type 30 PITS
telephone users. If KX-l7030 or KX-vj 30
is used in PITS station programming mode,
press the STORE button instead of
MEMORY button. ..
12-C-l
1.00 DN (Directory Number)
Button Assignment
Assigning various fearures to me DN buttons of The explanation of the message display applies
individual PITS telep?one is explained here. only to a PITS with the display.
Operation Resu H Comment/Note

I. Set the MEMORY switch at l The following message l This status is called “initial
the rear of PITS to appears on the display: display for PITS station
“PROGRAM.” programming mode.”
PITS-PGM No.?+ l If the programming data of your
PITS has already been
SET. - PFtoGRAu
Lz!!l MEMORY l The MEMORY button indicator accessed by another
lights in red. administration device, the
following message appears on
the display.
Already Accessed
l From now on in any status,

pressing the END button
restores this status.
!. Press the appropriate DN l Previously stored data appears l When the following messages
button. on the display: appears on the display,
changing the assigned feature
is impossible in this mode, and
cExamMl can be changed only by the
‘/I/ system programming.
light goes out and the
associated DN button indicator ““am&,
lights in red. (Primary Directory Number)
l If nothing is entered within one
minute after pressing the DN
button, “Initial display for
-PtB station programming Irm$ber)
mode” is displayed again.
cExam*]
(Private CO)
cExamf*i
(UCD Log in)
‘Exam~~
Continued
12-c-2
Continued
Operation I Result Comment/Note
<Exam*1 (Single CO)
<Example>
1 Trunk Group:1 1 I
Grow CO)
If no feature is assigned to the

DN button, the following
message appears on the
display :
1 Not Stored
3. To change the preset
feature, dial the program
number corresponding to the
desired feature.
l To assign DSS (DN) feature.
1) Dial ‘1.” The following message

•l 1
2) Dial a directory number
(three or four digits).
DSS(DN):
2) The dialed number appears

on the display.
I
l If the dialed number does not
exist as a directory number,
alarm tone sounds.
l If you want to dear a wrong
and dial the correct number.
l To assign DSS (ICM)
feature, I
1) Dial ‘2.” 1) The following message
Ia
I
ABC
2
1
2) Dial an ICM number (one

DSS(ICM):
2) The dialed number appears

I
l If the dialed number does not
or two digit(s)). on the display. exist as an ICM number, alarm
tone sounds.
If you want to clear a wrong
cExam*l l

12-C-3
Continued
To assign One Touch Dialing l Refer to Section 4-C-4.01

feature, “One Touch Dialing” for further
1) Dial “3,” 1) No message appears on the information .
display:
DEF
3
•l
2) Dial a telephone number 2) The following message l Up to 16 digits can be entered
or a feature number. appears on the display:
<Example l> when dialing a l If you want to clear a wrong
123 , , 2 te;;ho3q”s”,“p”: entry, press the CLEAR button
416
*789 and dial the correct number.
m <Exampe Z=w en tarng a
feature number:
I 01 1
...
l To assign Privacy Change The following message appears l Privacy Change feature is
feature, dial “4.” on the display: assignable to only one button
among DN buttons and DSS
GHI Privacy Change buttons.
i
4 l Refer to Section 4-G-2.00
El “Privacy Release” and Section
4-G-3.00 “Privacy Attach” for
further information about
Priacy Change feature.
l To assign External Feature The following message appears l Refer to Section 4-G-9.00 _
Access feature, dial “5.” on the display: “External Feature Access” for
further information .
JKL External Feature ..
I
5
•l
l To assign Call Park-System The following message appears l Refer to Section 4-E-5.01
feature, dial “6.” on the display: “Call Park-System” for further
information .
MN0 Park System
6 ‘- .\;
lol
l To assign Call Park-Station The following message appears l Refer to Section 4-E-5.02
feature, dial 7.” on the display: “Call Park-Station ” for further
information .
PRS Park Station I
7
El
l To assign Ringing Transfer The following message appears l Refer to Section 4-F-i .04
feature, dial “8.” on the display: “Ringing TransfeT for further
information.
TUV Ringing Transfer 1
8
•l
Continued
12-C-4
Continued
I
To assign Call Splitting The following message appears l Refer to Section 4-E-6.00
feature, dial ‘9.” on the display: “Call Splitting” for further
information.
IaWXY
9
To assign Tone Through
Split
The following message appears l Refer to Section 4-G-l 2.00

Break feature, dial “xc.” on the display: “Tone Through (End to End
*
DTMF Signaling)” for further
lcll Tone Break I information.
Press the MEMORY button l The MEMORYbutton indicator

to store the assignment. lights in red.
l The associated DN button
ll indicator light goes out.

m
MEMORY l
l
“Initial display for PITS station
programming mode” is
displayed again.
To conclude the “PITS l PITS station programming

station programming mode,” mode is concluded and
slide the MEMORY switch to returns to the operation mode.
“SET.”
12-c-5
--Operation Chart--
To assign DSS(DN) feature:

-II
Dial “1”
I
PITS PGM No.? +
<Operation 1, DSS (DN) : 1101

{FJ
l Displays current data on the 1

display.
l The MEMORY button
indicator lights in red.
I
1 \
4 To assign One Touch Dialing:
To assign Privacy Change feature:
4 Dial “4” ) 1 Privacy Change ”
l Registration (Storage) is
To assign Call Park-System feature:
executed.
2:
lights in red.
indicator light goes out. To assign Call Park-Station feature:
To assign Ringing Transfer feature:

11 PITS PGM No? _j 11
I 1 II -+E-)-Ringing-
Note : In any status, pressing the END key restores <STATUS 1~

12-C-6
2.00 PF (Programmable Feature)
Button Assignment
Assigning various functions to the PF buttons of The explanation of the message display applies
the individual PITS telephone and DSS Console only to a PITS provided with the display.
is explained here.
. Set the MEMORY switch at l The following message l This display is called “Initial
PITS-PGM No.?+ l From now on in any status,
SET-. PRcGRAu
MEMORY l The MEMORY button indicator restores this status.
Pfrl . If the programming data of your
lights in red.
accessed by another
administration device, the
the display.
Already Accessed
!. Press a PF button. l Previously stored data appears
q
on the display.
NQ <Example>
I If preset to one touch dialing ..
button
+ l Stored data as one touch
MOl/P: 9-l-201 -12 dialing.
L l If nothing is stored, “Not

Stored” appears.
, _
To scroll, “-
l I
use the + or ----, button.
(Note)
> ,P” means PF button of the
l
PITS. If PF button on DSS

console associated with PITS
is pressed, “c” appears
instead of “P.”
> l PF button number.
l The MEMORY button indicator l If nothing is entered within one

light goes out. minute after pressing a PF
button, “Initial display for PITS
station programming mode” is
displayed again.
Continued
12-C-7
Continued
c3. To change the previously

stored data, dial the program
number corresponding to the
desired feature.
l To assign DSS(ICM) feature,
1) Dial “2.” 1) The following message

appears on the diaplay:
ABC
2 MOl/P : DSS(ICM)
•l
2) Dial ICM number (one or 2) The following message l If the dialed number does not
two digit(s)). appears on the display: exist as an ICM number, alarm
tone sounds.
l If you want to clear a wrong
l To assign One Touch Dialing
feature,
1) Dial “3.” 1) The foltowing message

appears on the display:
MOl/P : I
2) Dial a telephone number 2) The following message l Up to 16 digits can be stored.
or a feature number. appears on the display:
<Example> when entering a l You can enter: 0 to 9, * , #,
, MO,,P ;le;trg;qmber: ;E;ey.ash, - (hyphen),
&xample> when entering a

feature number: l If you want to clear a wrong
1 MOl/P : 01 1 entry, press the CLEAR button
‘0 To assign External Feature l The following message
-‘I(Access, dial “5.” - appears on the display: i
JKL MOl/P : EXT FEAT

5
•l
l To assign Call Park-System l The following message
feature, dial “6.” appears on the display:
MN0 MOl/P : PARK SYS

6
•l
l To assign Call Park-Station l The following message
MOl/P : PARK ST
Continued
12-C-8
Continued
l To assign Ringing Transfer l The following message

MOl/P : RING TRNS
l To assign Call Splitting l The following message

MOl/P : Split
l To assign Call Forwarding /Do l This feature is assignable only

Not Disturb (FWD/DND) to the PF3 button of PITS type
feature, dial “0.” 50.
Refer to Section 4-k-2.01
“Location of Feature Buttons”
for further information.
l To assign Tone Through l The following message

Break feature, dial “* .” appears on the display:
MOl/P : Tone Break
l To assign Saved Number l The following .mes&age l This feature is assignable only
Redial (SNR) feature, dial “#.” appears on the display: to the PFl button of PITS type
50, KX-17020 and KX-l7030.
MOl/P : SNR J ..
I. Press the MEMORY button to l The MEMORY button indicator

store the assignment. lights in red.
l ‘Initial display fcrw:PITS;-

displayed again.
5. To conclude PITS station l PITS station programming

programming mode, slide the mode is concluded and returns
MEMORY switch on the PITS to operation mode.
to ‘SET.”
1-lImiF
SET* * PROGRAM
MEMORY
12-c-9
--Operation Chart--
To assign DSS(ICM) feature:
<?)
To assign Call Park-System feature:
-I -I’Dial “6” )I I MOl/P: PARK SYS II

PITS PGM No? +, To assign Call Park-Station feature:
I I
l The MEMORY button
wMO1/P:
i .- 4; Dial)IIMO1/P:
To assign Split feature:
To assign Call Forwarding/Do Not Disturb feature:

Assigning Call Forwardin Do Not
Disturb is limited to the P Pi S type
50 and KX-l7050 only.
To assign Saved Number Redial feature:
mm
Note : In any status, pressing the END key restores <STATUS l>.
12-C-l 0
3.00 DSS (Direct Station Selection)
Button Assignment
Assigning various functions to the DSS buttons The explanation of the message display applies only
on the KX-T30830 type PITS telephone and DSS to a PITS provided with the display.
console is explained here.

I. Set the MEMORY switch at l The following message l This status is called “initial
PITS-PGM No.?+ l If the programming data of your
SET.-PRoGRw
L?!!!l MEMORY l The MEMORY button indicator accessed by another
lights in red. administration device, the
the display.
Already Accessed

!. Press a DSS button. Previously stored data appears

l l If the following message
on the display. appears, Message Waiting
qifn
<Example> If DSS(DN) feature
is assigned:
DSS(DN):lOl 1 I
feature is already assigned
and changing the feature in this
mode is impossible.
Message Waiting
light goes out. l If nothing is entered within one
The associated DSS button minute after pressing a DSS
indicator lights. button, ‘Initial display for
..r+. qs- .4.* PITS station programming
1. To change the stored data, mode” is shown on the display
dial the program number again.
corresponding to the desired
feature.
l To assign DSS (DN) feature, 1) The following message
1) Dial “1.” appears on the display:
1 DSS(DN):
1 I
•l
2) Dial a directory number 2) The dialed directory number l If the dialed number does not
(three or four digits). appears on the display: exist as a directory number,
alarm tone sounds when
q
tas
4se <Example> MEMORY button is pressed.
7ll9
* [ DSS(DN):lOO l To clear an error entry, press
the CLEAR button and dial the
correct number.
Continued
12-C-l 1
Continued

l To assign DSS (KM)
feature,
1) Dial “2.” 1) The ‘o!!owing message
appexs on the display:
ABC
2 DSS(ICM):
•l
2) Dial ICM number (one or 2) The dialed ICM number l If the dialed number does not
two digit(s)). appears on the display: exist as an ICM number,
t23 alarm tone sounds when
499
789 DSS(ICM):ll MEMORY button is pressed.
* . If you want to clear a wrong
L!ll entry, press the CLEAR button
B To assign One Touch Dialing and dial the correct number.
feature,
1) Dial “3.” 1) No message appears on the
display:
DEF
3 I
•l
2) Dial a telephone number 2) The following message l Up to 16 digits can be stored.
or a feature number. appears on the display: l If you want to clear a wrong
(7.5, <Example l> when entering a entry, press the CLEAR button
499 telephone number: and dial the correct number.
7.9
* 123456 1
I
.m <Example 2~. when entenng a
feature number:
I 01 1
..
t To assign Privacy Change l The following message l Privacy Change feature is
feature, dial “4.” appears on the display: assignable to only one button
among DSS buttons and DN
GHI Privacy Change buttons.
I
4
•l
) To assign External Feature l The following message
.A-&ss, dial “5.” ;appears==n the display: w.
JKL External Feature

5
•l
p To assign Call Park-System l The following message
MN0 Park System

6
•l
Continued
12-C-l 2
Continued
l To assign Call Park-Station l The following message

feature. dial ‘7.’ appears on the display:
Park Station I
l To assign Ringtng Transfer l The following message

TUV Ringing Transfer

8
•l
l To assign Call Splitting l The following message
feature, dial 9.’ appears on the display:
WXY Split
9
•l
l To assign Tone Through l The following message
Break feature, dial ‘9c .” appears on the display:
Tone Break I
I. Press the MEMORY button to l The MEMORY button indicator

store the assignment. lights in red.
l The associated DSS button
l “Initial display for PITS station
programming mode” is shown
on the display.
5. To conclude PITS station l PITS station programming

44EMORY switch to ‘SET.” !-.40 theoperation mode.
sm.. PROGRAM
12-c-1 3
--Operation Chart--
To assgr, iJSSir?i> ‘eature:
To assign DSS (KM) feature:

l Current contents appear on
the display.
- The MEMORY button
- ihe associated DSS button
1 indicator iigh[ in red. 1 -
:: .‘)
To assign External Feature Access:
....:3 1 PITS PGM No? +

I
1
1
l The MEMORY button
l The DSS button indicator
light goes out.
To assign Call Splitting feature:
Dial “9”
Note : In any status, pressing END key restores <STATUS l>.
12-c-14
4.00 Automatic Line Hunting
(Calling) Selection
This feature automatically connects a PITS If “No Line Preference-Calling” is selected, no line is
telephone to a pre-assigned line when an connected to a PITS telephone by lifting the handset
extension user lifts the handset or press the SP- or pressing the SP-PHONE button.
PHONE to make calls. For further information about this feature, refer to
There are two options by which an extension user Section 4-C-l .OO ‘Line Selection-Calling.”
may select a desired line: The table shows the operation for each programming.
lPrime Line Preference-Calling (Default) (The explanation of the message display applies only
‘0 Idle Line Preference-Calling to a PITS provided with the display.)

1. Set the MEMORY switch at l The following message l This status is called ‘Initial
the rear of PITS to appears on the display: display for PITS-station
PITS-PGM No.?+ l If the following message
appears on the display, the
SET-.PROWWd programming data of your
lights in red. PITS has already been
accessed by another
administration device:
Already Accessed

..
2. Dial ‘00.” l Preset data appears on the l If nothing is entered within one
minute after dialing “00,”
“Initial display for PITS-
shown again on the display.
Pref. Out : No. I .+A+;.‘ - : b.

light goes out.
3. To change the preset l To change the assignment,

feature, dial the appropriate simply dial the appropriate
program number number again.
corresponding to the desired
feature.
l To set “No Line Preference,” l The following message

dial “1.” appears on the display:
Pref. Out : No. 1

1
•l
Continued
12-C-l 5
Continued
Operation Result Comment No:e
l To set “Idle Line Preference,” l The following message If “Idle tine Preference” is set,
dial “2.” appears on the display: the system selects an idle button
from the buttons assigned In
ABC Pref. Out : Idle “System Operation’, Idle tine
2 I
Preference:
•l DN (PDNSDN) bunons or CO
(Private CO, Single CO, Group
CO) buttons.
l To set “Prime Line <Example l> l Pressing a wrong button is

Preference,” press one of the When pressing one of the DN cleared by pressing a correct
following buttons: buttons, the DN number of the button.
pressed button appears on the l If an inaccessible button is
PDN display: pressed, alarm tone sounds.
SDN
Private CO Pref. Out : DN-xx
Single CO
Group CO <Example 2s
ICM When pressing the ICM button,
q
the following message appears
on the display:
Pref. Out : ICM I
F. Press the MEMORY button l The MEMORY button indicator

to store the assignment. lights in red. c..
m
rl
EMORY
l
l
‘Initial display for PITS

..

shown on the display.
i. To conclude PITS station l PITS station programming

programming mode, slide the mode is coneluded and returns 1. li-.
MEMORY switch to “SET.” to the operation mode.
12-C-l 6
--Operation Chart--
<STATUS 1s
l Current data appears on To set “No Line Preference”:

the display.
l The MEMORY button
To set “Idle Line Preference”:
To set ‘Prime Line Preference”:

<Example> Press the ICM
The assignment can be changed before pressing

..
the MEMORY button.
+I .
l The MEMORY button
Note : In any status, pressing the END key restores <STATUS 1s.
12-C-17
5.00 Automatic Answering
Selection
This feature automatically connects a PITS If “No tine Preference-Answering” is selected, no
telephone to a pre-assigned line when an line is connected to a PITS telephone by lifting the
extension user lifts the handset or press the SP- handset or pressing the SP-PHONE button.
PHONE to answer incoming calls. For further information about this feature, refer to
There are two options by which an extension user Section 4-D-l .OO “Line Selection-Answering.”
may select a desired line. The table shows the operation for each
Ringing Line Preference-Answering
l (Default) programming. (The explanation of the message
Prime Line Preference-Answering
l display applies only to a PITS provided with the
display.)

1. Set the MEMORY switch at l The following message l This display is called “Initial
the rear of PITS to appears on the display. display for PITS-station
PITS-PGM No.?+
SET- * PRoGRAM
l The MEMORY button indicator appears on the display, the
lights in red. programming data of your PITS
has already been accessed by
another administration device.
Already Accessed
l From now on, in any status,

..
2. Dial “01.” l Preset data appears on the . If nothing is entered within one
Pref. In ‘:No
. .’
3. To change the preset l To change the assignment,
feature, dial the program simply dial the appropriate
number corresponding to the number again.
desired feature.
l To set No Line Preference, l The following message
Pref. In : No.
l To set Ringing Line l The following message

Preference, dial “2.” appears on the display:
ABC Pref. In : Ring 1
2
•l
- . I
Continuea
Continued
l To set “Prime Line Preference,’ <Example I> l Pressing a wrong button is

press one of the following When you press a DN button, cleared by pressing a correct
buttons. the number of the pressed button.
button appears on the display: l If an inaccessible button is
PDN pressed, alarm tone sounds.
SDN Pref. In : DN-xx I
Private CO
Single CO <Example 2~
Group CO If you press the ICM button, the
ICM following message appears on
q
the display:
Pref. In : ICM I
-. Press the MEMORY button l The MEMORY button indicator

to store the programming. lights in red.
9 Confirmation tone sounds.
l “Initial display for PITS
CEJ station programming mode” is
rl displayed again on the display.
i. To conclude PITS station l PITS station programming

MEMORY switch to “SET.” to the operation mode.
sEr..PRoGRm
.
12-c-19
--Operation Chart--
<STATUS 1, I
To set “No tine Preference”:
-3 l The MEMORY button
To set ‘Rinaina Line Preference”:
- I Dial “2” ) II Pref. In : Ring Il-

I I II ’ I
To set “Prime Line Preference”:

<Example> Press the ICM
The assignment can be changed before pressing

..
the MEMORY button.
+j
l The MEMORY button
Note : In any status, pressing the END key restores <STATUS 1~.
12-c-20
6.00 Call Waiting Tone Selection
Used to choose desired call waiting tone type refer to Section 4-D-7.00 ‘Call Wahng.-
from Tone 1 and Tone 2. The explanation of the message display apokes
For further information about call waiting tone, only to a PITS provided with the display.

I. Set the MEMORY switch at l The following message l This display is called “Initial
PIT-PGM No.? + l If the following message
appears on the display, the
SET.. PlIcGRM4
programming data of your
L?!l ME&low l The MEMORY button indicator
lights in red. PITS has already been
accessed by another
administration device.
Already accessed

!. Dial “02.” l The preset tone type appears l If nothing is entered within one
on the display: minute after dialing “02,” “Initial
display for PITS station
p!jJq programming mode” is shown
‘y?%%Gay again on the display.
..
light goes out.
;. To change the preset tone l To change the assignment,

type, dial the number simply dial the appropriate
corresponding to the desired number again.
call waiting tone.
To set the call waiting tone 1,
l l The following message
C.W. Tone-l 1
1
•l l The following message
appears on the display:
l To set the call waiting tone 2,
dial “2.” C.W. Tone-2
ABC
2
•l
Continuec
12-c-21
Continued

I
4. Press the MEMORY button l The MEMORY button
to store the entry. indicator lights in red.
l The confirmation tone sounds.
0
AUTO l “initial display for PITS station
II
MEMORY on the display.
5. To conclude “PITS station l PITS station programming

programming mode,” slide mode is concluded and
the MEMORY switch to returns to the operation mode.
‘SET.”
12-c-22
--Operation Chart--
PITS station program-

ming mode
<STATUS l>
-[ml
l Current data appears on To assign Call Waiting Tone 1:
l The MEMORY button f

--
To assign Call Waiting Tone 2:
..
pGzkzq
l The MEMORY button
s ,
Note : In any status, pressing the END key restores <STATUS 1s.
12-C-23
7.00 Confirmation of Directory
Number/Port Number
Enables an extension of a PITS with display to (physical number) displayed on the display by the
confirm its own directory number and port number following operation:

1. Set the MEMORY switch at l The foliowing message l This display is called “Initial
PITS-PGM No.%
SET*. PROGPAM
l The MEMORY button indicator appears on the display, the
lights in red. programming data of your
accessed by another
Already Accessed

2. Dial “03.” l The physical number and the l If nothing is entered within one
directory number appear on minute after dialing “03,” ‘Initial
display for PITS station
again on the display.
PlOllW DNllll

light goes out.
l To conclude PITS station l PITS station program mode

programming mode, slide is concluded and returns to
the MEMORY switch to the operation mode.
“SET.”
12-C-24
--Operation Chart--
l Port number (physical

number) & DN appears on
the display.
l The MEMORY button
indicator liaht aoes out.
Note : In any status, pressing the END key restores cSTATUS 1s.
12-c-25
8.00 PITS Automatic Test
Provides automatic test for normal operation of Explanation of the message display applies only
LCD (Itquid crystal disalay), LED (light-emitting to a PITS with the display.
diode), and +ger tape on the PITS telephone.

1. Set the MEMORY switch at l The following message l This status is called “Initial
PITS-PGM No.?+
SET--amFw ! appears on the display, the
lights in red. programming data of your
accessed by another
Already Accessed
l Before starting the test, set the

RINGER switch on the right
side of the PITS to LOW or
HIGH.
2. Dial “90.” .-* Test sequence is as follows: l To stop the test, press the
END button, and then “Initial
1) LEDTest display for PITS station
again on the display.
12-C-26
Testing sequence after dialing “90” is given below by using an example of PITS model
KX-T123230.
In LED test, ” CIZII” means the light off, UII” means the light on, ” ze n
means flashing.
---
r ------------------ 1
I 1) Testing the DN button indicators and the ICM button
I
indicator for lighting in green. I
I I
%nasonlc i
r LED TEST I] I
I
I
I
I
- DN buttons I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
u I
I
I
1 2) Testing the DN button indicators and the ICM button I. I
indicator for flashing in green. I
I Panascnlc
I
I
I
i
I
I - DN buttons
I
I
cl0 I
I ocl
I on I
I I
ICI I
I
I - CM button I
I I
I
I
I
I
I
u I
I
I
I I
12-C-27
u
‘3) Testing the DN button indicators and the DSS button indicators
I
I for lighting in red.

I Panasomc i
I LED TEST I1 I
I I
r I
I
I I
I I
I I
- DN buttons
I I
I I
I
I I
I I
I I
I VVith the PITS model K the DSS I

button indicators also-lk ht in re I
-.. I
3 I
14) Testing the DN button indicators and the DSS button indicators I
i for flashing
I
I
I
I
I
I
I - DN buttons
I
I
I ~. I
I I
I I
I I
With the PITS model KX, , the indicators I
1 on the DSS buttons also flash in red.
I u
I 5) Testing the indicators of the Messa& Waiting, CONF,FWW I
1 DND, AUTO/MEMORY, AUTO ANS/MUTE, SP-PHONE I
1 buttons foi I
I I
I I
I Message Waiting I
button
I I
I
I
ICONF button -
I FWD/DND’--
I button AUTO/MEMORY button I
I AUTO ANS/MUTE button I
I SP-PHONE button I
I
I----- -------------m-P-- I
12-C-28
__------
r--- 1
L ----------- -I
r -----Mm---- 1
<<c<<<<<<<<<<<<<
I
I
I
a I
>s>>>>>>>>>>>>>>
I
I
u I
-#HH# I
I
0 I
I
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH I
I
u
I
fSSS+**SjF+ I
I
U
EEEEEEEEE2EEEEEE
I
I
I
U I
I
I
L ----------A -I
u.
Conclusion of the test
u
“Initial display for PITS station program mode” is
displayed again on the display.
12-c-29
Testing sequence after dialing “90” is given below by using an example of PITS model
KX-T7130.
In LED test, “ mV means the light off, y II” means the light on, “te ”
means flashing.
-----__---__---------
I- 1
I 1) Testing the DN button indicators and the INTERCOM I
I button indicator for lighting in green.
I
I
I
I
I 000000
I 000000
I
I
I, CClOClOol - DN buttons 1
I INTERCOM I
I button I
I
I
I
I
I
I
a I
I
I -w.
I 2) Testing the DN button indicators and the ICM button I ..
I indicator for flashing in green.
I
I 1 I
I
I
I
I : ‘_ I
I m} - DN buttons
I
I I
1 INTERCOM --I ,3l3lnma ua
button
I I
I I
I I
I
I
I J000 = I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
u I
I
I
I I
12-C-30
I u
1 3) Testing the DN button indicators for lighting in red.
I
I
I
I
I --
uuuuuu
-_- -
I uuuuuc
L-- ...--.
CN buttOns
I mmmo m t
I
I
I
I
I c JOIIO~
n
1 4) Testing the DN button indicators for flashinn in red.
II LED TEST
I
cl ’ I
000000
I oomooo
I :u:u~t=l.u:c:c I
- DN buttons
I bb:m:mb:U I
I mmmo m I
I
I I
I I
I .I I
I
I .. d IO0 II
/ I
I
I u
15) Testing the indicators of the MESSAGE, CONF, FWD/DND,
/
I AUTO DIAUSTORE, AUTO ANSWEWMUTE, SP-PHONE
buttons for linhtins in red. --.
/
I
I
I
I
I CONF button
MESSAGE button
I FWD/DND
button
I AUTO DIAL/
I STORE button
I AUTO ANSWER/
I MUTE button
I 000 SP-PHONE button
12-C-31
The following message appears
I I
1 I
1 RING TEST 1
I I
L ----------- J
r --------se-
a 1
<c<cc<cc<<<c<<<< I
I
ll I
u I
>>>>>>>>>>>>>>>> I
u I
I
I
################ I
r-l
u 1
I
HHHHHHHHHHHHHHHH I
I
u
l-l
I
I
I
I
I
I
IXEEEEEEEEEEEEEEE
I
1
I
I
u I-
I
I
I
L -----B----B J
0
Conclusion of the test
0
“Initial display for PITS station programming mode”
is shown again on the display.
12-C-32
Section 13
Station Programming
Attendant Console
(Section 13)
Station Programming
Attendant Console (ATT)
Contents
Page
A Preparation . . .. . . . .. . . .. .. .. . .. . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . .. .. .. . . . .. . . ..-... . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . 13-A-l
1 .oo Outline of Local Mode ............................................................................ 13-A-l

2.00 Command System ................................................................................. 13-A-2
3.00 Basic Operation ..................................................................................... 13-A-3
3.01 Starting Local Mode.. ................................................................... 13-A-3
3.02 Ending Local Mode.. .................................................................... 13-A-3
3.03 Command Entry.. ......................................................................... 13-A-3
3.04 Control Key Combinations.. ......................................................... 13-A-4
3.05 Special Keys.. .............................................................................. 13-A-4
4.00 Entering a Mode .................................................................................... 13-A-5
B Extension Directory Mode .. . . .. .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . .. . . .. .. . . .. 13-B-l
1 .oo Summary ............................................................................................... 13-B-l

2.00 APPEND Command .............................................................................. 13-B-2
3.00 DELETE Command ............................................................................... 13-B-4
4.00 LIST Command ...................................................................................... 13-B-6
5.00 SET Command ...................................................................................... 13-B-9
6.00 HELP Command.. .................................................................................... 13-B-l 2
7.00 INIT Command ...................................................................................... 13-B-l 3
8.00 END Command.. .................................................................................... 13-B-l 4
C Speed Dial Dictionary Mode ............................................................................ 13-C-l
1 .OO Summary ................. . .............................................................................. 13-C-1

2.00 DELETE Command ............................................................................... 13-C-2
3.00 LIST Command.. .................................................................................... 13-c-3
4.00 SET Command ...................................................................................... 13-c-5
5.00 HELP Command.. .................................................................................. 13-c-7
6.00 END Command ...................................................................................... 13-C-8
13-1
Page
D Local Diagnosis Mode . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. .. . . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. . .. . . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. 13-D-l
1 .oo Summary ............................................................................................... 13-D-l

2.00 Diagnosis of CRT ......... . ......................................................................... 13-D-2
3.00 Diagnosis of LEDs ................................................................................. 13-D-5
4.00 Diagnosis of Operation Keyboard .......................................................... 13-D-6
5.00 Diagnosis of Full Keyboard .................................................................... 13-D-8
6.00 REP Command ..................................................................................... 13-D-10
7.00 All Diagnosis ......................................................................................... 13-D-11
8.00 HELP Command .................................................................................... 13-D-12
9.00 END Command ...................................................................................... 13-D-13
E Backup Mode . .. .. .. . . . . .. . .. . .. . . . .. ..>................ . . . . .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . . ...-...... 13-E-l
1 .OO Summary ............................................................................................... 13-E-l

2.00 SAVE Command.. .................................................................................. 13-E-2
3.00 LOAD Command ................................................................................... 13-E-3
4.00 HELP Command .................................................................................... 13-E-4
5.00 END Command ...................................................................................... 13-E-5
..
F HELP Mode ...................................................................................................... 13-F-l
G Clear Mode . . .. .. . . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. .. . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . ...-........ 13-G-l
..$
13-2
A. Preparation
1.00 Outline of Local Mode

Attendant Console Local Mode is used to edit the
local data dedicated to the attendant console.
Attendant Console Local Mode is operated
independently from the main unit.
The operator at Attendant Console can utilize the
following modes on local mode for programming,
diagnosis, and backup.
Extension Directory mode
Speed Dial Dictionary mode
‘Local Diagnosis mode
Backup mode
In addition, CLEAR mode is provided for clearing

the programmed local data.
Before entering the above modes, HELP
command will help you to see which commands
are available in local mode.
13-A-l
2.00 Command System
Command System in the local mode is shown

below:
---em ----em -----

T-GE--J -f-K--J
Extension Speed Dial Local Backup mode Help mode I Clearing
Directory Dictionary Diagnosis I Local Data
mode mode mode
--e-e ----- -------- -I .
---em ----- --e-s
-pzq J-ziq J--E--J 1-1

1
‘3
Entry of
Extension
Deletion from
Speed Dial
Diagnosis of
CRT display
Save the
Local Data
II
Directory Dictionary
T--E-J
Diagnosis of f
LED
Deletion from indicators I
Extension 1 LIST 1 -pq
J--Z--J
Directory
Display of
Diagnosis of
Load the Local I
.Sped Data I
keys on function
Dial Dictionary I
keyboard
Display of
Extension I
I .
Directory Diagnosis of
keys on full I
I Storage and keyboard I
Change of change of I
Extension Speed Dial I
Directory Dictionary IC diagnosis I
report
t AU I I
Initialization of I
Extension Diagnosis of
Directory
all the above I
items
.-----
.---Be -----
----- .--se-
-pZiF-J
Display of Display of Display of Display of
HELP screen HELP screen HELP screen HELP screen i
for DIC for SPD for DIG for BUP
.----- ----- .----- ----- -I
.-- --- -----
-pE--j
Ending Speed Ending Local Ending Backup 1
Dial Dictionary Diagnosis mode
-1 Directory mode mode mode I
I
L --____--------------- -I
13-A-2
3.00 Basic Operation
3.01 Starting Local Mode 3.03 Command Entry
To enter the Local Mode, set the LOCAL switch Each Main Command can be entered either by
(on the right side of the Attendant Console) to simply pressing the associated function key or by
“ON” when call processing mode of the attendant entering each command character at Full
console is displayed, then the Local Mode Main keyboard.
Menu is displayed on the screen. (See the If Sub Command is required, type it directly at
illustration below) Full keyboard.
The prompt “$. is displayed on this screen and The function keys at the top of the Function
you can enter the desired mode by entering the keyboard are command-entry specific.
appropriate command. Their functions depend on the mode you are in.
The entered command is displayed on the
3.02 Ending Local Mode command line. -’
To execute a command line, press the RETURN
To end the Local Mode, set the LOCAL switch key after entering the Main Command and Sub
(on the right side of the Attendant Console) to Command (if required).
“OFF” when prompt ‘?$” is displayed on the
screen, then call processing mode of attendant <Example>
console is obtained automatically. In Extension Directory mode:
Enter: DIG> (m) (1 OOO/JacWSales)

4 t
main command sub coknmand
****************************
* 3c
* ..
* Localmode for attendantconsole
* *
*************.***************
DIC : enterto edit modeof extensiondirectory
SPD : entertoeditmodeofspeeddiidictionary
DIG : enterthe diagnosticmodeof atWant console
BUP : entertheiocaldatabackupmode
HELP : displaythe commandinformation
-’ CLEAR : cleartheattendantiocaldata
Command line
4 .
y Function field: display the commands to be selected by keys. c
c
Local Mode Main Menu Screen
13-A-3
3.04 Control Key Combinations 3.05 Special Keys
You can perform specific operations by mng tne The following special keys are used to edit the
1-1 key in combination with certam otner keys command line:
as follows.
To use am] key combination, hold down the i DEL : deletes the character at the current cursor
1-1 key, and press the other key. position. The cursor does not move.
[xl : moves the cursor one character left and
ICTRLI+@ : suspends the display scrolling to deletes the character in that position.
let you view it.
m] : moves the cursor one space to the right
ICTRL]+IQI : and adds a space to a line.
p[ : moves the cursor one character right.
[miq+ICJ : terminates the execution of
entered command. Then allows m : moves the cursor one character left.
you to enter a command again. m : recalls a command which was already
fEK]+pJ : establishes the insert mode. executed by pressing the RETURN key in
Pressing lml+ aagain reverse order. When the oldest command
cancels the insert mode. is recalled, recalls again from the newest
command.
ml+-] : moves the cursor to the
beginning of the next word. m] : recalls a command which was already
executed by pressing the RETURN key in
m + ItI : moves the cursor to the entered order. When the newest
beginning of the previous word. command is recalled, recalls again from
ICTRLl+ml : deletes the-line. the oldest command.
<Example>
While displaying the list in the Extension
..
Directory mode, pressing WI+ q
terminates the display as follow:
I DIGLIST *I*/* 1
Dw
Sales
Sales
Finance
t
<Example>
DIGAPPEND 1 OOMlhit /Sales
After pressing Im]m, enter “e”

results in
DIC Z=APPEND 1 OO/White/SalesI
13-A-4
4.00 Entering a Mode
To enter the desired mode, either press the The flow chart below shows how to enter each
appropriate funcbon key, or enter the appropriate mode and ( ) in the chart shows the prompt
command and press the RETURN key at Local displayed in each mode.
Mode Main Menu screen.
Then the prompt associated with the entered
mode is displayed on the screen.
Extension Directory mode

(DIG)
Speed Dial Dictionary mode

(SPD>)
Local Diagnosis mode

(DIG>) ..
Backup mode
(BUP>)
Displays HELP screen to enter

individual mode
, Clears data stored in Extension
13-A-5
B Extension Directory Mode
1 .OO Summary
Extension Directory mode allows you to edit the extension directory fc: :ne Arrendant
Console. It is possible to store, add, delete, and change extension names and
departments in this mode.
Pressing the Fi key or entering DIC (CR) command in the local mode mam menu sc;:een
introduces the function field below, which indicates a command entry needed.
To start editing, press the function key associated with the desired operation, or enter the
desired command directly at the full keyboard.
Lets you register the new

entries to’ the Extension
APPEND
Dire&q.
Lets you deletes the entries

DELETE registered in the Extension
Directory. Use both main and sub
commands.
+-E--J+ Lets you display entries
LIST registered in the Extension
,
Directory.
Lets you correct or change

SET the entries registered in the
Extension Directory.
-lJ’=-Jn
HELP
Lets you display the HELP
screen.
Lets you initialize the

1
Use the main commands
only.
I
-pJ+
INIT Extension Directory.
Lets you end the Extension

-f-q+
END Directory mode.
13-B-l
2.00 APPEND Command
Description Used to register the cew entrees to Extension Directory.

Up to 500 entries can be rq:s:ered.
Input Format There are three types of input formats in APPEND Command, as
follows:
I I Contents I Format I
1 Stores extension number, name, department. DG=APPEND Number/Name/
Department
2 Stores extension number, name (wlthout DLAPPEND Number/Name/
designating department)
3 Stores extension number, department DIGAPPEND Number//Department
(without designating extension name)
Input Examples To store the extension number “1000,” name “Bob,” department “Sales,” enter:
DIG-APPEND 1 OOO/Bob/Sales
To store the extension number “1001,” name “Steven,” no department, enter:
DIG-APPEND 1004k3tever-V
To store the extension number “1002,” no name, department “Sales”; enter:
DIG-APPEND 1002HSales
Display Example To store the extension number “1000,” name “White,” department “Sales”:
DIG APPEND1OOO/VVhiie/Sales
-- Appendcomplete
Conditions An extension number consists of three or four digits.
An extension name consists of up to 16 characters including letters,

numbers and special characters (except “, *, /, -), and the first digit
should be a letter.
A department name consists of up to eight characters including

letters, numbers and special characters (except “, *, /, -), and the
first digit should be a letter.
13-B-2
Each entry should always include the extension number.
For example, entering: DIGAPPEND /Jack/Sales displays an error
message.
Be sure not to leave a space within a sub command.

For example, entering: DIG-APPEND 1OOl/Jack Smith/Sales
displays an error message. Instead of a space, special characters
such as =-” can be used to separate words as “Jack-Smith.”
The same extension number can be registered in the multiple

number of entries if extension name and/or department name
are/is different.
Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

MS+- Error:lllegslmaincommand There i’s an”error in the main command.
- Error:Illegalsub command There is an error in the sub command.
++w- Error:inputdata alreadyexist Entered data has already been stored.
- Appendcomplete Storing is completed.
+++HH Error:&end deny(already500 data 500 data entries have already been stored.
entrv) j
13-B-3
3.00 DELETE Command
Description Used to delete the entries registered in the Extension Directory.
input Format There are 10 types of input formats, as follows:
Contents. Format
1 Specifies extension number, name, department DIG DELETE Numoer/Namel
Department
2 Specifies extension number, name (for a data DIG DELETE Number/Name/
which has no department stored) I
3 ISpecifies extension number, name (regardless IDIG DELETE Number/Name/*
of which department)
4 Specifies extension number, department (for DIG> DELETE Number//Department
which there is no name stored)
5 Specifies extension number, department DIG DELETE NumberrC/Department
1(regardless of which extension name) I
6 (Specifies name, department (regardless of I DIG DELETE */Name/Department
extension number)
7 Specifies extension number only DIG DELETE Number/*F
8 Specifies extension name only DIG DELETE */Name?
9 Specifies department only DIG DELETE *F/Department
10 Deletes all DIG DELETE *I*/+
Input Examples To delete the extension number “1000,” name “Jack,” department
“Project,” enter:
DIC > DELETE 1 OOONacklProject
To delete the extension number “1001,” name “Betty,” no department
stored, enter:
DIC > DELETE 1 OOl/Betty/
To delete all entries which include the department “Project,” enter:.
DIC > DELETE */*/Project
Display Example To delete the extension number “1000,” name “White,” department
”
Sales”:
DIG. DELETE1OOOMhiie/Sales
*3cyyyTotal 1 entry
M-M DeleteOK? (Y/N)=> Y
s+-+ Deletecomplete
When “Delete OK ? (Y/N)” appears on the screen, press “Y” key,

then the RETURN key to delete the displayed data.
Press “N” key, then the RETURN key, if you do not wish to delete the
data.
13-B-4
Conditions Usage of Wild Card Character
One character “*” can be used as a wild card character which
substitutes any character in that position.
<Example l>
If the followings are registered:
No. Ext name Dep
100 Sales
100 Jack Sales
Entering: DICYDELETE 1OONSales deletes both of the above entries.

<Example 2>
To delete any entry which includes the extension numbers from 1000
to 1999, enter:
DIC > DELETE l*/*/*
If the extension number is three digits, enter “0” at the beginning of the
number.
<Exampie 3>
To delete any entr)i which includes the extension numbers from 310 to
319, enter:
DIC > DELETE 031*FPI
Take care not to delete the data that you do not intend to delete when
you use the wild card * for the input formats 3 and 5 through 10.

M-M-- Error:Illegalmaincommand There is an error in the main command.
- Error:Illegalsubcommand There is an error in the sub command.
WHW+Error:Inputdata do not exist. Entered data has not been stored.
X-MM Deletecomplete Deleting is completed.
- Deleteabort Deleting is not executed yet.
+-w DeleteOK?FIN)+. Confirmation message.
+H- Total 3 entries There are three entries to be deleted.
13-B-5
4.00 LIST Command
Description Used to display all entries registered in the Extension Directory.
input format There are 10 types of input formats as follows:

Contents Format
1 Specifies extension number, name, department DIC > LIST Number/Name/Department
2 Specifies extension number, name (for an entry DIC > LIST Number/Name/
which has no department stored) I
3 1 Specifies extension number, name (regardless j DIC > LIST Number/Name/*
of department)
4 Specifies extension number, department (for DIC > LIST Number//Department
an entry which has no name stored)
5 Specifies extension number, ekpartment DIC > LIST Number)AIDepartment
(regardless of name)
6 Specifies name, department (regardless of DIC z. LIST */Name/Department
extension number)
7 Specifies extension number only DIC > LIST NumberrCln
8 Specifies name only DIC > LIST */NameP
9 Specifies department only DIC > LIST *P/Department
IO Lists all entries DIC > LIST *FP
input Examples To display the extension number “1000,” name “Jack,” department
“Project,n enter:
DIC > LIST 1OOO/JacWProject
To display the extension number “1001 ,mname “Betty,” no department
stored, enter:
DIC > LIST lOOl/Betty/
To display all the entries which include the extension number “1002,”
..
enter:
DIC > LIST lOO@rC
To display all the entries which include the department “Project,”
enter:
DIC > LIST *F/Project
Display Example To display all the entries which include the extension number “1000”
and the extension name whose initial is “J? >..- -
DIG>LISTlOOO/~~
No. Ext name Dep
1000 James Sales

1000 Jennifer Product
1000 Joanna Product
1000 Jone Sales
+-+H Total 4 entries
13-B-6
One ch’aracter I‘*” can be used as a wild card character which
substitutes any character in that position
If the following entries are stored:

<Example 1>
Entering: DIC > LIST 1 OOp/Sales displays both the above entries.
<Example 2s
To list up 1000 through 1999, enter:
DIC > LIST l*pp
If the extension number is three digits, “0” should be entered as the

leading digit.
<Example 3>
To list up extension numbers from 310 through 319, enter:
DIC > LIST 031*crC/*
Listing Order
LIST command is used to list ali entries in alphabetical order of
extension names first, then alphabetical order of departments, and
then ascending order of extension numbers.
<Example 1 > ..
DIC>LIST *PY I
No. Ext name Dep

1002 Betty Sales
1003 Jack Product
1001 Smith Account
Listing order may be altered depending on input format types. For

instance, the above list can be changed in ascending order of
extension numbers by entering: DIC > LIST 1OO*/*rC, as follows:
<Example 2>
DIC>LIST 1 OO*crC/*
I Ext name
1F
I
No. I ! Dep
1001 Smith Account
1002 Betty Sales
1003 Jack Product
:
13-B-7
That is, preferential order is determined by the sub parameters
which are not substituted by wild card character “*.”
Listing all entries

All stored entries may be listed by entering LIST command only.
Up to 14 entries can be displayed on the screen at a time.
For example, if 30 entries are stored, the first execution of LIST will
display the first 14 entries and the second execution of LIST will
display the second 14 entries and the third execution of LIST will
display the remaining two entries.
Entering: LIST *rCrC lists all the stored entries.

H+W Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
+-w Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
M Error: Input data do not exist. Entered data has not been stored.
- Total 3 entries There are three entries to be listed.
+,+-w No data is entered. No data stored.
-.
13-B-8
5.00 SET Command
Description Used to correct or change the entries registered in the Extension

Directory.
input Format Basic format for SET command is to enter:

DIGSET [originai data] [new data].
There are 10 types of input formats for it as shown below.

The c > mark in the table indicates that the data in the c Z= may be
skipped.
The u mark in the table indicates a space.
I
Format
1 Specifies extension number name department i DIC>SETuNumber /Name/
~Department u cNumbeo/cName>/
1<Departmenb
2 Specifies extension number, name (for data 1DIC>SETuNumber /Name/ ‘1
which has no deoartment stored) <NumbeokName>kDepartmenb
3 Specifies extension number, name (regardless DGSETu Number /NameP u
of deoartmentl
4 Specifies extension number, department (for
data which has no name stored)
5 Sbecifies extension number, department
J
(recardless of name) cNumber>/<NamezkDepartmenb
6 Specifies name, department (regardless of DIC>SETu*/Name/Department LJ
extension number) <Numbe~/cName>/<Department>
7 Specifies extension number only DIC>SETu Number rCrC u cNumbeti#
eName>kDeoartmenb
8 Specifies name only DIGSET u */Narnep u <Number/
cName>/eDepartrnent>
9 Specifies department only DIC>SET~*P/Department I-J
cNumbeo/<Name>/eDeparbnenb
10 Changes all entries DIGSET u*PP ucNumber>/
.cName>kDepartment>
Input Example To change the department from “Sales” to “Account” for the
._, ,: extension number 7000,” name “Jack,” department YSales,” enter :
DIC > SET 1 OOO/JacWSale.s 1OOO/JacWAcccunt
To change the entry which has the extension number “1001,” name
“Betty,” no department to the extension number “2000,” name
‘Smith,” department ‘Account,” enter :
DIC > SET 1OOl/Betty/ u 2000/Smith/Account
13-B-9
Display Example To change the extension number “1000,” name “James,”
department “Sales” to “1000, White, Product” :
DIC~SET1000/James/Sales lOOO/Whiie/Product
ti
-Totallentry
sHHHc,Set complete
Conditions An extension number can be three or four digits.
An extension name can be up to 16 characters including letters,

numbers and special characters (except “, *, 1, -), and the first digit
should be a letter.
..
A department can be up to eight characters including letters,
numbers and special characters (except “, *, /, -), and the first digit
should be a letter.
..
Make sure not to leave a space within a sub command.
For example, if you enter: SET 1 OOO/James/Sales ~1 OOl/James/
Div 4, an error message appears on the screen and you cannot
change the data.
In this case use special characters such as “-” to separate words as
“Div4.“.
Usage of Wild Card Character

One character tiD can be used as a wild card character which
substitute any character in that position.
The wild card character cannot be used for sub parameters of new
data.
<Example l>
If the following entries are stored:
I No. I Extname 1 Dep I
13-B-l 0
To change the extension numbers of the entries which include
depmmen! -Pvj+Y to 200. enter :
DIG > SET - ‘/Project 200//
The specifiec entnes NilI be changed as follows:
<Example 2>
To change ‘all the extension numbers from 1000 through1 999 to
1000, enter:
DIC > SET 1*/*P 1 OOO//
If the extension number is three digits, “0” must be entered as the

leading digit.
<Example 3~
To change all the extension numbers from 310 through 319 to 400,
enter :
DIC > SET 031*/*/* 400//
As shown in formats 3 and 5 through 10, the wild card character w

is used to change data without specifying sub parameters.
Insert one space between original data and new data.
Displayed Message Disalaved- Messaae I Meaning

-.-s-.-I -
- Error: illegal main command There is an error in the main command.

+-++ Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
++-H Error: Input data do not exist. Entered data has not been stored.
- Set complete Changing the data is completed.
- Total 3 entries There are three entries to be changed.
13-B-l 1
6.00 HELP Command
Description Used to display brief instructions and a list of command related to

the Extension Directory mode.
Input Format DIGHELP
Display Example
DIG HELP
++-+- Helpfor editingextensiondirectov
appedmentry =>APPEND number/name&p

deletean entry =>DELETEnumber/name/dep
Manentry =>LISTnumber/name/dep
changean enby =fiET number/name/depnumberlnameldep
initializethe directory =>INlT
returnto the localmenu =>END
helpfor usingcommand =>HELP
Displayed Message * Displayed Message Meaning

- Error : Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
W- Error : Illegal sub command There is an error in the &b command.
13-B-l 2
7.00 INIT Command
Description Used to initialize the entries in the Extension Directory, and the
extension names and numbers assigned in :fie system
programming are copied to the Extension Dfrectory screen at the
same time.
Input Format DIG INIT
Display Example
DIC> INIT
+H++ InitializeOK? (Y/N) => Y
- lnitislizecomplete
-Total 3 entries
When “Initialize OK? (Y/N)” appears on the screen, press “Y” key
then the RETURN key to execute.
Not to execute, press “N” key, then the RETURN key.
$
__ Conditions Extension names to be copied can include letters, numbers and
special characters(except “, *, /, -), and the first digit should be a
letter.
Both number and name of the extension will not be copied, if the
first digit of the extension name is a numeric character other than a
letter.
Displayed Message Meaning

- Error:Illegalmaincommand There is an error in the main command.
+-+ Error:Illegalsub commend There is an error in the sub command.
-!- InitializeOK? (Y/N) => Confirmation message.
m Initializecomplete Initialization is completed.
M Initializeabort Did not initialize.
+-+ Total3 entries There are three entries to be copied.
13-B-13
8.00 END Command
Description Used to conchde the Extension Directory mode.
Input Format DIC>END
Display Example
IX> END
90
Conditions Entry of END command concl&es Extension Directory mode, and

displays the prompt $” which indicates that you can enter another
command.
..

-+Wlegal main command There is an error in the main command.
-Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
. .. . :
:L’
13-B-l 4
C Speed Dial Dictionary Mode
1 .OO Summary
This mode is used to edit the Speed Dial Dictionary for the Attendant Console.
It is used for storing, deleting and changing a speed dial name.
Pressing the F2 key “SPD (c,)” in the local mode main menu screen displays the function
field be&v. The “SPD> a” shows that you may enter further commands.
To start editing, press the function key associated with the desired operation, or enter the
desired command directly at the full keyboard.
Lets you delete the entries \

registered in the Speed Dial
DELETE
Dictionary.
Lets you display all entries

-OF2 registered in the Speed Dial Use both main
> commands. and sub
..
LIST Dictionary.
Lets you register new entries

-p-I]+ or change the entries
SET registered in the Speed Dial
Dictionary. /
the HELP ,’
Use the main command
only.
Lets you end the Speed Dial
-p-II]+ Dictionary mode.
END
13-C-l
2.00 DELETE Command
Description Used to delete the entries registered in the Speed Dial Dictionary.
Input Format SPD > DELETE 001 to 200 (speed dial code)
input Example To delete speed dial code 100, enter :

SPD > DELETE 100
Display Example When deleting speed dial code 100 :
SPD>DELETE100
deletedata
No. name
100 white
El
yy+y+ Total 1 entry
-X.X+-+
Delete OK ? (Y/N) => Y
- Delete complete
When the message ‘Delete OK? (Y/N) =>” appears, press “Y” then the
RETURN key to delete the data.
Not to delete the data, press “N” then the RETURN key.

One character *’ can be used as a wild card character which
substituteb any character in that positian.
<Example>
To delete the speed dial code from 100 through 199, enter :
SPD > DELETE 1*
This function deletes the speed dial codes and the names from the
Speed Dial Dictionary screen, but does not affect the data in the
system programming.
Displayed Message Disolaved Messaae Meaning

+-M+ Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
- Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
- Delete OK ? (Y/N) => Confirmation message
- Delete complete Deleting is completed.
- Error: Input data do not exist Entered data does not exist.
+-+++ Delete abort Did not delete the specified data.
+-++ Total 3 entries There are three entries to be deleted.
L
13-C-2
3.00 LIST Command
Description Used to display all entries registered in the Speed Dial Dictionary.
Input Format There are four types of input formats as follows :
1 ! Contents Format I
1 Specifies speed code and name SPD > LIST Number / Name
2 Specifies speed code (regardless of name) SPD > LIST NumberrC
3 Specifies name (regardless of number) SPD > LIST */ Name
4 Lists all entries SPD > LIST *cln
input Example To list the speed dial code1 00 and name Jones, enter :
SPD > LIST 100 / Jones
Display Example To list speed dial name which starts with J :
SPD>LIST *c/J*
1 .
No. 1 name
100 James
001 Jennifer
200 Joanna
150 Jone
w+++ Total4 entries

One character u-Kpcan be used as a wild card character which
substitutes any character in that position..
<Example>
To list the speed dial code from 100 through 199, enter :
SPD > LIST l*rC
13-c-3
Listing Order
LIST command is used to list all entries in alphabetical order of the
extension names and in ascending order of the speed dial codes.
<Example>
SPD>LIST *F
NO. name
102 BW
103 Jack
101 Smith /
The listing order can be altered by changing the input format.

For instance, in the example above, to list the entries in ascending
order of the speed dial codes, enter :
SPD>LIST 1O*/++
The specified entries will be displayed as follow :
SPD>LIST 1 O*p
No. name
101 Smith
102 Betty
103 Jack c
That is, data is listed in the order of the code or the name which is
not specified by one wild card *. .L
Listing All Entries

All stored entries may be listed by entering LIST command only.
Up to 14 entries can be displayed on the screen at a time.
For instance, if 30 entries are stored, the first execution of LIST will
display the first 14 entries and the second execution of Lsz will
display the second 14 entries and the third execution of Lfs”T’inrill
display the remaining two entries.
When you want to list all the stored entries, enter :

LIST *I*
+-++ Error : Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
w Error : illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
H+++ Error : Input data do not exist Entered data does not exist.
W- Error : No data is entered No data is stored.
++-+ Total 3 entries Three entries are listed.
13-c-4
4.00 SET Command
Description Used to register or change the entries in the Speed Dial Dictionary.
If newly registered speed dial code has been already registered,
previous entry will be overwritten by the new one.
Up to 200 entries (001 to 200) can be registered.
Input Format SPD > SET speed dial code/name
Input Example To store the speed dial code “120” and the name ‘James,” enter :
SPD>SET 120IJames
If the speed dial code 120 has already been stored, the preset
name is changed to James.
Display Example To store the speed dial code 100 and the name “Bob” (when the
speed dial code 100 has not been stored before) :
SPD>SET1OO/Bob
- Total1 entry
M SETcomplete
Conditions A speed dial code should be three digits (001 to 200).

A speed dial name consists of up to 20 charaotes including letters,
numbers and special characters (except “, *, /, -).
The beginning of the name should be a letter.
Make sure not to insert a space into each sub command of speed
dial code and name.
For example entering : SET 1 OO/ABC Food displays an error
message after pressing the RETURN key.
However, it is possible to use special characters such as u-* to
separate words as “ABC-Food.”
Only one speed dial name can be stored for one speed dial code.
Usage of Wild Card Character

One character “*c” can be used as a wild card character which
substitutes any character in that position.
13-c-5
<Example>
To change the name of speed code from 001 through 099 to Panasonic, enter :
SPD > SET O*/Panasonic
Displayed Message r Displayed Message Meaning

+w++xError: illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
+H+W Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
M Set complete Data has been stored or changed.
= Error: Input data do not exist Entered data does not exist.
-+- Error: Set deny (speed dial Entered speed dial code is out of the range
number=001 -200) of 001 to 200
++-+ Total 3 entries There are three entries to be stored or
changed.
13-C-6
5.00 HELP Command

the Speed Dial Dictionary mode.
Input Format SPD > HELP
Display Example
SPD>HELP
***‘* Helpfor editingspeeddial dictionary **‘*

l
delete an entry => DELETEnumber

listan entry => LISTnumber/name
append/changean entry =>SETnumber/name.
returnto the localmenu => END
helpfor usingcommand =a HELP

W+X+IS
Error. Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
W- Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
13-c-7
6.00 END Command
Description Used to conclude the Speed Dial Dictionary mode.
Input Format SPD > END
Display Example
SPD>END
a--
. Conditions Entering END command concludes Speed Dial Dictionary mode
and displays the prompt “$” which indicates that you can enter
another command.
Displayed Message 1 Displayed Message Meaning

+=-w Error: illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
++-+ Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
13-C-8
D. Local Diagnosis Mode
1 .OO Summary
Local Dsagrosis -ode is used to diagnose the CRT, LEDs on the operation keyboard, the
operation keyboarc and :ne full keyboard of the Attendant Console.
Pressing the F3 eej -C,S (CR)’ introduces the following function field, and waits for
command entry.
.-* Press the function key for the desired command or directly enter the command from the
1 full keyboard.
piiq
pq+ Lets you diagnose the CRT display.

CRT
Lets you diagnose LEDs on the operation

p--J+
LED keyboard.
[I-q+ Lets you diagnose the operation keyboard.

OPR
Lets you diagnose the full keyboard.
. 1.:. Lets you display the IC diagnosis report.
Lets you diagnose all the items above

OF6
ALL sequentially
Lets you display the HELP screen.

lllliil+
HELP
p-J+ Lets you conclude the Local Diagnosis mode.

END
The diagnoses above are executed by the main
commands only.
13-D-i
2.00 Diagnosis of CRT
Description Used to diagnose the CRT display.
Input Format DIG>CRT
Diagnostic Method Follow the subsequent procedures for diagnosis of CRT.
1) When the following outer frame appears, confirm the distortion

of vertical and horizontal lines.
after two seconds
2) The outer frame disappears and nothing appears for

approximately two seconds.
l-l
V
after two seconds
3) The outer frame appears in reverse video.
a after two seconds
(Continued)
13-D-2
(Continued)
4) The letters ‘H‘s appear.
25 lines 4 I I
I I
I I
I I
. & __-_ _-___ -__________ ___._ __ .--- . ..lr.

.
5) Letters and numbers appear.

_ a 80 characters
after two seconds
ABCDEFGHlJKLMNOWRSTUVWXYZAS *--
ABCD-.
ABCD ..-
abc&efghijWmnopqrstuvwxyzabc
. .-
al&::
01234567890123458789012345
.--
01234.,.
01234*-
\ /
u
u
n 8Ocharacten
after two seconds
6) The character generator codes and the attributes appear. ‘*
13-D-3
7) After the diagnosis of the CRT display ends, the following
display appears and waits for command entry.
I
DIG> C9T
- CRTTsst start
--- Compete
Note : Pressing the F8 key or CRTL + C key during the diagnosis stops
the diagnosis and displays “Abort.”
. Displayed Message Displayed Message Meaning

H-K-X+Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
+-+ Error: illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
13-D-4
3.00 Diagnosis of LEDs
Description Used to diagnose the LEDs on the operation keyboard.
Input Format DIG>LED
Diagnosis Method 1) ALL LEDs on the operation keyboard light in the following order:
WC-LOOP 1, LOOP 2, LOOP 3, LOOP 4, LOOP 5. LOOP 6,
NIGHT, ALARM, DES-LOOP 1, LOOP 2, LOOP 3, LOOP 4,
LOOP 5, LOOP 6
Confirm LEDs corresponding to the display on the screen.
DIGLED
+-- LEDTeststart
... LOOP1SRCLEDis lighting t Displaysthe LEDwhichis lit.
‘I
. I
Note : Pressing the F8 key or CTRL + C key during the diagnosis stops..
the diagnosis and displays “ABORT.”
2) After the diagnosis of LED ends, “Complete” appears and waits

for command entry.
DIGLED
-LEDTeststarI
LOOP6DESLEDis lighting t Displaysthe LEDwhichis lit.

- Complete
Displayed Message ’ Displayed Message Meaning

m Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
+w++ Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
1
13-D-5
4.00 Diagnosis of Operation Keyboard
Description Used to diagnose the operation keyooara.
input Format DIG>OPR
Diagnosis Method 1) When the arrangement of the operation keyboard appears on

the CRT screen, confirm that the key pressed on the operation
keyboard is displayed in reverse video on the CRT screen.
ss+x+m
OPR.TESTSTARTs+x+-s
ATT-FWD PROGRAM
c.
Note : Pressing the F8 key or the CTRL + C key during the diagnosis
stops diagnosis, and displays “ABORT.”
Displaying all keys in reverse video means the conclusion of _,

diagnosis of operation keyboard.
__
13-D-6
2) After the diagnosis ends, “Complete” appears and waits for the
entry of the next command.
- OPR. Teststart+--
Al-T-MID PROGRAM
._
3
v CompleteB
DIG>C]

S-X+- Error. Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
++WM Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
13-D-7
5.00 Diagnosis of Full Keyboard
Description Used to diagnose the full keyboard.
Input Format DIG>KEY
Diagnosis Method 1) When.the arrangement of the full keyboard appears on the CRT
screen, confirm that the key pressed on the full keyboard is
displayed in reverse video on the CRT screen.
Note : Pressing the F8 key or CTRL + C key during the diagnosis, stops
the diagnosis, and displays “ABORT.”
Displaying all keys in reverse video means the conclusion of

diagnosis of full keyboard.
13-D-8
2) After the diagnosis ends, “COMPLETE” appears and waits for
the entry of the next command.
+-- KEYtest start
m Complete

W- Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
- Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
13-D-9
6.00 REP Command
Description Displays IC diagnosis report performed when the Attendant
Console is switched on.
Input Format DIG > REP
Display Example
DIG REP
- Reportthe resultof IC diagnostic)uHH-2
1. ROM (IC-3) OK
2. RAM RAM#1 (c-4) OK
RAM#2 (c-5) OK
VRAM (IC-!X)--- OK
3.uo 8259A (IC-9)----- OK
8253A (IC-9)----- OK
8255A (IC-9)----p- OK
89322 (IC-10)--- OK
H 8255 w-w OK P
I
8952 (ICI l)-- NG

+-+ Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
+H+W Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the su6 command.
13-D-l 0
7.00 All Diagnosis
Description Used to diagnose CRT, LED, OPR, KEY and REP sequentially.
Input Format DIG>ALL
Diagnosis Performs diagnosis in order from CRT, LED, OPR, KEY and REP.
After conclusion of all diagnosis, “Complete” appears and waits for the entry of the
next command.
Note : Pressing the F8 key or the CTRL + C key stops the current diagnosis with
displaying “Abort” and advances to the next diagnosis.

- Error: illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
+-- Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
13-D-l 1
8.00 HELP Command
Description Used to display the brief instructions and a list of command related
to the Local Diagnosis Mode.
After displaying the HELP screen, prompt ‘DIG>” is displayed on
the screen, and you can perform desired diagnosis by entering the
command associated with it.
Input Format DIG>HELP
Display Example
DIG>HELP
***** Helpfor Diagnosticmode command*****
cmv : TodiagnoseCRT.
Wed : To diagnoseLED.
Qw4 : Todiagnoseoperationkeyboard.
KEY(CR) : Todiagnosefull keyboard.
REP(cd : Todiagnosethe diagnosticresultof memoryand l/O.
B-44 : Todiagnoseall items.
HELP(Q) : Todfagnctsethe commandinformation.
END(cR) : To quitethe diagmxticmode.
-“‘T”‘T”‘T”‘i”‘T’“T”i”‘-
CRT(Q) LED (CR) OPR(CA) KEY(d REP(Q) ALL(Q) HELP(c+,) END(CR)

***** Error: illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
13-D-12
9.00 END Command
Description Used to conclude the Local Diagnosis mode.
Input Format DIG>END
Display Example
DIG>END
. Condition Entering END command concludes Local Diagnosis mode and

displays the prompt %” which indicates that you can enter another
command.
..
* Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
HW+ Error: Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
13-D-l 3
E. Backup Mode
1 .OO Summary
(Saving Procedure)
Backup mode is used to make a backup copy of the user-programmable attendant
console database on a memory location of the PBX for security reason.
The SAVE command is used to initiate the saving procedure.
(Loading Procedure)
If it becomes necessary to re-program the attendant console database, it will be faster to
load the saved data form the system memory than manual re-input.
The LOAD command is used to initiate the loading procedure.
Attendant console database consists of Extension Directory data and Speed Dial
Dictionary data programmed in the attendant console local mode.
A backup copy of the attendant console database in the system memory location can be
saved on an external device, and loaded in to system memory when required.
Refer to Section 16 “Backup Utility-On-site” and Section 17 “Backup Utility-Remote
Location” for further informatioti.
Pressing the F4 key “BUP(cR)” in the local mode main menu‘screen displays the function
field below, that shows you four commands available in Backup mode. The “BUP> I”
indicates that you may enter any one of those commands.Press the function key for the
desired command, or directly enter the command from the full keyboard.
Press the function key for the desired command, or directly enter the command from the
full keyboard.
.. _,1.:
Fl * Lets you save the attendant console database from attendant

@I console to a memory location of the system main unit.
SAVE
O ~2
LOAD
d Lets you load the attendant console database from a memory
location of the system main unit to attendant console.
@I F3
HELP
+ Lets you display the HELP screen.
t n
F8 + Lets you end the Backup mode.
END
13-E-l
2.00 SAVE Command
Description The SAVE command is used to make a backup copy of the

attendant console dataDase on the memory location of the system
main unit.
Input Format BUP>SAVE
Display Example
BUP>SAVE
***** SaveOK?(Y/N) => Y

* * * * * Complete
When “SAVE OK? (Y/N)” is displayed on the screen, piess Y key

to put the data into storage on PBX.
Not to save, press ‘N” key and then the RETURN key.
Conditions A backup copy of the attendant console database can be saved on

an external device for further secudty.
Refer to Section 16 “Backup- Utility-On-Site” and Section 17
“Backup Utility-Remote Location” for further information.
***** Save OK? (Y/N) => Confirmation Message.

***** Complete Saving is executed successfully.
***** Save abort Saving is interrupted.
***** Error : Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error : Illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
***** Error : Can’t save Saving is executed unsuccessfully.
13-E-2
3.00 LOAD Command
Description The LOAD command is used to load a backup copy of the

attenaant console database that has been stored in the system
memory !ocation to the memory location of the attendant console.
Input Format BUP>LOAD
Display Example BUP>LOAD
*** *- Load OK? (Y/N) => Y

* * * l f Complete
..
When “LOAD OK? (Y/N)” is displayed on the screen, press “Y” key
to read the data from the main unit to Attendant Console.
Not to read, press “N” key and then RETURN key.
Conditions If the loading operation is performed successfully, a copy of the

entire attendant console database is made in attendant console,
erasing whatever was previously in it.

***** Load OK? (Y/N) => Confirmation Message.
***** Complete Loading is executed successfully.
*****Loadabort Loading is interrupted.
***** Error : Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Error : illegal sub command There is an error in the sub command.
***** Error : Can’t Load Loading is executed u~nsuccessfully.
13-E-3
4.00 HELP Command

the Backup Mode.
Input Format BUP>HELP
Display Example BUP>HELP

I
***** Helpfor localdata backupmode command*****
SAVE(%): Tosavelocaldata to PBX.

LOAD : To loadlocaldata from PBX.
HELP(cR): Todisplaythe commandinformation.
END(Q) : Toquit backupmode.
13-E-4
5.00 END Command
Description Used to conclude the Backup mode.
Input Format BUP>END
Display Example BUP>END
Conditions Entry of END command concludes Backup mode, and display the
prompt 3” which indicates that you can enter another command..

***** Error: Illegal main command There is an error in the main command.
..-
13-E-5
F. HELP Mode
the entry of various modes.
Input Format !§ HELP
Display Example
/ $HELP
t * * * * * Helpfor enteringeachmode * * * * *
enterthe EXTdirectory => DIC
I enterthe SPDdictionary => SPD
enterthe diagnosticmode => DIG
enterthe backupmode => BUP
help for usingcommand => HELP
clearthe All localdata => CLEAR
Conditions After displaying the HELP screen, prompt “$” is displayed on the
screen and you can enter the desired mode by entering the
command associated with it.

***** Error: Illegal main command mere is an error in the main command.
_.^
13-F-1
G. Clear Mode
Description Used to clear the entire database programmed in the attendant
console local mode.
Input Format $ CLEAR
Display Example
r $ CLEAR
***** Data Clear OK ? (Y/N) => Y

* * * * * Data Clearaxnplete
VI-
i DIG
(CR)
When “Data Clear OK ? (Y/N)” appears, press Y then the
RETURN key to clear the data. .,
If you do not clear, press “N” then the RETURN key.
After the above operation, prompt %” is displayed on the screen ”

and you can enter the desired mode by entering the appropriate
command.
Conditions The followings are cleared by executing this command:
l All entries in the Extension Directory

(same asIf DIC > DELETE */*I*)
l All entries in the Speed Dial Dictionary -._
(same as if SPD > DELETE */*)
l All extension numbers in the BLF screen
Displayed Message I DisPlayed Messaae I Meaning

***** Error: Hlegal main command There is an error in the main command.
***** Data Clear OK ? (Y?N) =r Confirmation message.
***** Data Clear complete Clear is completed.
***** Data Clear abort Data is not cleared.
13-G-l
Section 14
Maintenance

(Section 141
Maintenance
Contents
Page
A Introduction . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . . . . .. . . . .. . .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . 14-A-l
_,
B System Administration .................................................................................... 14-B-l
1 .OO On-Site Administration ........................................................................... 14-B-l

1 .Ol Logging in to the System ............................................................. 14-B-l
1.02 Administration Main Menu screen ............................................... 14-B-2
2.00 System Administration from a Remote Location .................................... 14-B-3
C Device Status ................................................................................................... 14-C-l

1 .OO Service Commands and Their Functions.. ............................................. 14-C-l
1.Ol INS (In Service) Command.. ........................................................ 14-C-2
1.02 OUS (Out of Service) Command ................................................. 14-c-3
2.00 Definition of Operating Status ............................................................... 14-c-4
2.01 Shelf, Slot, Resource.. .......... .._.................................................... 14-c-4
2.02 Port .............................................................................................. 14-c-4
2.03 Interactions among Devices ........................................................ 14-c-4
2.04 Changes of the Shelf Status ........................................................ 14-c-5
2.05 Changes of the Slot Status ............................................................ 14-C-6
D Self-Test (System-Detected Troubles) ............................................................. 14-D-l
1 .OO Error Record Display ............................................................................. 14-D-l

1 .Ol Start Time of Self-Test ................................................................. 14-D-l
1.02 Error Log ...................................................................................... 14-D-l
1.03 Printing Out the Automatic Failure Reporting.. ............................ 14-D-l
1.04 Local&farmu.. .............................................................................. 14-D-2
1.05 Remote Alarm .............................................................................. 14-D-3
2.00 Clearing System-Detected Troubles.. .................................................... 14-D-4
2.01 Introduction .................................................................................. 14-D-4
2.02 Consulting the Error Log.. ............................................................ 14-D-4
2.03 Background Diagnostic Error List.. .............................................. 14-D-5
E Troubleshooting Guide ..................................................................................... 14-E-l
1 .OO introduction ............................................................................................ 14-E-l

2.00 Troubleshooting via the LED Indicators.. ............................................... 14-E-2
3.00 Troubleshooting via Error Log Records ................................................. 14-E-4
3.01 Error Log Record List .................................................................. 14-E-4
3.02 System Reset caused by CPU Runaway (Restart Procedure) .... 14-E-5
3.03 TSW clock down .......................................................................... 14-E-6
3.04 Basic shelf power down (DC) ...................................................... 14-E-7
3.05 Basic shelf power down (AC) ...................................................... 14-E-8
14-l
Page
3.06 Expansion shelf power down (DC) .............................................. 14-E-9
3.07 Expansion shelf power down (AC) .............................................. 14-E-l 0
3.08 Progress tone failure (TSW card). ............................................... 14-E-l 1
3.09 Check date/time (Real Time Clock IC) ........................................ 14-E-12
3.10 Conference trunk failure (Basic). ................................................. 14-E-l 3
3.11 Conference trunk failure (Option) ................................................ 14-E-14
3.12 System memory error (Major) ...................................................... 14-E-l 5
3.13 System memory error (Minor) ...................................................... 14-E-1 6
3.14 Device not connect for SMDR ..................................................... 14-E-l 7
3.15 CPU RAM backup battery down.. ................................................ 14-E-18
3.16 Card link failure (LPR) ................................................................. 14-E-l 9
3.17 LPR ROM checksum error .......................................................... 14-E-20
3.18 LPR RAM failure.. ........................................................................ 14-E-21
3.19 Card disconnect.. ......................................................................... 14-E-22
3.20 Modem failure (RMT card) ........................................................... 14-E-23
3.21 LPR memory checksum error.. .................................................... 14-E-24
3.22 Card type error (LPR) .................................................................. 14-E-25
3.23 LPR runaway.. ............................................................................. 14-E-26
3.24 OGM CPU runaway (DISA) ......................................................... 14-E-27
3.25 OGM lost (DISA) .......................................................................... 14-E-28
3.26 OPX power down ......................................................................... 14-E-29
3.27 DTMF generator failure (COT card) ............................................ 14-E-30
3.28 DTMF receiver failure (SLC/HLC/OPX card) ............................... 14-E-31
3.29 Tone detector failure (DISNAGC card) ....................................... 14-E-32
14-E-33
.). 3.30 HDLC failure (ATLC card) ................ .,-...~ .....................................
3.31 Port link failure (ATT/DPH) .......................................................... 14-E-34
3.32 OHCY%SW failure(TSW card) ...................................................... 14-E-35
3.33 OHCA not installed (PLC/HLC) ................................................... 14-E-36
3.34 TSW DTMF G./R. failure ............................................................. 14-E-37
4.00 Troubleshooting via User-Reponed Troubles ........................................ 14-E-38
F Functional Test by Entering Commands .......................................................... 14-F-1
1 .OO Introduction ............................................................................................ 14-F-l

2.00 Test Main Menu ........................ ............................................................. 14-F-2
3.00 Testing the Cards.. ................................................................................. it;;;:
3.01 Functions to be Verified ...............................................................
3.02 Card Test Initial screen.. .............................................................. 14-F-4
3.03 Card Test procedure.. .................................................................. i bF;z
3.04 Card Test Results screen ............................................................
14-2
Page
4.00 Testing the Ports .................................................................................... 14-F-7
4.01 Functions to be Verified.. ............................................................. 14-F-7
4.02 Port Test Initial screen ................................................................. 14-F-8
4.03 Port Test procedure ..................................................................... 14-F-9
4.04 Port Test Results screen.. ............................................................ 14-F-10
5.00 Testing PITS and ATT ............................................................................ 14-F-11
5.01 Functions to be Verified.. ............................................................. 14-F-l 1
5.02 PITS and ATT Test Initial screen ................................................. 14-F-12
5.03 PITS and ATT Test procedure ..................................................... 14-F-l 3
5.04 PITS and ATT Test Results screen .............................................. 14-F-14
6.00 Return Messages.. ................................................................................. 14-F-15
G Monitor .. . . .. . .. . .. . . . . .. .. .. . .. . . . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. . . .. . 14-G-l
1 .oo Monitor Main Menu screen .................................................................... 14-G-l

2.00 Error Log screen ................................................................................... 14-G-2
3.00 Device Status screen.. ........................................................................... 14-G-3
3.01 System Status Initial screen.. ...................................................... 14-G-3
3.02 Card Status screen.. .................................................................... 14-G-4
3.03 Port Status screen ....................................................................... 14-G-5
3.04 Conference Trunk Status screen ................................................. 14-G-6
4.00 Traffic Submenu screen ......................................................................... 14-G-7
4.01 Station Initial screen.:‘. ................................................................. 14-G-8
4.02 Trunk Group Initial screen ........................................................... 14-G-9
4.03 Attendant Console initial screen.. ................................................ 14-G-l 0
4.04 DISA screen ................................................................................ 14-G-11
4.05 OGM 1 screen ............................................................................. 14-G-12
4.06 OGM 2 screen ............................................................................. ‘14-G-13
4.07 AGC screen.. ............................................................................... 14-G-14
H Other Features.. ............................................................................................... 14-H-l
1 .OO Power Failure Transfer Assignment ...................................................... 14-H-l
14-3
A. Introduction
This section describes the information necessary
for monitoring, testing, and maintaining the
system using VT220 (VT1 00) or Compatibles in
interactive format.
The modular self-testing capabilities of the
system allow most maintenance to be reduced to
simple procedures.
You can administer the system programming and
maintenance of the system using a Vr220
(VT1 00), Compatibles, Dumb terminals or an
Attendant Console.
Only one terminal can be performing system
administration at any one time.
Changing the System Administration Device is
done by programming.
To execute the change, you must exit system
administration mode and then reenter system
administration mode.
14-A-l
B. System Administration

1.01 Logging in to the System

maintenance of the system using a VT220 (loo), terminal displays the Main Menu screen from
Compatibles. For details about communication which you can select administration functions.
parameters, refer to Section 9-O-7.00 By selecting an item from the Main Menu, you
“Communication Interface.” enter a system programming area and can
access specific system parameters and features.
System Security
For security reasons, access to the administration
capabilities of the system is controlled by a
password. To prevent an unauthorized person
from learning the password, the password
characters are not display4 when they are
entered.
Password
feature, a valid password {four-digit, alphanumeric
characters*) must be entered.
To be recognized by the system, the password
must be entered exactly as stored in memory.
You must assign eight passwords from the first to
fourth levels for on-site operation and the first to
fourth levels for operation from a remote location.
password level.
The 1st Level : To access to all levels
The 3rd Level : To set Port level parameters.
When you log in to the system using the first level
password, you can execute all functions, but are
increasingly restricted when entering levels 2, 3
and 4.
Those passwords are originally factory
programmed, but may be changed when logging
in to the system by enterirg the first level
password.
(Refer to Section 7-E “Changing Password.“)
etc.). However, entering ‘f’, U*” are not
available, because these characters cannot be
displayed on the display of PITS.
14-B-l
1.02 Administration Main Menu screen
Main Menu Screen
Main Menu 1 OFL j 1 LIN 1 DIR
1. ProgramminG
2. Test
3. Monitor
4. Print Out
5. Change Password
6. Change Date & iime
7. Backup Utility
8. Restart
9. Exit
i,.
Main Menu Items

The following list describes the features you can
administer through each of the Main Menu Items: ..
To select an item from the Main Menu, just type
the number of the item you want followed by the
return key.
1. Programming .- 6. Change Date & Time

Allows you to administer system-wide Allows you to change the date and time.
programming parameters.
7; Backup Utility ,.
2. Test Allows you to save and load the system “.
Allows you to test the status of cards, ports, programming data and the Attendant Console
resources and so on. database.
3. Monitor 8. Restart
Allows you to display the error log, Allows you to reset the system.
card/port/resource status and traffic
measurements. 9. Exit
Allows you to exit the administration mode.
4. Print Out
Allows you to print out the system
programming parameters and traffic
information.
5. Change Password
Allows you to change the current password.
14-B-2
2.00 System Administration from
a Remote Location
using a VT220 (loo), Compatibles or Dumb
terminals. Dial “Remote Directory Number” using Direct
Refer to Section 9-D-7.00 “Communication Inward System Access (DISA) feature.
For further information about “Remote Directory
Interface.”
Number,” refer to Section 9-D-l .02 “Operation
Conditions (2/a).” And for further information about DISA
feature, refer to Section 3-D-2.02 “Direct
l RMT card (Modem) must be installed in the Inward System Access (DISA).”
system and register the telephone number of
modem in the System-Operation “Remote Program DID feature so that the incoming
Directory Number” (FDN: 3-4 digits) for telephone number is converted to the “Remote
accessing the remote administration feature. Directory Number.”
For assignment of Remote Directory Number, For further information about DID feature, refer
refer to Section 9-D-l .02 “Operation (2f3).” to Section 3-D-2.03 “Direct Inward Dialing
(DID).”
l For remote access, a data terminal and modem
Assign that a call from a remote-location can
are required at a remote location.
access the Remote Administration feature
automatically using DIL (1:l) feature.
. l Factory programmed 4 types of password from
For further information about DIL (1:l) feature,
1st to 4th level for remote operation are
refer to Section 3-D-2.01 “Direct In Line (DIL).”
provided. Passwords are originally factory
programmed, but may be changed at any time. Remote access with assistance of the operator
(Refer to Section 7-E “Changing Password.“) The call from a remote location can be made
on any trunk into the system, and be answered
l You can execute remote system administration by the operator.
during on-line communication mode only. But The call is then placed on hold and the Remote
when you load the system programming data Directory Number of the system dialed is
from a remote location, the system shifts to off- received. The operator transfers the call after
line communication mode automatically. receiving the modem answer tone. The caller
Refer to Section 17-B-2.02 “Loading Procedure” at a remote location will then hear the modem
for details; answer tone andcan proceed with sign-on.
For further information, refer to Section 4-F-
l Starting up system administration from a remote 1.05 “Unscreened Call Transfer to Remote.”
location can be done only in Dumb mode, so to
enter VT mode, press jcTRl key + q key When the system administrator at a remote
simultaneously at the dumb mode initial screen. location accesses the system remote
administration feature, the following message
appears on the display of operator’s telephone if
display is provided.
1234:RMT Access
Only one system administration terminal can
access the system at a time.
14-B-3
C. Device Status
1.00 Service Commands and

Their Functions
COMMON AUTOCNF
Displays the cc,mma.od function mode. Lets you assign the telephone type to the system.
SHOW LV Refer to Section 7-J “Execution of Function

Modes” for details about command functions.
Lets you display the current password level.
CHG LV
Lets you change the password level.
INS
Changes the status of the target shelf, card, or
station to “In Service.”
ous
Changes the status of the target shelf, card, or
station to “Out of Service.”
REMOVE
. Removes the programmed parameters of target
device (when removing a device).
EXIT
Exits the general command mode and displays
the current command function screen.
INDEX
Lets you enter a specific programming screen.
COPY
Lets you copy programming parameters.
READ
Lets you read parameters from any progrmming
screen.
HRD CPY
Lets you print out the displayed programming
parameters.
14-C-l
1.01 INS (In Service) Command
Description
Changes the status of the target device ,shelf, Refer to Section 14-F “Functional Test by
card, port, station etc.) to “In Service” in on-line Entering Commands” for details about test
communication mode. command.
Conditions When you change the status of an upper device,

the status of lower devices changes as follows.
The status of the specified devices (she?. card,
port, station) should be “OUS” or “FAULT.’ Upper device OUS - INS
When you change the status of a lower device Lower device OUS - INS
(port, station) to “INS,” the upper device [shelf, Fault - Fault
card) should be changed to “INS” status
beforehand. Upper device Fault --t INS
If you try to change the lower device (port, Lower device Fault ----t INS
station) status to “INS” while upper device (shelf, ous - ous
card) is in “OUS” status, the error message Normal operation
“Invalid Status” appears on the screen. The following message appears on the screen.
Operation l **** OK
Press the function key INS. Operation failed
An error message apears on the screen in the
following cases.
CMD> In Service No. = xxxxxx
l Parameter error
l Not installed
l Status error
l INS failure (Diagnostic error)
..
Enter the number of the desired device.
For input values, see below:
Device Input Value
Shelf 1 to 3 (physical number)
Card 101 to 315 (physical number)
Port 1011 to 3158 (physical number)
Station DNxxxx (xxxx: extension number;

three or four digits) or Physical
number: four digits
AT-I- Al orA2or
Physical number: four digits
DTMF Rxxxy (xxx:Card number; y: t or 2)

CNF CFBxx or CFOyy (xx: 01 to 08.
yy: 01 to 64)
14-C-2
1.02 OUS (Out of Service) Command
Changes the status of the target device !,srtif. Press the function key OUS.
card, station etc.) to “Out of Service” in ori-ijne I
communication mode.
CMD>Out of Service No. = xxxx
Conditions
The status of target devices (shelf, card, port,
station) should be “INS.” Enter the number of the desired device. Four
input values, see below:
If the system administration terminal is an _:
Attendant Console (All-), do not change the Device Input Value
status of the following devices from “INS” to
“OUS.” Shelf 1 to 3 (physical number)
Card 101 to 315 (physical number)
l Shelf in which ATLC card is installed
l ATLC card Port 1011 to 3158 (physical number)
l Attendant console assigned as the System
Administration Terminal Station DNxxxx (xxxx: extension number;
three or four digits) or Physical
During a remote operation, do not changethe number: four digits
status of the following devices from “INS” to Al-l- Al or A2 or
“OUS.” Physical number: four digits S’C’
l Shelf in which RMT card is installed DTMF Rxxxy (xxx:Card number; y: 1 or 2)
l RMT card (Modem)
CNF CFBxx or CFOyy (xx: 01 to 08,
yy:Ol to64) ..
Refer to Section 14-F ‘Functional Test by

Entering Commands” for details about the test
command.
When you change the status of an upper device

(shelf, card), the status of .lower devices (port,
station) changes as follows.
Upper device INS - OUS
Lower device INS - OUS
Fault---t Fault
Normal operation
The following message appears on the screen.
l **** OK
Operation failed
An error message appears on the screen in the
following cases.
l Parameter error
l Not installed
l Status error
14-c-3
2.00 Definition of Operating
Status
2.01 Shelf, Slot, Resource 2.03 Interactions among Devices
Not-Installed: Interactions among Shelf, Slot, Port and

Resource are as follows.
Programming data for the target device are not
entered at all. In other words, even if the device Shelf>Slot>Port, or Shelf>Slot>Resource
is physically installed in the system, no (See the illustration below)
programming has been performed.
Out of Service (OUS):

Shelf
Programming data for the target device is
entered, but the target device is not assigned to
the system.
($z-:g>
In Service (INS):
The target device is operating normally.
Fault (FLT): l The resource is a lower device of a slot. There

are no interactions between resources and
The device is defective (hardware).
ports.
In this case the LED indicator on the card is lit.
(Example)
2.02 Port PB receiver on the SLC (Single tine Telephone
Circuit) card.
Not-Installed:
The slot (upper device of port) is not
programmed even though the card may be
physically installed.
Pre-Installed
Programming data for the slot (upper device of
port). is entered, but programming.data for the
port is not entered.
Out of Service (OUS):

Programming data for the target device is
entered, but the target device is not assigned to
the system.
In Service (INS):
The target device is operating normally.
Fault (FLT):
Defective device (hardware).
14-c-4
2.04 Changes of the Shelf Status
Removing the Expansion Shelf 4. Automatic recovery ‘.Fault--, INS)

When attempting to remove the expansion shelf,
the status of devices (slot, port, resource) in the Device in “Fault” status beames in good
target shelf should be changed to “Not-installed” status without any speciai care.
beforehand.
When you change the status of target shelf, the Expansion Shelf Fault-+ INS
status of devices in the shelf changes as follows. Slot Fault+ INS
Port Fault- INS
1. INS - OUS Resource Fault- INS
Expansion Shelf INS - OUS No changes in other status.

Slot INS - OUS
Port INS - OUS In case of “2. OUS - INS” and “3. INS -
.‘fs Resource INS - OUS Fault”, don’t care about “Fault” status of lower
device.
No changes in other status
(Note)
2. OUS - INS Up to two optional Expansion Selve? (1 and 2)
can be connected to the system for enlargement
Expansion Shelf OUS - INS of system’s ability.
Slot OUS - INS
Fault (defective
device)
Port OUS - INS
Fault (defective
device)
Resource OUS - INS
Fault (defective
device)
No changes in other status
I) 3. INS - Fault
Expansion Shelf INS -W Fault -

Slot INS + Fault
Port INS --F Fault
Resource INS --t Fault
No changes in other status.
14-c-5
2.05 Changes of the Slot Status
Canceling the Slot Assignment 3. ISS + Fault

Before canceling the slot assignment, the s:arus
of ports or resources assigned to the target slot SrOi INS --) Fault
should be changed to “Not-installed” or ‘Pre- Pon INS --) Fault
installed” beforehand. Resource INS 4 Fault
Slot Assignment No changes in other status.
The status of ports and resources installed in the FIFO communication is terminated.
target slot.
4. Fault --t INS
HLC --) Pre-installed
PLC --) Pre-installed Slot Fault- INS
SLC --) Pre-installed Port Fault- INS
LCOT ---) Pre-installed Resource Fault- INS
GCOT ---t Pre-installed
DID + Pre-installed No changes in other status.
ATLC - Pre-installed
OPX + Pre-installed FIFO communication begins.
DPH -+ Pre-installed
DISA - OUS In case of “3. INS---t Fault,” “4. Fault--t INS
AGC - OUS the “OUS” status of lower devices doesn’t
RMT - OUS change.
Resource (DTMF receiver) --) OUS
When you change the status of target slot, the

status of devices (port, resource) in the slot
changes as follows.
1. INS ---) OUS
Slot INS - OUS

Port INS - OUS
Resource INS ---) OUS
FIFO communication is terminated.
2. OUS - INS
Slot OUS - INS

Port OUS - INS
Fault (defective device)
Resource OUS - INS
Fault (defective device)
14-C-6
D. Self-Test (System-
Detected Troubles)
1.00 Error Record Display
1.01 Start Time of Self-Test 1.03 Printing Out the Automatic
Failure Reporting
Built-in diagnostic self-test program monitors the
troubles generated by hardware or software. The error log records can be printed out.
To perform the self-test, assign the desired start First connect the printer to the SIO #2 port on the
time of self-test in ‘System-Operation” Start Time basic shelf using RS-232C cable, then set
of Test. “System-operation” SMDR-Error Log to “Yes” by
Be careful not to access the system during this the system programming.
test. Refer to Section 9-D-l .02 “Operation (2/3)” for
Refer to Section 9-D-l .02 “Operation (2/3)’ for programming.
programming.
-.
i
_’ 7.02 Error Log
When a system maintenance object begins to fail
periodic testing, the system automatically
generates an error record. (Refer to Section 14-
G-2.00 “Error Log screen.“)
Depending on the severity, the record is stored in
one of two tables in the Error Log.
. The two tables are:
Error Loa (l/2) (Maior and Minor Alarm)
Up to 15 major or minor error records are stored
in this error log.The error tables are organized by
time of occurence.The newest error record
appears on the top of the screen.
If more than 15 errors have occured in that time,
error records already stored in the error log will be
overwritten, starting with the first.
Error Loa Q/2) (Liaht Alarm)

Up to-1 5 light error records can be stored in this
error log.
Other conditions are the same as error log (l/2).
Each error log screen (l/2)(2/2) exists

independently.
Deleting Error Log records (available only when

logged in to the system by entering the 1st Level
Password only)
When you exit the error log screen, the following
message appears on the screen.
=> Error Log clear ? (Y/N)
Error log records can be deleted by entering “Y.”
14-D-l
1.04 Local Alarm
Description
When the system detects a problem during on- 7. The alarm message on the display of FITS (if
line communication, an alarm message will be provided) disappears if making a call frsm that
displayed on the screen of the Attendant Console telephone; an incoming call arrives a: mat
or on the display of PITS (if provided) whose telephone; held call reminder occurs.
owner is assigned as operator 1. by pressing the The alarm message reappears on the display
ALARM key. when the PITS goes to on-hook.
Programming Operation
ALARM key (button) assignment To display the alarm message, press the ALARM
key (button) while ALARM LED is flashing or lit
(Attendant Console) steady.
ALARM key (Fixed feature key) If local alann occured during a conversation,
press the ALARM key (button) after replacing the
(PITS) handset then the alarm message will be
Reference displayed.
System Programming VT 1 Dumb
l An example of the alarm display
“Extension-Station (2/3),” 9-G-l .02 1O-C-24.00
DN key Type
‘Extension-Station (3/3),” 9-G-l .03 10-C-26.00 (Attendant Console)
DSS key Type JAN-25-91 6:31 AM MAJOR*AiARM I#041 0
Basic Shelf power down
Condition
(PITS)
1. When the system has detected the error, the
1 ERR 0410 POW DWN 1
ALARM LED on the Attendant Console or
PITS (Operator 1) automatically flashes in red To clear the displayed alarm message, press the
(Major Alarm) or is lit steady in red (Minor ALARM key (button) when the alarm message is
Alarm). displayed. The ALARM LED will be turned off
and the alarm message on the display of PITS (if
2. Local alarm is not shown if the Operator 1 is provided) or CRT screen of the Attendant
an SLT user. Console disappears.
3. If the ALARM button is not assigned to a

PITS, the local alarm doesn’t show.
4. The local alarm occurs only with operator 1 of

each tenant.
5. In case of a PITS without the display, the

ALARM LED is lit when the system detects an
error. To clear the error message press the
ALARM button twice.
6. When multiple troubles occur at a time, only

the most serious trouble appears on the
screen of attendant console or display of PITS
(if provided).
14-D-2
1.05 Remote Alarm
When ?he system detects a problem during on- Setting “System-Operation (2/3)” Remote Alarm
line communication, an error message appears to “Yes” is not available if the RMT card is not
on the screen of the remote maintenance device. installed.
For remote access, a data terminal and modem All systemdetected error messages are
are required at a remote location. displayed in the error log, but concerning “Local
Alarm,” or “Remote Alarm”, some error
Remote Configuration messages are displayed and some are not.
Refer to Section 14-D-2.03 “Background
Main Unit Data Terminal Diagnostic Error List” for details.
RMT
I’
Central
Off ice
Programming
To execute this feature, set “System-Operation,”
Remote Alarm to “Yes” and register the
telephone (Modem) number of the remote
. administration device in “Destination Address.” -.
Installing the RMT card is required for this
feature.
..
14-D-3
2.00 Clearing System-Detected
Troubles
2.01 Introduction
,Most system-detected troubles are reported via This record is interpreted as follows:
the alarm LED (light-emitting diode) indicators
located on the top shelf, each circuit card, 1. The year, month, date and time of the
Attendant Console and PITS. The following occurence.
covers general trouble-clearing techniques and
recpmmended procedures for identifying and 2. The severity of the error
clearing a variety of specific system troubles.
MAJOR ALARM-Error Log (l/2)
You can detect, report, and clear troubles in the MINOR ALARM-Error Log (l/2)
following three ways. Blank-Light Error-Error Log (2/2)
(1) Error Log 3. Error Code

(2) LED indicators on the Main Units Each error record has a specific errbr code.
(ALARM LED on the Top shelf, LEDs on the You can clear the troubles via the
cards) troubleshooting guide corresponding to the
(3) User-Reported Error error code.
(Including Automatic Failure Reporting, Local (Refer to Section 14-E-3.00 “Troubleshooting
Alarm, Remote Alarm) via Error Log Records.“)
. 2.02 Consulting the Error Log 4. Description

A description of the nature of the error.
Consulting the error log should be the first step in
diagnosing system-related troubles.
The error log is read by logging in to the system
administration terminal, selecting the Main Menu
item “3. Monitor,” and then selecting ‘1. Error
Log.”
Refer to Section 14-G-2.00 “Error Log Screen.”
The error log is comprised of the following two
error tables.
Error Log (l/2) (Major and Minor Alarms)

Error Log (2/2) (tight Alarms)
Each error record is reported as one line on the

screen.
Error Log (l/2) and Error Log (2/Z) use the same
format and exist independently.
These error records provide the location of the
error, the date and time of the occurence, and a
description of the error.
A typical error record from the error log is as

follows:
Error Log (l/2)
MAR-20-90 8:39 AM MAJOR ALARM #I400 Basic shelf power down
1 2 3 4
14-D-4
2.03 Background Diagnostic Error List
Basic shelf AC power down
Legend:
MJ-Major Alarm X : applied
MN-Minor Alarm Blank : not applied
PFT-Power Failure Transfer
LED-Refer to Section 14-E-2.00 “Troubleshooting via the LED indicators.”
14-D-5
E. Troubleshooting Guide
1 .OO Introduction
This subsection uses system troubleshooting flow
chats to guide the service personnel in efficient
and systematrc testing and fault location.
The system troubleshooting flow charts provides
service personnel with a step-by-step sequence
to use for system evaluation. Isolated steps in a
flow chart should never be used out of context,
since any step assumes that proper results were
obtained on all previous tests.
14-E-l
2.00 Troubleshooting via the LED Indicators
When the system detects a problem, the alarm LED indicator located on the top shelf will turn red.
(Refer to the figure below)
If the detected trouble is generated by a card, the alarm LED indica?or on the card will light up simultane-
ously.
(Refer to the table below)
When the trouble is cleared, the alarm LED indicator located on the top shelf goes off automatically.
LED Indicators on the Top Shelf LED indicators on the CPU card
0 <l>
Panasonic
RUN OFFLINE ALARM
0 45
on 0
Location of LED Indicators
LED on the Card Possible contents Error Code

I I
..
ON System Down None
(CPU<1 >)
RAM OAXX
ON
(CPU&?>) Calendar 0700
Backup Battery ocoo
Clock 0300 .
1 Progress Tone 1; 0600 I
ON 1~~ C&&al Conference TSW I 0900 I
U-SW) 1 OHCATSW Do00
! I
ON DTMF G/R for test FFFF
Link 1oxx
Card Type Error 21xx
ON ROM llxx
0-W
RAM 12xx
MODEM 14xx
Card is not installed 13xx
AC/DC Power Supply 0410
None 0500
0510
I SMDR Communication I OBOO I
14-E-2
Troubleshooting via the LED indicators
A:arm LED on
*; Yes
No
Check the status of the
followings
CPU RAM
l
TSW
l
OHCASW
l
CONFSW
l
LPR
l
SMDR
l
I
Fault
Not Fault
I I
Is Error Log record printed
out?
No
Is the Local Alarm reported?
Yes
I
No
No
q
Infer the defective device 1 Troubleshoot by consulting
through the User’s report or f the Error Lo{ Record List
the indication of theLED on
the card
L NG
OK
Consutt the nearest Service

Center
I End I
14-E-3
3.00 Troubleshooting via Error Log Records
3.01 Error Log Record List

Background Diagnostic Errors
ERR Sever- AUTOMATIC FAILURE REPORT 1 LOCAL ALARM ESSAGE

COMMENTS ;
CODE Iw (SMDR) MESSAGE Al-r PITS
0100 MJ bVDToverflow
0200 MJ SOfl timer overflow
0300 MJ TSW clock down TSW Clock Down TSW DWN
0400 MJ Basic shelf power down DC power down
0410 MN Basic shelf power down B-Shelf POW Down P&W DWN 4C power down
050n MJ Expansion shelf n (l/2) power dowr E-Shelf POW Down POW DWN 3C power down
051n MN Expansion shelf n (l/2) power dowr E-Shelf POW Down POW DWN 4C power down
0600 MN Progress tone failure Tone Failure DIAL TN
0700 MN Check date/time Check Date/Time CLCK IC
0800 MN Conference trunk failure CONF TRK Failure CONF I-K III basic trunk failure
08bb -- Conference trunk failure :runk failure
0900 MN Conference trunk failure CONF TRK Failure CONF TK 111optional trunk failun
09tt -- Conference trunk failure :runk failure
OAZZ MN System memory error SYS Memory Error SYS MEM sad error
MJ System memory error -. SYS Memory Error SYS MEM write/read error
OBOO MN SMDR Not Connect SMDR
ocoo MN CPU RAM backup battery down Battery Down BATTERY
1oxx MN Card link failure Card Link Failure CRD LNK
llxx MN LPR ROM checksum error LPR ROM Failure CRD ROM
12xx MN LPR RAM failure LPR RAM Failure CRD RAM
1300 MJ Card disconnect Card Disconnect DISCNCT lSW card
13xx MN Card disconnect Card Disconnect DISCNCT
14xx MN Modem failure MODEM Failure MODEM
2oxx -- LPR memory checksum error oaded data failure
21xx -- Card type error -’ mcl type error
22xx r- LPR runaway 3R runaway
5oxx -- OGM CPU runaway X;M CPU runaway
51xx MN OGM lost OGM Lost OGM LOS
6Oxx MN OPX power down OPX Power Down OPX POW
61xx MN OPX power down (bell) OPX Power Down OPX POW
8Oxx MN DTMF generator failure DTMF G. Failure DTMF G.
9rxx MN DTMF receiver failure DTMF R. Failure DIMF R.
Ayxx MN Tone detector failure Tone Detector TN DTCT
Byxx MN HDLC failure HDLC Failure HDLC
cyxx -- Port link failure
DO00 MN OHCA SW failure OHCA SWFailure OHCA SW
Dyxx _- OHCA not installed
FFFF MN TSW DTMF G./R. failure TSW Failure TSW FLT
.egend:
MJ-Major Alarm
MN-Minor Alarm
14-E-4
3.02 System Reset caused by CPU Runaway (Restart Procedure)
Error Code 0100 = Overflow of the watch dog timer.

0200 = Software Infinite Loop
Possible cause of 1) External circumstance, such as introduced noise

the malfunction 2) Hardware is defective
Countermeasures
Does the trouble occur frequently?
Yes No
I
I Replace the CPU card*

I
I
OK
No change in
condition
I Replace the TSW card I

No change in OK
condition
Remove the LPR cards one by one
No change in I OK
condition
jl b,
No change in
condition t
I Consult the Service Center I
&I End
Note 1) If a reset occurs 16 times/in one hour due to overflow of the watch dog timer,
the restart procedure is not activated and the system will be shut down.
Press the RESET button to restart the procedure.
l It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to
facilitate accurate and rapid recovery.
14-E-5
3.03 TSW clock down
Error Code 0300
Possible cause of 1) TSW card connection error

the malfunction 2) TSW card clock link failure
Countermeasures
After confirming the TSW card
connection, press the RESET
button
Is the trouble registered in the Error

Log ?
Yes
’ y Yes
>
Replace the TSW card

No change in OK
condition
I Replace the Shelf
<
Y
.;I3 I End I
-.
:
Note If the TSW clock malfunction occurs:

1) The attendant console does not function.
(Communication to the LPR becomes impossible)
2) Calling becomes impossible
3) Power Failure Transfer will be activated
14-E-6
3.04 Basic shelf power down (DC)
Error Code 0400 /
Possible cause of 1) AC power cord is unplugged

the malfunction 2) Power Failure
3) Power Switch is turned off
4) Malfunction in the Power Supply Unit of the Basic Shelf, or the trouble with
the Power Supply System (Backboard, CPU card) of the Shelf
Countermeasures
No
1 Does the trouble occur frequently? 1
Yesyy
No change in OK
,.
condiiion w
I Replace the CPU card*
No change in OK
3
condition
Reolace the Shelf I
Note l It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to

14-E-7
3.05 Basic shelf power down (AC)
Error Code 0410
Possible cause of 1) AC power cord is unplugged

the malfunction 2) Power Failure
3) Malfunction of Power Unit of the Basic.Shelf or Power Supply System
(Backboard, CPU card) failure of the Shelf.
Countermeasures
Did the above item 1) or 2) occur at
the recorded time of the Error Log?
“.) Yes
No I
G
Does the troubles occur frequently ?
I
+ 1
No
3l
I
Replace the Power Supply unit
No change in --’ OK
1
condition ”
Replace the CPU card’ 1
No change in OK
>
condition v
Replace the Shelf
I
I
Note 1) It is desirable to store the system programming data on a floppy disc or tape
to facilitate accurate and rapid recovery, considering the limited running time
(about 3 years) of the backup battery in case the Power Failure continues for
a long time.
14-E-8
3.06 Expansion shelf power down ( DC )
Error Code 050n

n = 1 : Expansion Shelf 1
2 : Expansion Shelf 2
Possible cause of 1) Power switch of the Expansion Shelf n (n=l or 2) is turned off.
the malfunction 2) Malfunction of Power Supply Unit of the Expansion Shelf, or trouble with the
Power Supply System(Backbcard, CPU card) of the shelf
Countermeasures Did the above item 1) occur at the

recorded time of the Error Log ?
No Yes
Is a new error recorded in the Error

Log, when the RESET button is
pressed ?
Yes
,No
Does the trouble occur frequently ?

No
1 Yes
Y
Replace the Power Supply Unit
No change in ‘CK
condition Y
Replace the CPU card* I
OK
No change in
condition Y
Repiace-the Expansion Shelf
I
c
Y
I End I

14-E-9
3.07 Expansion shelf power down ( AC )
Error Code 051n

n = 1 : Expansion Shelf 1
2 : Expansion Shelf 2
Possibk cause of
the malfunction 1) Power failure
2) Power Supply Unit malfunction of the Expansion Shelf n (n=l or 2), or trouble
with the Power Supply System (Backboard, CPU card) of the Shelf
Countermeasures
Is there a new error message in the

I Yes 1 F;;rozd;hen th;rSET button /
Does the trouble occur frequently ? 1 No

I
Yes
Replace the Power Supply Unit 1
No change in ..OK
condition Y
Replace the CPU card*
I
OK
No change in
condition
.
..I Y
Replace the Shelf
^_. I
I
l It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to

14-E-10
3.08 Progress tone failure (TSW card)
Error Code 0600
Possible cause of 1) Defective progress tone IC on the TSW card

the malfunction 2) Defective Tone Detector on the TSW card
Countermeasures Can 4 types of tones’be heard from

a telephone ?
No Yes
I 1
/msTSWl1~~~~~~r~~
/
Replace the Progress Tone IC on
I
I
Is there a new related error mes-
sage in the Error Log, after pressing
the RESET button ?
No
Yes I
L
No good
I Replace the TSW card
1 ..
OK
Y
I
Note 1) Unless the Call Progress Tone failure is cleared, the following item is not
executed
lTone Detector for the DISA / AGC card
*l . Refer to Section 3-B “Basic Features” for details about the 4 types of
tones
l 2. Consult the nearest service center
14-E-l 1
3.09 Check date /time (Real Time Clock IC)
Error Code 0700
Possible cause of 1) Count up of the Real T!me Clock IC is stopped

the malfunction 2) Variances between the CPU clock and the calender clock became greater
than +30 minutes per 12 hours
Countermeasures
Confirm the time displayed on the
PITS/ATT
Is the displayed time correct ?

No
1 I
Is the Real Time Clock IC counting

up ?
I Yes
1 Set the time from the ATT, PITS, 1

1 maintenance termI etc. 1 ,.
Is the Real Time Clock IC set cor-

rectly and counting up correctly ?
No Yes
Y
Replace the CPU card* 1 pnd 1
I
* It is recommended to have a current copy of the program on disk or tape to

14-E-l 2
3.10 Conference trunk failure (Basic)
Error Code 080x

x= 0 : for all basic conference trunks (1 to 8 )
1 to 8 : for individualbasic conference trunk 1 to 8
Possible cause of 1) Basic conference trunk on TSW card failure.

the malfunction
. .
Countermeasures
Note l Refer to Section 14-F-4.03 “Port Test procedure.”
14-E-13
3.11 Conference trunk failure (Option)
Error Code 09 xx
xx= 00 : for all optional conference tr<'Jnks(0’ !o 64).
01 to 64 : for individual optional conference trunk 01 to 64.
Possible cause of 1) Optional TSW Conference Expansion card on the TSW card is defective.
the malfunction 2) Malfunction of the TSW card.
Countermeasures Enter test command to check the

.\ faulty trunk from the maintenance
7 terminal
I Pass
Fault 1 I
Enter INS command
Replace the optional TSW
from the maintenance
Conference Expansion Card
- .terminal _
I
1
After turning the power switch on,
check the optional conference trunk
status L
INS
Fault 1
Replace the TSW card
Note None
14-E-l 4
3.12 System memory error (Major)
Error Code OAxx

xx= 01 ; RAM IC 1
08 : RAM IC 8
Possible cause of 1) RAM IC of the CPU card failure.

the malfunction (Including Input/Output bus)
Countermeasures
I Replace the CPU card’
I
Enter the system data 1
End I

facilitate accurate and rapid recovery. ..
. I
14-E-15
3.13 System memory error (Minor)
Error Code OAxx

xx= 01 : RAM IC 1
r) 0
08 :RAMIC8
Possible cause of 1) intermittent defect of RAM IC on the CPU card.

the malfunction (Including input/Output bus)
2) Introduced noise.
Countermeasures
1 Eyterthermda; 1
I End I
Note None
14-E-16
3.14 Device not connect for SMDR
Error Code OBOO
Possible cause of 1) RS-232C cable is not connected.

the malfunction 2) RS-232C cable is defective.
3) Printer is turned off. (including out of paper)
Countermeasures
I Do you use SMDR? ” I
No
Yes
I 1
Check above ite Assign SMDR to “No” in the
I system programming
No Problem NG ,
Y
Replace the CPU card*
I I
I
r
..

14-E-17
3.15 CPU RAM backup battery down
Error Code ocoo
Possible cause of 1) Defective rechargeable lithium battery on the CPU card

ihe malfunction 2) Defective CPU card
Countermeasures
rAfter replacing lithium battery,*’
turn on the POWER switch I
Is there a new related error mes-

sage in the Error Log?
No
Yes
w
Replace the CPU card l 2
I _
I
L Enter the system data

I
I End I
$ Note
‘1. Consult the nearest service center
l 2. It is recommended to have a current copef the program on diskor tape
to facilitate accurate and rapid recovery.
14-E-l a
3.16 Card link failure (LPR)
1
Error Code to 12
xx= 01 to 42 : Slot number 13to27 Expansion Shelf 1
1 oxx 01 to 42
28 Expansion
Basic Shelf Shelf 2
Possible cause of 1) Defective FIFO (First In First Out) trouble in LPR.
the malfunction 2) Input/Output trouble (CPU card, Shelf).
Countermeasures
1 Fault
Fault 4.
Replace the faulty LPR card
.i -
the maintenance terminal I

I OK .
Fault L ‘I
1 Replace thi CPU card’ 1
+
;Enter card test command frqm
the maintenance temMal
OK
Fault >
Enter INS command from the
I maintenance terminal
I. I
I v I
I End I

14-E-19
3.17 LPR ROM checksum error
Error Code llxx

xx= 01 to 42 : Slot number
Possible cause of 1) LPR ROM check&m error

the malfunction
Countermeasures Replace the ROM of faulty

LPR card
”
I End I
None
:).
14-E-20
3.18 LPR RAM failure
Error Code 12xx

Possible cause of 1) LPR RAM failure

the malfunction
Countermeasures
1 Replace the frlty LPR card 1
None
14-E-21
3.19 Card disconnect
Error Code 13xx

xx= 00 : TSW
01 to’42 : Slot number
Possible cause of 1) Card connection error

the malfunction 2) Defective CPU card
Countermeasures
Tsw ;I
connectron, press the RESET button
..
)
Is there a new related message in
the Error Log
I No
1
Yes 1
After replacing CPU card,
turn on the POWER switch
INS
Fault >
1
I
I
Replace the Shelf I I
k
LPR
--. .
NG
After replacing the LPR card, enter
kcard INScom~
After replacing the CPU card, turn*

on the POWER switch I INS
Fault 1
Replace the Shelf I
I I
End I

14-E-22
3.20 Modem failure (RMT card)
Error Code 14xx

Possible cause of 1) Modem failure

the malfunction
Countermeasures
I Replace the card I
I End I
Note None
C’-
14-E-23
3.21 LPR memory checksum error
Error Code 20xX.

xx= 01 to 42 : 530: wmSe’
Possible cause of 1) Defective LPR RAM

the malfunction
Countermeasures
1Check the status of the related card 1
INS
Fault w
maintenance terminal
G , I
1 Check the status of the card 1 I
Fault
r
I ReDlace the LPR card
I
I
Note None
14-E-24
3.22 Card type error (LPI?)
Error Code 21 xx.

xx= 01 lo 42 : Slot number
Possible cause of 1) Assigned card type doesn’t correspond to the installed card type.
the malfunction
Cduntermeasures I I
/ WZy;oth; card ysignment or 1
replace the installed card with
Note None
14-E-25
3.23 LPR runaway
Error Code 22xX

Possible cause of 1) LPR is reset

the malfunction
Countermeasures
1 Check the status of the related card 1
INS
Fault
I
I Check the status of the card

I INS
Fault ‘- 1
I 1 I
1 1 Replace th,e LPRcard 1 1 ,. End 1

maintenance terminal
I
Note None
14-E-26
3.24 OGM CPU runaway (DISA)
Error Code 50 xx
Possible cause of 1) Runaway of the OGM (CPU) of the DiSA card

the malfunction
Countermeasures Is it possible to play the OGM through

the telephone of the operator 1 ?
Yes
No
After entering OUS command,
enter the card test command from
the maintenance terminal
Pass
Fault
Replace the DISA card
I
Y
Enter the card INS command
from the maintenance terminal
c
Y
I End I
None
14-E-27
3.25 OGM lost (DISA)
Error Code 51xx

Possible cause of 1) Power failure or power-off for long duration (6-7 days).
the malfunction 2) Defective backup battery for DISA card.
3) OGM was not recorded after the installation.
Countermeasures
After confirming the OGM recording/
Operator 1, press the RESET button
piGzp!g , .?,=.
..,
None
14-E-28
3.26 OPX power down
Error Code 60 xx
Possible cause of 1) Power-off of external OPX Power Unit.

the malfunction 2) Defective OPX card.
Countermeasures Check the port status of the related

OPX card
No “Fault” port
Faufty port
v
Check external OPX Power Unit
(Power, Power cable, Connector
etc.).
w
Check the port status of the related
OPX card
No change in INS status

condition v
Replace the OPX card. ..
Power on the external OPX Power
Unit and then, enter INS command
from the maintenance terminal
t
v
n:.: End
I
Note None
14-E-29
3.27 DTMF generator failure (COT card)
Error Code 80 xx
Possible cause of 1) DTMF generator on the LCOT/GCOT card is defective.

the malfunction 2) DTMF signal transmission path is defective.
Countermeasures
Set the smallest physical extension

number (SLC/HLC) port to OUS,
enter port test command for 2 ports
(COT-SLC)
Fault
Pass
v
Set the related port to INS I
L
v v
Confirm that a CO outgoing call Perform thesame test for
through the faulty port is possible other SLCYHLC cards
from
OK NG Fault Pass
V v
Replace the COT card Replace the faulty card
II I
.-
I
+, ^
None
14-E-30
3.28 DTMF receiver failure (SLC/HLC/OPX card)
Error Code 9 rxx

r= 1 to2 : DTMF Receiver number
Possible cause of 1) Defective DTMF receiver.

the malfunction 2) Defective path for the DTMF receiver from the faulty port.
Countermeasures
Is the DTMF dialing (O-9, *, #)

from the extension SLT in the faulty
card acceptable ? I
I
I NG
1
recetver to INS, perform port test for
I,] /
rbmbered COTcard’ J
I’
II OK .
NG
Replace the TSW card, and perform
e test as above -
NG
Replace the faulty card, and perform
the same test as above
OK ,4
I
Replace the shelf I
/I
Note None
14-E-31
3.29 Tone detector failure (DISA/AGC card)
Error Code AY=

Y= 1 to4 : Port number
Possible cause of 1) Tone detector failure

the malfunction 2) Defective tone receiving path from the faulty port.
Countermeasures Set the faulty port to OUS, enter the

port test command
I Pass
Note None
3
-.i
14-E-32
3.30 HDLC failure (ATLC card)
Error Code B yxx

Y= 1to 2 : Port number
Possible cause of 1) Defective HDLC IC

the malfunction
Countermeasures
Fault
1 I
I Replace the faulty ATLC card 1 I
Note None
14-E-33
3.31 Port link failure (AlT/DPH)
Error Code c yxx

y= 1 to 8 : Port number
Possible cause of 1) Communication disconnection due to unplugged terminal etc.

the malfunction
Countermeasures
Check the status of the faulty port
INS
Fault V
Is AC power cord unplugged from AC power cord was
the terminal? unplugged
I
3
Not unplugged
I Replace the terminal I
I OK
3
check the status of the faulty port

INS
I 3
Fault
Replace the LPR card
1
.- End I
Note None
14-E-34
3.32 OHCA SW failure (TSW card)
Error Code D 000
Possible cause of 1) “OHCA” is assigned to BS02 in the slot assignment, but TSW-OHCA card
the malfunction (KX-T336105) is not installed
Countermeasures Do you use ‘OHCA” ?

No
Yes
v
r
Is the VSW-OHCA” card
installed ?
Yes
/Cnang.h; 1 Rep,, t:TSW card 11 Install the>-OHCA card, i
<
v
I End I
Note None
\ 14-E-35
3.33 OHCA not installed (PLUHLC)
Error Code D yxx

YX= 91 :o 42 : Slot number
Y= 1 to 8 : Port number
Possible cause of 1) In spi!e of assigning “OHCA” to “Yes” in the station programming, OHCA
the malfunction circuit card (KX-T96136) is not installed.
Countermeasures I Do you use “OHCA” 1
No
Is the “OHCA” circuit

installed in the faulty port
.. .I No,
I End 1
Note None
14-E-36
3.34 TSW DTMF G./R. failure
Error Code FFFF
Possible cause of 1) DTMF Generator or Receiver for test is defective

the malfunction
_..
Countermeasures Replace the TSW card
I
I
End 1I
Note None
14-E-37
4.00 Troubleshooting via User-Reported Troubles
If a problem is not detected by the system, a report from :he user IS very useful to
determine the trouble.
The basic procedure to determine the cause of the trouble according to a report
from the user is shown in the following flow chart.
1 User-Reporte(Troubles 1
Can related error message be read

out? I
No Yes
Check the status of the device from

lfhe maintenance trinaf 1
Not fault
Is the failure report printed out?
Yes
No V
Is the Local Alarm reported?

Yes
No
Is the Remote Alarm reoorted? Yes
,
I
“1’““*“‘“‘““9”““’
infer the probable defective device
I c
Detect failures according to the
Error Code
.
NG \L NG
OK
Replace the probable defective
Ldevice
I OK
L1 I
1.
Enter the rrn data 1
<
14-E-38
F. Functional Test by
Entering Commands
1 .OO Introduction
1. You can execute diagnostrc testing tucng on- 6. When you perform a device (shelf, card, port,
line communication by entering tes: . resource) test, the status of the device to be
commands at the maintenance termrnal tested must be changed to “Out of service”
(VT220, VT1 00, Compatibles, Dumb terminal, by entering the OUS command in advance.
Attendant Console). If an attempt is made to test a device in “INS”
status, the following message appears on the
2. Execute this functional test in the following screen.
cases. “invalid Status”
l When new devices are installed 7. You can test a device in “Fault” status.
l When the device combination is changed
l When system detects an alarm or an error 8. If the device test results in failure, first change
message appears in the error log- the status of the device to ‘Faulr and replace
l When device status becomes ‘Fault” it with a normal one if necessary.
l When a number of telephone instruments
don’t function properly 9. It is impossible to execute functional test
during off-line communication mode.
3. There are three kinds of tests as follows.
1O.The <CANCEL>, <NEXT> or <PREV> keys
(a) Card Test do not function during the test.
If multiple numbers of extensions do not
function well, you can detect whether
troubles are caused by the card or the
telephone instruments by this test.
(b) Port Test
(c) PITS and ATT (Attendant Console) Test
* Test (b), (c) are executed to detect troubles

when telephone instruments don’t function
well while card status is good.
4. This functional test must be done during

on-line communication mode both at on-site
and from a remote location. For remote
access, a data terminal and modem are
required at a remote location, and you must
install the RMT card in‘the system and assign
Remote Directory Number to the system in
system programming operation ‘Remote
Directory Number.”
Refer to Section 14-B-2.00 “System
Administration from a Remote Location” for
details.
5. Functional test can be done only when you

log in to the system by entering the 1st level
password.
14-F-l
2.00 Test Main Menu
From the Main Menu screen, select “2. Test”;
then the following “Test Main Menu” appears on
the screen. .
TestMain Menu 1 ONL 1 TST 1 LIN 1 DIR
1. CardTest
2. PostTest
3. PITSand Al7 Test
Description
1. Card Test -------Verifies the card status.
2. Port Test --------Verifies the port status.
3. PITS and ATT Test -----Verifies the PITS and AlT(Attendant Console) status.
14-F-2
3.00 Testing the Cards
3.01 Functions to be Verified
This test verifies the status of each card for the

items listed below:
Remarks
SLC Link ;ard to be verifiec

.PLC Card type hould ba ‘OUS”
HLC ROM tr ‘FAULT.”
LCOT RAM
GCOT
DID
ATLC
AGC
OPX Link
Card type
ROM
RAM
Power Supply
DISA Link
Card type
ROM
RAM
OGM RedPlay
RMT Link
Card type
ROM
RAM
Modem
I
DPH Card Type
14-F-3
3.02 Card Test Initial screen
From the test main menu screen, select '1. Card

Test " then the following “Card Test” initial screen
CardTest 1 ONL( TST 1 LIN 1 DIR

Tested at12:05AM 09/JUL/90
1
Basic 01 PLC 01 PLC !Expansion 01 LCOT
Shelf 02 PLC 02 PLC Self2 02 LCOT
03 PLC 03 PLC *. 03 LCOT
04 PLC 04 PLC 04 LCOT
10 PLC IO PLC 10 ATLC
11 PLC 11 PLC 11 DPH
12 PLC 12 LCOT 12 RMT
13 LCOT 13
14 14
15 15
P: Pass,l-F:Fau%
=>
..
(Note) In the above screen, no indication means
no card is installed.
14-F-4
3.03 Card Test procedure
Enter the test command according to the card test

format below.
=> x y y
TL cardNo.(o,-15,or**)
Shelf No. (1: Basic 2: Expansion 1
3: Expansion 2)
(Note) “*” can be used as a wild card character

&*” or yJc** means “All
1** means all cards in the basic shelf
(Example)
Executing card No. 208 test
2
3
4
(Note) When you test the DISA card, the following

message appears on the screen
=> 105 cOGM Test ? Y/N/C>
When you select “Y”, the previously recorded OGM

message is erased.
When you finish the card test, go to the Test Main

Menu by pressing the <END> key.
14-F-5
3.04 Card Test Results screen
Card Test 1 ONL] TST 1 1 DIF

Tested at 12:05 AM OE JU9(
Basic 01 PLC -7 Expansion 01 PLC P Expansion 01 LCOT P
Shelf 02 PLC 1 self 1 02 PLC 2 Self 2 02 LCOT P
03 PLC 5 03 PLC P 03 LCOT P
05 PLC 5 05 PLC 05 LCOT
10 PLC IO PLC IO LCOT
f 12 PLC 12 LCOT 12 LCOT
13 LCOT 13 ATLC
14 LCOT 14 DPH
15 LCOT 15 RMT
-
P: Pass, 1-F: Fault
=> 107
***** Failed
Description
Card Test Error Code List ..
Error Code Description

1 A card is not installed in the specified slot.
2 Card link error
.i) 3 Assigned card type die& correspond to the installed card type
4 Card ROM error
5 Card RAM error
6 RMT card failure (Modem failure)
7 ---------------------
8 ---------------------
9 OPX power down

A OPX power down (Bell)
I I
B OGM Recording/Playing back failure
C -----------_---______
I F TSW card PB generator/PB receiver failure
14-F-6
4.00 Testing the Ports
This test verifies the status of the ports for the functions listed below.
1. By entering the physical port number (Except pairs of extension and CO ports)
Card Functions Remarks
PLC OHCA Detect Port to be tested should

HLC be ‘OUS” or ‘FAULT”
ATLC HDLC
DISA Speech Path

DTMF Receiver
Tone Detector
AGC Speech Path

Repeater
Tone Detector
2. By entering the physical port number of extension and CO ports in pairs.
1 Card Functions Remarks
LCOT Speech Path 2 Ports to be tested should ..

Loop Current be ‘OUS” or ‘FAULT.”
Bell Detect SLC, HLC. OPX and DTMF
DNF Dial (DTMF Generator) receiver to be tested should
Pulse Dial be “OUS” or “FAULT.”
GCOT Speech Path

DTMF Dial (DTMF Generator)
Pulse Dial
SLC Speech Path

HLC Bell
OPX DTMF Detector (DTTvIFReceiver)
Pulse Detect
14-F-7
4.02 Port lest Initial screen
+Test I ONLi TSTl I DIR

Tested at 12:05 AM 09NUU90
Slot Basic Shelf Expansion Shelf 1 Expansion Shelf 2

000000000111 000000000111111 000000000111111
123456789012 123456789012345 123456789012345
1 -- ___-_--__ _--__-_ 0-e -_____---__

_' ---
2 -- _--m---m- _ _ _- - - - -__m-------
p 3 -- __-__--__ _--_--- --- -----------
0 4 -- ___----__ ---_--_ e-e -______---_
r 5 -- _____--__ ---_--- --- ---o-e-----
t 6 __ _________ _______ ___ --_--------
7 -_ -_-__-___ _ _ _- - - - __- -______-___
8 -- _____--__ _ _ __ - _ - _-- -e--e------
P:Pass,l-F:Fault
(Note) U-mmark in the above screen indicates that

the port is not assigned or the card type is
not LCOT, GCOT, SLC, PLC, HLC, OPX,
DISA, AGC, or ATLC.
..
14-F-8
4.03 Port Test procedure
Enter the test command according to the following (2) => C F 0

format.
(Refer to Section 14-F-4.01 “Functions to be Optional conference trunk
Tested.“) No. (01-84)
(Example)
(a) When testing the port status on the following =>CFOOl
cards. (PLC, HLC, ATLC, DISA, AGC)
(Note) Conference trunk test can be done at the

port test screen and the test result is
I Port No. (l-8, or * )
displayed just under the entered
Card No. (01-15 or **)
command as follows.
Shelf No. ( 1: Basic 2: Expansion 1
3: Expansion 2)
=>CFBOl
*****Pass
(Note) y *” or ‘**” means “All”
=> 2***...All ports in the Expansion Shelf 1

=> 105* . . ..All ports assigned to the card No.05
in the Basic Shelf
(Example)
Executing port 211 testl
I (b) When testing extension (SLC, HLC, OPX) port

and CO trunk port (LCOT, GCOT) in pairs
=>Extension port No. & CO trunk port No.
WwvW _--.
: .
=> 1011&2011
=> DN4000&2012
(c) To verify the status of the speech path of the

specified conference trunk, enter the conference
trunk No. as follows.
Before testing, change the status of target con-
ference trunk to Qut of Service” by entering
OUS command.
Refer to Section 14-G-3.04 ‘Conference Trunk
Status screen.”
(1) => C F B I_t
I Basic conference trunk No.

(01-08)
14-F-9
4.04 Port Test Results screen
-es&d at 12:05 AM 09NUU9
slot saslc Shelf Expansion Shelf 1 Expansion Shelf 2

oc 3000000111 000000000111111 000000000111111
123456789012 123456789012345 123456789012345
1 - - p- - - - - - - - - ____-_--_-_ P
2 --p _-----__- ---__-_ - -- ____-_----_ P
P 3 _ .. 3. __ _ _ - - _ _ _ _-_____ ___ _-_--_--m-e P
0 4 - . p. - - - - _- - - _-_____ --- e----_-*--- P
r 5 --p ___-__--- -----__ --_ __--____-__ P
t 6 - - p- _ _ _ - _ - - - ------- - _- ___--___--_ P
7 - - p- _ - - _ _ - - - --_---- -_- __--___---_ P
8 _ _ p- _ _ _ _ - - - - _-_____ --- -_-_-_----- 2
P: Pzss, 1-F: Fault
i’-.COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 :.i’-

.&
Port Test Error Code List

Port Pair When you have completed the port test, go to the
Code Description
test test test main menu by pressing <END> key.
1 Loop current failure - 0 (Note)
2 Bell detection failure -
10 If you want to verify the status of’the DTMF re-
I ceiver (1 or 2), change it’s status to “Out of
3 1 PB Generator failure I- lol Service” by entering OUS command and verify
the status of a card which contains DTMF
4 1 Dial pulse failure I-Id receivers.
SLC, HLC and OPX card contains two DTMF . ./
5 PB Receiver 1 failure lo 101 receivers respectively.
t I I For further information about OUS command,
6 I PB Receiver 2 failure I-101 refer to Section 14-C-l -02 “OUS command.”
7 Tone detection circuit 1 failure 0 -
This port test is available only for ports on the
8 Tone detection circuit 2 failure 0 - following cards.
LCOT, GCOT, SLC, PLC, HLC, DISA, AGC,
lol-I OPX, and ATLC card.
I A I OHCA card is not installed l0l-l When you test the SLC, HLC, OPX, LCOT and
GCOT cards, change the status of both exten-
I B I Pulse detection failure I- lol sion port and CO port to “OUS.”
I I C Speech path failure

HoI If a trouble is caused by a card, an error mes-
sage “Card Fault” appears on the screen.
14-F-10
5.00 Testing PITS and AlT
Tn~s test verifies the status of a PITS or an Attendant Console (ATT) for the
functions listed below.
Card to be verified Function Remarks
PLC Link (All types of PITS) Card to be tested should be

HLC DTMF generator (KX-T1232300, . “OUS’or “FAULT.”
KX-T123235 and KX-l7130)
ATLC Link
DTMF generator
ROM
RAM
14-F-l 1
5.02 PITS and Al7 Test Initial screen
F'ITSand AnTest 1 ONLl TSTi I DIR

Tested at 12:05 AM 09NUU90 I
Basic Shelf Eqmsion Shelf 1 Expansion Shelf 2
000000000111 000000000111111 000000000111111
123456789012 123456789012345 123456789012345
-----m-e---
__________-
__-_______-
-----__---_
----m__----
-.. __--____--_
5
_---_______
_________--
P:Pass, I-F:Fautt
(Note) u-” mark in above screen indicates that no

ports are assigned to a PITS or an ATT
(Attendant Console) .\
14-F-12
5.03 PITS and ATT Test procedure
A PITS ant ah 47 IPZ! can be done according to the

following three !es! ‘ormats.
(a) => D N g o d c
- Directory number (three or four
digits)
(Example) => DN 4000
Executing DN4000 Port Test
(b)=‘A
L Attendant console number (1,2 or *)
PITS and ATT test can be done by entering physical port

number of PITS or ATT
Port number (1 to 8, or *)
Card number (01 to 15 or **)
Shelf number ( 1: Basic 2: Expansion 1
3: Expansion 2)
14-F-13
5.04 PITS and ATT Test Results screen
When the test is finished, test result is displayed on the

screen automatically.
PITS and ATTTest I owl TST! 1 DIR

Tested at 12.05 AM 05JUU90 I
Basic Shelf ExpansionShelf 1 Expansion Shelf 2
000000000111 000000000111111 000000000111111
123456789012 123456789012345 123456789012345
--p ____----- __-

--p ___------ ______- __-
--p--------- ___--_- __-
_ - p--------- -_---__ -_-
--p --------- -__---_
--p---------
_ _ pm--------
--p---------
P:Pass,l-F: Fault
=>314*
-W++Cn+'?-NF&j
Description
PITS and ATT Test Error Code List
Code Description
1 PITS Link failure, Al7 Link failure
2 PITS PB Generator failure, ATT PB Generator failure
_-_---------
2
A -- ------B-m-
B _-_---------
C Speech Path failure ..
D _-_-_-----A-
E --- ----- ----
F ----- -- -----
l If a trouble results from a card, an error message

"Card Fault" appears on the screen.
14-F-1 4
6.00 Return Messages
Display on message line when executing test
=> DN4000
2 **** Executing
l Message line
43 1 COMMON 2’ 1::::..:
: .Z‘
@j 5 6 HRD CPY ::$.I ;jJ:
Message Description
I
Executing Executing device test
I
Illegal Parameter Entered parameter is out of format or related device is not installed.
invalid status The status of the card or port being verified is not ‘OUS” or ‘Fault.”
Pass Device status is good.
Failed Device status is bad.
14-F-l 5
G. Monitor
1 .OO Monitor Main Menu screen
From the Main Menu screen, select “3. Monitor”
then follow the Monitor Main Menu that appears on
the screen.
By selecting an item from this screen, you can
monitor the current operating information.
Aonitor Main Menu 1 ONLl MONl LIN 1 DIR
1. Error Log
2. Device Status
3. Traffic
=>
I COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 7 6
I.
Description
(1) Error Log
Displays error records.
(2) Device status -
Displays current device status.
(3) Traff id .. .
Displays traffic measurement for extensions, CO
trunks, attendant consoles and resources.
14-G-l
2.00 Error Log screen
Error Log (1 P) ! 04LIMoNI I
JAN-20-90 8 : 39 AM MAJOR ALARM #XII00 CPR runaway

JAKPl-90 10: 00 AM MINOR ALARM #WOO TSW tin town
JAN-21-90 11 : 12 PM MAlORAfARM #0400 Basic shelf power down
JAN-25-90 6 : 32 AM MINOR ALARM #0600 Progress tone failure
JAN-29-90 1 : 57 PM MINOR ALARM #0700 Check dawtime
JAN-30-90 9 : 01 AM MINOR ALARM X)800 Conference trunk failure
FE&11-90 6 :59 PM MINOR ALARM #oBOO Device not connect tw SMDR
FEB-12-90 6 : 59 PM MINOR ALARM #1270 LPR RAM tailure
FEB-13-90 5 : 45 PM MINOR ALARM #1300 Card disconnect
1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8
Fur further informations about Error Log, refer to

Section 14-D-l .Ol ‘Enor Log.”
14-G-2
3.00 Device Status screen
3.01 System Status Initial screen
Ievice Status(l/4) 1 ONLl MONl 1

SystemStatus
ROMVersion_--__ -__-_-__--__-- Vl .oo
Date___--__----- __-_ -__-___-____ May.081991
For place------ ___-___ ---__- Area-2
_. -
CPURAM-----1---1_-___-__ INS
BasicShelf-----i------_ INS
ExpansionShelf 1 ----------- INS
-\ ExpansionShelf2 --------- -
3 TSW
Ad&j& CONF~__---_-I__---- -
SMDR---_--- ---__--___ INS
*.,n I Ed .-- Al.- A . ,m m-s-r I.
1~3:In be~ce, uu3: utn or 3ervce, FL1: raw
COMMON2 3 4 5 6 HRDCPY 7 8
Description
ROM version - Software’s version .I
Date - The date software was originated
For Place - Destination
CPU RAM - Current status of RAM area
Basic Shelf - Current status of Basic Shelf
Expansion Shelf 1 - Current status of Expansion She.lf 1
Expansion Shelf 2 - Current status of Expansion Shelf 2
TSW - Current status of TSW card
Additional CONF - Current status of optional Coference‘card
SMDR - Current status of SMDR device
% fn above screen, “- ” indicates that the device is not installed.
14-G-3
3.02 Card Status screen
leviceStatus(2/4)
Card Status
1 ONLlMON1 1
1
Basic 01 PLC I Expansion 01 PLC F Expansion 01 LCOT 0
Shelf 02 PLC I shelf 1 02 PLC F Shelf2 02 LCOT 0
03 PLC I 03 PLC F 03 LCOT 0
09 PLC I 09 PLC- F 09 LCOT 0
12 PLC I 12 LCOT F 12 LCOT 0
13 LCOT F 13 ATLC 0
82 OHCA F 14 LCOT F 14 DPH 0
83 TSW I 15 LCOT F 15 RMT 0
- - -
I: In Service,0: Outof Service,F: Fault
COMMON2 3 4 5 8 HRDCPY 7 8 I
Description
In the above screen, a blank indicates that a card is
not installed in the slot.
14-G-4
3.03 Port Status screen
Device Status (3/4) I ~NL~M~N I I
Port Status
Slot Basic Shelf Expansion Shelf 1 Expansion Shelf 2

000000000111 000000000111111 000000000111111
123456789012 123456789012345 123456789012345
1 I 0 I I I
2 I 0 I I I
P 3 0 0 I I I
0 4 0 I I I
r 5 I 0 B I
t 6 F 0 B I
7 I F I
0 I F I
DTMF 1 I OF I
Ret 2 F 0 I I
I: In Service 0: Out of Service, F: Fa t, B: Busy Out
1 COMMON2 3 4 5 6 HRDCPY 7 8 I
Description
DTMF Ret - Status of DTMF receivers
Two DTMF receivers are provided
on each SLC, HLC, OPX card re-
spectively
The system administrator can change the status of a

CO trunk port from ‘Busy Our to “INS” by entering INS
command. _:.
$
In the above screen a blank indicates that a port is not
assigned to the system.
14-G-5
3.04 Conference Trunk Status screen
3evice St2k.s (4/4) I0NLl fd0~l I

Conference Trunk Status
Basic 1 ous 3 5 7
2 ous 4 6 8
1 INS 13 INS 25 37 61
2 INS 14 INS 26 38 62
3 INS 15 INS 27 39 63
4 INS 16 INS 28 40 64
5 INS 17 INS 29 41
option 6 OUS 18 INS 30 42
7 FLT 19 INS 31 43
8 INS 20 INS 32 44
9 INS 21 INS 33 45
10 ous 22 INS 34 46
11 INS 23 INS 35 47
12 INS 24 INS 36 48
INS : In ! vice OUS ; Out of Service FLT :auft
I COMMON2 3 4 5 6 HRDCPY 7 8
. Description
This screen shows the current operating status of
both basic and optional conference trunks.
14-G-6
4.00 Traffic Submenu screen
Traffic - Submenu 1 ONLl MONl LIN 1 DIR
1. Station
2. Trunk Group
3. Attendant Console
4. DISA
5. OGMl .
6. OGM2
7. AGC
=>
1 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
. .
. Description Programming
1. Station
Displays traffic measurements of all extensions.
2. Trunk Group
Displays traffic measurements of each trunk
grow. ,
Displays traffic measurements of each attendant
console. _-
4. DISA, OGMi,OGM2, AGC
Displays traffic measurements of each resource.
if tenant service is employed, traffic measure-
ments of each resource will be displayed by each
tenant individually.
14-G-7
4.01 Station Initial screen
Traffic information -Station (l/2) IONLIMONI 1

Feb.22 1991
StartTime - 9:OOAM 10:OOAM 11:OOAhd 12:OOAM l:OOAM 2:OOAM

lncomingCa!ls- 498 637 590 120 803 760
AnswerCaUs- 360 503 476 88 711 662
Outgoing Cak- 405 602 555 103 763 731
CompfetedCalls- 241 430 411 48 509 500
ccs 723 811 780 230 998 889
startTime - 3:OOPM 4:OOPyM 5:OOPM 6:OOPM 7:OOPM 8:OOPM

IncomingCak- 632 721 611 598 420 311
AnsverCaf!s- 531 603 482 449 289 192
OutgoingCafls- 600 654 600 531 301 191
Completed Calls - 442 488 503 461 188 119
ccs 800 830 762 750 680 620
IlCOMMoN2 3 4 5 6 HRDCPY 7 8
Description
Start Time - The system can be programmed
to display traffic measurements of
all extensions from up to 24 hours
before the current time. In above
screen, “9:OO AM” indicates the
traffic measurement from 9:00 AM
to 1O:OOAM one day ago.
Incoming Calls - The number of incoming calls.
(both extension and CO)
Answer Calls - The number of answered calls.
Outgoing Calls - The number of outgoing calls
(both extension and CO) during
the pm-set time period.
Completed Calls - The number of completed calls.
ccs - One hundred call seconds, or one
hundred seconds of telephone
conversation. One hour of
telephone traffic is equal to 36
ccs.
14-G-8
4.02 Trunk Group Initial screen
IONLIMONI 1 1
Feb 22 i991 TrunkGroupNo.=Ol
I &fl Ime _____--- 9:OOAM 10:OOAM 11 :OOAM 12:OOAM 1:OOAM 2:OOAM
incoming Calls ----- 406 511 430 110 763 653
AnswerCaIls---- 232 362 291 65 580 572
Outgoing Calls--- 362 419 381 98 601 599
Completed Calls --- 241 311 263 60 449 472
Busy Calls ---- 109 120 95 39 195 201
ccs --I---- _---- 700 801 755 215 932 831
StartTime ------ 3:OOPM 4:OOPM 5:OOPM 6:OOPM 7:OOPM 8:OOPM

Incoming Call---- 613 555 529 511 412 311
AnswerCalls--- 482 412 427 400 303 200
Outgoing Calls--- 499 400 395 382 291 183
Completed Calls --- 362 282 312 300 162 99
Busy Calls ------ 139 99 112 95 68 35
ccs ----* ------ 777 703 683 663 582 411
i. .; -. 1 COMMON 2 INDEX 3 4 5 6 HRDCPY 7 8 I
Description
Busy Calls -The number of outgoing calls
encountering a busy.
For a description of other items, refer to Section

14-G-4.01 “Station Initial screen.”
14-G-9
4.03 Attendant Console Initial screen
Traffic lnfonation - Attendant Console (l/2) (ONLIMONI 1

Feb.221991 Attendant No.=01
start lime ------ 9:OOAM 1O:OOAM 11:OOAM 12:OOAM 1:OOAM 2:OOAM

lncoming Calls-- 511 632 590 140 809 751
AnswerCalls--- 412 488 476 99 680 612
Outgoing Cails-- 403 471 555 121 762 592
Completd Calls -- 291 403 411 a3 611 464
HandleCalls ---- 300 381 299 69 491 391
ccs -------- 712 a53 768 240 998 900
start Time ---- 3:OOPM 4:OOPM 5:OOPM 6:OOPM 7:OOPM a:OOPM

lncomingCails-- 721 700 683 592 483 301
AnswerCalfs--- 549 550 521 482 362 188
Outgoing Cak.--- 611 603 549 468 411 165
CompletedCalls -- 455 423 401 352 348 100
Handle Calls -- 311 301 281 311 298 a3
ccs --- 881 862 a00 762 700 583
lcoMMoN2 3 4 5 6 HRDCPY 7 a
Description
Handled Calls -The number of calls transfered
by the attendant console.

14-G-4.01 “Station Initial screen.”
14-G-10
4.04 DISA screen
Fee 22 I?$! Tenant=t
Start Time ------- .. 9 :XAU :O OOAM 11:OOAM 12:OOAM 1:OOPM 2:OOPM

Busy Calls ---------- 5 18 12 2 20 8
ccs -----__- _------ _-- 3 IO 2 1 10 3
Start Time __- __-__- 3:OOPM 4:OOPM 5:OOPM 6:OOPM 7:OOPM 8:OOPM
Busy Calls ---------- 30 4 12 3 2 4
ccs - -_-_______--_-- 20 2 8 1 1 2
Start Time --------- 9 :OOAM 10:OOAM 11:OOAM 12:OOAM 1:OOPM 2 :OOPM

Busy Calls -------- 6 20 12 4 2 4
ccs -- -_-___----- 3 9 3 2 1 2
Start Time ------- 3:oaPM 4:OOPM 5:OOPM 6:OOPM 7:OOPM 8 :OOPM

Busy Calls ------ 30 0 12 3 2 4
ccs __---_-_--I---- 10 0 6 1 1 2
I1 COMMON2 3 4 5
Description
Start Time - Refer to Section 14-G-4.01 “Station
Initial screen.”
Busy Calls -The number of DISA calls which
failed to access any DISA re-
sources.
ccs -One hundred call seconds, or one
hundred seconds of telephone
conversation.
1 One hour of telephone traffic is
equal to 36 CCS.
Tenant - If tenant service is employed, this .. “- -+-:.
screen can be displayed by each
By pressing the cPREV> or
<NEXT> key, you can enter into the
previous or next screen.
14-G-l 1
4.05 OGMl screen
Traffic Information - CGMl 1 ONLlMONl i

Feb. 22 1991 Tenzst = 1
Start Time -- 9 :OOAhr 10 .XJOAM 11 :OOAM 12 :OOAM 1 :OOPM 2 :OOPM

Busy Calls --- :- 20 12 3 2 4
ccs ------- 8 2 1 2 4
Start Time -- 3 :OOPM 4 ?lOPM 5 :OOPM 6 :OOPM 7 :OOPM 8 :OOPM

Busy Calls --- 35 5 12 8 2 4
ccs --- 2c 1 8 3 1 2
Start Time --- 9 :OOAM 10 zOOAM 11 :OOAM 12 :OOAM 1 :OOPM 2 :OOPM

*
Busy Calls - 3 18 12 3 2 4
ccs -- i 7 3 1 1 2
Start Time - 3 :OOPM 4 tiPM 5 :OOPM 6 :OOPM 7 :otilJM 8 :OOPM

Busy Calls --- 3; 0 12 7 2 4
ccs ---- 15 0 6 3 1 2
11 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRD CPY 7 8
Description
Initial screen.”
Busy Calls - The number of calls which failed to
access any OGlW resources.
ccs -One hundred call seconds, or one
hundred seconds of telephone con-
versation.
One hour of telephone traffic is
equal to 36 CCS.
Tenant - If tenant service is employed, this
s tree n - fdr earn ::~~~-
~.dispiayed
tenant indiidualty.
By pressing the -#REV> or
<NEXT> key, you can enter into the
previous or next screen.
14-G-12
4.06 OGM2 screen
Traffic Information -0GM2 IONLlMONl 1

Feb.221991
StartTime ------ 9:OOAM -* XAM 12:OOAM 1:OOPM 2:OOPM

Busy Calls -------- 3 :2 3 2 4
cc&$ _---- ___----- 1 2 1 2 4
StartTime -------- 3:OOPM i:OOPM 5OOPM 6:OOPM 7:OOPM 8:OOPM

Busy Calls----- 8 5 12 5 2 4
ccs __^-------- 2 2 8 2 1 2
StartTime --- 9:OOAM 18:OOAM 11 .OOAM 12:OOAM l:OOPM 2:OOPM

Busy Calls--- 7 13 12 4 2 4
ccs ------- 3 6 3 2 1 2
Start Time ------- 3:OOPM <:OOPM 5:OOPM 6:OOPM 7:OOPM 8:OOPM

Busy Calls------ 30 4 12 7 2 4
ccs --- ------- 10 1 6 4 1 2
1 COMMON2 3 4 r; 6 HRDCPY 7 8
Description
initial screen.”
access any OGM2 resources.
versation.
One hour of telephone traffic is equal
to 36 CCS.
Tenant + If tenant service.& employed, this
screen can be displayed for each
By pressing the cPREV> or <NEXT>
key, you can enter into the previous
or next screen.
14-G-l 3
4.07 AGC screen
Tra”< 1q-z~ AGC IONLlMONl 1

Tenant=1
SW me ----- 9:OOAM 10:OOAM fl:OOAM 12:OOAM 1:OOPM 2:OOPM

BlJ$yC&r ----- 3 10 12 3 2 4
as --- .__.__-_ 1 3 2 1 2 4
star?
lime------ 3:OOPM 4:OOPM 5:OOPM 6:OOPM 7rOOPM 8:OOPM
BusyCahs------ 30 8 12 4 2 4
ccs _-__ _----- 20 2 8 2 1 2
startTime
--- 9:OOAM 10:OOAM 11:OOAM 12:OOAM 1:OOPM 2:OOPM
Busy C&< ---- 30 9 12 3 2 4
ccs _---- 10 3 3 1 1 2
StartTime ----- 3:OOPM 4:OOPM 5:OOPM 6:OOPM 7:OOPM 8:OOPM

Busy Cd:; -------- 30 8 12 8 2 4
ccs - ---__I- 10 3 6 3 1 2
11 COMMON 2 3 4 5 6 HRDCPY 7 8
Description
initial screen.”
access any AGC resources.
versation.
to 36 CCS.
Tenant - If tenant service is employed, this
screen can be displayed for each
By pressing the <PREVs or <NEXT>
key, you can enter into the previous
or next screen.
14-G-7 4
H. Other Features
1 .OO Power Failure Transfer

Assignment
Description
Provides up to 144 extension/CO line pairs to From the main menu screen, first select
maintain a conversation when power is restored ‘1. Programming’ and select ‘10. Miscellaneous”
or TSW recovery. then you can enter into the screen below by
If this is not programmed then power restoration selecting “2. Power Failure Transfer.”
cr TSW recovery drops any existing conversa- To program this assignment, you must fog in to
tions. the system by entering the 2nd level or higher
password.
iscellaneous - Power Failure Transfer Assignment I Oil I PRG I SCR I DIR

--~~~~--~~~~~~~~~~~-~~~~~~--~--~~~~~~~~~-~~~~~~~~~~+-~-~-+-~~~--+-~~-^+-~~~-’
Power Failure Transfer Assigment

+-------------------- --------------.____---------------.------------ +.
I I Trunk I Extension I 1 Trunk I Extension I
1 No. I-- _____e-----w-+ ____________-__+ be I__________ -mm-+ -__-_________ 1
I I Shelf I Slot \ Shelf I Slot L I Shelf I Slot 1 Shelf I Slot I
I -_--- +------+----+ ------- +-----+ ---- + ------ +-----+ ------- +---‘ I
I 1 I 1 I 01 I 1 I 07 I 10 I 2 I 04 I 2 I 10 I
I 2 I 1 I 02 I 1 I 08 I 11 I 2 I 05 I 2 I 11 I
I 3 I 1 I 03 I 1 I 09 I 12 I 2 I 06 I 2 I 12 I
I 4 I 1 I 04 I 1 I 10 I 13 I 3 I 01 I 3 I 07 I
151 1 IO5 I1 Ill 1141 3 102 I3 108.~I
I 6 I 1 1 06 1 1 I 12 I 35 I 3 I 03 I 3 I 09 I
1 7 1 2 1 01 1 2 1 07 1 16 1 3 1 @t 1 3 1 10 1
I 8 I 2 I 02 I 2 I 08 I 17 I 3 I 05 I 3 I 11 I
191 2 103-l 2 109 1181 3 106 I3 112 1
+____---- ---A------- -----------.-- .------------- --- --_---__------.- +
14-H-l
Programming
Assignable How to
Item Zescmton Default input
Parameters
Assign LCO’ or GCOT car3 No. to the 1,2,3 or blank Blank
Trunk Shelf D
system which ar,e dwadabm !or power
No. 1 failure transfer.
-18 Slot 01-15 or blank Blank D
Assign HLC or SLC card No. to the 1,2,3 or blank Blank D

Extension Shelf
system which are available for power
failure transfer.
Slot 01-l 5 or blank Blank D
D: Enter appropriate parameters directly.

S: Select appropriate parameters from the factory-set options.
l Cursor is scrolled from left to right by pressing the return key.
l Assign extension card and trunk card for power failure transfer in pairs.
To assign only a trunk or an extension is not possible.
Refer to Section 9-L-2.00 “Power Failure Transfer Assignment” for further

information about programming.
Conditions
SLT telephones and some PITS telephones can
be used during power failure if power failure
transfer assignment had been done in advance.
The following PITS telephones can be used

during power failure.
KX-T123230, KX-T123230D,
KX-T123235, KX-T61630, KX-T30830
When you are using above listed PITS tele-

phones, set the POWER FAILURE switch to ON,
when power failure occurs.
If dialing cannot be done, set the DIALING MODE
selector to another position (PULSE or TONE).
When the power is restored, set the POWER
FAILURE switch to OFF.
If the power is restored during a conversation, set
the POWER FAILURE switch to OFF after
conversation is completed.
14-H-2
Section 15
Maintenance
Dumb Type Terminal
(Section 15)
- Maintenance
Dumb Type Terminal
Contents
Page
A Introduction . . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . . .. . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. . .. . .. . .. .. . . . .. . .. . . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. .. .. . . .. 15-A-l
B System Administration . . . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .. .. . .. . . .. .. . .. . . .. . . . . .. . .. . . . . .. . . .. . .. . . . 15-B-l

1.00 On-site Administration ........................................................................... 15-B-l
1 .Ol Logging in to the System ............................................................. 15-B-l
1.02 Dumb Operation Mode ................................................................ 15-B-l
2.00 System Administration from a Remote Location.. .................................. 15-B-2
C Device Status ................................................................................................... 15-C-l
1 .OO Service Commands and Their Functions.. ............................................. 15-C-l

1 .Ol INS (In Service) command .......................................................... 15-C-l
1.02 OUS (Out of Service) command.. ................................................ 15-C-2
D Self-Test (System-Detected Troubles) ............................................................. 15-D-l

1 .OO Error Record Display ............................................................................. 15-D-1
1 .Ol Start Time of Self-Test ................................................................. 15-D-l
1.02 Error Log ...................................................................................... 15-D-l
1.03 Printing Out the Automatic Failure Reporting .............................. 15-D-l
1.04 Local Alarm ................................................................................... 15-D-2
1.05 Remote Alarm .............................................................................. 15-D-3
E Functional Test by Entering Commands .......................................................... 15-E-l
1 .OO Introduction ............................................................................................ 15-E-l

2.00 Functions to be Verified ......................................................................... 15-E-2
2.01 Card Test ..................................................................................... 15-E-2
2.02 Port Test ...................................................................................... 15-E-3
2.03 PITS and ATT Test ...................................................................... 15-E-4
3.00 TST command (Test) ............................................................................. 15-E-5
4.00 Card Test Results Display ...................................................................... 15-E-6
5.00 Port Test Results Display ....................................................................... 15-E-7
6.00 PITS and ATT Test Results Display ....................................................... 15-E-8
15-l
Page
F Monitor ._...__. . .. .. . . . . . . .. .._..................................................................................... 15-F-l
1 .OO SYM command (System Maintenance Monitor). ................................... 15-F-l
1 .Ol System Status screen.. ................................................................ 15-F-2
I .02 Card Status screen ...................................................................... 15-F-3
1.03 Port Status screen ....................................................................... 15-F-4
1.04 Conference Trunk Status screen ................................................. 15-F-5
2.00 TFD command (Traffic Display) ............................................................. 15-F-6
2.01 Station screen.. ............................................................................ 15-F-7
2.02 Trunk Group screen.. ................................................................... 15-F-6
2.03 Attendant Console screen ........................................................... 15-F-9
2.04 DISA screen ................................................................................ 15-F-10
2.05 OGM 1 screen ............................................................................. 15-F-11
2.06 OGM 2 screen ............................................................................. 15-F-12
2.07 AGC screen.. ............................................................................... 15-F-13
G Other Features ................................................................................................. 15-G-l

1 .OO PFT command (Power Failure Transfer) ............................................... 15-G-1
15-2
A. Introduction
This section describes the information necessary
for monitoring, testing, and maintaining the
system using a Dumb terminal.
The modular self-testing capabilities of the
system allow most maintenance to be reduced to
simple procedures.
You can administer the system programming and
perform maintenance using VT220(100),
Compatibles, Dumb terminal and Attendant
Console.
Only one terminal can be performing system
administration at any one time.
Changing the System Administration Device is
done in programming.
. - _- - To execute the change, the user must exit
: system administration mode and then reenter
system administration mode.
.
(Note)
The following subsections are defined in Section
14.
C. Device Status
2.00 Definition of Operating Status
2.01 Shelf, Slot, Resource
2.02 Port
2.03 Interactions among Devices
2.04 Changes of the Shelf Status
2.05 Changes of the Slot Status
0. Self-Test (System-Detected Troubles)

2.00 Clearing System-Detected Troubles
2.01 Consulting the Error Log
E. Troubleshooting Guide
15-A-l
C. Device Status
1.00 Service Commands and

Their Functions
9.01 INS (In Service) command

Description
At the operation prompt (OPE>), enter INS When you change the status of an upper device
command to change the status of the target ’ (shelf, card), the status of lower devices (port,
device (shelf, card, station etc.) to ‘In Service” in station) change as follows.
on-iine communication mode.
Upper device OUS + INS
Command Format Lower device OUS - INS
Fault e Fault
OPE>INS + Item No. 3
:... (Item) Upper device Fault --) INS

3 Lower device Fault - INS
Device Input Value ous - ous
Normal operation
Shelf 1 to 3 (physical number) When this operation is executed without failure,
initial ‘OPEz-” prompt appears again on the
Card 1 101 to 315 (physical number)
screen.
Port 1011 to 3158 (physical number)
Operation failed
Station DNxxxx (xxxx: extension number; The error message appears on the screen in the
three or four digits) or Physical following cases.
number: four digits
Parameter error
Al-T Al or A2 or Not installed
Physical number: four digits .*
Status error
DTMF Rxxxy (xxx:Card number; y: 1 or 2). INS failure (Diagnosis error)
CFBxx or CFOyy (xx: 01 to 08,

yy: 01 to 64)
)
.<- Refer to Section 15-E-3.00 ‘TST Command
(Test)!’ for details about test command.
Conditions
The status of specified devices (shelf, card,
station) should be in “OUS” or “FAULT,” and
system must be in on-line mode.
When you change the status of a lower device
(port, station) to “INS,” the upper device (shelf,
card) should be in “INS” status.
If you try to change the lower device status to
“INS” while upper device is in “OUS” status, the
error message “Invalid Status” appears on the
screen.
15-C-l
1.02 OUS (Out of Service) command
Description
At the operationprompt (OPE>). enter the OUS Operation failed
command to change the status of the target An error message appears on the screen in the
device (shelf, card, station etc.) to “Out of torrowrng cases.
Service” in on-line mode.
l Parameter error
Command Format l Not installed
l Status error
OPE> OUS + Item No. -;L.
If the system administration terminal is an
(Item)
Attendant Console (ATT), do not change the
status of the following devices from ‘INS” to
‘OUS.”
l Shelf in which ATLC card is installed

l ATLC card
l Attendant console assigned as the
Maintenance Terminal
During remote operation, do not change the

status of the following devices from “INS” to
“OUS.”
l Shelf in which RMT card is installed

l RMT card (Modem) f
Refer to Section 15-E-3.00 7ST command (Test)

” for details about the test command.
Conditions
The status of target devices (shelf, card, station)
should be “INS,” and the system must be in on-
line communication mode.
When you change the status of an upper device

(shelf, card), the status of lower devices (port,
station) change as follows.
Upper device INS +OUS

Lower device INS *OUS
Fault + Fault
Normal operation
When this operation is executed without failure,
“OPE>” initial prompt appears again on the
screen.
15-c-z
Jministration
ministration
the System
;ystem programming and
etc.)
em using a dumb entering the
But entering “/” “- n are not available, because
these characters cannot be displayed on the
unication parameters,
display of PITS.
3 “Communication
Both uppercase and lowercase characters
can be recognized by the system. *
xess to the n the Error Log

#es of the system is 1.02 Dumb Operation Mode
rd. I the Error Log
,ized person from learning When you log in to the system administration
mord characters are not terminal, “Select the Mode” screen appears on
‘e entered. the display. I the Error Log
At initial prompt in this screen, you can enter into
programming mode by entering PRG, and
;ystem administration operation mode by entering OPE.
)rd (4-digit. Alphanumeric In programming mode, assigning and changing
antered. the system programming parameters can be
done. In operation mode, monitoring, testing and ‘or log records
le system, password must
stored in memory. maintaining the system can be done.
Refer to Section 8 ‘Preparation for Programming he following two
3 passwords are provided
31for on-site operation and and Maintenance (Dumb Type Ten-tinal)” for
!ration from a remote further details about Dumb operation mode.
M&or Alarm)
Drrect password, the 0
kmb initial Screen from
rror Log Screen.”
7to programming mode or
ltomatic
3 functions available to each
knted out.
to all levels SIO #2 port on the
;em level parameters le, then set
: level parameters r Log to UY.”
3rameters only. ration (OPR) for
le system using the 1 st level
!xecute all functions, but are
Id when entering level 2,3
Tally factory programmed,

I when logging in to the
:he 1st level password.
:-1 .OO ‘Change Level (CHL)”
3rd level.
15-B-l
J on- 7. The alarm message on the display of PITS :it Lion
qe will provided) disappears when placing a call from a up the system administration from a
lf that telephone: when an incoming call arnves location can be done in the following ways.
vided) at that telephone; or if a held call reminder
occurs with it. And the alarm message ‘Remote Directory Number” using Direct
appears again when PITS goes to idle. rd System Access (DISA) feature.
Jtther information about “Remote Directory
Operation oer,” refer to Section 1O-C-4.00 “Operation
I).”
To display an alarm message, press the ALARM ‘or further information about DISA feature,
key (button) while ALARM LED is flashing or lit to 3-D-2.02 “Direct Inward System Access
steadily. 4).”
If local alarm occured during a conversation,
*am DID feature so that the incoming
press the ALARM key (button) after replacing the
lone number is converted to the “Remote
handset then the alarm message will be
tory Number.”
z8 displayed.
irther information about DID feature, refer to
Dumb
an 3-D-2.03 “Direct Inward Dialing (DID).”
l An example of the alarm display
C-24.00
n that a call from a remote location can
C-26.00 (Attendant Console) is the Remote Administration feature
JAN-2591 6:31 AM MAJOR-ALARM #0410 iatically using DIL (1 :l) feature.
7
Basic Shelf power down lrther information about DIL (1 :l) feature,
/ to Section 3-D-2.01 “Direct In tine (DIL).” f
(PITS) l RI bte access with assistance of the operator
ARM 1ERR 0410 POW DWN 1 T all from a remote location can be made on
5 unk into the system, and be answered by
m) or is To clear the displayed alarm n&sage, press the aerator.
ALARM key (button) when the alarm message is all is then placed on hold and the Remote
displayed. ALARM LED will be turned off and the :ory Number of the system dialed is
alarm display on the display of PITS (if provided) ,ed.
or CRT screen of the Attendant Console perator transfers the call after receiving the
)a disappears. m answer tone.
aller at a remote location will then hear the
m answer tone and can be proceed with
star 1 of In.
to Section 4-F-l .05 “Unscreened Call
fer to Remote” for further information.
e
fetects le system administrator at a remote
accesses the system remote
lice. tration feature, the following message
on the display of operator’s telephone if
ne same s provided.
‘pears
r display 1234:RMT Access
J log in to the system from a remote
you can operate the system in the same
f you were on-site.
Onl) 3 system administration terminal can
accf he system at a time.
15-D-2
i
1.05 Remote Alarm
When the system detects a problem during on- Setting “Remote Alarm” to “Y” is not available if
line communication, an error message appears the RMT card is not installed.
on the screen of the remote maintenance device. All systemdetected error messages are
For remote access, RMT card must be installed displayed in the error log, but for “Local Alarm,”
in the system, and a data terminal and modem and “Remote Alarm”, some error messages are
are required at a remote location. displayed and some are not.
Refer to Section 14-D-2.03 “Background
Remote Configuration Diagnostic Error List.”
Main Unit Data Terminal Command Format

4
PRG>OPR AT2 J/
RMT
Central
Ofke
Programming
To execute this feature, set “Remote Alarm” to
_ 7” and register the telephone (Modem) number
of the remote administration device in
‘Destination Address.”
15-D-3
E. Functional Test by
Entering Commands
1.00 Introduction
.-_
1. You can execute diagnostic test during on-line 6. When you perform a device (shelf card, port,
communication mode by entering test resource) test, the status of the device to be
commands at the maintenance terminal. tested must be changed to “Out of service” by
entering the OUS command in advance.
2. Execute this functional test in the following If an attempt is mate to test a device in “INS”
cases. status, the following message appears on the
screen. ‘Invalid Status”
. l When new devices are installed 7. You can test a.device in “FaurP status.
l When the device combination is changed
l When the system detects an alarm or an 8. If the device test results in failure, first change
error message appears in the error log the status of the device to ‘Fault” and replace
l When device status becomes ‘Fault” it with a normal one if necessary.
l When a number of telephone instruments
don’t function properly 9. It is impossible to execute functional test
during off-line communication mode.
3. There are following three types of Tests as
follows.
(a) Card Test

If a number of telephone instruments do
not function well, you can detect whether.
troubles are caused by the card or the
telephone instruments by this test.
(b) Port Test
(c) PITS and ATT (Attendant Console) Test
l Test (b), (c) are executed to detect troubles

when telephone instruments don’t function
well when card status is good.
4. This functional test must be done during on-

line communication mode both at on-site and
from a remote location. For remote access, a
data terminal and modem are required at a
remote location, and you must install RMT
card in the system and assign Remote
Directory Number to the system in system
programming operation “Remote Directory
Number.”
Refer to Section 14-B-2.00 “System
Administration from a Remote Location” for
details.
5. Functional test can be done only when you

log in to the system by entering the 1 st level
password.
15-E-l
2.01 Card Test

This test verifies the status of each card for the
items listed below.
Card ?o Item Remarks

be tested
SLC Link Card to be tested

PLC Card type should be ‘OUS
HLC ROM or ‘FAULT.”
LCOT RAM
GCOT
DID
ATLC
AGC
OPX Link
Card type
ROM
RAM
Power Supply
DISA Link
Card type
ROM
RAM
OGM RedPlay
RMT Link
Card type
ROM
RAM
Modem
DPH Card Type
15-E-2
2.02 Port Test
This test verifies the status of the following functions for each port of the indicated
cards.
1. By entering physical port number (Except paired extension port and CO port)
Card Functions Remarks
PLC OHCA Detect Port to be tested should

HLC be ‘OUS” or ‘FAULT
ATLC HDCC *.
DISA Speech Path

DTMF Receiver
Tone Detector
AGC Speech Path

Repeater
Tone Detector
2. By entering the physical port number of extension port and CO port in pairs.
LCOT Speech Path 2 Ports to be tested should

Loop Current be ‘OUS” or “FAULT.”
Bell Detect SLC, HLC, OPX and DTMF
DTMF Dial (DTMF Generator) receiver to be tested should
Pulse Dial be ‘OUS” or “FAULT.”
GCOT Speech Path

DTMF Dial (DTMF Generator)
Pulse Dial
SLC Speech Path

HLC Bell
OPX DTMF Detector (DTMF Receiver)
Pulse Detect
(Note)
l If you want to verify the status of the DTMF re- l When you test the SLC, HLC, OPX, LCOT and
ceiver (1 or 2), change it’s status to “Out of GCOT cards, change the status of both exten-
Service” by entering OUS command and verify sion port and CO trunk port to OUS.
the status of a card which contains DTMF
receivers. l If trouble results from the card (not port), the
SLC, HLC and OPX card contains two DTMF following message appears on the screen.
receivers respectively.
For further information about OUS command, “Card Fault”
refer to Section 15-C-l .02 “OUS command.”
l This port test is available only for ports on the

following cards.
LCOT, GCOT, SLC, PLC, HLC, DISA, AGC.
OPX and ATLC cards.
15-E-3
2.03 PITS and ATT Test
Td ve-ify tke s:afus of ?iTS or ATT the following functions are tested.
__..
Card to be ?ested Function Remarks
PLC Link (All types of PITS) Card to be tested should be

HLC 1 DTMF generator (KX-7232300, ‘0lJS”or ‘Fault.”
1 KX-T123235 and m-l71 30)
ATLC Link
DTMF generator
ROM
’ RAM
15-E-4
3.00 TST command (Test)
Before executing -the device test, change the (Refer to Section 15-C-l .OO“Service Commands
status of the target device to “Out of Service” by and Their Functions.” for details about OUS and
entering OUS command. INS commands)
Command Format
OPGTST + Index + Item1 + (& Item 2) 3
Test Index Item 1 Item 2
Card Test 1 Physical No. (xyy)
PITS Physical No. (xyyz) or

DN (DN dddd)
P
0 ATT Physical No. (xyyz) or
R ATT No. (Aa)
T
(Extension) Physical No. (xyyz) or (CO line) Physical No. (xyyz)
T Extension & CO line DN (DN dddd)
E SLC, HLC, OPX. 2
S LCOT, GCOT (CO line) Physical No. (xyyz) (Extension) Physical No. (xyyz) or
T DN (DN dddd)
4.
Basic Conference Trunk CFB tt (01 - 08)
Optional Conference Trunk CFO tt (01 - 64)
DlSA/AGC Physical No. (xyyz)
7 PITS Physical No. (xyyz) or

DN (DN dddd)
; . 3
& Al-f Physical No. (xyyz) or
Al-T No, (Ax)
8 ..-
Description
x : Shelf No. (1: Basic 2: Expansion 1 “*” can be used as a wild card character and
3: Expansion 2) substitutes any number from 0 to 9.
yy : Slot No. (01-l 5, or **)
zz : Port No. (l-8, or *) $ywle)
a : Attendant console No. (l-2, or *) ------ All cards installed in the Basic shelf
dddd : Directory No. (3-4 digits) 105* ----- All ports assigned to the card No.5 in
tt : Basic Conference Trunk No. (01-08) the Basic shelf
tt : Optional Conference Trunk No. (01-64) 2*** ---- All ports in the Expansion shelf 1
15-E-5
4.00 Card Test Results Display
;OPE>TST1 1Ol<CR>
; 101 **‘** PASS
l
;OPGTST 1 ***<CR>
; 101 ****** PASS
; 102 **‘* PASS
l
; 103 ****** NO CARD

; 104 ***** LINK
; 105 I**** TYPE
I I
t /
; 214 ****** POWER

; 215 -**‘** TEST ABORT (TSW FAIL)
;OPG
I .
I ’
Description
Card Test Message List

..
5.00 Port Test Results Display
;0qg_z-5 21311ccFb
. . . . --..* PAS
;op'": E>~ST22313<CFb
; 2013 -***-• NO CARD
;OPGTST 2 131181021cCR>
; lGl1 “**’ PASS l
; 1021 ***** FAULT05 l
;OPG
Port Test Error Code List
Legend:
0 applied
- not applied
15-E-7
6.00 PITS and ATT Test Results
Display
._I
;OPGTST3Al<Cb
; Al '""'FAULT02
;OPGTST3DN1012<CR>
; DN1012*****' PASS
;OPGTST32121<CR>
; 2121 ***** FAULT01
l
;OPGTST21011&1021<CR>
; 1011 '-'** PASS
; 1021 '*-* FAULT01
l
;OPG
PITSand AlT Test Error Code List
Code Description
FAULT01 PITS Link failure, ATT Link failure
FAULT02 PITS PB Generator failure, Al7 PB Generator failure
FAULT03
-----------
1FAULT09 1
FAULT(,A ------s---m
FAULT• B -----------
FAULTOC Speech Path failure
FAULTOD -----------
FAULTOE ----------A
IFAuLToF( -----------
* If trouble results from card, an error message

“Card FaulYappeares on the screen.
15-E-8
F. Monitor
1.00 SYM command (System
Maintenance Monitor)
__a
Current operating status of the followq items
can be displayed on the screen by entering SYM
command.
Command Format
OPE>SYM + Index 2
(Index)
1 i System Status -
2 : Card Status
3 : Port Status
4 : Conference Trunk Status
15-F-l
1.Ol System Status screen
Command Format
OPE>SYM 7-d 3
ktice Status(l/4) I~NLIMONI I

SystemStatus
ROMVersion Vl .oo
Date - --- May.081991
For Place ---- Area-2
CPU RAM-------p INS

BasicShelf-------- INS
ExpansionShelf1 INS
ExpansionShelf2 --------- -
TSW
AddiiionalCONF----
SMDR_---v--v INS
INS: In Service,OUS:Out of Service,FLT: Fault
Description
ROM version - Software’s version
Date - The date software was originated
For Place - Destination
CPU RAM - Status of RAM area
Basic Shelf - Status of Basic Shelf
Expansion Shelf 1 - Status of Expansion Shelf 1
Expansion Shelf 2 - Status of ExpansionShelf 2
TSW - Status of TSW card
Additional CONF - Status of optional conference card
SMDR - Status of SMDR device
% In above screen, -- ” indicates that the device is not installed.
15-F-2
I .02 Card Status screen
‘1 : .’ .‘:
&$nmand Format
OPE7SYM 2 3
mice status (U4) I lJLlMON 1 -I 1

Card !3taU
31 PLC
-
I Eqarlsion 01 PLC F Expansion 61
02 LCOT
z-
0
02 PLC I Shelf1 02 PLC F shelf2
cl3 PLC I 03 PLC F 03 LCOT 0
i
_.. ( -.
- .: .-
11 PLC I 11 PLC F II LCOT 0
12 PLC I 12 LCOT F 12 IGOT 0
13 LCOT F 13 ATL’Z 0
82 OHCA F 14 GOT F 14 DPH 0
83 TSW I 15 LCOT F 15 RMT 0
- - -
I: In Service,0:out of Service,F: Fault
-’
Description
In the above screen, a blank indicates that a card
is not installed in the slot.
15-F-3
1.03 Port Status screen
Command Format
OPE>SYM 3-‘7
DeviceStatus(314) t ONLIMON 1 t
Portstatus
Slot Basic Shelf Expansion Sheff 1 Expansion Shelf 2

000000000111 000000000111111 000b~0000111111
123456789012 123456789012345 123456789012345
1 I 0 I II
2 I 0 I II
.... P 3 0 0 I I I
J 0 4 0 I I I
r 5 I 0 6 I
t 6 F 0 B I
f I F I
0 I F I
E$ : :
I:In Service, 0:OutofSewice. F:F It, B:BusyOut
Description
DTMF Ret - Status of DTMF receiver
Two DTMF receivers are provided on the
SLC. HLC and OPX cards.
The system administrator can change the status of a CO

port from “Busy Out” to “INS” by entering INS command.
In the above screen a blank indicates that a port is not

assigned to the system.
15-F-4
1.04 Conference Trunk Status screen
Command Format
OPE7SYM 4 1
eviceStatus(l/4) I I I I
ConferenceTrunkStatus
Basic 1 OUS 3 5 7
2 ous 4 6 6
1 INS 13 INS 25 37 49 61
2 INS 14 INS 26 36 50 62
3 INS 15 INS 27 39 51 63
4 INS 16 INS 28 40 52 64
5 INS 17 INS 29 41 53
opti 6 OUS 16 INS 30 42 54
7FLT 19 INS 31 43 55
6INS 20 INS 32 44 56
9INS 21 INS 33 45 57
10
ous 22 INS 34 46 56
11
INS 23 INS 35 47 59
12 INS 24 INS 36 46 60
INS: InService OUS; Out of Service FLT; Fault
Description .I
This screen shows the current operating status of
both basic and optional conference trunks.
15-F-5
2.00 TFD command (Traffic Display)
Displays traffic measurement for extensions, trunk

groups, attendant___.consoles and resources.
Command Format
OPE>TFD + Index + Item1 + (item2) 1
Index Item1 I Item 2
Station 1 The first hatf = 1

The second half = 2
Trunk Group 2 Trunk Group No. The first half = 1

(01-16) The second half = 2
Al-T 3 All- No. The first half = 1

(1 or 2) The second half = 2
DISA
OGMl The first half = 1 (Tenant 1)
OGM2 The second half = 2 (Tenant 2)
AGC
Description Programming
1. Station Set desired start time in “System-Operation” Start
Displays traffic measurements of all extensions. Time of Traffic Measurement.
Refer to Section 10-C-4.00 “Operation (OPR)” for
2. Trunk Group programming.
Displays traffic measurements of each trunk
group.
Displays traffic measurements of each attendant
console.
4. DISA, OGMl, OGM2, AGC

Displays traffic measurements of each resource.
If tenant service is assigned to the system,
traffic measurements of each resource will be
displayed by each tenant individually.
15-F-6
f
2.01 Station screen
Command Format
OPE>TFD-1 ‘(1 - 2) 3
F
Tlrafiic information - Station (l/2) I I I I
Feb.221990
Start lime - 9 :OOAM 10:OOAM 11:OOAM 12:OOAM 1:OOAM 2 :OOAM

Incoming Calls - 496 637 590 120 603 760
Answer Calls - 360 503 476 66 711 662
outgoing Calls- 405 602 555 103 763 731
conlpleted calls - 241 430 411 46 509 500
CCS 723 811 760 230 996 669
smTlme - 3:OOPM 4:OOPM 5:OOPM 6:OOPM 7:OOPM 6:OOPM

Incoming Caks- 632 721 611 596 420 311
Answer Calls - 531 603 482 449 269 192
Outgoing Calls- 600 654 600 531 301 191
CompletedCalls- 442 466 503 461 166 119
ccs 600 630 762 750 660 620
Description
Start Time - The system can be programmed to display traffic
measurements of the extensions from up to 24
hours before the current time. In above example,
‘900 AM” indicates the traffic measurement from
9:00 AM to 10:00 AM one day ago.
Incoming Calls -The number of incoming calls (both extension
and CO).
Answer Calls - The number of answered calls (both extension
and CO).
Outgoing Calls - The number of outgoing calls (both extension and
CO).
Completed Calls - The number of completed calls (both extension
and CO).
ccs - One hundred call seconds, or one hundred sec-
onds of telephone conversation. One hour of
telephone traffic is equal to 36 CCS.
15-F-7
2.02 Trunk Group screen
Command Format
OPE>TFD 2401 - 16)(1 - 2) 2
r; raffic information -Trunk Group (1.~) I I I I

Feb.221990 TrunkGroupNo.=Ol
StartTime--- 9:OOAM 10:OOAM 11:OOAM 12:OOAM 1:OOAM 2 zOOAM

Incoming Calls-- 406 511 430 110 763 653
AnswerCalls--- 232 362 291 65 580 572
OutgoingCaJls-- 362 419 381 96 601 599
Completed Calls - 241 311 263 60 449 472
BusyCalls--- 109 120 95 39 195 201
ccs -- 700 801 755 215 932 831
StartTime - 3 :OOPM 4 :OOPM 5:OOPM 6 :OOPM 7:OOPM 0:OOPM

Incoming Call-- 613 555 529 511 412 311
AnswerCails--- 462 412 427 400 303 200
Outgoing Calls-- 499 400 395 382 291 163
Completed Calls - 362 282 312 300 162 99
Busy Calls----- 139 99 112 95 68 35
ccs ---- 777 703 683 663 582 411
Description
Busy Calls - The number of outgoing calls
which encountered a busy
line.

15-F-2.01 “Station screen.”
15-F-8
i
2.03 Attendant Console screen
Command Format
OPE>TFD 3 (1 - 2) (1 - 2) -JI
&icIn!ormation-Atte&ntConsole(1/2) I I I I
Feb.221990 AttendantNo.=Ol
Start Time - 9:OOAM 10:OOAM 11:OOAM 12:OOAM 1:30AM 2:OOAM

lncomingCafts-- 511 632 ~_. 590 140 809 751
Answer Calls - 412 488 476 99 680 612
outgoing Calls - 403 471 555 121 762 592
CompletedCalls- 291 403 411 83 611 464
HandleCalls - 300 381 299 69 491 391
ccs 712 853 768 240 998 900
StartTime --- 3:OOPM 4rOOPM 5:OOPM 6:OOPM 7:OOPM 8:OOPM

Incoming Calls- 721 700 683 592 483 301
Answer Calls- 549 550 521 462 362 186
Outgoing Calls- 611 603 549 468 411 165
CompletedCalls- 455 423 401 352 348 100
Handle Calls - 311 301 281 - 311 298 83
ccs -- 881 862 800 762 700 533
L f
Description
Handled Call - The number of calls transferred
by the attendant console.

15-F-2.01 “Station screen.”
15-F-9
2.04 DISA screen
” Command Format
OPE>TFD 4 (t.- 2) YL
Traffic Information - DISA I I I I

Feb.22 1990 Tenant = 1
start Time - 9 rOtlAM 10 :OOAM II :OOAM 12 :OOAM 1 :OOPM 2 :OOPM
Busy Calls --I--- 5 ia 12 2 20 8
(-&$ -------- 3 10 2 1 10 3
start Time --- 3 :OOPM 4 :ooPU 5 OOPM 6 :OoPM 7 :OOPM 8 :OOPM

Busy Calls ----I 30 4 12 3 2 4
ccs - 20 2 8 1 1 2
St&Time -- 9 :OOAM 10 :OOAM 11 :OOAM 12 :OOAM 1 DOPM 2 zOOPM

Busy Cails -- 6 20 12 4 2 4
ccs ----I 3 9 3 2 I 2
Start Time -- 3 :OOPM 4 :OOPM 5 :OOPM 6 :OOPM 7 :OOPM 8 :OOPM

Busy Calls --- 30 0 12 3 2 4
ccs ----- 10 0 6 1 1 2
Description
Start Time - Refer to Section 15-F-2.01 “Station
screen.”
Busy Calls - The number of DISA calls which failed
to access any D&A resources. -’
hundred seconds of telephone conver-
sation.
One hour of telephone traffic is equal to
36 CCS.
Tenant - If tenant service is employed, DISA
screen for each tenant is displayed
individually.
15-F-1 0
2.05 OGM screen
Command Format
.__
OPE>TFD 5 * - 2) 1
‘rattic eYllaw . GGMl I I I I

Feo.22199C Tenant = 1
StertGne ---- 9:OOAM 10:OOAM 1l:OOAM 12100AM 1:OOPM 2 :ooPM
BusyCalls--- 5 20 12 3 2 4
ccs -- ----- 1 8 2 1 2 4
StartTme ---- 3 IOOPM 4 :ooPM 5 :ooPM 6 :OOPM 7:OOPM 8:OOPM

Busy Calls ------ 30 5 12 8 2 4
ccs --------- 20 1 8 3 1 2
SklllilW------ 9:OOAM 10100AM 11:OOAM 129OAM 1:OOPM 2 :OOPM

BusyCalls---- 6 18 12 3 2 4
ccs ---- 2 7 3 1 1 2
StartTime --- 3 :OOPM 4:OOPM 5:OOPM 6:OOPM 7fIOPM 8 :OOPM

BusyCalls---- 30 0 12 7 2 4
ccs ------ 10 0 6 3 1 2
Description
screen.”
access any OGMl resources. .
sation.
36 CCS.
Tenant - If tenant service is employed, OGM 1
individually.
15-F-l 1
2.06 OGM2 screen
Command Format
OPE>TFD c;(l - 2) 1
1'rafficinfomution-OGhd2 I I I I
Feb.221990 Tenant=1
StartTime --- 9:OOAM 10:OOAM 11:OOAM 12ftOAM 1:OOPM 2:OOPM

Busy Calls---- 3 20 12 3 2 4
ccs 1 11 2 1 2 4
startTlme -- 3:OOPM 4:OOPM 5:OOPM 6:OOPM 7:OOPM 8100PM

Busy Calls -- 8 s 12 5 2 4
... ccs 2 2 8 2 1 2
1
start Time - 9:OOAM 10:OOAM 11:OOAM 12:OOAM 1:OOPM 2:OOPM
BusyCalls- 7 13 12 4 2 4
ccs ----- 3 6 3 2 1 2
StartTime -- 3:OOPM 4:OOPM 5:OOPM 6:OOPM 7:OOPM 8:OOPM

Busy Calls---- 30 4 12 7 2 4
cc!j ----I- 10 1 6 4 1 2
Description
Start Time - Refer to Section 15-F-2.01 ‘Station
screen.”
access any OGM2 resources.
ccs - One hundred call seconds, orxne
sation.
to 36 CCS.
Tenant - If tenant service is employed, OGM 2
individually.
15-F-l 2
2.07 AGC screen
Command Fqrmgt
OPE>TFD 7 (1 - 2) 7,
‘rafftc information - AGC I I I I

Feb. 22 1990 Tenant=1
start l-me - 9 :6OAM 10 :OOAM 11 :OOAM 12 :OOAM 1 :OOPM 2 :ooPM

BusyCalls- 3 10 12 3 2 4
ccs --- 1 3 2 1 2 4
start-lime - 3 :OOPM 4 :OOPM 5 aOPM 6 OOPM - 7:OOPM 8 :OOPM

Busy calls - 30 8 12 4 2 4
ccs 20 2 8 2 1 2
Start lime --- 9 :OOAM 10 :OOAM 11 :OOAM 12 :OOAM 1 :OOPM 2 :OOPM

BusyCalls-- 30 9 12 3 2 4
ccs----- 10 3 3 1 1 2
Start lime - 3 :OOPM 4 :OOPM 5 :OOPM 6 :OOPM 7 :OOPM 8 :OOPM

BusyCalls- 30 8 12 8 2 4
ccs -- 10 3 6 3 1 2
Description
screen.”
access any AGC resources.
hundred seconds of telephone conversa-
tion.
36 CCS.
Tenant - If tenant service is employed, AGC
individually.
15-F-13
G. Other Features
1 .OO PFT command (Power

Failure Transfer)
Description ___
Provides up to 144 extension/CO line pairs to
maintain a conversation when power is restored
or TSW recovery.
If this is not programmed then power restoration
or TSW recovery drops any existing conversa-
tions.
Command Format
PRG > PFT + AT+ (Index)
Index = PFT No. (01 - 18)
Screen display
; PRG > PF=T SHOl <CR>

; PFT No. 01 i.
1 : Trunk Slot No. -----------------_----------------- 101
2 : Extension Slot No. _________
-- -________
- _____- 107
; PFT No. 02
1 : Trunk Slot No. ______________ - --__________-____-- 102
, 2 : Extension Slot No. -----------------_------------- 108
; PFT No. 18
I 1 : Trunk Slot No. ____-_--------_-____________________
206
2 : Extension Slot No. ______________________________
212
; PRG>
Item Data Explanation
1 101-315 Assign LCOT or GCOT card No. which are available for power
failure transfer
2 101-315 Assign HLC or SLC card No. which are available for power
failure transfer
Refer to Section 1O-C-47.00 “Power Failure

Transfer (PFT),” for further information about
programming.
15-G-l
f
Conditions
SLT telephones and some PITS telephones* can When you are using the PITS ielepnones avail-
be used duringpcwer failure if power failure able with power failure transfer, se! t>e POWER
transfer assignment had been done in advance. FAILURE switch to ON, when power failure
occurs.
‘Following PITS telephones can be used during If dialing cannot be done, set the DIALlfG MODE
power failure. selector to another position (PULSE or TONE).
When the power is restored, set the POWER
P.lTS-KX-Tl23230, KX-Tl232300, FAILURE switch to OFF.
KX-T123235, KX-T61630, KX-T30630 If the power is restored during a conversation, set
the POWER FAILURE switch to OFF after
conversation is completed.
15-G-2
Section 16
Backup Utility-On-Site
(Section 16)
Backup Utility-On-Site
Contents
Page
A Introduction . .. . . .. .. .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. .. .. .. . . .. .. . . . .. . . . . .. . . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. . . . .. . .. . . . .. . .. .. 16-A-1
16-B-l
B Backup Utility Types .........................................................................................
1 .OO VT220, Compatibles, or Dumb Terminals.. ............................................ 16-B-l
2.00 Before Beginning Backup.. .................................................................... 16-B-2
3.00 Using Vl220, Compatibles.. .................................................................. 16-B-3
3.01 Backup Main Menu.. .................................................................... 16-B-3
3.02 Saving Procedure ........................................................................ 16-B-4
3.03 Loading Procedure ...................................................................... 16-B-6
4.00 Using Dumb Terminal ............................................................................ 16-B-7
4.01 Saving Procedure.. ...................................................................... 16-B-7
4.02 Loading Procedure ...................................................................... 16-B-7
C Troubleshooting . . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. . . . .. .. .. . . .. . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . .. . . .. .. . . .. 16-C-l
16-l
A. Introduction
Introduction Backup Configuration
Backup is a procedure where a cop); z! t% 1. Maintenance Device = Operation device
system programming data and attetxant ccrsoie
database is stored on an externai storage Main Unit VT220, compatible,
medium, such as a floppy aisk or magnetic tape.
If it becomes necessary to re-initialize the system
programming data and attendant copsole
‘database, it will be faster to reload from tape or
disk than by manual re-input.
This section describes a backup procedure of
system programming data and attendant console I I / \
database at on-site.
The backup device is the same as the maintenance
Backup Types device.
.._ There are following two backup types.

1 2. Maintenance device = Attendant console
1. Save (Main Unit +Backup Device)
Attendant
l Saving system programming data and console
attendant console database from the
system to the backup device at on-site can Main Unit
be done during on-line mode as well as
off-line mode.
l When an attendant console is used as the

‘system administration device, saving the
system programming data and attendant RS-232C Cable
console database can be done using a
personal computer with external storage
medium. The backup device is a personal’&mputer with
external storage medium
2. Load (Backup Device+ Main Unit)
l Loading system programming data and

.:J attendant console database from the
backup device to t&+ystem can be done
%.
during off-line mode only.
l When an attendant console is used as the

system administration device, loading the
system programming data and attendant
console database can be done using a
personal computer with external storage
medium.
(Note)
To save/load the attendant console database,
first save/load the data to the Main Unit and then
save/load the attendant console database to the
backup device.
Refer to Section 13-E “Backup Mode” for further
information.
16-A-l
B. Backup Utility Types
1 .OO VT220, Compatibles, or

Dumb Terminals
On-sate backup is ;>ossible with the following (Note)
terminals which have functions for saving system Even when System Administration Device
programming data and attendant console name is changed to Dumb in VT mode,
database sent via RS-232C cable to an external switching from VT220 to Dumb and from
storage medium and loading the saved system Dumb to VT220 by simultaneously pressing
programming data and attendant console ]ml key +a key is possible until exit has
database to the Main Unit. been executed once or until the
communication has been interrupted.
l VT220. (VTlOO) terminal
l VT220 (VTlOO) compatible terminal Operating Mode Switching
l Dumb terminal (Dumb + VT220)
1. When the System Administration Device
Operating Mode Switching name is changed from Dumb to VT220 by
(VT220 --t Dumb) operation in Dumb mode, VT mode will be
There are two methods for switching the mode obtained when the communication between
from VT220 to Dumb. the system and maintenance device is
interrupted once and then started again.
1. First set “System-Operation (2/3)” System .-.
Administration Device to “Dumb” and save the (Note)
change to memory. In the above case, return to VT mode will not
Change to Dumb mode is made when “9. Exit” be executed b simultaneously pressing
is selected in the Main Menu and reenter the WL] key + 6V key in Dumb mode.
system administration mode, or when the
communication is interrupted and reconnection
is made to the system.
(Note)
When a Dumb mode is entered using the
above procedure, return to VT mode is not
possible even when m] key + q key are
pressed simultaneously.
Return to VT mode is made by changing the
System Administrat@n Device name by+- 1( ;-
operation in Dumb mode from Dumb to VT220
and using the exit command at the initial
prompt 5” or interrupting the communication
between the system and maintenance device
once and then restarting communication.
2. When lml key + q key are pressed

simultaneously while the Main Menu is being
displayed in VT mode, the mode will be
switched from VT220 to Dumb.
When ml key + q key are pressed
simultaneously while the initial prompt “>n is
displayed in Dumb mode, the mode will be
switched from Dumb to VT220.
16-B-l
2.00 Before Beginning Backup
?
It will not be possible to save or load the system
programming data and attendant console
database correctly if the backup device’s
communications settings are not correct.
1. Are the baud rate, number of data bits, stop

bit and parity settings correct? They must all
be the same as the settings on the system
side. (Is there a communications format
setting? This must be set to full duplex.)
2. Is the backup device set up to sent X-on/X-off

codes to control the flow of the data from the
system? (X-on/X-off send)
Also, is it set up to receive X-on/X-off codes
sent from the system to control the flow of the
data sent to the system? (X-on/X-off receive)
Both are essential.
3. Is the backup device set so that all control -, -

codes corresponding to ASCII OOh-1 Fh are
transmitted and written to the storage device?
Also, is the backup device set so that these
stored control codes can be sent without
limitation to the system?
The above settings are necessary to ensure
that the SOH, STX, EOT, ETX codes, etc.
specified in the transmission format
correspond to the control codes.
In addition, in order to perform a backup with
a protocol, the backup device must be set up
so that all codes form OOh-FFh are received,
stored and transmitted.
4. Does-the setup specify automatic linefeeds

(the linefeed code is automatically added to
the data each time the data displayed reaches
the 80th column at the far right of the
screen)? If this function is enabled, the large
number of extra codes added to the data will
produce an “Illegal code detect” error
whenever data is loaded. The automatic
linefeed function must therefore be turned off.
16-B-2
3.00 Using VT220, Compatibles
3.01 Backup Main Menu
From the Main Menu Screen, Select ‘7. Backup
Utility” then the following “Backup Utility M&n
Menu” appears on the screen.
Backup Utility Main Menu 1 ONLl BCK 1 LIN 1 DIR

_________________--_------------------------- _____-- -_____ + .---. + -_-- + ---- +.---
1. Load(SIO1 -> PBX)
2. Save ( PBX -> SIO 1 )
^_ ..
Description
1. Load...Loading the saved data (system
programming data and attendant
console database) from backup device
to the Main Unit.
2. Save...Saving the system programming data
and attendant console database from
the Main Unit to backup device.
16-B-3
3.02 Saving Procedure
Save - Submenu 1 OFL 1 BCK] LIN 1 DIR

----------------------------------------------------------+.---.+----+ ----+.---
1. ALL Data
2. PBX Data
3. ATT1 Local Data
4. ATT2 Local Data
1. First, confirm that the preparations for start of [Submenu Description]

communication between sender and receiver 1. All Data . ..Saves all data, system programming
have been made, like uniform communication data and attendant console
parameters for sender and receiver etc. database (ATT1 and/or ATT2), from
2. Select “2. Save” from the-Backup Utility Main the Main Unit to backup device.
Menu, then Save-Submenu screen appears 2. PBX Data . ..Saves PBX data (system
on the screen. (See above) programming data) from the Main
3. Before selecting an area, prepare the terminal Unit to backup device.
to receive data. 3. ATT1 Local Data . ..Saves the database of
4. Select the area (1 to 4) with the submenu. attendant console assigned
(Refer to [Submenu Description].) as ATT1 from the Main Unit
to backup device.
5. The saving start message “Transfer start”
appears on the screen. Then the selected 4. ATT2 Local Data . ..Saves the database of
data is transferred as ASCII codes from the attendant console assigned
Main Unit to the backup device. as ATT2 from the Main Unit
to backup device.
6. When saving is finished, the following
“Transfer end”
7. Release the Data Receive mode of the
backup device.
16-B-4
Transmission Format
The number of Da.2 Area

SOH ST-X Address Area
bytes
I
I I I I I I 1 I
I I I I I
Data Area Ch;zm EXT ST-X Address Area
I I I I I
SOH = Start of header

STX = Start of text
Address = System data address
(Is system address is “FFFFF h”, it would
be software version) (ASCII code) - ..
The number of byte = 1 to 256 (ASCII code)
Data area = System data (ASCII code)
Checksum = Address + The number of bytes +
data
* The complement of the sum of all bytes (ASCII
code)
ETX = End of text
EOT = End of data transfer
16-B-5
3.03 Loading Procedure
Load - Submenu 1 OFL 1 BCK 1 LIN j DIR

________-__________------------------------------- --_------ + .---. + ---- + ---- +.---
1. ALL Data
2. PBX Data
3. ATT1 Local Data
4. ATT2 Local Data
1. First, confirm that the preparations for start of [Submenu Description]

communication between sender and receiver
1. All Data Loads all data, system
have been made, like uniform communication
parameters for sender and receiver etc.
database (ATT1 and/or AlT2), from backup
2. Select ‘1. Load” from the Backup Utility Main device to Main Unit.
Menu, then Load-Submenu Screen appears on
2. PBX Data . ..Loads PBX data (system
the screen. (See above)
programming data) from backup
3. Select the area (1 to 4) with the submenu. device to Main Unit.
(Refer to [Submenu Description].)
3. ATT1 Local Data . ..Loads the database of
4. The loading start message “Transfer start” attendant console
appears on the screen, and the system waits assigned as ATT1 from
for the data from the backup device. backup device to Main
5. Change the backup device to Data Send mode. Unit.
Saved data is transmitted as ASCII codes from
4. ATT2 Local Data . ..Loads the database of
the backup device to the system. attendant console
6. When loading of the saved data is finished, the assigned as ATT2 from
following message appears on the screen. backup device to Main
“Transfer end” Unit.
7. Release the Data Send mode of the backup
device. (Note)
Loading the saved data is possible during off-
8. You can edit the just loaded data in off-line line mode only. If you select “1. Load” in on-
mode. line mode, an error message appears on the
And if you want to restart the system (enters to screen and your selection becomes invalid.
on-line mode), set the Operation Switch No other troubles occur.
(MODE) to on-line mode, and press the RESET
button.
For further information about Operation Switch,
refer to Section 2-F-2.00 “CPU Rotary-Switch
Features.”
16-B-6
4.00 Using Dumb Terminal
1. First, confirm that the preparationsfor start of 2. Enter the loading command.
communication between sender and receiver (a) Command format
have been made, like uniform communication
parameters for sender and receiver etc. OPE>LOD + Item 1 + Item 2
(b) Item explanation
2. Change the system mode to Data Receive.
Item 1 : 1 to 4
3. Select the area and enter the saving
. 1. All Data
command.
2. PBX Data
(a) Command format 3.AlTl Local Data
4.AlT2 Local Data
OPE>SAV + item 1 + Item 2
Item 2 : 1 to 3
(b) item explanation
1. No procedure (Hex)
item 1 : 1 to 4 2. CRC-16 (binary code decimal) available only
1 .All Data in remote operation
2. PBX Data 3. CRC-CCIlT (binary code decimal) available
3.ATTl Local Data only in remote operation
4.AlT2 Local Data
(Note)
Item 2 : 1 to 3 . Refer to Section 16-B-3.03 “Loading
1. No procedure (Hex) Procedure” about description of Item 1.
2. CRC-l 6 (binary code decimal) available only . To select the option 2, or 3 of Item 2 is :’
in remote operation available only when you are loading the saved
3. CRC-CCITT (binary code decimal) available data from a remote location.
only in remote operation
3. The loading start message “Transfer start”
(Note) appears on the screen, and the system waits
l Refer to Section 16-B-3.02 “Saving Procedure” for the data from the backupdevice.
about description of Item 1.
l To select the option 2, or 3 of Item 2 is 4. Change the terminal to data send mode.
available only when you are saving the system Selected data is transferred as ASCII codes
programming data and attendant console from the backup device to the system.
database from a remote location. 5. When loading is finished, the following
4. The saving start message “Transfer start” message appears on the screen.
appears on the-screen. Then the selected “Transfer end
data is transferred as ASCII codes from the 6. Release the Data Send mode of the backup
system to the backup device. device.
5. When saving is finished, the following 7. When loading the selected data is finished,
message appears on the screen. you can edit the loaded data in off-line
“Transfer end” communication mode.
6. Release the Data Receive mode of the backup And if you want to restart the system (move to
device. on-line mode), set the Operation Switch
(MODE) to on-line mode, and press the
4.02 Loading Procedure RESET button.
(Note)
1. First, confirm that the preparations for start of Loading the selected data is possible only in
communication between sender and receiver off-line mode. If you select “1. Load” in on-
have been made, like uniform communication line mode, an error message appears on the
parameters for sender and receiver etc. screen and your selection becomes invalid.
No other troubles occur.
16-B-7
CTroubleshooting
1. If the following troubles should occur during 2. Checksum error detection
backup operation, stop the operation and
return to the initial screen. If checksum error is detected during loading
the system programming data, an error
message appears on the screen and loading
l When the communication cable connection
is terminated.
has disconnected.
Then the system is reset and started with
l When the backup device has lost power.
default values automatically.
In above case stop the loading and boot the

system with default values compulsorily.
.
Error Message List
Error Message Contents Countermeasures
Device error (VT220) Backup device is not connected Connect the backup device to SIO # 1 Port.
DATA ERROR 027(Dumb) (only when maintenance device
is attendant console)
Version’ error (VT220) Different version’ at the time of Match the backup version.
DATA ERROR 029(Dumb) backup
_i
Checksum error (VT220) A checksum error has been Communication line is defective or backup
DATA ERROR 030(Dumb) detected. data is destroyed.
Illegal code detected (VT220) incorrect data has been Communication line is defective or backup
. DATA ERROR 031 (Dumb) received. data is destroyed.
.
l Version=System Data Version
The system firmware (ROM) needs to be changed only in case of a software update
involving an alteration in the data format of the system area. The backup function does
not allow compatibility between different system data versions. Data saved using the old
version of the firmware can be used as is even if the firmware is updated, as long as the
system programming data (RAM) is not changed.
16-C-l
Section 17
Backup Utility-Remote Location

-‘?I
(Section 17)
Backup Utility-Remote Location
Contents
Page
A introduction.. ................................
.................................................................. .. 17-A-l
_.
B Backup Utility Types ......................................................................................... 17-B-l
1 .OO Before Beginning Backup.. .................................................................... 17-B-1

2.00 Using Dumb Terminal ............................................................................ 17-B-2
2.01 Saving Procedure.. ...................................................................... 17-B-2
2.02 Loading Procedure.. .................................................................... 17-B-4
C Troubleshooting ............................................................................................... 17-c-1
.I
17-l
A. Introduction
Introduction Backup Types
This section describes a backup procedure of There are following two backup !yxs.
system programming data and attendant console
database from a remote location. 1. Save (Main Unit + Remote terminal)
To execute system programming, diagnosis, data
backup, and traffic measurement in an interactive l Saving the system programming data and
format via CO line from a remote location, RMT attendant console database from the
card (Modem) must be installed to the system. system to remote terminal is possible during
Backup (Save and Load) from a remote location on-line communication mode only.
is possible cnly in Dumb mode.
For further information about switching of the 2. Load (Remote terminal+ Main Unit)
operating modes, please refer to Section 16-B l When loading the system programming data
“Backup Utility Types.” and attendant console database from a
remote terminal begins, the system
The following conditions are required for remote automatically shifts to off-line mode while
operation. holding the speech path.
l To have successful data communications with Backup Configuration

protocol, the communication parameters of 1. Maintenance device= RMT (remote) terminal
both the system and remote maintenance
terminal must be preset to the following fixed
values. Main Unit Remote terminal
I ,
data = 8 bit RMT
parity = none
stop = 1 bit R a
Central
l These fixed communication parameters do office
not apply to the data communication without
protocol. The backup device is the same as the
maintenance device
l For remote access, a data terminal and modem
are required at a remote location.
For further information about communication
2. parameters, refer to Section 9-D-7.00
“Communication Interface.”
r.t. t:. ;.*,,
l RMT card (Modem) must be installed to the
system.
l To administer the system from a remote

location, assign “System-Operation” “Remote
Directory Number” in system programming. _.
l Backup (Save and Load) from a remote

location is possible only in Dumb mode.
(When system administration from a remote
location is started, the system defaults to Dumb
operation mode.)
For further information about remote operation,

refer to Section 14-B-2.00 “System
Administration from a Remote Location.”
17-A-l
B. Backup Utility Types
l-.00 Before Beginning Backup

It wilt not be possible to save or load the system
database correctly if the backup device’s
communications settings are not correct. .
1. Are the baud rate, number of data bits, stop

bit and parity settings correct? They must all
be the same as the settings on the system
side. (Is there a communications format
. setting? This must be set to full duplex.)
2. Is the backup device set up to sent X-on/X-off

codes to control the flow of the data from the
system? (X-on/X-off send) Also, is it set up to
receive X-on/X-off codes sent from the system
to control the flow of the data sent to the
system?
-. ‘Both are essential.
3. Is the backup device set so that all control

codes corresponding to ASCII OOh-1 Fh are
transmitted and written to the storage device?
Also, is the backup device set so that these
stored control codes can be sent without
limitation to the system?
The above settings are necessary to ensure
that the SOH, STX, EOT, ETX codes, etc.
specified in the transmission format
correspond to the control codes.
In addition, in order to perform a backup with
a protocol, the backup device must be set up
so that all codes form OOh-FFh are received,
stored and transmitted.
4. Does thesetup specify autema#k&inefeeds

(the linefeed code is automatically added to
the data each time the data displayed reaches
the 80th column at the far right of the
screen)? If this function is enabled, the large
number of extra codes added to the data will
produce an “Illegal code detect” error
whenever data is loaded. The automatic
linefeed function must therefore be turned off.
17-B-1
2.00 Using Dumb Terminal
First, confirm that the preparations for the start of Using the protocol CRC-l 6/CRC-CCIll’
communication have been made.
1. Select the area and enter the saving
‘0 The communication parameters must be the command.
same for sender and receiver. A message “Transfer start” appears on the
screen, and the system will wait for protocol
l The system will do an “auto baud” to adjust its linking.
baud rate to remote terminal (300 or 1200 Refer to the explanations for without the
baud). protocol on this page in regard to (a)
Command format and (b) Item explanation.
Without the protocol
2. Switch the terminal to protocol data receive
1. Change the terminal to data receive mode. mode.
When the protocol link has been established,
2. Select the area and enter the saving the selected data is transferred in binary
command. format from the system to a remote terminal.
(a) Command format 3. When saving is finished, the profocol link is
OPE>SAV + item 1 + Item 2 disconnected automatically, and the mode
(b) Item explanation changes to non-protocol communication
mode, and the following message appears on
Item 1 : 1 to 4 the screen.
1. All Data “Transfer end”
2. PBX Data
3. ATT1 Local Data 4. Release Protocol Data Receive mode of the
4. ATT2 Local Data ..
backup device.
Refer to Section 16-B-3.02 “Saving
Procedure” about description of Item 1.
Item 2 : 1 to 3
2. CRC-16 (binary code decimal) only
I~,available in remote operation
3. CRC-CCllT (binary code decimal) only
available in remote operation
3. The saving start message

“Transfer start” appears on the screen.
Then the selected data is transferred as
ASCII codes from the system to the remote
terminal.
4. When the saving is finished, the following

“Transfer end”
5. Release the Data Receive mode of the

backup device.
17-B-2
I I I
The number Data Area
SOH STX Address Area
of byte
I I I I
The number
Data Area ETX STX Address Area
of byte
I I I I
Transmission Format
SOH = Start of header
STX = Start of text
Address = System data address
(Is system address is “FFFFF h”, it
would be software version)
(Binary data)
The number of byte = 1 to 256JBinary data)
Data area = System data (Binary data)
Checksum = Address + The number of bytes +
data
ETX = End of text
EOT = End of data transfer
I- . . L:
17-B-3
2.02 Loading Procedure
First, confirm that the preparations for the start of 6. Release the Data Send mode of the backup
communication have been made. device.
l The communication parameters must be the 7. When the remote operation is terminated, the
same for sender and receiver. system is reset automatically.
l The system will do an “auto baud” to adjust its Using the protocol CRC-lG/CRT-CCITT
baud rate to the remote terminal (300 or 1200
baud). 1. Enter the loading command.
Refer to the explanations for without protocol
Without the protocol in regard to (a) Command format and (b) Item
explanation.
1. Enter the loading command.
-: 2. The loading start message
7 (a) Command format “Transfer start”
OPE>LOD + Item 1 + Item 2 appears on the screen, and the system waits
for Protocol Linking.
(b) Item explanation
Item 1 : 1 to 4 3. Change the remote terminal to protocol data
1. ALL Data send mode.
2. PBX Date When the protocol link has been established,
3. ATT1 Local Date the selected data is transferred in binary
4. ATT2 Local Data format from the remote terminal to the
system.
Refer to Section 16-B-3.03 “Loading
Procedure” about description of Item 1. 4. During the loading, the system automatically
shifts to off-line mode while holding the
Item 2 : 1 to 3
speech path. ..
2. CRC-16 (binary code decimal) available
only in remote.operation 5. When loading the selected data is finished,
3. CRC-CCfTT (binary code decimal) the protocol link is disconnected
available only in remote operation automatically, and the protocol data send
mode changes to non-protocol
2. The loading start message “Transfer start” communication mode and the following
appears on the screen, and the system waits message appears on the screen.
for the data from the remote terminal. “Transfer end”
3. Change the terminal to data send mode. 6. Remove the terminal from protocol data send
Selected data is transferred as ASCII codes mode.
from the remote terminal to the system.
7. You can edit the loaded data from a remote
4. When loading the selected data from a location. And if you want to reset the system
remote terminal begins, the system (enters to on-line mode), replace the handset
automatically shifts to off-line mode while and stop the data communication. After
holding the speech path. loading the selected data, if the system
detects “no carrier,” the system is reset
5. When loading the selected data is finished, automatically.
the following message appears on the screen.
\ ‘7ransfer end”
17-B-4
C. Troubleshooting
1. If the following troubles should occur during 2. Checksum error detection
backup operation, stop the operation and
return to the initial screen. If checksum error occurs during loading the
saved data, an error message appears on the
. When the communication screen and loading is terminated.
cable has been Then the system is reset and started with
disconnected. default values automatically.
. When the remote terminal has lost power.
In above case stop the loading and boot the

system with default values compulsorily.
Error Message List
Error Message Contents Countermeasures

Data error 027 Backup device is not connected. Connect the backup device to SIO
(only when maintenance device is #1 Port.
attendant console)
Data error 029 Different version’ at the time of Match the backup version.
backup.
Data error 030 A checksum error has been Communication line is defective or
detected. backup data is destroyed.
Data error 031 Incorrect data has been received. Communication line is defective or
backup data is destroyed.
l Version=System Data Version

The system firmware (ROM) needs to be changed only in case of a software update ‘.
involving an alteration in the data format of the system area. The backup function does not
allow compatibilii between different system data versions. Data saved using the old
version of the firmware can be used as is even if the firmware is updated, as long as the
system programming data (RAM) is not changed.
17-c- 1
Section 18
Abbreviations
Abbreviations
A H
AGC Automatic Gain Control HLC Hybrid Line Circuit
ARS Automatic Route Selection
A-I-T Attendant Console I
ATLC Attendant Console Line Circuit ICM Intercom
INS In Service
B IRNA Intercept Routing-No Answer
BGM Background Music
BLF Busy Lamp Field L
BSS Busy Station Signaling LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LCOT Loop Start Central Office Trunk
C LED Light Emitting Diode
CHG. Change LNR Last Number Redial
co Central Office
COL Central Office Line M
CONF Conference MOD Modification
cos Class of Service MODEM Modulator and Demodulator Unit
COT Central Office Trunk MSG Message
CPC Calling Party Control MW Message Waiting
CPU Central Processing Unit
0
D
occ Other Common Carrier
DES Destination OFDN Overflow Directory Number
DID Direct Inward Dialing OGM Outgoing Message
DIL Direct In Lines OHCA Off-Hook Call Announcement
DISA Direct Inward System Access OPX Off Premise Extension
DN Directory Number ous Out of Service .\
DND Do Not Disturb
DP Dial Pulse P
DPH Doorphone Circuit
DSS Direct Station Selection PB Push Button
DTMF Dual-Tone Multifrequency PBX Private Branch Exchange
PC0 Private CO
E PDN Primary Directory Number
PF Programmable Feature
-.. EFA External Feature Access PITS Proprietary Integrated Telephone
EXT Extension System
PLC Proprietary Integrated Telephone
F System Line Circuit
FbN Floating Directory Number
FWD Call Forwarding R
RMT Remote Circuit
G RST Restart
GCO Group CO
GCOT Ground Start Central Office Trunk
18-1
-.7. S
>-
_,,..
S co Single CO
SDN Secondary Directory Number
Sic Single Line Telephone Circuit
SL? Single Line Telephone
SMDR Station Message Detail Recording
SNR Saved Number Redial
SRC Source
T
TAFAS Trunk Answer From Any Station
TG Trunk Group
TSW Time Sharing Switch
-. U
)
UCD Uniform Call Distribution
UNA Universal Night Answer
W
Warning Tone
18-2
Section 19
Index
Index
A Basic Shelf, 1 -E-l, 2-B-1
Absent Message: Battery Adaptor, 2-C-32
Capability, 4-l-l 2, 5-G-l 0 Building Block System. ! -A-3
Boundary, 9-D-l 6, 1 O-C-12 Busy Lamp Field (BLF) Screen. 5-C-7
Account Code Entry, 4-l-5, 5-G-5, 64-6 Busy-Out Extension, 6-A-4, 9-G-29. 12-C 52
AGC (Automatic Gain Control) Card, l-A-6, 1 -E-10,
2-C-28
C
Call:
Amphenol 57 JE type, 2-C-24
Forwarding-All Calls, 4-F-6, 5-D-4
Anchor Plug, 2-B-19
Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook, 4-F-9,5-D-?
ANSWER Key, 6-A-3, 6-E-l
Forwarding-Busy/Off-Hook/No Answer.
Area Code, 3-C-6,3-C-l 5 to 20
4-F-15, 5-D-13
Assignable Feature Buttons, 4-B-4
Forwarding-No Answer, 4-F-12.5-D-l 3
Assigned Feature Clear, 4-1-19.5-G-15
Forwarding to Trunk, 4-F-l 8.5-D-l 6
ATLC (Attendant Console Line Circuit) Card,
Hold Retrieve-Station, 4-E-5, 5-C-3
1 -A-5, 1 -E-7,2-C-9
Park and Paging, 6-l-6
Attendant:
Park-Station. 4-E-8, 5-C-5
Console-less Operation, 3-D-3
Park-System, 4-E-6, 5-C-4, 6-F-3
Management Screen, 6-C-31
. ‘- Park-System Screen, 6-C-l 9
Overflow Time, 6-G-6
Pickup Deny, 4-D-9,5-B-3
Auto Start Time, 3-B-l 8, 4-l-3, 5-G-3, 6-J-5
Pickup Group, 3-B-l 2
Automatic:
Splitting, 4-E-l 0.6-H-3
Answering Selection, 12-C-l 8
Transfer, 4-F-1,5-D-l, 6-G-l
Callback-Trunk, 4-C-22.4-G-l. 5-A-12
Transfer by Camp-On to Station, 6-G-2
Callback-Station, 4-C-24.5-A-l 3
Transfer via Attendant Console, 6-G-9
Dialing, 4-C-l 0, 5-A-4, 6-D-4
Waiting, 4-D-15, 5-B-8
Gain Control (AGC), 3-D-4.9-F-8, 1 O-C-38
Calling Party Control (CPC) Signal.Detection, 3-F-l 0
Line Hunting (Calling) Selection, 12-C-15
Centrex. 3-C-37,4-G-l 5,5-E-3
Pause Insertion. 3-C-37
Class of Service @OS), 3-B-l 0, 9-D-22, 1 O-C-15
Redial. 4-C-15
co:
Redial Retry Count, 1 O-C-77
Access Control, 6J-22
Redial Retry Interval, 1 O-C-77
Appearance Type, 3-D-l 6 to 17.9-E-l 1, 1O-C-3 1
Route Selection (ARS), 3-C-21
Busy Out, 3-F-l 1
StationcRelease. 3-B-21 .._
.,_..:
3 L- Duration Limit, 3-D-5,4-F-3,4-F-8,4-G-9,4-G-l 1,
Transfer, 4-l-24
5-D-l 6, 6-H-2, 9-E-4, 1 O-C-29
B Forward Mode, 4-F-l 8, 5-D-16, 9-D-25, 1O-C-l 5
Backup: Management Screen, 6-C-28
Configuration, 16-A-l Transfer Mode, 4-F-3, 9-D-25, 1 O-C-l 5
Main Menu, 16-B-3 Communication Interface, 9-D-65, 1 O-C-25, 17-A-l
..
Mode, 13-E-1 Conference, 4-G-5,5-E-l, 6-H-l
Types, 16-A-l One Appearance, 4-G-5
Utility-On-Site, 16-I Two Appearances, 4-G-7
Utility-Remote Location, 17-l Confirmation Tone, 3-B-24
Utility-Types, 16-B-l. 17-B-l Consultation Hold, 4-E-3, 4-F-1, 5-C-2, 5-D-l
Background Music (BGM), 4-f-9 CPU Card, 1-E-3, 2-C-3
Background Music (BGM) through External Pager, CPU Rotary-Switch, 2-F-2
4-H-9, 5-F-8, 6-l-7 CRT Unit, 2-E-5
Basic Features, 3-B-l
19-1
D Error Log, 14-D-1, 14-D-4, 14-E-4, 14-G-2, 15-D-l
Data Line Security, 4-l-l 1, 5-G-9 Error Message Tables, 9-M-l
Delayed Answer, 9-K-3, 1 O-C-66 Exclusive Hold, 4-E-2
Dial: Executive Busy Override, 4-C-25, 5-A-l 4, 6-D-l 5
Call Pickup, 4-D-7, 5-B-l Executive Busy Override Deny, 4-D-l 1,5-B-5
Mode, 3-C-36,9-F-3 Expansion Shelf, 1 -E-2,2-B-7
Tone Transfer, 6-J-l 6 Extension:
Dialing Plan, 3-C-6, 3-C-20, 9-E-4 to 5, 1 O-C-29 Directory Mode, 13-B-l
DID (Direct Inward Dialing) Trunk Card, 1 -A-S, l-E-8, Directory Screen, 6-C-l 7
2-C-25 Management Screen, 6-C-21
Direct: External:
Answering (Pre-Selection), 4-D-3 Feature Access, 4-G-15,5-E-3
In Line (DIL) 1 :I, 3-D-3,3-D-l 6, 9-E-2, 1 O-C-29 First Digft Time-Out, 3-B-21, 9-D-20, 1 O-C-1 4
In Line (DIL) 1 :N, 3-D-3, 3-D-16 to 17.9-E-2, Interdigit Time-Out, 3-B-21, 9-D-20, 10-C-l 4
:_
f’ j 1 o-c-29 Interdigit Time-Out (PBX), 3-B-21, 9-D-20, 1 O-C-14
Inward Dialing (DID), 3-D-7, 9-K-5, 10-C-69 Music Source, 2-D-2,3-E-l, 9-D-5, 10-C-7
Inward System Access (DISA), 3-D-4,9-K-l,
F
1 O-C-66
FDN for General Operator Call l/2, 9-D-4
Termination, 3-D-3.3-D-l 6,9-F-3,.1 O-C-34
Feature Buttons, 4-B-l
Trunk Access, 4-C-9
First Dial Timer, 1 O-C-79
Directed Call Pickup, 4-D-8, 5-B-2
Fixed:
Directed Night Answer, 3-B-15
Feature Buttons, 4-B-l
Directory Number (DN), 3-B-5
Feature Numbers, 3-B-2
DISA (Direct Inward System Access) Card,
Message. 4-l-l 2,5-G-10, 9-D-71,1 O-C-27
1 -A-6, 1 -E-8.2-C-28
Night Service, 3-B-l 7
Disconnect Time, 4-G-l 4,6-H-6,9-E-4,1 O-C-29
Flash, 4-G-14 ..
Discriminating Ringing, 3-D-l 9
Detect, 1 O-C-77
Distinctive Busy Tone, 3-B-23
Flexible:
Distinctive Dial Tone, 3-B-22
Feature Numbers, 3-B-3
DN Assignment, 3-B-5, 9-C-6, 1 O-C-5
Message, 4-l-l 2.5-G-10.9-D-71, 10-C-27
DN (Directory Number) Button Assignment,
Night Service, 3-B-17,4-1-2,5-G-2, 6-J-l
9-G-7, 12-c-2, 1 o-c-43
Numbering, 3-B-l
Do Not Distuib@ND), 4-D-12, 5-B-6
Ports, 1 -A3
Do Not Disturb (DND) Override, 4-C-26,5-A-15
Ringing Assignment-No Ringing, 3-D-l 8
Door Opener, 2-C-l 3
Ringing Assignment-Delayed Ringing, 3-D-l 8
Doorphone, 4-G-13,5-E-2, 6-H-4
Floating Directory Number (FDN), 3-B-8
DPH (Doorphone Circuit) Card, l-E-9, 2-C-l 0
Forced Account Code Mode, 4-1-5,5-G-5, 6J-6,
DSS (Direct Station Selection) Button Assignment,
9-D-23, 1 O-C-15 -.
9-G-12, 9-G-15, 10-C-48, 12-C-11
Free Slot (FS), 1 -E-l, 1 -E-2.2-C-l
DSS Console, 4-l-22
Function keys, 7-l-l
DTMF Duration Time, 9-F-3, 1 O-C-34
Dual Console Operation, 3-D-l G
Dumb Type Terminal, 1 -D-l, 8-A-1, 1O-A-1, 15-A-l GCOT (Ground Start Central Office Trunk) Card,
1 -A-5, 1 -E-5, 2-C-22
E
\ Group:
ElectronicStation Lock Out, 4-i-l 8, 4-1-20,5-G-l 4,
CO (GCO). 3-D-l 7
5-G-l 6, 6J-10
ICM (Intercom), 3-B-11, 9-E-l 5.9-G-3, 1 O-C-40
Equal Access, 4-C-8,5-A-3, 6-D-3.9-H-l. 1 O-C-54
19-2
Group (continued) K
Call Pickup, 3-B-l 2, 9-E-l 4, 9-G-3, 1 O-C-l 0 Key Operation Table for Various Terminals, 7-H-8
Uniform Call Distribution (UCD), 3-B-12. 9-E-15,
1 o-c-33 L
Paging, 3-B-13, 9-D-29, 9-E-15, 10-C-33 Last Number Radial (LNR). 4-C-14,5-A-9,6-D-8
Trunk, 3-B-l 3,9-E-l, 9-F-3, 1 O-C-28, 1 O-C-34 LCOT (Loop Start Central Cffice Trunk) Card,
Guide Plate, 2-C-2 1 -A-5. 1-E-5.2-C-21
Leading Digit Table, 3-C-28, 9J-1
H LED Indication Patterns, 4-A-l 9
Hands-Free Conversation, 4-G-4 Line Access Buttons, 4-B-6
Heavy Traffic Overflow Transfer to Station, 6-G-6 Local:
Held Call Reminder, 3-E-2.9-D-5, 9-D-20, 1 O-C-14 Alarm, 14-D-2, 15-D-2
Held Call Reminder (ATT), 3-E-2, 9-D-5.9-D-20. 10-C-14 Call, 3-C-6,3-C-l 5
HELP Mode, 13-F-l Diagnosis Mode, 13-D-l
HLC (Hybrid Line Circuit) Card, 1 -A-5, 1 -E-7, 2-C-l 4 Mode, 13-A-l
Hold. 4-E-l. 5-C-l. 6-F-l Trunk Dial Access, 4-C-6.5-A-1, 6-D-l
Home Dialing Plan. 3-C-6,3-C-20,9-D-4, 9-E-5, 1 O-C-6 Lockout, 3-B-21
Hook Switch Flash Time, 4-G-15,5-E-3,9-E-4, 1 O-C-30 Long Distance Call, 3-C-6, 3-C-l 5
Loop Key, 6-A-3, 6-E-2
I
In Service (INS), 7J-5, 8-F-2, 14-C-2, 15-C-l M
Individual Trunk Group Dial Access, 3-C-7,4-C-7,5-A-2, Maintenance, 14-1, 15-l
6-D-2 Maintenance Capability, 9-D-25, 1 O-C-l 6, 11 -A-l
Individual Virtual Trunk Group Dial Access, 3-C-l 0, Making Internal Calls. 4-C-l 7.5-A-11, 6-D-9
4-C-8,5-A-3,6-D-3 Making Outside Calls, 4-C-6,5-A-l, 6-D-l
Inter Office Calling, 4-C-l 7,5-A-11 Max. Dialing Digits, 3-B-l 0.9-D-25, 1 O-C-15
by BLF Screen, 6-D-l 1 Message Waiting, 4-l-15, 5-G-12;.6J-9
by Extension Directory Screen, 6-D-9 Microphone Mute, 4-G-l 6
by Extension Management Screen, 6-D-l 2 Mixed Station Capacities, 3-B-l 9
by Name/Department, 6-D-13 Modified Digit Table, 3-C-24, 9 J-l 3, 1 O-C-65
Manual Dialing, 6-D-9 Monitor, 14-G-l. 15-F-l
Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA), 6-D-14 Music on Hold, 3-E-l
Intercept Routing:
N
~:89-::lo-c-14 - Night Answer Point, 3-B-15 to 17, 4-l-l to 2, 5-G-l to 2
J 6-J-l to 4.9-F-3, lo-C-34
Time-Out (System), 3-F-8,6-J-26,9-D-20, 1 O-C-14
Intercom (ICM): Night Key, 6-A-3, 6J-5
Answer BSSOHCA Deny, 4-D-6 Night Service, 3-8-14,4-l-1,5-G-l, 6-J-l
Answer Voice Calling Deny, 4-D-5 No Line Preference:
Busy Station Signaling (BSS), 4-C-20 Answering, 4-D-3
Calling, 4-C-t 8 Calling, 4-C-4
Group, 3-B-11, 9-E-15, 9-G-3, 10-C-40 Numbering Plan, 3-B-1,9-D-33, 1 O-C-20
Hands-Free Answerback, 4-D-4
0
Off-Hook Call Announcement (OHCA), 4-C-21,
Off Premise Extension (OPX), 3-F-3
4-G-l 7
Off ice Code, 3-C-6.3-C-l .5,3-C-20, 3-C-30 to 32
Voice Calling. 4-C-l 9
Cffice Code Table, 3-C-30 to 32
Interdigit Pause, 1O-C-77
OHCA (Off-Hook Call Announcement) Card, 1 -A-6,
Interposition Call Transfer, 6-G-8
1 -E-11, 2-C-6
19-3
One Touch Dialing, 4-C-l 0 Prime Line Preference:
On-Hook Dialing, 4-C-4 Answering, 4-D-2
Operator, 3-B-8 Calling, 4-C-2
Call, 4-C-28, 5-A-l 7 Printer, 2-D-5
Operator/International Call Restriction, 3-C-13 Privacy :
OPX (Off Premise Extension Trunk) Card, 1 -A-5, 1-E-9, Attach, 4-G-3
2-C-26 Programmable, 4-G-l
Other Common Carrier (OCC) Access, 4-C-8,5-A-3, Release, 4-G-2
6-D-3, 9-H-5, 1 O-C-56 Programmable Feature (PF) Buttons, 4-B-4, SG-12,
Outgoing CO Back Tone, 1 O-C-80 9-G-l 5, 1 O-C-46 3.
Outgoing Call Features, 3-C-l. 4-C-l. 5-A-1, 6-D-l Prolong Time, 9-K-3, 1 O-C-66
Outgoing Message @GM) Recording and Playing Back Private CO (PCO), 3-D-15,4-B-8
3-F-5, 6J-19 PITS (Proprietary Integrated Telephone System),
Out of Service (OUS). 7J-7, 8-F-3, 14-C-3. 15-C-2 3-B-l 9,4-A-2 to 18
-_
5 Overflow Transfer, 6-G-6 Automatic Test, 12-C-26
Overlay Sheet, 11 -B-l, 12-B-l Station Programming, 12-l
System Programming, 11-l
P Pulse Speed, 9-F-3, 1 O-C-35
Paging:
All Extensions, 4-H-1, 5-F-1, 6-l-l R
All Extensions and External Pagers, Released Line Operation, 6-C-31, 6-G-l 0
4-H-7,5-F-7, 6-l-5 Remote:
Call Park and. 6-l-6 Administration, 14-B-3, 15-B-2
Equipment, 2-D-l Alarm, 9-D-9, 1 O-C-10, 14-D-3, 15-D-3
External Pagers, 4-H-5, 5-F-5,6-1-3 Directory Number, 9-D-9, 1 O-C-l 0, 14-B-3, 15-B-2
Group, 4-H-3.5-F-3, 6-i-2 Station Feature Control, 4-I-20, 5-G-l 6, 6J-10
Parallel Connection of Extensions, 2-C-29,3-F-l 2 Rerouting, 3-F-9 ..
Password: Ringing Transfer, 4-F-4
Changing, 7-E-1, 10-C-74 RMT (Remote Circuit) Card, 1 -A-6. 1 -E-l 0,2-C-28
PITS Programming, 6-J-21, 9-D-l 3, 1 O-C-l 2. 11 -C-2 Route Lists Table, 3-C-26, 9 J-9, 1 O-C-64
Walking COS, 4-C-27, 5-A-l 6, 9-D-13. 1 O-C-12 Route Plan Table, 3-C-27, 9-J-6, 1O-C-63
PBX Access Code (No Restriction), 3-C-3,3-C-8, RS-232C Interface, 2-D-3 to 6
3-C-37,9-E-l 1, 1O-C-31
PBX Access Code (Restriction), 3-C-2 to 3. 3-C-7,3-C-8, S
3-C-37,9-E-l 1, 1 O-C-31 Saved Number Redial (SNR), 4-C-l 6
Screened Call Transfer:
Peripheral Equipments, 2-D-l to 6
Pickup: to Station, 4-F-l. 5-D-2,. 6-G-3
Dial Waiting, 5-A-9, 9-D-20, 1 O-C-14 to Trunk, 4-F-3, 6-G-4
Dialing, 5-A-9 Secondary Directory Number (SDN) Button, 4-B-7,4-F-4
Group Management Screen, 6-C-26 Secret Dialing, 4-l-l 0, 6 J-8
PLC (Proprietary Integrated Line Circuit) Card, Search by Name/Department, 6-J-l 7
1 -A-5. 1 -E-6,2-C-l 6 Serial Call, 6-G-7
Power Failure Transfer: 7/l 0 Digit Toll Restriction, 3-C-20
Assignment, 9-L-3. 1 O-C-73, 14-H-l. 15-G-l Single CO (SCO). 3-D-3, 3-D-l 6
Auxiliary Connection for, 2-C-30 SLC (Single Line Telephone Line Circuit) Card,
\ l-A-5, 1 -E-6. 2-C-18
Power Unit, l-E-4, 2-C-3
Primary Directory Number (PDN) Button, 4-B-6 Slot Assignment, 9-C-3, 1 O-C-2
SLT (Single Line Telephone), 3-B-l 9, 5-l
19-4
SMDR Duration Time, 4-A-21, 9-D-20, 1O-C-l 4 Tone Through (End to End DTMF Signaling), 4-G-18,
Special Carrier Access, 4-C-8, 5-A-3, 6-D-3, 9-H-1, 6-H-5
1O-C-54, 1 O-C-56 Transfer Recall, 3-E-3, 9-D-20, 1O-C-l 4
Speed Dial Dictionary Mode, 13-C-1 Troubleshooting Guide, 14-E-1
Speed Dial Screen, 6-C-l 5 Trunk:
Speed Dialing: Answer From Any Station (TAFAS)
System, 4-C-11,5-A-6,6-D-4 - Day Service, 3-D-8,4-D-l 0,5-B-4
System Boundary, 9-D-l 6, 1 O-C-l 2 Group, 3-B-l 3
Station, 5-A-4 Name, 4-A-22
Station: Verify, 6J-21
Features, 1 -C-3 TSW (Tme Switch Sharing) Card, 1 -E-4,2-C-3
Hunting-Circular. 3-D-20 TSW-Conference Expansion Card, 1 -A-6, 1 -E-l 1,
Hunting-Terminal, 3-D-21 2-c-4
Message Detail Recording (SMDR), 3-F-l TSW-OHCA (Off-Hook Call Announcement) Card,
Name Display, 4-A-23 1 -A-6, 1 -E-l 1, 2-C-5
Programmed Data Display, 4-A-22
Switching of Day/Night Mode, 3-B-l 8. 4-l-3, 5-G-3, 6 J-5 U
System: Unattended Conference, 6-H-2
Administration, 14-B-1, 15-B-1 One Appearance, 4-G-9
Components, 1 -B-l Two Appearances, 4-G-l 1
Configuration, 1 -E-l Uniform Call Distribution (UCD), Q-K-7, 10-C-70 to 71
Connections, 1 -B-2 Group, 3-B-l 2
Description, 1 -A3 Log Out, 4-D-l 7, 5-B-l 0
Features, 1 -C-l with OGM, 3-D-12
Interface, l-D-1 without OGM, 3-D-9
Timer, 3-8-20.9-D-l 8, 1 O-C-14 Universal Night Answer (UNA). 3-B-l 6.4-l-1, 5-G-l
Unscreened Call Transfer: ”
T to Remote, 4-F-5.5-D-3, 6-G-5
Test, 1 -D-2 to Station, 4-F-1, 5-D-1, 6-G-l
Self-Test, 14-D-1, 15-D-l I. -
Functional Test by Entering Commands, v
14-F-1,15-E-l Variable Time-Out, 3-B-20
Tenant Service, 3-B-7 VTlOO. 1-D-1. 7-H-8
Timed Reminder, 4-l-7, 5-G-7 VT220, 1 -D-l, 7-H-8
Toll Restriction:
for Individual Trunk Group Dial Access/ W
Direct Trunk Access, 3-C-7 Walking COS (Class of Service), 4-C-27, 5-A-l 6
for Individual Virtual Trunk Group Password, 11 -C-l 8
Dial Access, 3-C-l 0 Walking Station, 3-F-3
for Local Trunk Dial Access, 3-C-2
in Automatic Route Selection (ARS) System. 3-C-5
Operation/International, 3-C-13
7/l 0 Digit, 3-C-20
3/6 Digit, 3-C-l 5
Table, 3-C-4.3-C-6.3-C-8.3-C-11
Tone and Ringing Patterns, 3-B-25
Tone Detect, 3-D-5, Q-F-Q, Q-K-3, 1 O-C-38, 10-C-66
Tone/Pulse Conversion, 3-C-36
19-5

Panasonic KX-T336 System Ref Vol 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Panasonic KX-T336 System Ref Vol 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Panasonic KX-T336 System Ref Vol 2 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Panasonic

System Reference Manual

Panasonic Company (West) of America,

Panasonic Sales Company (“PSC”),

Section 3 ---- System Featuresand Operation

Section4 ---- Station Featuresand Operation

Section 5 ---- Station Featuresand Operation

Section 6 ---- Station Featuresand Operation

Section9 ---- System Programming

Section 10 ---- System Programming

Section 11 ---- System Programming

Section 14 ---- Maintenance

Section 15 ---- Maintenance

Section 18 ---- Abbreviations

Prepafation for Programmhg and Maintenance

Preparation for programming and Maintenance

VT220 and Compatibles

1 .OO On-Site Administration ..................................................... 7-A-l

B Pre-entering Mode . . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . . . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . . .. . . .. . .. . . . . 7-B-l

1 .OO Initial Screen .................................................................... 7-B-l

C Menu Screen . .. . . . . .. . . .. . .. .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . . . .. . . .. . . .. .. . . . .. .. . . .. .. . . . .. . . .. . . .. . . . 7-c-1

1 .oo Introduction ...................................................................... 7-c-1

D Printing Out ............................................................................... 7-D-l

E Changing Password.. .................................................................. 7-E-?

F Changing Date and Time ...................................... ........ 7-F-l

G Returning to Initial Screen .._._............_..._._._._.___.. . . . . . . .. .. . . . 7-G-l

1 .OO Exit ....................................................... .......... 7-G-l

1 .oo Moving Cursor bymmmmmm! .. . .. . . .. . .. . .. 7-H-l

Operation of Function Keys . .. . . . .. . . .. .. . . . .. . . . . .. . .. . .. . . .. . . .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. . .. . . 7-l-l

1 .OO Relation between Function Keys and Screens.. .............. 7-I-l

Execution of Function Modes ...................................................... 7-J-l

1 .oo COMMON (Fl) and EXIT (F7) ......................................... 7-J-l

1 .OO On-Site Administration

The followings are the functions available to each

The 1st Level : To access to all levels

When you log in to the system using the first level

m parameters and traffic information.

Programming Main Menu For further details, refer to Section 7-C-7.00

Change Password Change Date & lime

Screen Editing Field

Display Mode Display Location

ONL On-line SCR Screen Editing Field

/ Display 1 Display Entry Method

PRG Programming SEL Select value by space key

Screen Editing Field

<Example> Configuration-System Assignment

Configuration - System Assignment 1 OFL 1 PRG 1 SCR 1SEL

I Assigning items Default Selection of Value Reference

Expansion Shelf Automatic set No : expansion shelf not installed 1-E-2.00

1.00 Initial Screen

f Panasonic Hybrid PBX *

Assigning Items Deiaur: Selection of Value

Welcome to the Panasonic Hybrid PBX Version 1.0

System Admin i&ration

Displays ON-LINE PROCESS screen in on-line

Set Date & Time

Date and Time : ‘!j9 JAN. 1 FRI 12:00 AM

Assigning Items Default Selection of Value

Year 99 Last two digits of the year